GRZ100 Toshiba PDF

6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DISTANCE RELAY
GRZ100 - ∗∗∗B
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2006

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 0.5)
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRZ100. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
⎯ 1 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
DANGER
• Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
• Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
• Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
• Fiber optic
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
CAUTION
• Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
• Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust, etc.
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
• Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
• Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
• Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
• Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
⎯ 2 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Short-link
Do not remove a short-link which is mounted at the terminal block on the rear of the relay before
shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand voltage, etc., to
reduce.
• Tripping circuit connections

Must connect the FD (Fault Detector) output contact with A- to C-phase tripping output contacts
in series in case of the model 400 and 500 series.
• Disposal
When disposing of this product, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.
This product contains a battery, which should be removed at the end-of-life of the product. The
battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local regulations. The battery can be
removed by withdrawing the Signal Processing module (SPM) from the relay case, and cutting the
connecting leads and plastic strap which hold the battery.
• Plastics material
This product contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins
⎯ 3 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 9
2. Application Notes 12
2.1 Power System Protection - Basic Concepts 12
2.1.1 The Function of The Protection Relay 12
2.1.2 Protection Relay Requirements 12
2.1.4 Distance Relay - General Performance 14
2.1.5 Power Swing and Out-of-Step 15
2.1.6 Redundant Configuration of Protection Relay and Improvement of
Reliability 16
2.2 Principle of Distance Measurement 17
2.2.1 Phase Fault 17
2.2.2 Earth Fault 18
2.3 Multi-Terminal Line Protection 20
2.3.1 Increased Use of Multi-Terminal Lines 20
2.3.2 Protection Problems on Three-Terminal Application 20
2.3.3 Three-Terminal Line Protection 22
2.4 Protection Scheme 24
2.4.1 Time-Stepped Distance Protection 24
2.4.2 Zone 1 Extension Protection 40
2.4.3 Command Protection 43
2.4.4 Directional Earth Fault Protection 60
2.4.5 Overcurrent Backup Protection 65
2.4.6 Thermal Overload Protection 69
2.4.7 Switch-Onto-Fault Protection 72
2.4.8 Stub Protection 73
2.4.9 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 74
2.4.10 Broken Conductor Protection 81
2.4.11 Breaker Failure Protection 84
2.4.12 Out-of-Step Protection 87
2.4.13 Voltage Transformer Failure Supervision 89
2.4.14 Power Swing Blocking 91
2.4.15 Tripping Output Signals 95
2.4.16 Fault Detector 97
2.5 Characteristics of Measuring Elements 100
2.5.1 Distance Measuring Elements Z1, Z1X, Z2, ZF, Z3, Z4, ZR1, ZR2, ZND
and PSB 100
2.5.2 Phase Selection Element UVC 109
2.5.3 Directional Earth Fault Elements DEFF and DEFR 109
2.5.4 Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) OC, EF, DEF Elements 111
2.5.5 Out-of-Step Element OST 112
⎯ 4 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5.6 Voltage and Synchronism Check Elements OVL, UVL, OVB, UVB, and
SYN 113
2.5.7 Current Change Detection Elements OCD and OCDP 114
2.5.8 Negative Sequence Directional Elements DOCNF and DOCNR 115
2.5.9 Level Detectors 116
2.5.10 Fault Detector Elements 117
2.6 Autoreclose 119
2.6.1 Application 119
2.6.2 Scheme Logic 121
2.6.3 Setting 131
2.6.4 Autoreclose Output Signals 133
2.7 Fault Locator 134
2.7.1 Application 134
2.7.2 Distance to Fault Calculation 134
2.7.3 Starting Calculation 135
2.7.4 Displaying Location 136
2.7.5 Setting 136
3. Technical Description 138
3.1 Hardware Description 138
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 138
3.1.2 Transformer Module 145
3.1.3 Signal Processing Module 146
3.1.4 Binary Input and Output Module 147
3.1.5 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module 152
3.1.6 Fault Detector Module 154
3.2 Input and Output Signals 155
3.2.1 Input Signals 155
3.2.2 Binary Output Signals 157
3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 158
3.3 Automatic Supervision 159
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 159
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing 159
3.3.3 CT Circuit Current Monitoring 160
3.3.4 Signal Channel Monitoring and Testing 160
3.3.5 Disconnector Monitoring 161
3.3.6 Failure Alarms 161
3.3.7 Trip Blocking 162
3.3.8 Setting 162
3.4 Recording Function 163
3.4.1 Fault Recording 163
3.4.2 Event Recording 165
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 165
3.5 Metering Function 167
4. User Interface 168
⎯ 5 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4.1 Outline of User Interface 168

4.1.1 Front Panel 168
4.1.2 Communication Ports 170
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 172
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 172
4.2.2 Relay Menu 174
4.2.3 Displaying Records 177
4.2.4 Displaying Status Information 182
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 186
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 187
4.2.7 Testing 210
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 216
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 216
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 217
4.6 Clock Function 217
5. Installation 218
5.1 Receipt of Relays 218
5.2 Relay Mounting 218
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 218
5.4 Handling Precautions 218
5.5 External Connections 219
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 220
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 220
6.2 Cautions 221
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 221
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests 221
6.3 Preparations 222
6.4 Hardware Tests 223
6.4.1 User Interfaces 223
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 224
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 225
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 226
6.5 Function Test 227
6.5.1 Measuring Element 227
6.5.2 Timer Test 246
6.5.3 Protection Scheme 247
6.5.4 Metering and Recording 252
6.5.5 Fault Locator 252
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 253
6.6.1 On Load Test 253
6.6.2 Signaling Circuit Test 253
6.6.3 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test 255
6.7 Maintenance 257
6.7.1 Regular Testing 257
⎯ 6 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 257

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules 259
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 261
6.7.5 Storage 261
7. Putting Relay into Service 262
⎯ 7 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix A Block Diagrams 263

Appendix B Signal List 271
Appendix C Variable Timer List 307
Appendix D Binary Input/Output Default Setting List 309
Appendix E Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 321
Appendix F Case Outline 331
Appendix G Typical External Connections 339
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet 351
Appendix I Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 377
Appendix J Return Repair Form 383
Appendix K Technical Data 389
Appendix L Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 401
Appendix M Example of Setting Calculation 405
Appendix N IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and Troubleshooting 417
Appendix O Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal
Model to IEC60255-8 429
Appendix P Inverse time Characteristics 433
Appendix Q Failed Module Tracing and Replacement 437
Appendix R Ordering 443
The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.0.5)
⎯ 8 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
1. Introduction
GRZ100 is a fully numeric distance protection for application to transmission lines on solidly
earthed network.
The GRZ100 provides the following protection schemes.

- Time-stepped distance protection with four forward zones, three reverse zones, and one
non-directional zone
- Zone 1 extension protection
- Command protection (Distance protection using telecommunication)
- Overcurrent backup protection
- Thermal overload protection
- Switch-on-to-fault and stub protection
- Circuit breaker failure protection
- Broken conductor detection
- Out-of-step protection
- Overvoltage and undervoltage protection
For high-resistance earth faults, the GRZ100 provides the following directional earth fault
protections.
- Directional earth fault protection
- Directional earth fault protection utilizing telecommunications facilities
The GRZ100 actuates high-speed single-shot autoreclose or multi-shot autoreclose.
The GRZ100 provides the following metering and recording functions.

- Metering
- Fault record
- Event record
- Fault location
- Disturbance record
The GRZ100 provides the following menu-driven human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of
stored data.
- Relay front panel; LCD, LED display and operation keys
- Local PC
- Remote PC
Password protection is provided to change settings. Eight active setting groups are provided. This
allows the user to set one group for normal operating conditions while other groups may be set to
cover alternative operating conditions.
GRZ100 provides either two or three serial ports, and an IRIG-B port for an external clock
connection. A local PC can be connected via the RS232C port on the front panel of the relay.
⎯ 9 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Either one or two rear ports (RS485 or fibre optic) are provided for connection to a remote PC and
for IEC60870-5-103 communication with a substation control and automation system. Further,
Ethernet LAN port can be provided as option.
Further, the GRZ100 provides the following functions.

- Configurable binary inputs and outputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording, etc.
- Automatic supervision
The GRZ100 has the following models:

Relay Type and Model
Relay Type:
- Type GRZ100; Numerical distance relay
Relay Model:
- Model 100 series: No autoreclose
• Model 101B; 18 binary inputs, 13 binary outputs, 6 binary outputs for tripping
- Model 200 series: With autoreclose for single breaker scheme
• Model 204B; 22 binary inputs(12-independent), 19 binary outputs, 3 binary outputs for tripping
- Model 300 series: With autoreclose for one-and-a-half breaker scheme
- Model 400 series: With autoreclose for single breaker scheme / With fault detector
- Model 500 series: With autoreclose for one-and-a-half breaker scheme / With fault detector
⎯ 10 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Table 1.1.1 shows the measuring elements incorporated.
Table 1.1.1 Incorporated Measuring Elements
Model 101, 102 201, 202, 301, 401 501

203, 204, 302, 303
Measuring elements
205, 206
Z1S, Z1SX, Z2S, Z3S, Distance element (phase fault) 9 9 9 9 9

ZFS, ZR1S, ZR2S, Z4S,
ZNDS
Z1G, Z1GX, Z2G, Z3G, Distance element (earth fault) 9 9 9 9 9
ZFG, ZR1G, ZR2G,
Z4G, ZNDG
UVC Phase selection element 9 9 9 9 9
DEFF, DEFR Directional earth fault element 9 9 9 9 9
OC, OCI Overcurrent element (phase fault) 9 9 9 9 9
EF, EFI Overcurrent element (earth fault) 9 9 9 9 9
SOTF (OCH) Switch-onto-fault protection 9 9 9 9 9
VTF (OVG, UVF, OCD) VT failure supervision 9 9 9 9 9
PSBS, PSBG Power swing blocking 9 9 9 9 9
OST Out-of-step tripping 9 9 9 9 9
BF Breaker failure protection 9 9 9 9 9
THM Thermal overload protection 9 9 9
OVS1, OVS2, OVG1, Overvoltage & undervoltage 9 9 9 9 9

OVG2, UVS1, UVS2, protection
UVG1, UVG2
BCD Broken conductor detection 9 9 9 9 9
FL Fault locator 9 9 9 9 9
ARC (SYN, UV, OV) Autoreclose function 1CB 2CB 1CB 2CB
FD Fault detector 9 9
AMF Automatic monitoring 9 9 9 9 9
Automatic testing 9 9 9 9 9
(Signal channel testing)
⎯ 11 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2. Application Notes
2.1 Power System Protection - Basic Concepts
2.1.1 The Function of The Protection Relay
The protection relay, which protects the power system from various faults, plays an extremely
important role in power system stability. Its main functions are as follows:
Prevention of power supply interruption:
Fault clearance and resumption of healthy power transmission as soon as
possible.
Prevention of damage to equipment:
Consecutive system faults will eventually lead to damage to primary
plant, for example destruction of insulators, rupture of lines, burning of
transformers, etc. The protection relay can help prevent such damage to
equipment.
Prevention of system instability:
is necessary to remove Power system faults at high speed by using
protection relays as the existence of a system fault for an extended period
of time may initiate a generator out-of-step condition.
2.1.2 Protection Relay Requirements
The protection relay, which plays the important role of protecting the power system from faults,
must meet several requirements. These requirements can be summarized as follows:
a) Selectivity: All faults that occur on the power system should be removed but at the same time
it must be ensured that only the minimum section of the power system must be
isolated in order to clear the fault. Figure 2.1.2.1 shows typical different
protection zones on the power system. In order to provide complete coverage by
the protection, the neighboring protection zones are set to overlap. Figure 2.1.2.2
shows the relationship between the circuit breaker and CT locations. In Figure
(a), the CTs are installed on both sides of the circuit breaker, one for line
protection and the other for busbar protection, enabling the protection coverage
to overlap. Figure (b) shows the case where the same CT is used for both the line
protection and busbar protection. In this case, the line protection would operate
for a fault which occurred midway between the CT and circuit breaker, but the
busbar protection would not operate, thus failing to remove the fault. It is
important to prevent blind spots in power system protection design.
b) High speed: In order to avoid damage to equipment or power system instability, it is
important to shorten the duration of faults by applying high-speed protection
relays. The GRZ100 has a minimum operating time of 18 ms. However, the
operating time of the circuit breaker and transmission delay in the case of carrier
protection, etc. must also be taken into consideration.
⎯ 12 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Busbar Busbar Busbar
Line Line
:Circuit Breaker
Figure 2.1.2.1 Protection Zones
Busbar Busbar
Line Line
(a) (b)
Figure 2.1.2.2 Protection Zone and CB, CT
c) Reliability: The protection relay is normally in a quiescent state and is available to respond to
faults that may occur on the power system in the protection zone.
In order that this may be achieved the availability of the protection relay is
checked even in its quiescent state.
A fundamental requirement to ensure that the reliability of the protection relay is
high is that its components must be extremely reliable. This can be achieved by
using high quality components and reducing the number of components. The
GRZ100 reduces the number of parts by using state-of-the-art highly integrated
semiconductor components.
To maintain high reliability, not only must the relay have a robust hardware
structure but it is also important to detect any fault immediately and not to leave
the relay in a faulted state for prolonged periods. Therefore, the GRZ100 is
equipped with an automatic supervision function. Whenever a hardware fault
occurs, an alarm is issued to inform the operator of the problem to permit
remedial action.
In order to dramatically improve the operating reliability of the relay in the event
of a system fault, there are two options: to use a protection relay with a
duplicated protection system or to provide an additional fault detection relay
within the relay with AND logic.
⎯ 13 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.1.3 Main Protection and Backup Protection
The power system protection system generally consists of a main protection and a backup
protection to reliably remove all faults. In principle, system faults must be removed in the shortest
possible time and cause the minimum outage. This important function is served by the main
protection. In distance protection, this function is served by the zone 1 element and command
protection, etc. However, the main protection may not always function perfectly. For example, the
main protection relay may not be able to function correctly due to a power supply failure, CVT
failure, data transmission device failure, circuit breaker failure or failure of the main protection
relay itself. In such cases, power system integrity depends on the backup protection.
The backup protection provides power system protection with a set time delay, its timer value is
set in a range that allows coordination with the main protection. To achieve time coordination with
the main protection, the time delay of the backup protection is determined with a margin in
consideration of the following factors:
• Operating time of main protection relay
• Operating time of circuit breaker
• Reset time of backup protection relay
There are two types of backup protection: remote backup protection that provides backup from a
remote substation at a different location to the main protection, and local backup protection
installed in the same location as that of the main protection that provides backup from that
substation.
Each of these protections has the following features:
Remote backup protection: Possible causes for main protection failures include relay faults,
power supply faults, and various other factors. It is therefore
important to provide backup protection from a remote substation to
prevent the backup protection from failing due to the same causes as
the local main protection. The zone 2 and zone 3 elements of distance
relays, etc. provide as these remote backup protection functions.
Local backup protection: Provides backup protection at the same substation as that of the main
protection and often has the purpose of providing backup when the
circuit breaker fails to operate.
2.1.4 Distance Relay - General Performance
For distance relays, the reach of the zone 1 protection is usually set to approximately 80 to 90% of
the length of the transmission line. This is to ensure that overreach tripping does not occur for
external faults that occur beyond the busbar at the remote end. For internal faults that occur
beyond the reach of zone 1, time delayed tripping by the zone 2 element is applied. High-speed
tripping can be achieved by means of a "command protection system" that exchanges relay
operation information with the remote end.
There are various causes for measuring errors in a distance relay. In the case of a fault with
resistance, the reactance component seen by the relay at the power sending terminal is smaller than
the actual value and it tends to overreach. On the contrary, the reactance component seen by the
relay at the power receiving terminal is greater than the actual value and it tends to underreach.
The line impedance has different values in different phases. When its average value is used for the
relay setting, underreach will occur in a phase with a greater impedance than the average value. In
the case of fault resistance, its impedance is greater for earth faults where the fault is grounded via
a steel tower or tree rather than a phase fault consisting of arc resistance only. Therefore,
measuring errors in the earth fault relay are generally greater than those in the phase fault relay.
The fault arc is considered to be almost equivalent to pure resistance. But if the phase of a current
that flows into a fault point from the remote end is different from the phase of the local current, the
⎯ 14 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
voltage at the fault will have a phase angle difference with respect to the local current, producing a
measuring error in the distance relay with the principle of measuring the reactance component.
The existence of a zero-sequence current on the protected line and adjacent line can also cause
errors in the earth fault relay. The zero-sequence current normally acts in the direction of relay
underreaching due to the effect of the induced voltage. The compensation method will be
described in detail in the next section. The earth fault relay contains more errors than the phase
fault relays even with these compensation methods. Therefore, the earth fault relays are usually set
with a greater margin than the phase fault relays.
Regarding protection relay measuring errors, it is also necessary to consider hardware errors in the
relay itself, errors introduced by coupling capacitor voltage transformers (CCVT), and transient
overreach errors caused by the DC component of the fault current. For GRZ100, the total of these
errors is specified to be less than 5%.
2.1.5 Power Swing and Out-of-Step
Power swings occur when the output voltages of generators at different points in the power system
slip relative to each other, as a result of system instabilities which may be caused by sudden
changes in load magnitude or direction, or by power system faults and their subsequent clearance.
During the course of such a power swing, the impedance seen by a distance relay may move
(relatively slowly) from the load area into the distance protection operating characteristic. In fact,
this phenomenon appears to the distance protection measuring elements like a three phase fault
condition and may result in tripping if no countermeasure is applied. Most power swings are
transient conditions from which the power system can recover after a short period of time, and
distance protection tripping is therefore highly undesirable in such cases. GRZ100 provides a
power swing blocking function (PSB) to prevent unwanted tripping during a power swing. Figure
2.1.5.1 illustrates the typical impedance locus as seen by a distance relay during a transient power
swing.
X
Distance protection
characteristic (Mho)
Impedance locus during

transient power swing
R
Load Area
Figure 2 1.5.1 Impedance Locus during Transient Power Swing
A special case of the power swing condition occurs when the power system disturbance is so
severe that generators lose synchronism with each other and are said to be out-of-step. During an
out-of-step condition the phase angle between generators continues to increase and pass through
180°, at which point a distance relay measures an impedance equal to that for a three phase fault at
the centre of the power system. The impedance locus typically describes an arc passing through
the electrical centre, as shown in Figure 2.1.5.2.
⎯ 15 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
X
Distance protection
characteristic (Mho)
Impedance locus during

out-of-step condition
R
Load Area
Figure 2.1.5.2 Impedance Locus during Out-of-Step Condition
In the case of a full out-of-step condition (as opposed to a transient power swing) it is desirable to
separate the system in the vicinity of the centre of the out-of-step condition. GRZ100 provides an
out-of-step detection element (OST) which can provide tripping in these circumstances.
Although the power swing and out-of-step conditions are very closely related (in fact one is
simply the most severe form of the other), completely different actions are required from the
protection relay. The PSB function must ensure stability of the distance protection during transient
power system conditions, while the OST element initiates system separation by tripping in the
event that a severe power swing results in potentially irrecoverable loss of stability in the power
system. The PSB and OST elements are therefore completely separate functions within the
GRZ100 relay, with different characteristics, separate scheme logic and different settings.
2.1.6 Redundant Configuration of Protection Relay and Improvement of Reliability
The protection relay is expected to operate correctly without fail when a system fault occurs and is
required to have a high reliability. As long as high quality components are used and quality
assurance followed during manufacture, the probability of a defect is low. However, as an option
even further security can be provided to avoid the consequences of a hardware failure by
providing redundancy in the protection relay configuration.
Undesirable phenomena in a protection relay include "mal-operation mode" whereby the relay
operates erroneously when the power system is healthy or in the event of an external fault, and
"failure-to-operate mode" whereby the relay fails to operate for a power system fault. To guard
against the first mal-operation mode, a system that provides redundancy for hardware and issues a
trip command under conditions of ANDing of two or more results is effective. In the GRZ100
relay a fault detection relay can be provided for this purpose as an option. The fault detection relay
consists of a combination of an undervoltage relay and overcurrent relay based on a simple
principle. It also has a simple hardware configuration. Since the trip command of the circuit
breaker is executed under conditions of ANDing of the outputs of the main detection relay that can
exactly identify the faulted section and the fault detection relay that checks the occurrence of a
fault only, even if a hardware defect occurs in either element, the other element prevents tripping.
Furthermore, since the output is made from only one side of the main relay or fault detection relay
for a set time, this system makes it easy to detect a hardware defect and issue an alarm. The fault
detection relay has a simple hardware configuration, and thus for only a small additional cost it is
possible to dramatically improve the reliability in preventing mal-operations.
In the case of the latter failure-to-operate mode, the aforementioned backup protection functions.
Furthermore, a duplicated protection system is also available to ensure reliable operation.
⎯ 16 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.2 Principle of Distance Measurement

2.2.1 Phase Fault
The phase-fault distance relay measures the impedance from the relay to the fault point using a
delta voltage and current. The positive-sequence impedance is used as the line impedance. The
principle is described below.
Figure 2.2.1.1 shows the circuit in the event of a two-phase fault. Suppose that the impedance from
the relay to the fault is the same in both phase B and phase C, and that the self impedance is Zs and
the mutual impedance between phases is Zm. If the voltages and currents of phase B and phase C
are Vb, Vc, Ib and Ic and the fault point voltage is VF, then Vb and Vc are given by the following
equations.
Vb = Zs × Ib + Zm × Ic + VF ....................... (2-1)
Vc = Zs × Ic + Zm × Ib + VF ....................... (2-2)
From equations (2-1) and (2-2), the following equation is obtained.
Vb − Vc = (Zs − Zm) × (Ib − Ic) ......................... (2-3)
where,
Zs: Self impedance
Zm: Mutual impedance
Since the effect of the phase A current is small and is almost canceled when introducing equation
(2-3), it is omitted in equations (2-1) and (2-2).
When each phase of the line is symmetric to the other, the positive-sequence and zero-sequence
impedance Z1 and Z0 according to the method of symmetrical components are defined by the
following equations, using self impedance Zs and mutual impedance Zm:
Z1 = Zs − Zm ............................................... (2-4)
Z0 = Zs + 2Zm ............................................. (2-5)
where,
Z1: Positive-sequence impedance
Z0: Zero-sequence impedance
Equation (2-3) can be rewritten as follows:
Z1 = (Vb − Vc)/(Ib − Ic) .............................. (2-6)
As shown above, the positive-sequence impedance is used for the phase fault relay setting.
Va
ib
Vb
Zm VF
ic
Vc VF
Zs
Figure 2.2.1.1 Two-Phase Fault
⎯ 17 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.2.2 Earth Fault
Figure 2.2.2.1 shows the circuit in the event of a single-phase earth fault. It is not simple to exactly
measure the distance up to the fault point for a single-phase earth fault.
This is because the impedance of the zero-sequence circuit including the earth return is generally
different from the positive-sequence impedance. Therefore, the faulted phase voltage is not simply
proportional to the faulted phase current.
ia
va
vaF
vb
vc
Figure 2.2.2.1 Single-Phase Earth Fault
It is necessary to analyze the impedance seen by the relay in the event of a single-phase earth fault
according to the method of symmetrical components. Figure 2.2.2.2 shows an equivalent circuit
for the single-phase earth fault based on the method of symmetrical components. Assuming the
positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence voltages are V1F, V2F and V0F, the
voltage at the relay point of each symmetrical circuit is given by the following equation. However,
suppose that the positive-sequence impedance and negative-sequence impedance are the same and
influences of the fault resistance are ignored.
V1 = Z1 × I1 + V1F ..................................... (2-7)
V2 = Z1 × I2 + V2F ..................................... (2-8)
V0 = Z0 × I0 + Z0m × I0m + V0F ............... (2-9)
where, V1: Relay point positive-sequence voltage
V2: Relay point negative-sequence voltage
V0: Relay point zero-sequence voltage
V1F: Fault point positive-sequence voltage
V2F: Fault point negative-sequence voltage
V0F: Fault point zero-sequence voltage
I1 : Relay point positive-sequence current
I2 : Relay point negative-sequence current
I0 : Relay point zero-sequence current
I0m: Adjacent line zero-sequence current
Z1: Fault point - relay point positive-sequence impedance
Z0: Fault point - relay point zero-sequence impedance
Z0m: Adjacent line zero-sequence mutual impedance
Taking account of the fact that the faulted phase voltage VaF at the point of fault is,
VaF = V1F + V2F + V0F = 0......................................... (2-10)
phase A voltage Va at the relay is calculated from the following equation:
⎯ 18 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Va = V1 + V2 + V0
= Z1(Ia + (Z0 − Z1)/Z1 × I0 + Z0m/Z1 × I0m) ...... (2-11)
Where, Ia is the current at phase "a" relay point and is defined in the following equation by the
symmetrical component of the current:
Ia = I1 + I2 + I0 .............................................................. (2-12)
Here, defining the current synthesized by the phase "a" relay as Ia', and
Ia' = Ia + (Z0 − Z1)/Z1 × I0 + Z0m/Z1 × I0m ................ (2-13)
then equation (2-11) can be rewritten as the following equation:
Va = Z1 × Ia'................................................................... (2-14)
That is, positive-sequence impedance Z1 up to the fault point can be obtained from the simple ratio
of phase "a" voltage Va to compensated current Ia' according to equation (2-14).
Obtaining the compensated current according to equation (2-13) is called "zero-sequence
compensation." Note in this zero-sequence compensation, the compensation coefficient (Z0 −
Z1)/Z1 and Z0m/Z1 are not real numbers, but complex numbers. The GRZ100 relay has a
configuration that allows this compensation coefficient to be set as a complex number and setting
the coefficient correctly makes it possible to measure exactly the distance up to the fault point.
In equations (2-7) to (2-9), the fault resistance was ignored. Since the measurement of the distance
up to the fault point based on equation (2-14) is carried out using the reactance component, in
principle there is no influence on the voltage component due to the fault resistance. However,
under real operating conditions, distance measurement errors are produced as a result of the fault
resistance combined with the power flow or the current flowing into the fault point from the point
opposite the relay location.
I1 Z1
Positive-sequence circuit V1 V1F
I2 Z1
Negative-sequence circuit V2 V2F
I0 Z0
Zero-sequence circuit V0 V0F
Figure 2.2.2.2 Equivalent Circuit of Single-Phase Earth Fault
⎯ 19 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.3 Multi-Terminal Line Protection

2.3.1 Increased Use of Multi-Terminal Lines
The number of multi-terminal transmission lines has increased in recent years, mainly for
economic reasons. For example, connecting three substations through three-terminal transmission
lines can reduce the construction cost considerably compared to connecting substations through
individual lines. On the other hand, from the standpoint of protection, multi-terminal lines cause
various difficulties. Taking an example of a three-terminal line, these problems are illustrated
below.
2.3.2 Protection Problems on Three-Terminal Application
2.3.2.1 Underreach in the Case of an Internal Fault Further than the Branch Point
In the three-terminal line shown in Figure 2.3.2.1, if a phase fault occurs near terminal C, the fault
current flows in from both terminal A and terminal B and the voltages at terminal A and terminal
B are influenced by the current from one another, have represented by the following equations:
VA = IA × (Z1 + Z3) + IB × Z3 ..................................... (2-15)
VB = IB × (Z2 + Z3) + IA × Z3 ..................................... (2-16)
where, VA: Voltage at terminal A
VB: Voltage at terminal B
IA: Current at terminal A
IB: Current at terminal B
Z1 : Impedance from terminal A to branch point
Z2 : Impedance from terminal B to branch point
Z3 : Impedance from fault point to branch point
From equations (2-15) and (2-16), impedance ZA and impedance ZB seen from the relay at
terminal A and terminal B are given by the following equations:
ZA = VA/IA = (Z1 + Z3) + Z3 × IB/IA ......................... (2-17)
ZB = VB/IB = (Z2 + Z3) + Z3 × IA/IB .......................... (2-18)
From equation (2-17), the impedance seen from the relay at terminal A is greater than the actual
impedance (Z1 + Z3) up to the fault point by (Z3 × IB/IA). That is, if the current infeed from local
terminal A is large its influence is small, but if the current infeed from local terminal B is large the
relay sees the fault point much further than the actual distance.
Terminal A Z1 Z3
Terminal C
Z2
Terminal B
Figure 2.3.2.1 Three-terminal line
⎯ 20 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.3.2.2 Current Outfeed in the Event of an Internal Fault

In the event of an internal fault in a multi-terminal system, a fault current may flow out of a
specific terminal. An example is shown using a three-terminal system with two parallel lines
shown in Figure 2.3.2.2. The figure shows the case where only one circuit is used and another
circuit is open at terminal A. If a fault occurs at a close to terminal C, there is a route through which
the current flows from terminal B via the adjacent line into terminal C and part of the fault current
flows out of terminal B and flows into terminal C again. The magnitude of the outfeed current is a
maximum of approximately 1/2 of the infeed current from terminal A. If the fault point is
examined from terminal A, the impedance of the adjacent circuit between terminal B and terminal
C enters in parallel, and consequently the relay at terminal A sees it as smaller than the actual
impedance up to the fault point, which means this relay tends to overreach.
It is difficult to protect the system when a fault current flows out of one end. Since an ordinary
directional comparison method judges an external fault at one end and sends a block signal, it may
fail to remove the fault.
Terminal A Terminal C
IC
IA
IB
Terminal B
Figure 2.3.2.2 Current Outfeed in Event of Internal Fault
2.3.2.3 Diversion of Outfeed Current in the Event of an External Fault

If an external fault occurs at terminal C in the three-terminal system shown in Figure 2.3.2.3, the
fault current that flows into terminal A may not only flow out of terminal C but may also flow out
of terminal B and flow into the fault point. In this case, outfeed currents IB from terminal B and IC
from terminal C become smaller than infeed current IA from terminal A. That is,
(Outfeed current) < (infeed current)............................... (2-19)
The directional comparison method sometimes cannot detect external faults under such
conditions, increasing the possibility of unwanted operation due to detection of an internal fault
from terminal A.
Terminal A IC Terminal C
IA
IB
Terminal B
Figure 2.3.2.3 Outfeed Current in Event of External Fault
⎯ 21 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.3.2.4 Possible Attenuation of Carrier Wave in Power Line Carrier

There are no particular problems related to power line carrier or multi-terminal lines. However,
when the distance of the line from a branch point is 1/4, 3/4, 5/4 and 7/4, etc. of the wavelength of
the carrier wave, the reflected wave from the branch line may cause considerable attenuation of the
carrier signal, and thus care is required in selecting the carrier frequency. Furthermore, when the
same carrier frequency is used for each terminal, the signal from each terminal may not be
received due to the beat phenomenon, and thus it is desirable to use the carrier wave for each
terminal with a different frequency in a multi-terminal system.
2.3.3 Three-Terminal Line Protection
2.3.3.1 Distance Relay Protection

The relay at terminal A in Figure 2.3.2.1 will underreach due to an infeed current from terminal B.
However, the zone 1 element of distance relay should not overreach for a fault on the busbar at the
remote end under any conditions. Therefore, the relay at terminal A is set so that it may operate
correctly for faults within the protected zone in the absence of a power source at terminal B. This
makes it unavoidable for the relay at terminal A to permit considerable underreach for an infeed
current from terminal B.
When there is a branch point on the line between terminal A and terminal B and it is connected
with terminal C via a short-distance line as shown in Figure 2.3.3.1, the setting range of the zone 1
element at terminal A and terminal B can only include part of the entire length of the line as shown
in the figure to avoid unwanted operations for external faults at terminal C. Therefore, for most of
the faults on this line, one end is delayed-tripped by the zone 2 element. To avoid such a problem
a directional comparison method or current differential method must be used.
Terminal A Terminal B
Terminal C
Figure 2.3.3.1 Short-Distance Tapped Line (1)
2.3.3.2 Command Protection

Permissive Underreach Protection (PUP)
With the Permissive Underreach Protection (PUP) method, all the terminals are tripped via
transmission if zone 1 element operates at least at one terminal. In this system, a common power
line carrier is available.
In the system shown in Figure 2.3.3.2 where both terminal B and terminal C are near the branch
point and connected via a short-distance line, the distance relay at terminal B and terminal C must
unavoidably be set to an extremely short distance to prevent unwanted operations by busbar faults
at each other's end. In order for the relay at terminal A not to operate on a busbar fault at terminal
B or terminal C, it may not be able to set the branch point within the protection range, containing
a zone in which it is impossible to detect the fault as an internal fault. The fault in this zone is
removed by tripping of zone 2. When a current flows out of terminal B in the event of a fault inside
terminal C as shown in the example in Figure 2.3.2.2, the PUP system performs tripping of
terminal B sequentially following the tripping of terminal C.
⎯ 22 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Terminal A Terminal B
Terminal C
Figure 2.3.3.2 Short-Distance Tapped Line (2)
Permissive Overreach Protection (POP)

The Permissive Overreach Protection (POP) method carries out tripping on condition that zone 2
of each terminal (or zone 3 depending on the setting) has operated for an internal fault.
Accordingly it needs to use a different transmission channel when applied to three terminals.
Zone 2 in the POP method basically covers up to and including the busbar of all terminals at the
remote end of the protected zone. If the source behind each terminal is strong enough, in this
scheme all terminals will operate their distance relays for a fault in the protected zone. However, if
the impedance behind the power source changes, there is a tendency to underreach as a
consequence of the "branch effect." Therefore, it is necessary to check that the relay can operate
for faults in the protected zone even under the worst power source conditions.
Blocking Schemes
With the blocking scheme, a terminal sends a blocking signal to the other terminal for an external
fault and a common power line carrier channel can be used. It can also perform high-speed
tripping even if one end of the multi-terminal line is a non-power source and there is no fault
current infeed.
In the blocking scheme, it is necessary to pay attention to diversion of the outfeed current in the
event of an external fault. In the system shown in Figure 2.3.2.3, if a fault current flows out of
terminals B and C for an external fault, the outfeed currents of terminal B and terminal C are
smaller than the infeed current at terminal A due to the diversion. Therefore, it may be difficult to
operate the external detection relay of one terminal depending on the ratio of diversion.
⎯ 23 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4 Protection Scheme

The GRZ100 series has the following protection schemes and is applied to transmission lines of
directly earthed networks. The function of high-speed detection and clearance of faults ensures
that the disturbance to the power system is kept to a minimum in combination with the built-in
autoreclose functions. Appendix A shows block diagrams of the GRZ100 series.
• time-stepped distance protection
• zone 1 extension protection
• command protection (distance protection using telecommunication)
• directional earth fault protection
• overcurrent backup protection
• thermal overload protection
• SOTF and stub protection
• overvoltage and undervoltage protection
• broken conductor detection
• circuit breaker failure protection
• out-of-step protection
2.4.1 Time-Stepped Distance Protection
2.4.1.1 Application
Using reach and tripping time settings coordinated with adjacent lines, the GRZ100 provides up to
four steps of distance protection for forward faults and backup protection for reverse faults. These
are used as the main protection when telecommunications are not available, or as backup
protection for the protected line and adjacent lines.
The GRZ100 has maximum eight distance measuring zones for both phase and earth faults,
maximum four zones for forward faults and maximum three zones for reverse faults respectively.
There is also one non-directional zone. The zones can be defined with either mho-based
characteristic or quadrilateral characteristic. The characteristic is selected by setting the scheme
switch [ZS-C] for phase fault and [ZG-C] for earth fault to "Mho" or "Quad".
Figure 2.4.1.1 shows the mho-based characteristics. Zone 1 (Z1), Zone 1X (Z1X), Zone 2 (Z2),
additional forward Zone F (ZF) and reverse Zone R1 (ZR1) have a complex characteristic
combining the reactance element, mho element and blinder element, while Zone 3 (Z3), additional
reverse Zone R2 (ZR2) and Z4 elements have a complex characteristic combining the mho
element and blinder element. ZND elements have a complex characteristic combining the
impedance element and blinder element. Z3 is also used for detection of forward faults in
command protection. If Z3 is dedicated to command protection, ZF can be used for Zone 3 instead
of Z3 in time-stepped distance protection.
The blinder element (BFR) can be provided for each forward zone. The setting of blinder element
can be set independently or set common to forward zones by the scheme switch [BLZONE].
Figures 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2 show the characteristics with an independent setting.
Since the Z4 is used for detection of reverse faults in command protection, the Z4 for phase faults
has an offset characteristic with an offset mho element which assures detection of close-up phase
faults. The operation of Z4 for phase faults in the event of internal faults is inhibited by the
operations of Z2, ZF and Z3.
⎯ 24 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Figure 2.4.1.2 shows the quadrilateral characteristics. These have a complex characteristic
combining the reactance element, directional element and blinder element.
The Z4 for phase faults has an offset characteristic with an offset directional element which
assures detection of close-up phase faults.
The operation is the same as the mho-based characteristics.
X X
ZNDS ZNDG
Z3S Z3G
BFRG
BFRS
BNDS BNDG
BFLS ZFS ZFG
BFLG
BNDS
Z2S Z2G
BNDG
Z1XS Z1XG
Z1S Z1Sθ1 Z1G Z1Gθ1
75° 75°
Z4Sθ Z1Sθ2 R R
Z4Gθ Z1Gθ2
Z3Sθ
Z3Gθ
ZR1S ZR1G
BRLS BRLG
BRRS BRRG
ZR2S ZR2G
Z4S Z4G
B∗∗S: Blinder elements B∗∗G: Blinder elements
(a) Phase fault element (b) Earth fault element
Figure 2.4.1.1 Mho-based Characteristics
X X
ZNDS ZNDG
Z3S Z3G BFRG
BFRS
ZFS ZFG
BFLS BFLG
Z2S Z2G
BNDS BNDG
Z1XS BNDG Z1XG
BNDS Z1Sθ1 Z1Gθ1
Z1S Z1Sθ2 75° Z1G Z1Gθ2 75°
R R
ZBSθ ZBGθ
ZR1S ZR1G
BRLS BRRG BRLG
BRRS
ZR2S ZR2G
Z4S Z4G
ZNDS ZNDG
Figure 2.4.1.2 Quadrilateral Characteristics
Figure 2.4.1.3 shows typical time-distance characteristics of the time-stepped distance protection
provided at terminal A.
⎯ 25 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Zone 1 is set to cover about 80% of the protected line. When GRZ100 is used as the main
protection, zone 1 generally provides instantaneous tripping but if used as a backup protection,
time delayed tripping can be provided. With the GRZ100, 5 types of zone 1 tripping modes can be
set using the trip mode setting switch.
Zone 2 is set to cover about 120% or more of the protected line, providing protection for the rest of
the protected line not covered by zone 1 and backup protection of the remote end busbar. In order
to coordinate the fault clearance time by the main protection, with the zone 1 protection of the
adjacent lines or by the remote end busbar protection, zone 2 carries out time delayed tripping.
Time
Zone ND TND Zone ND
Reverse Zone R2 TR2
TR1
Reverse Zone R1 Zone 3 (Z3 or ZF)
T3
(TF)
Zone 2
T2
Zone 1
T1
∼ ∼
A B C
Figure 2.4.1.3 Time/Distance Characteristics of Time-Stepped Distance Protection
Zone 3 is mainly provided for remote backup protection of adjacent lines. Its reach is set to at least
1.2 times the sum of the impedance of the protected line and the longest adjacent line. The zone 3
time delay is set so that it coordinates with the fault clearance time provided by zone 2 of adjacent
lines. (Z3 is applied to Zone 3. Z3 is also used for detection of forward faults in command
protection. If Z3 is dedicated to command protection, ZF can be used for Zone 3 instead of the Z3.)
The reverse looking zone R1 and R2 elements are used for time delayed local backup protection
for busbar faults and transformer faults. Furthermore, when applied to multi-terminal lines, it is
effective as the backup protection for adjacent lines behind the relaying point instead of the zone 3
protection at the remote terminal. This is because it is difficult for zone 3 at terminals A and C to
provide remote backup protection for the fault shown in Figure 2.4.1.4 due to fault infeed from the
other terminal, whereas reverse looking zone of terminal B is not affected by this.
Z4 element is used for reverse fault detection in command protection, but not for backup
protection.
The non-directional zone ND is used for time delayed backup protection including overall zones.
Zone 3
B
A
Zone R1
Figure 2.4.1.4 Reverse Zone Protection
⎯ 26 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
To maintain stable operation for close-up three-phase faults which cause the voltages of all phases
to drop to 0 or close to 0, zone 1 for phase faults, once operated, changes its element to a reverse
offset element. This continues until the fault is cleared, and thus it is effective for time delayed
protection.
The reactance element characteristics of zone 1, zone 1 extension, zone 2, zone F and zone R1 are
parallel lines to the R axis and provide sufficient coverage for high-resistance faults. The reactance
element characteristics of zone 1 and zone 1 extension can be transformed to a broken line
depending on the load flow direction in order to avoid overreaching by the influence of load
current. The characteristic in the resistive direction is limited by the mho characteristic of zone 3.
The reactive reach setting is independent for each zone. It is also possible to have independent
settings for each individual phase fault and earth fault elements.
With a long-distance line or heavily loaded line, it is possible for the load impedance to encroach
on the operation zone of the mho element. Blinders are provided to limit the operation of the mho
element in the load impedance area.
Zero-sequence current compensation is applied to zone 1, zone 2 and reverse zone R1 for earth
fault protection. This compensates measuring errors caused by the earth return of zero-sequence
current. This allows the faulted phase reactance element to precisely measure the
positive-sequence impedance up to the fault point. Furthermore, in the case of double-circuit lines,
zero-sequence current from the parallel line is introduced to compensate for influences from
zero-sequence mutual coupling. (R1 is not provided with zero sequence mutual coupling
compensation for the parallel line.) Considering the case where the impedance angle of
positive-sequence impedance and zero-sequence impedance differ which is the most common in
cable circuits, GRZ100 carries out vectorial zero-sequence current compensation.
The autoreclose schemes are utilised with instantaneous zone 1 tripping. When single-phase
autoreclose or single- and three-phase autoreclose are selected, zone 1 executes single-phase
tripping for a single-phase earth fault. In order to achieve reliable fault phase selection even for
faults on heavily loaded long-distance lines or irrespective of variations in power source
conditions behind the relaying point, an undervoltage element with current compensation is used
as a phase selector. Other zones only execute three-phase tripping, and do not initiate autoreclose.
2.4.1.2 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.4.1.5 shows the scheme logic for the time-stepped distance protection. For zone 1
tripping, as described later, it is possible to select instantaneous tripping or time delayed tripping
using the scheme switch [Z1CNT] in the trip mode control logic. (Detail of the [Z1CNT] is
described after.) Zone 2, zone 3, zone F, zone R1, zone R2 and zone ND give time delayed
tripping. However, these zones can trip instantaneously by PLC signals Z∗_INST_TP. Timers
TZ2, TZ3, TZF, TZR1, TZR2 and TZND with time delayed tripping can be set for earth faults and
phase faults separately. Zone F, zone R1, zone R2 and zone ND backup tripping can be disabled
by the scheme switch [Z∗BT].
Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix L.
⎯ 27 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
CRT USE
1550 M-PROT_ON
Z1 Trip TZ1
[PSB-Z1] mode Phase t 0 S-TRIP
& control selection
"ON" logic logic Sigle-phase
0.00 - 10.00s tripping
command
Z2 TZ2
[PSB-Z2]
t 0 M-TRIP
&
"ON" Three-phase
0.00 - 10.00s ≥1 tripping
command
Z3 TZ3
[PSB-Z3]
t 0
&
"ON"
0.00 - 10.00s
ZF
[PSB-ZF] TZF
"ON" t 0
[ZFBT] &
+
"ON" 0.00 - 10.00s
ZR1
[PSB-ZR1] TZR1
t 0
[ZR1BT] "ON" &
+
"ON" 0.00 - 10.00s
ZR2
[PSB-ZR2] TZR2
PSB t 0
[ZR2BT] "ON" &
+
"ON" 0.00 - 10.00s
ZND TZND
[ZNDBT] t 0
+ &
"ON"
NON VTF 0.00 - 10.00s
Figure 2.4.1.5 Scheme Logic of Time-stepped Distance Protection
Tripping by each zone can be blocked the binary input signal (PLC signal) Z∗_BLOCK. The
tripping can be also blocked in the event of a failure of the secondary circuit of the voltage
transformer or power swing. The former is detected by the VT failure detection function. The
signal VTF becomes 1 when a failure is detected. The latter is detected by the power swing
blocking function. The signal PSB becomes 1 when power swing is detected. The zone in which
tripping will be blocked during a power swing can be set using the selection switches [PSB-Z1] to
[PSB-ZR2]. For zone ND backup tripping, power swing blocking is inhibited. For the VTF and
PSB, see Section 2.4.12 and Section 2.4.13, respectively.
By using the trip mode control logic, Zone 1 can implement different trip modes. The trip modes
as shown in Table 2.4.1.1 can be selected according to the position of the scheme switch [Z1CNT]
and whether or not the command protection is in or out of service.
Note: When permissive underreach protection is applied as the command protection, instantaneous
tripping is required for zone 1 and autoreclose must be started. Therefore, position 1 or 4 must be
selected for [Z1CNT].
The service condition of the command protection is judged by the service condition of the
telecommunication and the main protection. The telecommunication in-service signal CRT_USE
⎯ 28 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
is established when the binary input signal (PLC signal) CRT_BLOCK is "0" and the scheme
switch [CRSCM] is set to "ON" as shown in Figure 2.4.1.6.
9
1601 CRT_BLOCK 1 CRT USE
&
[CRSCM]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.4.1.6 Communication Service Logic
The service condition of the external main protection in duplicated scheme is input with the binary
input signal (PLC signal) M-PROT_ON. The command protection in Table 2.4.1.1 is out of
service when both main protections are out of service.
Table 2.4.1.1 Zone 1 Trip Mode Control
Z1CNT COMMAND PROTECTION

Position IN SERVICE OUT OF SERVICE
1 INST. TRIP & AUTO-REC INST. FINAL TRIP
2 DELAYED FINAL TRIP INST. FINAL TRIP
3 TRIP BLOCKED INST. FINAL TRIP
4 INST. TRIP & AUTO-REC
5 INST. FINAL TRIP
The zone 1 tripping mode at each position of the switch [Z1CNT] is as follows:
Position 1: When the command protection is in service, zone 1 executes instantaneous tripping
and starts autoreclose. Zone 1 performs single-phase tripping and reclosing or three-phase tripping
and reclosing depending on the reclose mode of the autoreclose function and the type of faults
(single-phase faults or multi-phase faults). If the autoreclose is out of service, zone 1 performs
instantaneous three-phase final tripping for all faults.
If the command protection is out of service, zone 1 performs instantaneous three-phase final
tripping.
Position 2: Zone 1 performs three-phase tripping with a time delay using timer TZ1 if the
command protection is in service, and it performs three-phase tripping instantaneously if the
command protection is out of service and does not start the autoreclose.
Position 3: Zone 1 tripping is blocked if the command protection is in service, and instantaneous
three-phase tripping is performed if it is out of service. Autoreclose is not started.
Position 4: Zone 1 executes instantaneous tripping irrespective of the command protection
conditions and initiates autoreclose. This instantaneous tripping becomes single-phase tripping or
three-phase tripping depending on the autoreclose mode and type of faults (single-phase faults or
multi-phase faults). If the autoreclose is out of service, zone 1 performs instantaneous three-phase
final tripping.
Position 5: Zone 1 performs instantaneous three-phase final tripping irrespective of the command
protection.
Zone 1 Trip Mode Control is performed using PLC function as shown in Figure 2.4.1.7. By
changing the PLC default setting, the Z1 trip can be controlled independently of the [Z1CNT]
setting.
⎯ 29 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Defalt setting
CRT USE 712
Zone 1 Z1CNT_INST 1696 Z1_INST_TP Z1 can trip instantaneously.
Trip 713
Z1CNT_3PTP 1712 Z1_3PTP Z1 performs three-phase trip.
Mode 714
[Z1CNT] Z1CNT_ARCBLK
Control 1655 Z1_ARC_BLOCK Z1 performs final tripping for all faults.
+ Logic 715
Z1CNT_TPBLK 1616 Z1G_BLOCK Z1G trip is blocked..
1632 Z1S_BLOCK Z1S trip is blocked.
Figure 2.4.1.7 Zone 1 Trip Mode Control Circuit
When zone 1 extension is used, normal zone 1 tripping is blocked. However, the blocking is
released by an autoreclose command that follows zone 1 extension tripping. Final tripping to the
reclose-on-to-permanent-fault is performed under the time-stepped distance protection including
zone 1.
Zone 1 tripping is provided with an additional phase selection element UVC and phase selection
logic to make sure the faulted phase is selected for the single-phase earth fault.
Figure 2.4.1.8 gives details of the phase selection logic in Figure 2.4.1.5. In case of single-phase
earth fault, the earth fault measuring zone 1 element Z1G with a certain phase and the phase
selection element UVC with the same phase operate together, and a single-phase tripping
command S-TRIP can be output to the phase.
19
Z1G - A A
&
20
Z1G - B B S-TRIP
&
21
Z1G - C
C
&
568
EFL
362
UVPWI-A
363
UVPWI-B
364
UVPWI-C
66
UVC - A
&
67
UVC - B
& ≥1
68
UVC - C
&
28
Z3G - A & M-TRIP
&
29
Z3G - B
& ≥1
30
Z3G - C
&
34
Z1S-AB
≥1
35
Z1S-BC
36
Z1S-CA
Figure 2.4.1.8 Phase Selection Logic for Zone 1 Protection
⎯ 30 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Depending on the setting of the scheme switch [Z1CNT] or [ARC-M] which selects reclosing
mode, single-phase tripping may be converted to a three-phase tripping command. This is not
shown in the figure.
In case of multi-phase fault, the phase fault measuring zone 1 element Z1S and the two phases of
the UVC operate together, the Z1G trip is blocked and the three-phase tripping command M-TRIP
is always output. The condition for the UVC two-phase operation is to inhibit the Z1S from
overreaching in the event of a single-phase earth fault.
The UVC element is applied to the zone 1 distance elements.
EFL is an earth fault detection element, and UVPWI is a phase undervoltage relay to provide
countermeasures for overreaching of a leading-phase distance element at positive phase weak
infeed condition. These elements are applied to all earth fault distance elements. (Refer to
Appendix A.) The UVPWI can be disabled by the scheme switch [UVPWIEN].
2.4.1.3 Setting
The following shows the necessary distance protection elements and their setting ranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
VT 1 - 20000 1 2000
CT 1 - 20000 1 400
Phase fault protection

ZS-C Mho - Quad Mho Characteristic selection
Z1S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 1.60Ω Z1 reach
(0.10 - 250.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω) (*1)
Z1S θ1 0° - 45° 1° 0° Gradient of reactance element
Z1S θ2 45° - 90° 1° 90°
Z2S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 3.00Ω Z2 reach
(0.10 - 250.00Ω 0.01Ω 15.00Ω)
ZFS 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 4.00Ω ZF reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 20.0Ω)
Z3S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 6.00Ω Z3 reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 30.0Ω)
Z3S θ(*2) 45 - 90° 1° 85° Characteristic angle of mho element
ZBS θ(*3) 0 - 45° 1° 5° Angle of directional element
BFR1S 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z1S
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω) Required if [BLZONE]=IND
BFRXS 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z1XS
BFR2S 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z2S
BFRFS 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for ZFS
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω) Required If [BLZONE]=IND
BFRS 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z3S or Common
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω) setting of BLZONE
BFLS θ 90° - 135° 1° 120° Forward left blinder angle
ZR1S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 2.00Ω ZR1 reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 10.0Ω)
ZR2S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 4.00Ω ZR2 reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 20.0Ω)
Z4S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
⎯ 31 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω)
BRRS 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Reverse right blinder reach
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
ZNDS 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 10.00Ω ZND reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 50.0Ω)
BNDS 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 12.00Ω ZNDS blinder reach
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 60.0Ω)
TZ1S 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s Zone 1 timer
TZFS 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.35 s Zone F timer
TZR1S 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s Zone R1 timer
TZR2S 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.60 s Zone R2 timer
TZNDS 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.70 s Zone ND timer
Earth fault protection

ZG-C Mho - Quad Mho Characteristic selection
Z1G 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 1.60Ω Z1 reach
(0.10 - 250.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω)
Z1G θ1 0° - 45° 1° 0° Gradient of reactance element
Z1G θ2 45° - 90° 1° 90°
Z2G 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 4.00Ω Z2 reach
(0.10 - 250.00Ω 0.01Ω 20.00Ω)
ZFG 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 6.00Ω ZF reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 30.0Ω)
Z3G 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z3 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω)
Z3G θ(*2) 45 - 90° 1° 85° Characteristic angle of mho element
ZBGθ(*3) 0° - 45° 1° 30° Angle of directional element
BFR1G 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z1G
BFRXG 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z1XG
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω) Required If [BLZONE]=IND
BFR2G 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z2G
BFRFG 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for ZFG
BFRG 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z3G or Common
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω) setting of BLZONE
BFLG θ 90° - 135° 1° 120° Forward left blinder angle
ZR1G 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 2.00Ω ZR1 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 10.0Ω)
ZR2G 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 4.00Ω ZR2 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 20.0Ω)
Z4G 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω)
BRRG 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Reverse right blinder reach
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
ZNDG 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 10.00Ω ZND reach
⎯ 32 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 50.0Ω)
BNDG 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 12.00Ω ZNDG blinder reach
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 60.0Ω)
Krs 0 - 1000 % 1% 340% Residual current compensation = R0/R1
Kxs 0 - 1000 % 1% 340% Residual current compensation = X0/X1
Krm 0 - 1000 % 1% 300% Mutual coupling compensation = ROM/R1
Kxm 0 - 1000 % 1% 300% Mutual coupling compensation = XOM/X1
KrsR 0 - 1000 % 1% 100% Residual current compensation for ZR = R0/R1
KxsR 0 - 1000 % 1% 100% Residual current compensation for ZR = X0/X1
TZ1G 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s Zone 1 timer
TZFG 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.35 s Zone F timer
TZR1G 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s Zone R1 timer
TZR2G 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.60 s Zone R2 timer
TZNDG 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.70 s Zone ND timer
UVC Phase selection element
UVCV 10 - 60 V 1V 48 V Voltage setting
UVCZ 0.0 - 50.0Ω 0.1Ω 2.0Ω Reach setting
(0 - 250Ω 1Ω 10Ω)
UVC θ 45° - 90° 1° 85° Characteristic angle
EFL 0.5 – 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Earth fault detection
(0.10 – 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.20 A)
UVPWI 30 V fixed UV for positive weak infeed
Scheme switch
PROTECTION 3ZONE/Z1EXT/PUP/POP/UOP/ POP Scheme selection
SCHEME BOP/POP+DEF/UOP+DEF/
BOP+DEF/PUP+DEF
CRSCM OFF/ON ON Telecommunication service
BLZONE COM/IND COM Common or independent setting for blinder
Z1CNT 1/2/3/4/5 1 (*4) Zone 1 trip mode selection
PSB - Z1 OFF/ON ON Z1 power swing blocking
PSB - Z2 OFF/ON ON Z2 power swing blocking
PSB - Z3 OFF/ON OFF Z3 power swing blocking
PSB - ZF OFF/ON OFF ZF power swing blocking
PSB - ZR1 OFF/ON OFF ZR1 power swing blocking
PSB - ZR2 OFF/ON OFF ZR2 power swing blocking
ZFBT OFF/ON OFF ZF backup tripping
ZR1BT OFF/ON OFF ZR1 backup tripping
ZR2BT OFF/ON OFF ZR2 backup tripping
ZNDBT OFF/ON OFF ND zone backup tripping
UVPWIEN OFF/ON OFF Countermeasures for overreaching of a
leading-phase distance element at positive phase
weak infeed condition
(*1) Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in the case
of 5 A rating.
(*2) Valid only when mho-based characteristic is selected by ZS-C and ZG-C.
(*3) Valid only when quadrilateral characteristic is selected by ZS-C and ZG-C.
(*4) Default setting is “5” in the case of models 101 and 102. In other models, the default setting is “1”.
⎯ 33 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The following elements have fixed setting values or their settings are interlinked with other
elements listed above. So no setting operation is required.
Element Setting Remarks
Z1BS Fixed to 1.5Ω Z1 reverse offset reach
(Fixed to 7.5Ω)(*1)
BFRS θ Fixed to 75° Angle of forward right blinder BFRS
Z4BS Fixed to 1.5Ω Z4 offset reach. This is also the offset reach for Z1RS and Z2RS.
(Fixed to 7.5Ω) However, in these cases the offset reach is limited by the Z1S
setting when Z1RS and Z2RS are used for backup tripping.
Z4S θ(*2) Interlinked with Z3S θ Characteristic angle of zone 4 mho element
Z4BS θ(*3) Interlinked with ZBS θ Angle of Z4 offset directional element
BRRS θ Fixed to 75° Angle of reverse right blinder BRRS
BRLS Interlinked with BRRS Reverse left blinder
BRLS θ Interlinked with BFLS θ Angle of reverse left blinder BRLS
BFRG θ Fixed to 75° Angle of forward right blinder BFRG
BNDSθ Fixed to 75° Angle of BNDS blinder
Z4G θ(*2) Interlinked with Z3G θ Characteristic angle of Z4 mho element
Z4BG θ(*3) Interlinked with ZBG θ Angle of offset directional element
BRRG θ Fixed to 75° Angle of reverse right blinder BRRG
BRLG Interlinked with BRRG Reverse left blinder
BRLG θ Interlinked with BFLG θ Angle of reverse left blinder BRLG
BNDGθ Fixed to 75° Angle of BNDG blinder
(*1)Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in the
case of 5 A rating.
(*2) Valid when mho-based characteristic is selected by ZS-C and ZG-C.
(*3) Valid when quadrilateral characteristic is selected by ZS-C and ZG-C.
In order to coordinate with the distance protection provided for adjacent lines, care is required in
setting the reach and timer setting. Figure 2.4.1.9 shows an ideal zone and time coordination
between terminals.
Time
Zone 3 Zone 3
T3
Zone 2 Zone 2 Zone 2

T2
T1
A B C D
T1
T2
T3
Zone 3 Zone 3
Figure 2.4.1.9 Typical Zone/Time Coordination among A-D Terminals
⎯ 34 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Zone 1 setting
Since instantaneous tripping is allowed in zone 1, it is desirable to select a setting that will cover
the widest possible range of the protected line. Conversely, zone 1 elements must not respond to
faults further than the remote end. Therefore, the setting of the zone 1 reach is set to 80 to 90% of
the impedance of the protected line taking account of VT and CT errors and measurement error.
The reach is set on the X-axis.
In order to change the reactance element characteristic into a broken line, Z1S(G)θ1 and
Z1S(G)θ2 in Figure 2.4.1.1 or Figure 2.4.1.2 must be set.
Time delayed tripping of zone 1 is selected when instantaneous tripping by another main
protection is given priority. The time delay TZ1 is set to ensure that coordination is maintained
with fault clearance by the main protection. Suppose that the maximum operating time of the main
protection is Tp, the opening time of the circuit breaker is Tcb, the minimum operating time of
zone 1 element is T1 and the reset time of the zone 1 element is Tzone 1, then TZ1 must satisfy
the following condition:
TZ1 > Tp + Tcb + Tzone 1 − T1
Zone 2 setting
Zone 2 is required to cover 10 to 20% of the remote end zone not covered by zone 1. To assure this
protection, it is set to 120% or greater of the protected line impedance. To maintain the selectivity
with zone 1 of the adjacent lines, the zone 2 reach should not exceed the zone 1 reach of the
shortest adjacent line. The reach is set on the X-axis.
Time delay TZ2 is set so that it may be coordinated with fault clearance afforded by the main
protection of the adjacent lines. If time delayed tripping is selected for zone 1 of the protected line,
coordination with the time delay should also be taken into account. Suppose that the main
protection operating time on the adjacent lines is Tp', the opening time of the circuit breaker is
Tcb', the minimum operating time of zone 2 element is T2 and the reset time of local terminal zone
2 element is Tzone 2, then TZ2 must satisfy the following two conditions:
TZ2 > Tp' + Tcb' + Tzone 2 − T2
TZ2 > TZ1
If the adjacent lines are too short for zone 2 to coordinate with zone 1 of the adjacent lines in reach
setting, it is necessary to set a much greater time delay for zone 2 as shown in Figure 2.4.1.10.
Generally, in setting the zone 2, consideration should be given to ensure selectivity with even the
slowest timer of the following protections:
• Remote end busbar protection
• Remote end transformer protection
• Line protection of adjacent lines
• Remote end breaker failure protection
Time
Zone 3
Zone 2
T2'
T2 Zone 2
Zone 1 Zone 1
A B C
Figure 2.4.1.10 Zone 2 Setting (When one of the adjacent lines is very short)
⎯ 35 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Zone 3 setting
Zone 3, in cooperation with zone 2, affords backup protection for faults that have occurred on
adjacent lines. The reach should be set to exceed the remote end of the longest adjacent line
whenever possible. It is also necessary to take into account the effect of fault infeed at the remote
busbars. If an ideal reach setting as shown in Figure 2.4.1.9 is possible, the timer setting for zone 3
needs only to consider the coordination with the timer setting in zone 2 of the protected lines and
adjacent lines.
However, as shown in Figure 2.4.1.11, if there are short-distance adjacent lines and it is
impossible to establish coordination only by the reach setting, there may also be a case where the
time delay for zone 3 will need to be set greater than that of the adjacent lines.
The zone 3 reach is set on the characteristic angle when the mho characteristic is selected or set on
the X axis when the quadrilateral characteristic is selected.
Zone 3
T3'
Zone 3
T3
Zone 2 Zone 2
Zone 1 Zone 1
A B C
D
Figure 2.4.1.11 Zone 3 Setting (When one of the adjacent lines is very short)
Zone F setting
When zone F is used for the zone 3 instead of Z3, above zone 3 setting is applied. If the zone F is
used separately from zone 3, the settings of zone F reach and time delay are set to be less than the
zone 3 settings.
Zone R1 setting
The setting of the zone R1 reach is set so as to exceed the end of the adjacent line behind the
relaying point. The reach is set on the X-axis. The time delay is set to be greater than that of the
zone 3 backup protection. The scheme switch [ZR1BT] is set to “ON”, and the scheme switch
[ZR2BT] must be set to “ON” and the zone R2 reach must be set greater than the zone R1 reach
even though the zone R2 is not used.
Zone R2 setting
The setting of the zone R2 reach is set so as to include the busbar of the adjacent terminal behind
the relaying point. The time delay is set to be greater than that of the zone R1.
The zone R2 reach is set on the characteristic angle when the mho characteristic is selected or set
on the X axis when the quadrilateral characteristic is selected. The scheme switch [ZR2BT] is set
to “ON”.
Zone ND setting
The setting of the zone ND reach is set so as to include all zone settings and the time delay is set
the greatest of all zones. The scheme switch [ZNDBT] is set to “ON”.
⎯ 36 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Blinder setting
BFR and BRR reaches are set to the minimum load impedance with a margin. The minimum load
impedance is calculated using the minimum operating voltage and the maximum load current.
can be set independently or set common to forward zones by [BLZONE]=IND or
[BLZONE]=COM setting. In the [BLZONE]=IND setting, the forward zone blinder setting
should be set BFR1∗≤BFRX∗≤BFR2∗≤BFR∗. If BFR∗≤BFR1∗, for example, the reach of BFR1∗
is limited to the BFR∗ setting reach as shown in Figure 2.4.1.12(b). The BFRF∗ can be set larger
than the BFR∗. If the BFRF∗ is larger than the maximum resistive reach of Z3, the area exceeding
the Z3 is invalid. The BFRF∗ is limited to Z3 operating zone as shown in Figure 2.4.1.12(C).
X X X
Z3 Z3 Z3
Z2 Z2 ZF
Z1 Z1
BFR R BFR1 R BFRF R

BFR2 BFR2 BFR
BFR1 BFR
(a) (b) (c)

Figure 2.4.1.12 BFR Reach
The BFL angle can be set to 90 to 135° and is set to 120° as a default. The BRL angle is linked with
the BFL angle.
Figure 2.4.1.12 shows an example of the blinder setting when the minimum load impedance is
ZLmin and Z’Lmin under the load transmitting and receiving conditions.
BFL X BFR
Load Area
θ 75°
30°
R
Z’Lmin 75° ZLmin
θ
BRR BRL
Figure 2.4.1.13 Blinder Setting
When Z4 is used for overreaching command protection ie. POP, UOP and BOP, it is necessary
when setting BRR to take account of the setting of the remote end BFR to ensure coordination.
That is, the BRR is set to a value greater than the set value of the remote end BFR (e.g., 120% of
BFR). This ensures that a reverse fault that causes remote end zone 2 or zone 3 to operate is
detected in local zone R1 or R2 and false tripping is blocked.
⎯ 37 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Setting of earth fault compensation factor (zero sequence compensation)

In order to correctly measure the positive-sequence impedance to the fault point, the current input
to the earth fault measuring elements is compensated by the residual current (3I0) of the protected
line in the case of a single circuit line and by residual current (3I0) of the protected line and
residual current (3I0’) of the parallel line in the case of a double circuit line.
Generally, the following equation is used to compensate the zero-sequence voltage drop in the
case of phase “a”.
Va = (Ia − I0)Z1 + I0 × Z0 + Iom × Zom (1)
where,
Va: Phase “a” voltage
Ia: Phase “a” current
I0 : Zero-sequence current of the protected line
I0m: Zero-sequence current of the parallel line
Z1: Positive-sequence impedance (Z1 = R1 + jX1)
Z0: Zero-sequence impedance (Z0 = R0 + jX0)
Z0m: Zero-sequence mutual impedance (Zom = Rom + jXom)
Equation (1) can be written as follows:
Va = (R1 + jX1)Ia + {(R0 − R1) + j(X0 − X1)}I0 + (Rom + jXom)Iom
R0 − R1 Rom X0 − X1 Xom
= R1(Ia + R1 I 0 + R1 I om) + jX1 (I a + X1 I 0 + X1 Iom)
In the GRZ100, the voltage is compensated independently for resistance and reactance
components as shown in equation (2) in stead of general equation (1).
Krs Krm
100 − 1 100
VaR + jVaX = {R1( IaR + 3 × 3I0R + 3 × 3IomR )
Kxs Kxm
100 − 1 100
− X1( IaX + 3 × 3I 0X + 3 × 3IomX )}
Krs Krm
100 − 1 100
+ j{R1( IaX + 3 × 3I0X + 3 × 3IomX )
Kxs Kxm
100 − 1 100
+ X1( IaR + 3 × 3I0R + 3 × 3IomR )} (2)
where,
Kxs: compensation factor (Kxs = X0/X1 × 100)
Krs: compensation factor (Krs = R0/R1 × 100)
Kxm: compensation factor (Kxm = Xom/X1 × 100)
Krm: compensation factor (Krm = Rom/R1 × 100)
X: imaginary part of the measured impedance
R: real part of the measured impedance
⎯ 38 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
VaX: imaginary part of phase “a” voltage

VaR: real part of phase “a” voltage
IaX: imaginary part of phase “a” current
IaR: real part of phase “a” current
I0X: imaginary part of zero-sequence current of the protected line
I0R: real part of zero-sequence current of the protected line
IomX: imaginary part of zero-sequence current of the parallel line
IomR: real part of zero-sequence current of the parallel line
I0’
Zom
P F
Va I1, I2, Io
Z1, Z2, Zo
Figure 2.4.1.14 Earth Fault Compensation
The zero-sequence compensation factors are applied to the earth fault measuring elements as
shown in the table below
Element Protected line Parallel line
Z1G Krs, Kxs Krm, Kxm
Z1XG Krs, Kxs Krm, Kxm
Z2G Krs, Kxs Krm, Kxm
Z3G − −
ZFG − −
ZR1G KrsR, KxsR −
ZR2G − −
Z4G − −
ZNDG − −
−: Compensation is not provided.
Note: The operation of Z1 or Z2 element is limited within the Z3 operating zone if the reach
of Z1 or Z2 compensated with zero-sequence current exceeds the reach of Z3. The
operation of ZR1G is also limited within the reach of ZR2G.
The zero-sequence compensation of the parallel line is controlled by the ZPCC (Zero-sequence
Current Compensation) element.
When an earth fault occurs on the protected line, the ZPCC operates and parallel line
compensation is performed to prevent underreach caused by the mutual zero-sequence current of
the parallel line.
When an earth fault on the parallel line occurs, the ZPCC does not operate and the compensation
of parallel line is not performed to prevent overreach. The operating condition of the ZPCC is as
follows:
3I0 / 3Iom ≥ 0.8
Charging current compensation

When distance protection is applied to underground cables or long-distance overhead lines, the
⎯ 39 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
effect of charging current cannot be ignored. It appears as a distance measurement error in the
fault.
To suppress the effect of the charging current and maintain the highly accurate distance
measurement capability, the GRZ100 has a charging current compensation function.
The compensation is recommended if the minimum fault current can be less than three times the
charging current.
The setting value of ZIC should be the charging current at the rated voltage Vn.
ZIC 0.00 - 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.0 0 Charging current setting
( 0.00 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.00 A) (*)
Vn 100 - 120 1V 110 V Rated line voltage
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of 5 A rating.
Setting of phase selection element

Phase selection is required only for faults on the protected line. Therefore, impedance reach
setting UVCZ is set to 120% of the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line. Impedance
angle setting UVC θ is set the same as the protected line angle.
Undervoltage setting UVCV is set higher than the estimated maximum fault voltage at the fault
point for a single-phase earth fault.
2.4.2 Zone 1 Extension Protection
Application
The disadvantage of time-stepped distance protection is that faults near the remote end of the
protected line can only be cleared in zone 2 time, thus high speed protection cannot be performed
for all faults on the protected line. If telecommunication is available, this disadvantage can be
solved by command protection. If telecommunication is not available, zone 1 extension protection
using autoreclose will implement high speed protection at both terminals.
Zone 1 extension (zone 1X) has a complex characteristic combining the reactance element, mho
element and blinder element, and its characteristic is the same as zone 1.
Zone 1X for earth faults is provided with the same residual current compensation as zone 1 and
zone 2.
As shown in Figure 2.4.2.1, zone 1X is set to overreach the protected line and performs
instantaneous tripping. This tripping is followed by autoreclose. In the selected autoreclose mode,
one of three-phase tripping and autoreclose, single-phase tripping and autoreclose, or single- and
three-phase tripping and autoreclose is executed.
The zone 1 extension protection clears a fault on the protected line including an end zone fault at
high speed, displaying the performance equivalent to that of command protection.
On the other hand, unlike command protection, overreaching zone 1X also acts instantaneously
for a fault on adjacent lines and executes tripping. If the fault is a transient fault, power
transmission can be recovered by autoreclose with a transient loss of power supply.
High speed zone 1X tripping is not desirable following reclosure onto a permanent fault on an
adjacent line because more of the network is lost than necessary. Therefore, tripping by zone 1X is
blocked prior to the reclosing command to the circuit breaker. Whether or not the permanent fault
is on the protected line or on an adjacent line, tripping is performed under time-stepped distance
protection.
⎯ 40 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
When autoreclose is out of service, the zone 1 extension protection is blocked.

Time
Zone R T4
Zone 3
T3
Zone 2
T2
Zone 1 Zone 1X
T1
A B C
Figure 2.4.2.1 Time/Distance Characteristics of Zone 1 Extension Protection

and Time-Stepped Distance Protection
Scheme Logic
The scheme logic of the zone 1 extension protection is shown in Figure 2.4.2.2. Zone 1X outputs
single-phase tripping signal S-TRIP or three-phase tripping signal M-TRIP through phase
selection logic on condition that the reclosing mode selection switch [ARC-M] of autoreclose be
set to "TPAR" or "SPAR & TPAR" and condition REC-READY1 = 1 be established. The phase
selection logic is the same as that for the zone 1 protection shown in Figure 2.4.1.7, except that
Z1XG and Z1XS are employed instead of Z1G and Z1S. When a power swing is detected (PSB =
1) and when a VT failure is detected (VTF = 1), tripping is blocked. Power swing blocking can be
disabled by the scheme switch [PSB-Z1X].
The zone 1 extension protection is disabled by the binary input signal (PLC signal)
Z1XG_BLOCK and Z1XS_BLOCK.
[ARC-M]
+
"SPAR","TPAR", & ≥1 &
"SPAR + TPAR"
REC-READY1
1540 Z1X_INIT Phase S-TRIP
Protection scheme Selection
M-TRIP
+
"Z1-EXT" ≥1
&
1659 Z1X_F.ENABLE
22:Z1XG-A 23:Z1XG-B 24:Z1XG-C
37:Z1XS-AB 38:Z1XS-BC 39:Z1XS-CA
Z1X
PSB [PSB-Z1X]
"ON"
VTF
1617 Z1XG_BLOCK
1
1633 Z1XS_BLOCK
Figure 2.4.2.2 Zone 1 Extension Scheme Logic
REC-READY1 is a signal in the autoreclose function, and as shown in Figure 2.4.2.3,

REC-READY1 = 1 is established when the reclaim time has elapsed, that is, when autoreclose is
ready, and reset when a reclosing command is output.
Zone 1 extension can provide protection in the case of evolving faults provided that they occur
before the reclosing command is output. Otherwise, in the case of a permanent fault, it will not
⎯ 41 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
respond to a reclose-on-to-fault.
Fault inception
Closed
Circuit Open
breaker
REC-
READY1
Reclaim time Reclaim time
Trip
Auto
- reclose
Figure 2.4.2.3 Sequence Diagram of Zone 1 Extension
Zone 1 extension executes single-phase tripping and autoreclose for single-phase to earth faults
when the reclosing mode selection switch [ARC-M] is set to "SPAR & TPAR". A phase selection
element UVC and phase selection logic are used for reliable selection of the faulted phases. Phase
selection logic for zone 1X can be seen in Figure 2.4.1.7 by replacing zone 1 measuring elements
with zone 1X measuring elements.
Setting
The following table shows the setting elements necessary for zone 1 extension protection and their
setting ranges.
Z1XS 0.01 – 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 2.40Ω Zone 1 extension reach
(0.10 – 250.00Ω 0.01Ω 12.00Ω) (*)
Z1S θ1 0° - 45° 1° 0° Gradient of reactance element
Z1S θ2 45° - 90° 1° 90°
BFRXS 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z1XS
Z1XG 0.01 – 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 2.40Ω Zone 1 extension reach
(0.10 – 250.00Ω 0.01Ω 12.00Ω)
Z1G θ1 0° - 45° 1° 0° Gradient of reactance element
Z1G θ2 45° - 90° 1° 90°
BFRXG 0.10 - 20.00Ω 0.01Ω 5.10Ω Forward right blinder reach for Z1XG
PROTECTION 3ZONE/Z1EXT/PUP/POP/UOP/BOP/PO POP Scheme selection
SCHEME P+DEF/UOP+DEF/BOP+DEF/ PUP+DEF
Autoreclose mode Disabled/SPAR/TPAR/ SPAR & TPAR Autoreclose mode selection
(ARC – M) SPAR & TPAR/EXT1P/EXT3P "SPAR" or "SPAR & TPAR" should be selected
BLZONE COM/IND COM Common or independent setting for blinder
PSB - Z1X OFF/ON ON Power swing blocking
(*) Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in the
case of 5 A rating.
The reach for zone 1 extension is set, for example, to 120% so as to completely cover the protected
line. It is not necessary to set the earth fault compensation factors because the same compensation
factors as those of zone 1 and zone 2 are used. The reach is set on the X-axis.
When the reactance element characteristic of zone 1 takes a broken line, that of zone 1 extension
follows it automatically.
When using zone 1 extension protection, either "SPAR & TPAR" or "TPAR" must be selected as
⎯ 42 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
the reclosing mode of the autoreclose.
2.4.3 Command Protection
If operational information from the distance relays located at each end of the protected line is
exchanged by means of telecommunication, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not
the fault is internal or external to the protected line. Each terminal can provide high-speed
protection for any fault along the whole length of the protected line. The GRZ100 provides the
following command protection using the distance measuring elements.
• Permissive underreach protection (PUP)
• Permissive overreach protection (POP)
• Unblocking overreach protection (UOP)
• Blocking overreach protection (BOP)
Each command protection can initiate high-speed autoreclose. These protections perform
single-phase or three-phase tripping depending on the setting of the reclosing mode and the fault
type.
Each command protection includes the aforementioned time-stepped distance protection as
backup protection.
2.4.3.1 Permissive Underreach Protection

Application
In permissive underreach protection (PUP), the underreaching zone 1 protection operates and trips
the local circuit breakers and at the same time sends a trip permission signal to the remote terminal.
The terminal which receives this signal executes instantaneous tripping on condition that the local
overreaching element has operated. The overreaching element can be selected as either zone 2 or
zone 3.
Since the trip permission signal is sent only when it is sure that the fault exists in the operating
zone of zone 1, the PUP provides excellent security. On the other hand, the PUP does not provide
sufficient dependability for faults on lines that contain open terminals or weak infeed terminals for
which zone 1 cannot operate. Faults near open terminals or weak infeed terminals are removed by
delayed tripping of zone 2 elements at remote terminals.
Since only the operating signal of the underreaching element is transmitted, it is not necessary to
distinguish a transmit signal from a receive signal. That is, the telecommunication channel can be
shared by the terminals and a simplex channel can be used.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.3.1 shows the scheme logic of the PUP. Once zone 1 starts to operate, it outputs a
single-phase tripping signal S-TRIP or three-phase tripping signal M-TRIP to the local terminal
instantaneously and at the same time sends a trip permission signal CS to the remote terminals.
When the trip permission signal R1-CR is received from the remote terminals, PUP executes
instantaneous tripping on condition that either zone 2 or zone 3 has operated. Whether or not zone
2 or zone 3 is used can be selected by the scheme switch [ZONESEL]. If the PLC signal
PSCM_TCHDEN is established, the delayed pick-up timer TCHD is provided.
⎯ 43 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
TSBCT
0 t
Z1 CS
0.00 – 1.00s
R1-CR
≥1
"Z2" & S-TRIP
Z2 Phase
TCHD &
[ZONESEL] Selection
0 t M-TRIP
&
Z3 0-50m s ≥1
"Z3"
&
1842 PSCM_TCHDEN CS (Carrier send) signal
[PSB-CR] Signal No. Signal nam e
225: EXT_CAR-S
PSB
(PSBS_DET/PSBG_DET " ON"
from Figure 2.4.12.2.)
NON_VTF
(from Figure 2.4.11.1.)
R1-CR: Trip perm ission signal from the rem ote term inal.
Signal No. Signal nam e Description
1568: EXT_CAR.R1-1 Trip carrier signal from rem ote term inal
1569: EXT_CAR.R1-2 G uard/And carrier signal from rem ote term inal
Figure 2.4.3.1 PUP Scheme Logic
To select the faulted phases reliably, phase selection is performed using the phase selection
element UVC. Phase selection logic in zone 1 tripping is shown in Figure 2.4.1.7 and its operation
is described in Section 2.4.1. Phase selection logic in command tripping is shown in Figure
2.4.3.9. Refer to Section 2.4.3.7.
Off-delay timer TSBCT is provided for the following purpose:
In many cases, most of the overreaching elements at both ends operate almost simultaneously.
However, there may be some cases where they cannot operate simultaneously due to unbalanced
distribution of fault currents. Non-operation of the overreaching elements can occur at a terminal
far from the fault, but they can operate if the other terminal trips. Transmission of the trip
permission signal continues for the setting time of TSBCT after reset of zone 1, and thus even the
terminal for which the overreaching element has delayed-picked up can also trip.
Setting
The following shows the setting elements necessary for the PUP and their setting ranges.
For the settings of Z1, Z2, Z3 and UVC, refer to Section 2.4.1.
TCHD 0 - 50 ms 1 ms 12 ms Channel delay time
TSBCT 0.00 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.10s
PROTECTION 3ZONE/Z1EXT/PUP/POP/UOP POP Scheme selection
SCHEME /BOP/POP+DEF/UOP+DEF/
BOP+DEF/PUP+DEF
ZONESEL Z2/Z3 Z2 Overreaching element selection
PSB - CR OFF/ON ON Power swing blocking
2.4.3.2 Permissive Overreach Protection

Application
In permissive overreach protection (POP), the terminal on which the forward overreaching
element operates transmits a trip permission signal to the other terminal. The circuit breaker at the
local terminal is tripped on condition that the overreaching element of the local terminal has
operated and that a trip permission signal has been received from the remote terminal. That is, POP
determines that the fault exists inside the protected line based on the overlapping operation of the
⎯ 44 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
forward overreaching elements at both terminals. It is possible to use zone 2 or zone 3, as the
forward overreaching element.
The POP is provided with an echo function and weak infeed trip function so that even when the
protection is applied to a line with open terminal or weak infeed terminal, it enables fast tripping of
both terminals for any fault along the whole length of the protected line. An undervoltage element
UVL is provided for weak infeed tripping. (See Section 2.4.3.5 for protection for weak infeed
terminal.)
When a sequential fault clearance occurs for a fault on a parallel line, the direction of the current
on the healthy line is reversed. The status of the forward overreaching element changes from an
operating to a reset state at the terminal where the current is reversed from an inward to an outward
direction, and from a non-operating status to operating status at the other terminal. In this process,
if the operating periods of the forward overreaching element of both terminals overlap, the healthy
line may be tripped erroneously. To prevent this, current reversal logic (CRL) is provided. (See
Section 2.4.3.6 for current reversal.)
Since the POP transmits a trip permission signal with the operation of the overreaching element, it
requires multiplex signaling channels or one channel for each direction. This ensures that the
transmitting terminal does not trip erroneously due to reception of its own transmit signal during
an external fault in the overreaching zone.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.3.2 shows the scheme logic for the POP. The POP transmits a trip permission signal to
the other terminal for any of the following conditions.
• The forward overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 selected by scheme switch [ZONESEL]
operates and the current reversal logic (CRL) has not picked up. If the PLC signal
• The circuit breaker is opened and a trip permission signal CR is received from the other
terminal.
• The forward overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 and reverse looking Z4 have not operated
and a trip permission signal is received from the other terminal.
The last two are implemented when an echo function (ECH) is selected. (Refer to Section 2.4.3.5
for echo function.)
Transmission of the trip permission signal continues for the TSBCT setting even after the local
terminal is tripped by the delayed drop-off timer TSBCT. This is to ensure that command tripping
is executed at the remote terminal.
The POP outputs single-phase tripping signal S-TRIP or three-phase tripping signal M-TRIP to
the local terminal when the trip permission signal R1-CR is received from the remote terminal, the
current reversal logic (CRL) is not picked up and one of the following conditions is established.
• The forward overreaching element operates.
• The undervoltage element UVL (UVLS or UVLG) operates and the forward
overreaching and the reverse looking elements do not operate.
The latter is implemented when the weak infeed trip function is selected. (Refer to Section 2.4.3.5
for weak infeed trip function.)
To select the faulted phase reliably, phase selection is performed using the phase selection element
UVC. Phase selection logic is described in Section 2.4.3.7.
⎯ 45 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
TECCB ECH
t 0
CB-OR 1
&
0.00 - 200.00s
R1-CR
≥1 ≥1 CS
&
&
TREBK
t 0 0 t
& 20ms 0.00-10.00s ≥1

TSBCT
0 t
CRL
Z4 WIT 0.00 – 1.00s
(∗) & ≥1
UVL & Phase S-TRIP
Selection M-TRIP
"Z2"
Z2 TCHD
[ZONESEL] 0 t &
&
Z3 0-50ms ≥1
"Z3" (∗) Note: Details of UVL
& Signal No. Signal name Description
72: UVLS-AB A-B phase
1842 PSCM_TCHDEN
73: UVLS-BC B-C phase
74: UVLS-CA C-A phase
[PSB-CR]
78: UVLG-A A phase
PSB 79: UVLG-B B phase
"ON " 80: UVLG-C C phase
NON VTF
Figure 2.4.3.2 POP Scheme Logic
Setting
The following shows the setting elements necessary for the POP and their setting ranges. For the
settings of Z2, Z3 and UVC, refer to Section 2.4.1.
UVL Weak infeed trip element
UVLS 50 - 100 V 1V 77V Undervoltage detection (phase fault)
UVLG 10 - 60 V 1V 45V Undervoltage detection (earth fault)
Z4S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω) (*)
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
Z4G 0.01 – 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω)
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
TREBK 0.00 - 10.00s 0.01s 0.10s Current reversal block time
TSBCT 0.00 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.10s
SCHEME BOP/POP+DEF/UOP+DEF/
BOP+DEF/PUP+DEF
⎯ 46 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

ECHO OFF/ON ON Echo function
WKIT OFF/ON ON Weak infeed trip function
case of 5 A rating.
(Fixed to 7.5Ω) (*1)
Z4S θ(*2) Interlinked with Z3S θ Characteristic angle of Z4 mho element
Z4BS θ(*3) Interlinked with ZBS θ Angle of Z4 directional element
Z4BG θ(*3) Interlinked with ZBG θ Angle of Z4 directional element
(*1) Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in
The reverse looking Z4 (G,S), BRR (G,S) and BRL (G,S) must always operate for reverse faults
for which the forward overreaching element of the remote end operates. The following setting
coordination is required.
When zone 2 is selected as the forward looking element:
Z4 setting = 1.2 × (Zone 2 setting at remote end)
When zone 3 is selected:
In both cases:
BRR setting = 1.2 × (BFR setting at remote end)
2.4.3.3 Unblocking Overreach Protection

Application
If a power line carrier is used as the telecommunication media, there is a possibility that the
dependability of the PUP and POP could be reduced. This is because the trip permission signal
must be transmitted through the fault point and the attenuation of the signal may cause the PUP
and POP to fail to operate. To solve this problem, unblocking overreach protection (UOP) is
applied.
The signal transmitted under the UOP is a trip block signal and this is transmitted continuously
during non-fault conditions. When the forward overreaching element operates, transmission is
stopped. At the remote end, the non-receipt of a trip block signal is recognized as an actual trip
permission signal and tripping is executed on condition that the local forward overreaching
element operates.
⎯ 47 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
In this system, the transmitted signal is a trip block signal, and transmission of that signal is
required only in the case of external faults. Therefore, even if power line carrier is used, a failure to
operate or false operation due to attenuation of the signal would not be experienced.
If the modulation method of the telecommunication circuits is a frequency shift method,
frequencies f1 and f2 are assigned to the trip block signal and trip permission signal, respectively.
The receive end recognizes signals CR1 and CR2 as corresponding to respective frequencies as
the actual trip permission signals when either one of the following conditions is established and
executes tripping on condition that the overreaching element should operate.
• CR1 is lost and only CR2 is received.
• Both CR1 and CR2 are lost.
The latter is also applicable if there is a telecommunication circuit failure in addition to attenuation
of the signal at the fault point. Therefore, when the latter condition continues for a certain period
or longer, the UOP is blocked and a telecommunication circuit failure alarm is output.
The UOP is provided with an echo function and weak infeed trip function and even when applied
to a line with open terminals or weak infeed terminals, it allows fast tripping of both terminals for
any fault along the whole length of the protected line. An undervoltage element UVL is provided
for weak infeed tripping. (See Section 2.4.3.5 for protection for weak infeed terminal.)
operating to a reset state at the terminal where the current is reversed from an inward to an outward
direction, and from a non-operating status to an operating status at the other terminal. In this
process, if the operating periods of the forward overreaching element of both terminals overlap,
the healthy line may be tripped erroneously. To prevent this, current reversal logic is provided.
(See Section 2.4.3.6 for current reversal.)
For the communication channel, a single channel shared by different terminals or multiplex
channels, one channel for each direction can be used.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.3.3 shows the scheme logic of the UOP. The logic level of transmit signal CS and
receive signal R1-CR is "1" for a trip block signal and "0" for a trip permission signal.
The UOP changes its transmit signal CS from a trip block signal to trip permission signal under
one of the following conditions. The logic level of CS changes from 1 to 0.
• The forward overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 selected by the scheme switch [ZONESEL]
operates and the current reversal logic (CRL) is not picked up. If the PLC signal
• The circuit breaker is open and the trip permission signal (R1-CR=0) is received from
the other terminal.
• The forward overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 and reverse looking Z4 are not operating and
a trip permission signal is received from the other terminal.
The last two are implemented when an echo function (ECH) is selected. (Refer to Section 2.4.3.5
for echo function.)
Transmission of a trip permission signal continues for the TSBCT setting even after the local
terminal is tripped. This is to ensure that command tripping is executed at the remote terminal.
The UOP outputs single-phase tripping signal S-TRIP or three-phase tripping signal M-TRIP to
the local terminal when the trip permission signal (R1-CR=0) is received from the remote
terminal, the current reversal logic (CRL) is not picked up and one of the following conditions is
established.
⎯ 48 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• The forward overreaching element operates.

• The undervoltage element UVL (UVLS or UVLG) operates and the forward
overreaching and the reverse looking elements do not operate.
The latter is implemented when the weak infeed trip function is selected.
UVC. Phase selection logic is described in Section 2.4.3.7.
TECCB ECH
t 0
CB-OR 1
&
0.00 - 200.00s
R1-CR 1
≥1 ≥1 1 CS
&
&
TREBK
t 0 0 t
& 20ms 0.00-10.00s ≥1

TSBCT
0 t
CRL
Z4 WIT 0.00 – 1.00s
& ≥1
UVL & Phase S-TRIP
Selection M-TRIP
"Z2"
Z2 TCHD
[ZONESEL] 0 t &
&
Z3 "Z3" 0-50ms ≥1
&
1842 PSCM_TCHDEN
[PSB-CR]
PSB
"ON "
NON VTF
Figure 2.4.3.3 UOP Scheme Logic
Setting
The following shows the setting elements necessary for the UOP and their setting ranges.
For the settings of Z2, Z3, and UVC, refer to Section 2.4.1.
UVL Weak infeed trip element
UVLS 50 - 100 V 1V 77V Undervoltage detection (phase fault)
UVLG 10 - 60 V 1V 45V Undervoltage detection (earth fault)
Z4S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach

(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω) (*)
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
Z4G 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω)
⎯ 49 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
TSBCT 0.00 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.10s
PROTECTION 3ZONE/Z1EXT/PUP/POP/UOP/ BOP/ POP Scheme selection
SCHEME POP+DEF/UOP+DEF/BOP+DEF/PUP+DEF
WKIT OFF/ON ON Weak infeed trip function
(*) Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in
(*1) Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in
The reverse looking elements Z4 (G,S), BRR (G,S) and BRL (G,S) must always operate for
reverse faults for which the forward overreaching element of the remote end operates. The
following setting coordination is required.
When zone 2 is selected as the forward-looking element,
When zone 3 is selected,
In both cases,
⎯ 50 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.3.4 Blocking Overreach Protection

Application
In blocking overreach protection (BOP), each terminal normally transmits a trip permission
signal, and transmits a trip block signal if the reverse looking Z4 operates and the forward
overreaching element does not operate. Tripping of the local circuit breaker is performed on
condition that the forward overreaching element has operated and a trip permission signal has
been received. As the forward overreaching element, it is possible to use zone 2 or zone 3.
If signal modulation is performed by an ON/OFF method, the signal is not normally transmitted
and a trip block signal is transmitted only when the reverse looking element operates. Tripping is
performed on condition that the forward overreaching element has operated and no signal has been
received. In this signaling system, the signal transmitted is a trip block signal and transmission of
this signal is only required in the event of an external fault. Therefore, even if power line carrier is
used, there will be no failure to operate or false operation due to attenuation of signals caused by
signal transmission through the fault.
The BOP receives a trip permission signal all the time. Therefore, when a forward external fault
occurs, the infeed terminal on which the forward overreaching element has operated attempts to
perform instantaneous tripping. At this time, at the remote outfeed terminal, the reverse looking
element operates and transmits a trip block signal. This signal is received at the infeed terminal
after a channel delay time. Therefore, a short delay is required for the tripping to check for the
reception of a trip block signal.
The BOP performs fast tripping for any fault along the whole length of the protected line even if an
open terminal exists. A strong infeed terminal operates for all internal faults even if a weak infeed
terminal exists. Therefore, no echo function is required. However, since no weak infeed logic is
applicable to the BOP, the weak infeed terminal cannot operate.
operating to a reset state at the terminal where the current is reversed from the inward direction to
outward direction, and from a non-operating status to an operating status at the other terminal. In
this process, if the operating periods of the forward overreaching element of both terminals
overlap, the healthy line may be tripped erroneously. To prevent this, current reversal logic is
provided. (See Section 2.4.3.6 for current reversal.)
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.3.4 shows the scheme logic of the BOP. The logic level of transmit signal CS and
receive signal R1-CR is "1" for a trip block signal and "0" for a trip permission signal.
The transmit signal is controlled in the BOP as follows:
In the normal state, the logic level of transmit signal CS is 0, and a trip permission signal is
transmitted. If the reverse looking Z4 operates and at the same time the forward overreaching
element zone 2 or zone 3 selected by the scheme switch [ZONESEL] does not operate, CS
becomes 1 and a trip block signal is transmitted. When this condition continues for 20 ms or more,
current reversal logic is picked up and a drop-off delay time of TREBK setting is given to reset the
transmission of the trip block signal.
Transmission of a trip permission signal continues for the TSBCT setting even after the local
terminal is tripped, assuring command tripping of the remote terminal.
The BOP outputs single-phase tripping signal S-TRIP or three-phase tripping signal M-TRIP to
the local terminal when zone 3 or zone 2 operates and at the same time the trip permission signal is
received (R1-CR=0). The delayed pick-up timer TCHD is provided to allow for the transmission
delay for receipt of the trip block signal from the remote terminal in the event of a forward external
fault.
⎯ 51 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
UVC. The phase selection logic is described in Section 2.4.3.7.
Z4
& TREBK & CS
≥1
t 0 0 t
20ms 0.00 – 10.00s
R1-CR 1 TSBCT
0 t
"Z2" TCHD
Z2 [ZONESEL] t 0 & 0.00 – 1.00s
&
Phase S-TRIP
Z3 "Z3" 0 - 50ms Selection M-TRIP
[PSB-CR]
PSB
"ON"
NON VTF
Figure 2.4.3.4 BOP Scheme Logic
Setting
The following shows the setting elements necessary for the BOP and their setting ranges.
For the settings of Z2, Z3 and UVC, refer to Section 2.4.1.
Z4S 0.01 - 50.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
(0.1 – 250.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω) (*)
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
Z4G 0.01 - 100.00Ω 0.01Ω 8.00Ω Z4 reach
(0.1 – 500.0Ω 0.1Ω 40.0Ω)
(0.5 - 100.0Ω 0.1Ω 25.5Ω)
TSBCT 0.00 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.10s
SCHEME BOP /POP+DEF/UOP+DEF/
BOP+DEF/PUP+DEF
case of 5 A rating.
⎯ 52 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(*1)Ohmic values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other ohmic values are in the
case of 5 A rating.
The reverse looking elements Z4 (G,S), BRR (G,S) and BRL (G,S) must always operate for
reverse faults for which the forward overreaching element of the remote end operates. The
following setting coordination is required.
When zone 2 is selected as the forward-looking element,
or
Z4 setting = α × (Zone 2 setting at remote end)
Note: α should be determined in consideration of the extension of zone 2 by zero-sequence
compensation.
When zone 3 is selected,
In both cases,
The delayed pick-up timer TCHD is set as follows taking into account the transmission delay time
of the blocking signal and a safety margin of 5 ms.
TCHD setting = maximum signal transmission delay time(*) + 5ms
(*) includes delay time of binary output and binary input for the blocking signal.
2.4.3.5 Protection for Weak Infeed Terminal

The POP and UOP are provided with an echo function and weak infeed trip function. Both
functions are used for lines with weak infeed terminals.
Figure 2.4.3.5 shows the scheme logic for the echo function.
With the POP, when a trip permission signal is received (R1-CR=1) if neither forward
overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 nor reverse looking Z4 have operated, the echo function sends back
the received signal to the remote terminal. With the UOP, when reception of a blocking signal is
stopped (R1-CR=0) if neither forward overreaching zone 2 (or zone 3) nor reverse looking Z4
have operated, the echo function stops sending the blocking signal to the remote terminal. When
the circuit breaker is open (CB-OR = 0), too, the echo function sends back the trip permission
signal or stops sending the blocking signal. Timer TECCB is used to set the time from CB opened
to the echo logic enabled.
The terminal on which the forward overreaching element has operated can be tripped at high speed
by this echoed signal.
Once the forward overreaching element or reverse looking element have operated, transmission of
the echo signal is inhibited for 250 ms by delayed drop-off timer T1 even after they have reset.
In order to prevent any spurious echo signal from looping round between the terminals in a healthy
state, the echo signal is restricted to last for 200 ms by delayed pickup timer T2.
⎯ 53 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The echo function can be disabled by the scheme switch [ECHO] and the PLC signal
ECHO_BLOCK.
The setting element necessary for the echo function and its setting range is as follows:

TECCB 0.00 – 200.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s Echo enable timer
ECH T2
t 0
& 619:C/R_DISECHO
R1-CR 0 t 200ms ECH
&
1
50ms
T1
Z4 0 t
≥1
"Z2" &
Z2 250ms ≥1
[ZONESEL]
Z3
"Z3"
CB-OR
TECCB
t 0
1
&
0.00 - 200.00s
[ECHO]
(+)
"ON"
1840 ECHO_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.3.5 Echo Logic
Figure 2.4.3.6 shows the scheme logic of the weak infeed trip function. Weak infeed tripping is
executed on condition that a trip permission signal has been received (R1-CR=1) for the POP, and
reception of a trip block signal has stopped (R1-CR=0) for the UOP, the undervoltage element
UVL (UVLS or UVLG) operates and neither forward overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 nor reverse
looking Z4 operates.
WIT
R1-CR
213:WI_TRIP
1 & WIT
Z4 0 t
≥1
"Z2"
Z2 250ms &
[ZONESEL]
Z3
"Z3"
CB-OR
UVL
[WKIT]
(+)
"ON"
1841 WKIT_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.3.6 Weak Infeed Trip Logic
The undervoltage element responds to three phase-to-phase voltages and three phase-to-ground
voltages. The undervoltage element prevents false weak infeed tripping due to spurious operation
of the channel.
Single-phase tripping or three-phase tripping is also applicable to weak infeed tripping according
⎯ 54 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
to the reclosing mode of the autoreclose function.

The weak infeed trip function can be disabled by the scheme switch [WKIT] and the PLC signal
WKIT_BLOCK.
2.4.3.6 Measure for Current Reversal

In response to faults on parallel lines, sequential opening of the circuit breaker may cause a fault
current reversal on healthy lines. This phenomenon may cause false operation of the POP, UOP
and BOP schemes in the worst case. To prevent this, the POP, UOP and BOP are provided with
current reversal logic.
With the parallel line arrangement as shown in Figure 2.4.3.7 (a), suppose that a fault occurs at
time t1 at point F of line L1, A1 trips at time t2 first and then B1 trips at time t3. The direction of
the current that flows in healthy line L2 can be reversed at time t2. That is, the current flows from
terminal B to terminal A as indicated by a solid line in the period from time t1 to t2, and from
terminal A to terminal B as indicated by a broken line in the period from time t2 to t3. This current
reversal phenomenon may occur with the presence of an external looped circuit if not for parallel
lines.
Figure 2.4.3.7 (b) shows a sequence diagram of Z3 and Z4 and the current reversal logic CRL on
healthy line L2 before and after the occurrence of a current reversal. When the current is reversed,
Z3 operation and Z4 reset are seen at terminal A, while reset of Z3 and operation of Z4 are seen at
terminal B. If at this time, Z3 of A2 operates before Z3 of B2 is reset, this may cause false
operation of the POP, UOP and BOP on line L2.
A1 F L1 B1
A B
A2 B2
L2
(a) Direction of fault current

: Before A1 opened
: After A1 opened
t1 t2 t3
Z3
A2 Z4
CRL
TREBK setting
Z3
B2 Z4
CRL
TREBK setting
(b) Sequence diagram
Figure 2.4.3.7 Current Reversal Phenomenon
Figure 2.4.3.8 shows the current reversal logic. The current reversal logic is picked up on
condition that reverse looking Z4 has operated and forward overreaching zone 2 or zone 3 have
not operated, and the output CRL immediately controls the send signal to a trip block signal and at
the same time blocks local tripping. If the condition above continues longer than 20ms, the output
⎯ 55 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
CRL will last for the TREBK setting even after the condition above ceases to exist.
TREBK
"Z2" t 0 0 t
Z2
[ZONESEL]
20ms 0.01 – 10.00s ≥1
Z3 214:REV_BLK
"Z3" & CRL
Z4
Figure 2.4.3.8 Current Reversal Logic
The operation of the current reversal logic and its effect in the event of a fault shown in Figure
2.4.3.7 (a) are as follows. As shown in Figure 2.4.3.7 (b), the current reversal logic of terminal A2
operates (CRL = 1) immediately after the fault occurs. This operation lasts for TREBK setting
even after the current is reversed and Z3 operates, continuously blocking the local tripping and
transmitting a trip block signal to the terminal B2.
Even if overlap arises due to current reversal on the operation of Z3 at terminal A2 and terminal
B2, it will disappear while the current reversal logic is operating, thus avoiding false tripping of
the healthy line of parallel lines. When a current reversal occurs in the direction opposite to the
above, the current reversal logic at terminal B2 will respond similarly.
Current reversal logic is not picked up for internal faults, thus not obstructing high-speed
operation of any protection scheme.
2.4.3.7 Phase Selection Logic

Every command protection has phase selection logic for single-phase tripping. Figure 2.4.3.9
gives details of the phase selection logic displayed in blocks in Figures 2.4.3.1 to 2.4.3.4.
Tripping command signal TRIP of each command protection can be classified by the phase
selection logic as a single-phase tripping command or a three-phase tripping command. If the
distance measuring element for earth fault Z3G (or Z2G depending on the setting of the scheme
switch [ZONESEL]) is operating when a TRIP is input, a single-phase tripping command S-TRIP
is output to the phase in which the phase selection element UVC is operating. If the UVC is
operating with two or more phases, a three-phase tripping command M-TRIP is output.
The undervoltage detection element UVLS, not shown in Figure 2.4.3.9, is used for the phase
selection logic as phase fault detector. The UVLS is also used for fault location.
If the distance measuring element for phase fault Z3S (or Z2S) is operating when a TRIP is input,
a three-phase tripping command M-TRIP is output.
⎯ 56 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
66
UVC - A
& A
UVC - B 67
& B S - TRIP
UVC - C 68
& C
28
Z3G - A
29 &
Z3G - B ≥1
30 & & ≥1
Z3G - C
&
TRIP
Z3S - AB 43 ≥1 M - TRIP
44 &
Z3S - BC ≥1
45
Z3S - CA
Figure 2.4.3.9 Phase Selection Logic for Command Protection
2.4.3.8 Interface with Signaling Equipment

GRZ100 interfaces with protection signaling equipment through binary input and output circuits
as shown in Figure 2.4.3.10.
Receiving command signals for remote terminal from the signaling equipment are input to
photo-coupler circuits BIn and BIm. A guard signal in frequency shift signaling or an alternative
trip signal is input to BIm. BIn and BIm output signals R1-CH1 and R1-CH2 through logic level
inversion (NOT logic) circuit by PLC function (refer to Section 3.2.3).
A sending command signal CS to the signaling equipment should be output to the auxiliary relay
BO13 through a logic level inversion circuit (Logic level inversion of CS can be performed by
BOSW switch or also by PLC function.). BO13 has one normally open contact.
In the BOP scheme, a signal channel automatic test function is available. Sending test signal SBT
can be assigned to any of the user configurable output relays BOn through a logic level inversion
circuit by PLC function. BOn has one normally close contact.
Note: In setting the signal SBT, the 0.2s delayed drop-off timer in the logic level inversion
circuit must be disabled by setting the scheme switch [BOTDn] to "OFF".
S-DEF2 or S-DEFBOP2 is a sending command signal used for DEF command protection and
assigned to any of the user configurable output relays BOn. (See Section 2.4.4.1.)
⎯ 57 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signaling Equipment
Signal (+)
Receiving
Trip
Logic Level R1-CH1
BIn
Guard Inversion
or Trip
Logic Level R1-CH2
Signal BIm
Inversion
Sending
(-)
Logic Level
CS BO13 Trip
Inversion (*)
Logic Level
SBT BO9 Test
Inversion (*)
S-DEF2 Logic Level

BOn Trip
(or S-DEFBOP2) Inversion (*)
(*): By PLC function.
Figure 2.4.3.10 Interface with Signaling Equipment
2.4.3.9 Signaling Channel

Table 2.4.3.1 shows the protection scheme and required signaling channel. "Simplex" here means
that a transmit signal is shared by all terminals. "Multiplex" means that a specific channel is used
for each terminal.
Table 2.4.3.1 Protection Scheme and Signaling Channel

Scheme Simplex Multiplex
PUP × ×
POP ×
UOP × ×
BOP × ×
Since the PUP transmits a trip permission signal through operation of the underreaching element,
it is not necessary to distinguish a transmit signal from a receive signal and a simplex channel
suffices. Of course, a multiplex channel can also be applied.
Since the POP transmits a trip permission signal through operation of the overreaching element, it
is necessary to distinguish a transmit signal from a receive signal to prevent false operation in case
of a fault in the overreaching zone. Therefore, a multiplex channel is necessary.
Since the UOP and BOP transmit a trip block signal, a simplex channel suffices. A multiplex
channel can also be applied.
The signal received from the protection signaling equipment is generally a single one, while with
frequency shift signaling, two signals, a trip signal and a guard signal, are received. The GRZ100
is equipped with signal receive logic shown in Figure 2.4.3.11 to respond to either case. In the case
of a single signal, a signal from the signaling equipment is input to R1-CH1 and the scheme switch
[CHSEL] is set to "Single". In the case of two signals, a trip signal is input to R1-CH1, a guard
signal or an alternative trip signal is input to R1-CH2 and the [CHSEL] is set to "Guard". Signal
R1-CR selected by this scheme switch is used as a receive signal in command protection.
When two signals are utilized, the signal receive logic outputs signal R1-CR only when receiving
a trip signal only or no trip signal nor guard signal is received for more than 20 ms. However, the
output by the latter lasts only for 100 ms. When the latter continues for more than 100 ms, a
telecommunication circuits failure alarm signal R1-CF is output.
⎯ 58 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
"Single"
"And" [CHSEL]
& R1-CR
R1-CH1 "Guard"
&
≥1 &
R1-CH2 t 0 t 0 0 t R1-CF
&
"Guard"
20ms 100ms 150ms
+
"CH1" & ≥1 R1-CR-DEF
[CH-DEF]
-
"CH2" &
&
"(PUP+DEF)"
+
[SCHEME]
-
"(POP+DEF)", "(UOP+DEF)", "(BOP+DEF)"
Figure 2.4.3.11 Signal Receive Logic
Selecting "And" for the scheme switch [CHSEL] in two signals reception will allow ANDing of
two signals to be set as signal R1-CR.
When directional earth fault command protection (see Section 2.4.4.1) is used with POP, UOP or
BOP scheme of distance protection and two channels are available, signal channel can be
separated from distance protection by setting the scheme switch [CHSEL] to "Single" and
[CH-DEF] to “CH2”. In this case, signals CH1 and CH2 are used for distance protection and
directional earth protection respectively. If the scheme switch [CH-DEF] is set to “CH1”, signal
CH1 is shared by the both protections.
When directional earth fault command protection is used with PUP scheme, signal channel is
separated irrespective of [CH-DEF] setting.
In three-terminal application, the signal receive logic for remote 2 is same as that of remote 1
shown in Figure 2.4.3.11.
Following table shows the scheme switch settings and usable signals:
Scheme CHSEL setting CH-DEF setting Use of signal

CH1 CH2
PUP+DEF Single CH1 PUP DEF
CH2 PUP DEF
POP+DEF Single CH1 POP and DEF (*) --
CH2 POP DEF
UOP+DEF Single CH1 UOP and DEF (*) --
CH2 UOP DEF
BOP+DEF Single CH1 BOP and DEF (*) --
CH2 BOP DEF
(*) CH1 is shared by the distance and directional earth fault command protections.
Setting
CHSEL Single/Guard/And Single Signal receiving
CH-DEF CH1/CH2 CH1 Channel separation
⎯ 59 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.4 Directional Earth Fault Protection
For a high-resistance earth fault for which the impedance measuring elements cannot operate, the
GRZ100 uses a directional earth fault element (DEF) to provide the following protections.
• Directional earth fault command protection
• Directional inverse or definite time earth fault protection
Figure 2.4.4.1 shows the scheme logic for the directional earth fault protection. The four kinds of
protection above can be enabled or disabled by the scheme switches [SCHEME], [CRSCM],
[DEFFEN] and [DEFREN]. The DEF and EF protections issue an alarm individually for the
backup trip for earth fault. The DEF protection can be blocked by the binary input signal (PLC
signal) DEF_BLOCK.
CB-DISCR [SCHEME]
(from Figure 3.2.1.2.) &
Command S-TRIP
[CRSCM]
+ & Protection M-TRIP
"ON"
1629 DEF_BLOCK
1849 DEFF_BLOCK
[DEFFEN] TDEF
& [DEFBTAL]
59 t 0 186
DEFF DEF_ALARM
& "ON" ≥1 "ON"
NON VTF 0.00 - 10.00s
1705 DEF_INST_TP &

DEF_TRIP
TDER 677
1851 DEFR_BLOCK [DEFREN]
& t 0 763 194
≥1 BU TRIP
DEFR
58 & "ON" ≥1 DEFR_
(M-TRIP)
0.00 - 10.00s TRIP
&
1707 DEFR_INST_TP
EFI_TRIP
184
& ≥1
1628 EFI_BLOCK " F"
&
61 &
EFI [DEFI] "R"
"NOD"
Figure 2.4.4.1 Directional Earth Fault Protection
The directional earth fault command protection provides the POP, UOP and BOP schemes using
forward looking DEFF and reverse looking DEFR elements. All schemes execute three-phase
tripping and autoreclose.
The command protection is disabled during a single-phase autoreclosing period (CB-DISCR=1).
The directional earth fault protection as backup protection is described in Section 2.4.4.2.
The directional earth fault element DEF provides selective protection against a high-resistance
earth fault. The direction of earth fault is determined by the lagging angle (θ) of the residual
current (3l0) with respect to the residual voltage (−3V0). The residual voltage and residual current
are derived from the vector summation of the three-phase voltages and three-phase currents inside
the relay.
The phase angle θ in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the zero-sequence
impedance of the system and in the directly-earthed system this value ranges approximately from
50° to 90°. θ of the DEF can be set from 0° to 90°. The minimum voltage necessary to maintain
directionality can be set from 1.7 to 21.0 V.
⎯ 60 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.4.1 Directional Earth Fault Command Protection

High-speed directional earth fault command protection is provided using the forward looking
directional earth fault element DEFF and reverse looking directional earth fault element DEFR.
The signaling channel of DEF command protection can be shared with or separated from distance
protection by the scheme switch [CH-DEF].
The DEF command protections are applied in combination with the distance command protection
POP, UOP, BOP and PUP and enabled when the scheme switch [SCHEME] is set to "POP+DEF",
"UOP+DEF", "BOP+DEF" or "PUP+DEF". These protections are called as the DEF POP, DEF
UOP, DEF BOP and DEF PUP hereafter. The POP, UOP or BOP schemes can be selected as a
common scheme. However, in the DEF PUP, distance protection takes the PUP scheme but DEF
command protection takes the POP scheme and signaling channels of distance and DEF command
protections are always separated (CH1: distance, CH2: DEF, see Section 2.4.3.9.).
The DEF command protection can select fast tripping or delayed tripping by a timer setting.
Delayed tripping is used when it is desired to give priority to distance protection.
The DEF command protection is blocked during a single-phase autoreclose period by the distance
protection (CB-DISCR=1). The signal CB-DISCR is generated with the binary input signals (PLC
signals) of circuit breaker auxiliary contact (refer to Section 3.2.1).
DEFF TDEFF
& t 0 215
DEFFCR
NON VTF
CB-DISCR [SCHEME]
DEFR TDEFR
t 0 216
& DEFRCR
"POP+DEF"
"UOP+DEF" 0 – 300ms
"BOP+DEF"
"PUP+DEF"
Figure 2.4.4.2 DEF Command Protection
DEF POP, DEF UOP and DEF PUP scheme logic

Figure 2.4.4.3 shows the scheme logic of the DEF POP and DEF UOP.
TREBK
t 0 0 t
TDEFR
t 0 20ms 0.01 – 10.00s ≥1
DEFR
&
≥1 CS
TDEFF & (POP)
DEFF t 0
TSBCT 1 CS
0 - 300ms
TCHD 0 t (UOP)
0 t
&
0-50ms ≥1 0.00 – 1.00s
& S-TRIP
& M-TRIP
1842 PSCM_TCHDEN
R1-CR-DEF
(POP) CS (Carrier send) signal
Signal No. Signal name
R1-CR-DEF 1 225: EXT_CAR-S for Distance and DEF command protection (CH1)
(UOP) 338: EXT_DEFCAR-S for DEF command protection (CH2)
R1-CR-DEF: Trip permission signal from the remote terminal.
Signal No. Signal name Description
1568: EXT_CAR.R1-1 Trip carrier signal from remote terminal
1569: EXT_CAR.R1-2 Guard/And carrier signal from remote terminal
Figure 2.4.4.3 DEF POP and DEF UOP Scheme Logic
⎯ 61 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
When the PUP+DEF scheme logic is selected, the DEF scheme logic is constructed same as the
DEF POP scheme logic in Figure 2.4.4.3.
The signal transmitted is a trip permission signal for the POP and a trip block signal for the UOP.
In the event of an internal fault, the POP transmits a signal, while the UOP stops transmission. In
Figure 2.4.4.3, a signal is transmitted when CS becomes 1, and when the signal is received
CR-DEF becomes 1. If the PLC signal PSCM_TCHDEN is established, the delayed pick-up timer
TCHD is provided.
When the DEFF operates, CS becomes 1 for the POP and a signal (that is, a trip permission signal)
is transmitted. For the UOP, CS becomes 0 and transmission of the signal (that is, a trip block
signal) is stopped.
When a signal is received in the POP, or no signal is received in the UOP, tripping is executed on
condition that the DEFF has operated. In order to assure tripping of the remote terminal,
transmission of a trip permission signal or stoppage of a trip block signal continues for the TSBCT
setting time even after the DEFF reset.
The DEFR is used for the current reversal logic in the same manner as reverse looking Z4 in the
distance protection (for the current reversal, refer to Section 2.4.3.6).
When operation of the DEFR and no-operation of the DEFF continue for 20 ms or more, even if
the DEFF operates or the DEFR is reset later, tripping of the local terminal or transmission of the
trip permission signal is blocked for the TREBK setting time.
The POP or UOP can be set for instantaneous operation or delayed operation by setting on-delay
timer TDEFF and TDEFR.
The DEF command protection is provided with an echo function and weak infeed trip function.
Both functions are used for lines with weak infeed terminals.
The echo function allows fast tripping of the terminal on which the DEFF has operated when
applied to a line with an open terminal or a weak infeed earth fault current terminal. The scheme
logic is shown in Figure 2.4.4.4.
With the POP, when a trip permission signal is received (R1-CR-DEF = 1) if neither the forward
looking DEFF nor the reverse looking DEFR operates, the echo function sends back the received
signal to the remote terminal. With the UOP, when reception of a blocking signal is stopped
(R1-CR-DEF = 0), if the DEFF and DEFR do not operate, the echo function stops transmission of
the blocking signal likewise. When the circuit breaker is open, the echo function also sends back
the trip permission signal or stops transmission of the blocking signal.
Once the DEFF or the DEFR operates, transmission of the echo signal is inhibited for 250 ms by
delayed drop-off timer T1 even after they are reset.
In order to prevent any spurious echo signal from looping round between terminals in a healthy
state, the echo signal is restricted to last 200 ms by delayed pick-up timer T2.
The echo function can be disabled by the scheme switch [ECHO] and the PLC signal
ECHO_BLOCK.
When a signaling channel is shared by the distance protection and DEF protection, it is necessary
to unite the scheme logic of both echo functions so that the echo function may not be picked up in
the event of an external fault. The echo function at this time is blocked by Z2 (or Z3) and Z4
indicated by a dotted line in Figure 2.4.4.4.
⎯ 62 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
R1-CR-DEF(POP)
& ≥1 & 0 t
R1-CR-DEF(UOP) 1 CS
T1 T2 & (POP)
DEFFCR 0 t 50ms t 0
DEFRY &
≥1 250ms ECHO1_DEF-R1 200ms
1 CS
Z4
(UOP)
&
"Z2" [ECHO]
Z2 CS (Carrier send) signal
[ZONESEL] (+)
"ON" Signal No. Signal name
Z3 CB-OR 225: EXT_CAR-S for Distance and DEF command
"Z3" TECCB protection (CH1)
t 0 338: EXT_DEFCAR－S for DEF command
1
protection (CH2)
0.00 - 200.00s R1-CR-DEF: Trip permission signal from the remote terminal.
Signal No. Signal name Description
1840 ECHO_BLOCK 1 1568: EXT_CAR.R1-1 Trip carrier signal from
remote terminal
1569: EXT_CAR.R1-2 Guard/And carrier signal
from remote terminal
Figure 2.4.4.4 Echo Function in DEF POP and DEF UOP Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.4.5 shows the scheme logic of the weak infeed trip function. Weak infeed tripping is
executed on condition that a trip permission signal has been received (ECHO1_DEF-R1=1) for
the POP, the undervoltage element UVL (UVLS or UVLG) operates.
The undervoltage element responds to three phase-to-phase voltages and three phase-to-ground
voltages. The undervoltage element prevents false weak infeed tripping due to spurious operation
of the channel.
Single-phase tripping or three-phase tripping is also applicable to weak infeed tripping according
to the reclosing mode of the autoreclose function.
The weak infeed trip function can be disabled by the scheme switch [WKIT] and the PLC signal
WKIT_BLOCK.
ECHO1_DEF-R1 778, 779, 780
& DEFWI_TRIP
UVL
[WKIT] &
(+)
"ON"
1841 WKIT_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.4.5 Weak Infeed Trip Logic
When the signaling channel of DEF POP or DEF UOP is separated from that of distance command
protection, the signal S-DEF2 is used for CS and assigned to a user configurable binary output
relay (see Section 3.2.2.).
DEF BOP scheme logic

Figure 2.4.4.6 shows the scheme logic of the DEF BOP.
TREBK
TDEFR t 0 0 t
DEFR
t 0 ≥1 & CS
20ms 0.01 – 10.00s
&
TDEFF
TSBCT
t 0 0 t
DEFF TCHD
0 - 300ms t 0
0.00 – 1.00s
0 - 50ms &
& M-TRIP
R1-CR-DEF 1
Figure 2.4.4.6 DEF BOP Scheme Logic
⎯ 63 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
With the BOP, the signal transmitted is a trip block signal. When the reverse looking DEFR
operates, the logic level of the transmit signal CS becomes 1 and a trip block signal is transmitted.
When the trip block signal is received, R1-CR-DEF becomes 1.
When the forward looking DEFF operates, it executes tripping on condition that no trip blocking
signal should be received.
The delayed pick-up timer TCHD is provided to allow for the transmission delay of the trip block
signal from the remote terminal. Therefore, the time is set depending on the channel delay time.
TCHD setting = maximum signal transmission delay time(*) + 5ms
(*) includes delay time of binary output and binary input for the blocking signal.
The DEFR is also used for the current reversal logic (for current reversal, see Section 2.4.3.6).
When operation of the DEFR and non-operation of the DEFF last for 20 ms or more, even if the
DEFF operates or the DEFR is reset later, tripping of the local terminal is blocked for the TREBK
setting time and transmission of the trip block signal continues for the TSBCT setting time.
When the signaling channel of DEF BOP is separated from that of distance command protection,
the signal S-DEFBOP2 is used for CS and assigned to a user configurable binary output relay (see
Section 3.2.2.).
Setting
The following setting is required for the DEF command protection:
DEFF Forward looking DEF
DEFFI 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual current
(0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.2 A) (*)
DEFFV 1.7 – 21.0 V 0.1 V 2.0 V Residual voltage
TDEFF 0.00 - 0.30 s 0.01 s 0.15 s Delayed tripping
DEFR Reverse looking DEF
DEFRI 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual current
(0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.20 A)
DEFRV 1.7 – 21.0 V 0.1 V 2.0 V Residual voltage
TDEFR 0.00 - 0.30 s 0.01 s 0.15 s Delayed tripping
DEF θ 0 - 90° 1° 85° Characteristic angle
PROTECTION 3ZONE/Z1EXT/PUP/POP/UOP/ BOP/ POP Scheme selection
SCHEME POP+DEF/UOP+DEF/ BOP+DEF/PUP+DEF
CHSEL Single/Guard/And Single
CH-DEF CH1/CH2 CH1
BODEFSW Active / Inactive Active BO for DEF: active or inactive
When the DEFF at the remote end operates, the local DEFR must always operate for reverse faults.
The setting levels of the residual current and residual voltage for the DEFR must be lower than that
for the DEFF.
The following setting elements are used in common with the distance protection or its setting is
interlinked with other elements listed above. So no setting operation is required here.
TCHD 0-50 ms 1 ms 12 ms Used in common with BOP
TREBK 0.00 - 10.00s 0.01s 0.10s
TSBCT 0.00 - 1.00s 0.01s 0.10s
ECHO OFF/ON OFF Used in common with BOP
⎯ 64 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.4.2 Directional Earth Fault Protection

The scheme logic is shown in Figure 2.4.4.1.
The directional inverse or definite time earth fault protection as backup protection executes
three-phase final tripping. The forward looking DEFF or reverse looking DEFR can be selected.
The directional inverse and definite time earth fault protections are available to trip
instantaneously by binary input DEF∗_INST-TRIP except for [DEF∗EN]= “OFF” setting.
In order to give priority to the distance protection, the directional earth fault protection enables
inverse time or definite time delayed tripping by the scheme switch [DEF∗EN].
Setting
The settings necessary for the directional earth fault protection are as follows:
DEFF Forward looking DEF
DEFFI 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual current
(0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.2 A) (*)
DEFFV 1.7 – 21.0 V 0.1 V 2.0 V Residual voltage
TDEF 0.00 - 0.30 s 0.01 s 2.0 s Definite time setting
DEFR Reverse looking DEF
DEFRI 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual current
(0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.2 A) (*)
DEFRV 1.7 – 21.0 V 0.1 V 2.0 V Residual voltage
TDER 0.00 - 0.30 s 0.01 s 2.0 s Definite time setting
DEF θ 0 - 90° 1° 85° Characteristic angle
DEFFEN OFF/ON OFF Forward DEF backup trip enable
DEFREN OFF/ON OFF Reverse DEF backup trip enable
DEFI OFF/NOD/F/R OFF EFI directional control
DEFBTAL OFF/ON ON DEF backup trip alarm
The DEF element is shared with the command protection.
2.4.5 Overcurrent Backup Protection
Inverse time and definite time overcurrent protections are provided for phase faults and earth
faults respectively.
Scheme logic
The scheme logic of the overcurrent backup protection is shown in Figure 2.4.5.1. The phase
overcurrent protection issues single-phase tripping signals in the operation of OC and OCI, and
can issue a three-phase tripping signal BU-TRIP by PLC signals OC_3PTP and OCI_3PTP. The
default of the phase overcurrent backup protection is a three-phase tripping since both of the PLC
signals OC_3PTP and OCI_3PTP are assigned to “1(=logic level)” (Signal No. =1). The earth
fault protection issues a three-phase tripping signal BU-TRIP in the operation of EF or EFI
element.
The overcurrent backup protection can provide a fail-safe function by assigning the PLC signals
OC-∗_FS and OCI-∗_FS to an output of relay element, etc. The PLC signals OC-∗_FS and
OCI-∗_FS are assigned to “1” (Signal No. =1) as default.
Tripping by each element can be disabled by the scheme switches [OCBT], [OCIBT], [EFBT] and
⎯ 65 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
[EFIBT], and also can be disabled by the binary input signals (PLC signals) OC_BLOCK,
OCI_BLOCK, EF_BLOCK and EFI_BLOCK. The EF element issues an alarm for the backup trip
for earth fault. The alarm can be disabled by the scheme switch [EFBTAL]. The OC and EF
protections can trip instantaneously by PLC signals OC_INST_TP and EF_INST_TP.
TOC S-TRIP
94 t 0 613 OC-A TRIP
OC-A ≥1 OC-A TP
95 & ≥1
OC-B t 0 614 OC-B TRIP
96 ≥1 OC-B TP
OC-C & ≥1
t 0 615 OC-C TRIP
≥1 OC-C TP
& ≥1
1608 OC-A_FS 0.00 – 10.00s 326 OC_TRIP
1609 OC-B_FS ≥1
& &
1610 OC-C_FS
[OCBT] & 1716 OC_3PTP
+
"ON" &
1625 OC_BLOCK 1
1703 OC_INST_TP
S-TRIP
97 616 OCI-A TRIP
OCI-A OCI-A TP
98 & ≥1
OCI-B 617 OCI-B TRIP
99 OCI-B TP
OCI-C & ≥1
618 OCI-C TRIP
OCI-C TP
& ≥1
1612 OCI-A_FS 327
OCI_TRIP
1613 OCI-B_FS ≥1
&
1614 OCI-C_FS
1717 OCI_3PTP
[OCIBT]
+ ≥1 194
"ON" BU-TRIP
1626 OCI_BLOCK 1 (M-TRIP)
TEF
60 t 0 678 187
EF EF_BU-TRIP
& ≥1 EF_TRIP ≥1
[EFBT]
+ 0.00 – 10.00s
"ON"
[EFBTAL] &
& 185
+ EF_ALARM
"ON"
1627 EF_BLOCK 1
1702 EF_INST_TP
61 184
EFI
[DEFI] & EFI_TRIP
+
"NOD"
1628 EFI_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.5.1 Overcurrent Backup Protection
2.4.5.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Backup Protection

In a system in which the fault current is mostly determined by the fault location, without being
greatly affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. Reasonably fast tripping can be obtained
even at a terminal close to the power source by using inverse time characteristics. In the IDMT
overcurrent protection function, one of the following three IEC-standard-compliant inverse time
characteristics and one long time inverse characteristic is available.
⎯ 66 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• standard inverse IEC 60255-3

• very inverse IEC 60255-3
• extremely inverse IEC 60255-3
The IDMT element has a reset feature with definite time reset.
If the reset time is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the
energising current falls below the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.
If the reset time is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Setting
The following table shows the setting elements necessary for the inverse time overcurrent backup
protection and their setting ranges.
OCI 0.5 - 25.0 A 0.1 A 10.0 A
( 0.10 - 5.00 A 0.01 A 2.00 A) (*)
TOCI 0.05 - 1.00 0.01 0.50 OCI time setting
TOCIR 0.0 – 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OCI definite time reset delay
[MOCI] Long/Std/Very/Ext Std OCI inverse characteristic selection
[OCIBT] ON/OFF ON OCI backup protection
EFI 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A Earth fault EFI setting
( 0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 1.00 A) (*)
TEFI 0.05 - 1.00 0.01 0.50 EFI time setting
TEFIR 0.0 – 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EFI definite time reset delay
[MEFI] Long/Std/Very/Ext Std EFI inverse characteristic selection
[DEFI] OFF/NOD/F/R OFF EFI directional control
The scheme switches [MOCI] and [MEFI] are used to select one of the four inverse time
characteristics. The DEFI is the scheme switch for directional control selection and if NOD is
selected, the inverse time overcurrent protection executes non-directional operation. If F or R is
selected, it executes forward operation or reverse operation in combination with the DEFF or
DEFR. If OFF is selected, the inverse time overcurrent protection is blocked.
Current setting
In Figure 2.4.5.2, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in
the event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when considering also backup protection of a
fault on an adjacent line, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at
remote end F3. For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is
set to the lowest value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting is restricted so as not to operate on false zero-sequence currents caused by an
unbalance in the load current, errors in the current transformer circuits or zero-sequence mutual
coupling of parallel lines.
⎯ 67 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
A B C
F1 F2 F3
Figure 2.4.5.2 Current Settings in Radial System
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to the relays on adjacent lines. Consider
a minimum source impedance when the current flowing in the relay becomes a maximum. In
Figure 2.4.5.2, in the event of a fault at the near end, F2 of the adjacent line, the operating time is
set so that terminal A may operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in
the relays may sometimes be greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time,
time coordination must also be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for
small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a
fault at point F2 in Figure 2.4.5.2.
Tc = T1 + T2 + Tm
where, T1 : circuit breaker clearance time at B
T2 : relay reset time at A
Tm: time margin
When single-phase autoreclose is used, the minimum time of the earth fault overcurrent protection
must be set longer than the time from fault occurrence to reclosing of the circuit breaker. This is to
prevent three-phase final tripping from being executed by the overcurrent protection during a
single-phase autoreclose cycle.
2.4.5.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Backup Protection

In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the
fault, the advantages of the IDMT characteristics are not fully used. In this case, definite time
overcurrent protection is applied. The operating time can be set irrespective of the magnitude of
the fault current.
The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent elements and
delayed pick-up timers started by them.
Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) is required.
The operating time of the overcurrent element at each terminal is constant irrespective of the
magnitude of the fault current and selective protection is implemented by graded settings of the
delayed pick-up timer. As a result, the circuit breaker of the terminal most remote from the power
source is tripped in the shortest time.
When setting the delayed pick-up timers, time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way as
explained in Section 2.4.5.1.
⎯ 68 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the definite time overcurrent backup protection and their
setting ranges are shown below.
OC 0.5 - 100.0 A 0.1 A 6.0 A Phase overcurrent
( 0.1 - 20.0 A 0.1 A 1.2 A) (*)
TOC 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 3.00 s OC delayed tripping
EF 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual overcurrent
( 0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.20 A) (*)
TEF 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 3.00 s EF delayed tripping
[OCBT] OFF/ON ON OC backup protection
[EFBT] OFF/ON ON EF backup protection
[EFBTAL] OFF/ON ON EF backup trip alarm
2.4.6 Thermal Overload Protection
Thermal overload protection is provided with GRZ100 model 100, 200, 300 series.
The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRZ100 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained
overloading. The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal
model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2 ⎛ −t ⎞
θ = ⎜1 − e τ ⎟ × 100% (1)
2
I AOL ⎝ ⎠
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when θ= 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix O for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of the thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for
‘cold’ and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case of the hot curve where prior load current Ip is
zero, catering to the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
⎯ 69 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎡ I2 ⎤
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2 ⎥ (2)
⎣ I − I AOL ⎦
⎡ I2 − I 2 ⎤
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2P ⎥ (3)
⎢⎣ I − I AOL ⎥⎦
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
τ= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.4.6.1 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The
left-hand chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously
un-loaded system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched
onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no Thermal Curves (Hot Curve - 90%

prior load) prior load)
1000 1000
100
100
Operate Time (minutes)
Operate Time (minutes)
10
10
τ 1
1 τ
100
100
50
0.1 50
20
20
0.1 10 10
5 0.01 5
2 2
1
0.01 1
1 10 0.001
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 2.4.6.1 Thermal Curves
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.6.2 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM_ALARM and trip signal THM_TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
⎯ 70 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAL] and [THMT]
respectively or binary input signals THMA_BLOCK and THM_BLOCK.
560
A 690
& THM_ALARM
THM 556
T 691
& THM_TRIP
[THMAL]
+
"ON"
[THMT]
+
"ON"
1615 THMA_BLOCK 1
1631 THM_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.6.2 Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
THM 2.0 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A Thermal overload setting.
(0.40 – 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (1.00 A) (THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)
THMIP 0.0 – 5.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A Previous load current
(0.00 – 1.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.00 A)
TTHM 0.5 - 300.0 min 0.1 min 10.0 min Thermal time constant
THMA 50 – 99 % 1% 80 % Thermal alarm setting. (Percentage of THM setting.)
[THMT] Off / On Off Thermal OL enable
[THMAL] Off / On Off Thermal alarm enable
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal
element, and is only active when testing ([THMRST] = “ON”).
⎯ 71 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.7 Switch-Onto-Fault Protection
In order to quickly remove a fault which may occur when a faulted line or busbar is energized, the
switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection functions for a certain period after the circuit breaker is
closed.
The SOTF protection is performed by a non-directional overcurrent element and distance
measuring elements. The overcurrent protection is effective in detecting close-up three-phase
faults on the line in particular when the voltage transformer is installed on the line side. This is
because the voltage input to the distance measuring elements is absent continuously before and
after the fault, and thus it is difficult for the distance measuring elements to detect the fault.
The distance measuring elements can operate for faults other than close-up three-phase faults. One
of the zone 1 to zone ND elements can be used for the SOTF protection.
Scheme logic
The scheme logic for the SOTF protection is shown in Figure 2.4.7.1. The SOTF protection issues
a three-phase tripping signal M-TRIP for the operation of an overcurrent element OCH or distance
measuring elements Z1 to ZND for 500 ms after the circuit breaker is closed (CB-OR = 1) and/or
for 500ms after the undervoltage dead line detector resets. The method of controlling the SOTF
protection by CB closing and/or by undervoltage dead line detection is selected by scheme switch
[SOTF-DL]. Elements UVFS and UVLG provide undervoltage dead line detection.
Tripping by each element can be disabled by the scheme switches [SOTF-OC] to [SOTF-ZND].
When a VT failure is detected (NON VTF = 0), tripping by the distance measuring elements is
blocked.
72:UVLS-AB
73:UVLS-BC
[SOTF-DL] TSOTF
UVLS 74:UVLS-CA t 0
& "UV",
78:UVLG-A
79:UVLG-B
"Both" 0 - 300s
UVLG 80:UVLG-C
TSOTF
t 0 ≥1 0 t
CB-OR 1 &
"CB",
0 - 300s 0.5s
55: OCH-A "Both"
56: OCH-B [SOTF-OC]
57: OCH-C & 183
OCH SOTF-TRIP
"ON" ≥1
[SOTF-Z1]
Z1
"ON"
[SOTF-Z2]
Z2
"ON" ≥1 &
[SOTF-Z3]
Z3
"ON"
[SOTF-F]
ZF
"ON"
[SOTF-R1] NON VTF
ZR1
"ON"
[SOTF-R2]
ZR2
"ON"
[SOTF-ND]
ZND
"ON"
1623 SOTF_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.7.1 SOTF Scheme Logic
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the SOTF protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
OCH 2.0 - 15.0 A 0.1 A 6.0 A Overcurrent setting
( 0.4 - 3.0 A 0.1 A 1.2 A) (*)
TSOTF 0 – 300 s 1s 5s SOTF check timer
⎯ 72 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

SOTF - OC OFF/ON ON Overcurrent tripping
SOTF - Z1 OFF/ON OFF Zone 1 tripping
SOTF - F OFF/ON OFF Zone F tripping
SOTF - R1 OFF/ON OFF Zone R1 tripping
SOTF - R2 OFF/ON OFF Zone R2 tripping
SOTF - ND OFF/ON OFF Zone ND tripping
SOTF-DL CB/UV/BOTH CB SOTF control
The OCH element and its setting are common with the stub protection.
2.4.8 Stub Protection
In the case of a busbar with a one-and-a-half breaker arrangement, the VT is generally installed on
the line side. If the line is separated from the busbar, the distance protection does not cover to the
"stub" area between the two CTs and line isolator. This is because the line VT cannot supply a
correct voltage for a fault in the "stub" area. For a fault in the stub area under such conditions, fast
overcurrent protection is applied.
Scheme logic
The scheme logic for the stub protection is shown in Figure 2.4.8.1. The stub protection performs
three-phase tripping on the condition that the line disconnector is open (DS_N/O_CONT = 0) and
the overcurrent element has operated (OCH = 1). CB condition (STUB_CB) can be added by
using programmable BI function (PLC function). Tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch
[STUB].
182
1542 DS_N/O_CONT 1 STUB_TRIP
(M-TRIP)
55: OCH-A
56: OCH-B &
57: OCH-C [STUB]
OCH
"ON"
1649 STUB_CB
1622 STUB_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.8.1 Stub Protection Scheme Logic
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the stub protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
OCH 2.0 - 10.0 A 0.1 A 6.0 A Overcurrent setting
(0.4 - 2.0 A 0.1 A 1.2 A) (*)
STUB OFF/ON OFF Stub protection
The OCH element and its setting are common with the SOTF protection.
⎯ 73 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.9 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection
2.4.9.1 Overvoltage Protection

GRZ100 provides four independent overvoltage elements with programmable
dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio for phase-to-phase voltage input and phase voltage input. OVS1 and
OVS2 are used for phase-to-phase voltage input, and OVG1 and OVG2 for phase voltage input.
OVS1 and OVG1 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation.
OVS2 and OVG2 have definite time characteristic only.
The OVS1 and OVG1 overvoltage protection elements have an IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (1):
⎡ ⎤
⎢ 1 ⎥
t = TMS × ⎢ (1)
( )
V
⎥
⎢ Vs − 1 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.4.9.1.

The OVS2 and OVG2 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OVS1 and OVG1 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the
Overvoltage elements OVS1, OVS2, OVG1 and OVG2 have a programmable dropoff/pickup
(DO/PU) ratio.
⎯ 74 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Overvoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)

10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.4.9.1 IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.4.9.2 and 2.4.9.4 show the scheme logic of the OVS1 and OVG1 overvoltage protection
with selective definite time or inverse time characteristic. The definite time protection is selected
by setting [OV∗1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal OV∗1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up
timer TO∗1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [OV∗1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip
signal OV∗1_TRIP is given.
The OVS1 and OVG1 protections can be disabled by the scheme switch [OV∗1EN] or the PLC
signal OV∗1_BLOCK.
These protections are available to trip instantaneously by the PLC signal OV∗1_INST_TP except
for [OV∗1EN]=“OFF” setting.
Figures 2.4.9.3 and 2.4.9.5 show the scheme logic of the OVS2 and OVG2 protection with definite
time characteristic. The OV∗2 gives the PLC signal OV∗2_ALARM through delayed pick-up
timer TO∗2.
The OV∗2_ALARM can be blocked by incorporated scheme switch [OV∗2EN] and the PLC
signal OV∗2_BLOCK.
These protections are also available to alarm instantaneously by the PLC signal OV∗2_INST_TP.
⎯ 75 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
436 TOS1
AB
& & t 0 950
OVS1-AB_TRIP
OVS1 BC 437 ≥1
CA 438 & & t 0 951

OVS1-BC_TRIP
≥1
& t 0 952
& OVS1-CA_TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
[OVS1EN]
"DT" ≥1 & 949
+ ≥1 OVS1_TRIP
"IDMT" ≥1
&
1808 OVS1_INST_TP
1856 OVS1_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.4.9.2 OVS1 Overvoltage Protection
439 TOS2
AB & t 0 954
440 ≥1 OVS2-AB_ALM
OVS2 BC
t 0 955
CA 441 & OVS2-BC_ALM
≥1
[OVS2EN] t 0 956
& OVS2-CA_ALM
+ ≥1
"On" 0.00 - 300.00s
&
953
≥1 OVS2_ALARM
&
1809 OVS2_INST_TP
1857 OVS2_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.4.9.3 OVS2 Overvoltage Protection
442 TOG1
A & & t 0 958
OVG1-A_TRIP
OVG1 B 443 ≥1
t 0 959
C 444 & & OVG1-B_TRIP
≥1
& t 0 960
& OVG1-C_TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
[OVG1EN]
"DT" ≥1 & 957
+ ≥1 OVG1_TRIP
"IDMT" ≥1
&
1812 OVG1_INST_TP
1860 OVG1_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.4.9.4 OVG1 Overvoltage Protection
445 TOG2
A & t 0 962
446 ≥1 OVG2-A_ALM
OVG2 B
t 0 963
C 447 & OVG2-B_ALM
≥1
[OVG2EN] t 0 964
& OVG2-C_ALM
+ ≥1
"On" 0.00 - 300.00s
&
961
≥1 OVG2_ALARM
&
1813 OVG2_INST_TP
1861 OVG2_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.4.9.5 OVG2 Overvoltage Protection
⎯ 76 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
OVS1 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OVS1 threshold setting.
TOS1I 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 10.00 OVS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OVS1EN] = IDMT.
TOS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s OVS1 definite time setting. Required if [OVS1EN] = DT.
TOS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OVS1 definite time delayed reset.
OS1DP 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OVS1 DO/PU ratio setting.
OVS2 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OVS2 threshold setting.
TOS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s OVS2 definite time setting.
OS2DP 10 - 98 % 1% 95 % OVS2 DO/PU ratio setting.
OVG1 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1V 70.0 V OVG1 threshold setting.
TOG1I 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 10.00 OVG1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OVG1EN]=IDMT.
TOG1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s OVG1 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=DT.
TOG1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OVG1 definite time delayed reset.
OG1DP 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OVG1 DO/PU ratio
OVG2 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1V 80.0 V OVG2 threshold setting
TOG2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s OVG2 definite time setting
OG2DP 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OVG2 DO/PU ratio
[OVS1EN] Off / DT / IDMT Off OVS1 Enable
[OVS2EN] Off / On Off OVS2 Enable
[OVG1EN] Off / DT / IDMT Off OVG1 Enable
[OVG2EN] Off / On Off OVG2 Enable
2.4.9.2 Undervoltage Protection

GRZ100 provides four independent undervoltage elements for phase and earth fault protection.
UVS1 and UVS2 are used for phase fault protection, and UVG1 and UVG2 for earth fault
protection. UVS1 and UVG1 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT)
operation. UVS2 and UVG2 have definite time characteristic only.
The UVS1 and UVG1 undervoltage protection elements have an IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (2):
⎡ ⎤
⎢ 1 ⎥
t = TMS × ⎢ (2)
⎣
( )
⎢1 − V Vs
⎥
⎥
⎦
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.4.9.6.
The UVS2 and UVG2 elements are used for definite time undervoltage protection.
⎯ 77 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UVS1 and UVG1 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the
period. If the energising voltage is below the undercurrent setting for a transient period without
causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising
voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has
travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
Undervoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS = 10
10.000
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.4.9.6 IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.4.9.7 and 2.4.9.9 show the scheme logic of the UVS1 and UVG1 undervoltage
protection with selective definite time or inverse time characteristic. The definite time protection
is selected by setting [UV∗1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal UV∗1_TRIP is given through the
delayed pick-up timer TU∗1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [UV∗1EN] to
“IDMT”, and trip signal UV∗1_TRIP is given.
The UVS1 and UVG1 protections can be disabled by the scheme switch [UV∗1EN] or the PLC
signal UV∗1_BLOCK.
These protections are available to trip instantaneously by the PLC signal UV∗1_INST_TP except
for [UV∗1EN]=“OFF” setting.
Figures 2.4.9.8 and 2.4.9.10 show the scheme logic of the UVS2 and UVG2 protection with
⎯ 78 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
definite time characteristic. The UV∗2 gives the PLC signal UV∗2_ALARM through delayed
pick-up timer TU∗2.
The UV∗2_ALARM can be blocked by incorporated scheme switch [UV∗2EN] and the PLC
signal UV∗2_BLOCK.
These protections are also available to alarm instantaneously by the PLC signal UV∗2_INST_TP.
In addition, there is user programmable voltage threshold UVSBLK and UVGBLK. If all three
phase voltages drop below this setting, then both UV∗1 and UV∗2 are prevented from operating.
This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to
“OFF” (not used) when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when
used for load shedding.
Note: The UVSBLK and UVGBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.
454 TUS1
AB & & t 0 966
455 ≥1 UVS -AB TRI
UVS1 BC
456 & & t 0 967
CA UVS -BC TRI
≥1
& t 0 968
UVSBLK & UVS1-CA_TRIP
≥1
& 1 NON
[VBLKEN] 0.00 - 300.00s
U SBL
+
"ON" [UVS1EN] 965
[UVTST] "DT" ≥ 1 & ≥1 UVS1_TRIP
+ "OFF" +
[IDMT]
≥1 &
1816 UVS1_INST_TP
&
1864 UVS1 BLOC 1
Figure 2.4.9.7 UVS1 Undervoltage Protection
457 TUS2
AB & & t 0 970
UVS2-AB_ALM
UVS2 BC
458
≥1
CA 459 & & t 0 971

UVS2-BC_ALM
≥1
[UVS2EN]
+ & & t 0 972
UVS2-CA_ALM
"ON" ≥1
NON UVSBLK 0.00 - 300.00s
969
≥1 UVS2_ALARM
&
&
1817 UVS2_INST_TP
1865 UVS2_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.4.9.8 UVS2 Undervoltage Protection
460 TUG1
A & & t 0 974
461 ≥1 UVG -AB TRI
UVG1 B
462 & & t 0 975
C UVG -BC TRI
≥1
& t 0 976
UVGBLK & UVG -CA TRI
≥1
& 1 NON
[VBLKEN] 0.00 - 300.00s
U GBL
+
"ON" [UVG1EN] 973
[UVTST] "DT" ≥ 1 & ≥1
+ "OFF" + UVG1 TRI
[IDMT]
≥1 &
1820 UVG1_INST_TP
&
1868 UVG1 BLOC 1
_ K
Figure 2.4.9.9 UVG1 Undervoltage Protection
⎯ 79 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
463 TUG2
A & & t 0 978
UVG2-A_ALM
UVG2 B
464
≥1
C 465 & & t 0 979

UVG2-B_ALM
≥1
[UVG2EN]
+ & & t 0 980
UVG2-C_ALM
"ON" ≥1
NON UVGBLK 0.00 - 300.00s
977
≥1 UVG2_ALARM
&
&
1821 UVG2_INST_TP
1869 UVG2_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.4.9.10 UVG2 Undervoltage Protection
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
UVS1 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UVS1 threshold setting
TUS1I 0.05– 100.00 0.01 10.00 UVSI time multiplier setting. Required if [UVS1EN] = IDMT.
TUS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s UVS1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.
TUS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UVS1 definite time delayed reset.
UVS2 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV2 threshold setting.
TUS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s UV2 definite time setting.
VSBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.
UVG1 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1 V 35.0 V UVS1 threshold setting
TUG1I 0.05– 100.00 0.01 10.00 UVSI time multiplier setting. Required if [UVS1EN] = IDMT.
TUG1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s UVS1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.
TUG1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UVS1 definite time delayed reset.
UVG2 5.0 – 150.0 V 0.1 V 25.0 V UV2 threshold setting.
TUG2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s UV2 definite time setting.
VGBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.
[UVS1EN] Off / DT / IDMT Off UVS1 Enable
[UVG1EN] Off / DT / IDMT Off UVG1 Enable
[UVS2EN] Off / On Off UVS2 Enable
[UVG2EN] Off / On Off UVG2 Enable
[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable
⎯ 80 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.10 Broken Conductor Protection
Series faults or open circuit faults which do not accompany any earth faults or phase faults are
caused by broken conductors, breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, or false operation of
single-phase switchgear.
Figure 2.4.10.1 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase
series fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right
side system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 – k1), k2 to (1 – k2) and k0 to (1 – k0).
E1A
Single-phase series fault
E1B
k1 1– k1
k1Z1 I1F I1F (1-k1)Z1
E1A E1B
Positive phase sequence

k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative phase sequence

k0Z0 I0F I0F (1-k0)Z0
Zero phase sequence
I1F k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 I1F

k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A E1B
Figure 2.4.10.1 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault
⎯ 81 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
current I0F at fault location in a single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0 (1)

Z2FI2F − Z0FI0F = 0 (2)
E1A − E1B = Z1FI1F − Z2FI2F (3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z 2 + Z0
I1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A − E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
−Z0
I2F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A − E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
−Z2
I0F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A − E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given with negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
I2F |I2F| Z0
= =
I1F |I1F| Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of BCD element is shown in Figure 2.4.10.2 to obtain the stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1| ≥ BCD
setting & BCD
|I1| ≥ 0.04×In
|I2| ≥ 0.01×In
0.01×In
0 I1
0.04×In In: rated current
Figure 2.4.10.2 BCD Element Characteristic
⎯ 82 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.10.3 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs
trip signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN] or the PLC signal BCD BLOCK.
766 TBCD
BCD t 0 767
& BCD_TRIP
[BCDEN]
0.00 - 300.00s
+
"ON"
1848 BCD_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.10.3 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and
their setting ranges.
BCD 0.10 – 1.00 0.01 0.20 I2 / I1
TBCD 0.00 – 300.00s 0.01s 1.00 s BCD definite time setting
[BCDEN] Off / On Off BCD Enable
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present on the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously
and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of
the last 15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage.
The BCD setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.
⎯ 83 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.11 Breaker Failure Protection
When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by backtripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element provided for each phase.
For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element is used.
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original
breaker. To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original
breaker again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent
breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping
at all, or use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip
command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
Tripping by the BFP is three-phase final tripping and autoreclose is blocked.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
The BFP is performed on an individual phase basis. Figure 2.4.11.1 shows the scheme logic for
one phase. The BFP is started by an initiation signal EXT_CBFIN from the external line
protection or an internal initiation signal CBF_INIT. The external initiation signals
EXT_CBFIN-A, -B, -C are assigned by binary input signals (PLC signals). Starting with an
external initiation signal can be disabled by the scheme switch [BFEXT]. These signals must
continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
TBF1 [BF1]
t 0
&
"T"
196:CBF_RETRIP-A
81:OCBF-A [BF1] 197:CBF_RETRIP-B
82:OCBF-B t 0 198:CBF_RETRIP-C
83:OCBF-C & 692:CBF_RETRIP
OCBF "TOC"
50 - 500ms (Trip original breaker)
CBF INIT-A, -B, -C 693:CBF_TRIP-A
TBF2 [BF2] 694:CBF_TRIP-B
t 0 695:CBF_TRIP-C
1560 EXT_CBFIN-A [BFEXT] ≥1 & 200:CBF_TRIP
"ON"
1561 EXT_CBFIN-B 50 - 500ms (Trip adjacent breakers)
"ON"
1562 EXT_CBFIN-C
1640 CBF_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.11.1 BFP Scheme Logic
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers BF-TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
OCBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBF2 after
initiation. Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with the scheme switch [BF2].
There are two kinds of modes of the retrip signal to the original breaker RETRIP, the mode in
which RETRIP is controlled by the overcurrent element OCBF, and the direct trip mode in which
RETRIP is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the
scheme switch [BF1].
Figure 2.4.11.2 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If
the circuit breaker trips normally, the OCBF is reset before timer TBF1 or TBF2 is picked up and
the BFP is reset.
⎯ 84 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
If the OCBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the
setting time of TBF1. Unless the breaker fails, the OCBF is reset by retrip. TBF2 does not time-out
and the BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and
unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the OCBF continues operating and the TBF2
finally picks up. A trip command BF-TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is
completed.
Fault Start BFP

Adjacent Trip
breakers Closed Open
TRIP
Normal trip Retrip

Original
breakers Closed Open Open
Tcb Tcb
OCBF
Toc Toc
TBF1
TBF1
RETRIP
TBF2
TBF2
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.4.11.2 Sequence Diagram
⎯ 85 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
OCBF 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 4.0 A Overcurrent setting
(0.1 - 2.0 A 0.1 A 0.8 A) (*)
TBF1 50 - 500 ms 1 ms 150 ms Retrip timer
TBF2 50 - 500 ms 1 ms 200 ms Related breaker trip timer
BFEXT OFF/ON OFF External start
BF1 OFF/T/TOC OFF Retrip mode
BF2 OFF/ON OFF Related breaker trip
The overcurrent element OCBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TBF1 and TBF2 are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.4.11.2) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.4.11.2).
The timer setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TBF1 = Breaker opening time + OCBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBF2 = TBF1 + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
OCBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBF2 can be the same as the setting of the TBF1.
⎯ 86 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.12 Out-of-Step Protection
Application
For an out-of-step condition on a power system, power system separation is executed in order to
recover power system stability or prevent the failure from extending to the entire system. Power
system separation by the distance protection with several operating zones is not desirable because
it is not always carried out at the optimal points. For optimal power system separation, the
GRZ100 has an out-of-step tripping (OST) function. The OST function uses independent
impedance measuring elements to discriminate against transient power swings and reliably detects
out-of-steps and operates only when the out-of-step locus crosses the protected line.
Scheme logic
The out-of-step element has three operating areas A, B and C by combining two impedance
measuring elements ZM and ZN as shown in Figure 2.4.12.1.
If an out-of-step occurs, the impedance viewed from the impedance measuring element moves
through the areas A, B and C in the sequence of A → B → C or C → B → A. The out-of-step
tripping logic shown in Figure 2.4.12.2 outputs a three-phase tripping command M-TRIP to the
circuit breaker when the impedance viewed from the impedance measuring element passes
through those areas in the sequence above and enters the third area and it stays in area A and area
C for the time set with the timers TOST1 and TOST2. The tripping command continues for 100
ms. The output signal is blocked when the scheme switch [OST] is set to "OFF" or binary signal
OST_BLOCK is input. The tripping signal of the out-of-step protection can be separated from
other protection tripping signals by the switch [OST]. In this case, the switch [OST] is set to "BO"
and the tripping signal OST-BO is assigned to a desired binary output number (for details, see
Section 4.2.6.9). When the tripping signal of the out-of-step protection is not separated from other
protection tripping signals, the switch [OST] is set to "TRIP".
The tripping logic does not operate for cases other than out-of-steps, for example, a power swing
in which the impedance moves from areas A → B → A or C → B → C or a system fault in which
the impedance passes through area A or C instantaneously.
Out-of-step tripping can be disabled with the scheme switch [OST].
X
OSTXF
ZN C B A ZM
75°
R
−OSTR2 OSTR1
−OSTXB
Figure 2.4.12.1 Out-of-Step Element
⎯ 87 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
OST
84
OST-ZM TOST1
&
1 t 0
≥1
0 t 203
0.01 - 1.0s & OST_TRIP
&
& 100ms (M-TRIP)
337
OST_BO
& &
"TRIP"
[OST]
+ "BO"
85
OST-ZN TOST2
&
1 t 0
≥1
0.01 - 1.0s
&
&
≥1
1630 OST_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.12.2 Out-of-Step Tripping Logic
Setting
The setting elements for the out-of-step protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
OSTXF 1.0 - 50.0Ω 0.1Ω 6.0Ω Forward reactive reach
( 5 - 250Ω 1Ω 30Ω) (*)
OSTXB O.2 - 10.0Ω 0.1Ω 1.0Ω Reverse offset reach
( 1 - 50Ω 1Ω 5Ω)
OSTR1 3.0 - 30.0Ω 0.1Ω 5.1Ω Resistive reach (right)
( 15 - 150Ω 1Ω 25Ω)
OSTR2 1.0 - 10.0Ω 0.1Ω 2.5Ω Resistive reach (left)
( 5 - 50Ω 1Ω 12Ω)
TOST1 0.01 - 1.00 s 0.01 s 0.04 s Out - of - step timer
TOST2 0.01 - 1.00 s 0.01 s 0.04 s Out - of - step timer
OST OFF/TRIP/BO OFF Out - of - step protection
case of 5 A rating.
⎯ 88 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.13 Voltage Transformer Failure Supervision
When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer (VT), the voltage
dependent measuring elements may operate incorrectly. GRZ100 incorporates a VT failure
supervision function (VTFS) as a measure against such incorrect operation. When the VTFS
detects a VT failure, it blocks the following voltage dependent protections instantaneously. In 10
seconds, it displays the VT failure and outputs an alarm.
• Zone 1-3, F, R1, R2 and ND distance protection
• Zone 1 extension protection
• Directional earth fault protection
• Command protection
Resetting of the blocks above and resetting of the display and alarm are automatically performed
when it is confirmed that all three phases are healthy.
A binary input signal to indicate a miniature circuit breaker trip in the VT circuits is also available
for the VTFS.
Scheme logic
Figure 2.4.13.1 shows the scheme logic for the VTFS. VT failures are detected under any one of
the following conditions and then a trip block signal VTF is output.
VTF1: The phase-to-phase undervoltage element UVFS or phase-to-earth undervoltage
element UVFG operates (UVFS = 1 or UVFG =1) when the three phases of the circuit
breaker are closed (CB-AND = 1) and the phase current change detection element
OCD does not operate (OCD = 0).
VTF2: The residual overcurrent element EFL does not operate (EFL = 0), the residual
overvoltage element OVG operates (OVG = 1) and the phase current change detection
element OCD does not operate (OCD = 0).
In order to prevent detection of false VT failures due to unequal pole closing of the circuit breaker,
the VTFS is blocked for 200 ms after line energisation.
The trip block signal VTF is reset 100 milliseconds after the VT failure condition has reset. When
the VTF continues for 10s or more, an alarm signal VTF-ALM is output.
Further, the VT failure is detected when the binary input signal (PLC signal) EXT_VTF is
received.
This function can be enabled or disabled by the scheme switch [VTF1EN] or [VTF2EN] and has a
programmable reset characteristic. When set to “ON”, the latched operation for VTF1 is reset by
reset of UVFS/UVFG element, and that for VTF2 is reset by reset of OVG element. Set to
“OPT-ON” to reset the latched operation when OCD or EFL operates.
The VTFS can be disabled by the PLC signal VTF_BLOCK.
⎯ 89 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
CB-AND t 0 174
142:UVFSOR VTF1_ALARM
UVFS
140:UVFGOR ≥1 10s
UVFG & 0 t
63:OCD-A
64 OCD-B ≥1 VTF1
65:OCD-C 100ms
OCD 1
172
VTF_ALARM
≥1
[VTF1EN]
+
"ON", “OPT-ON”
t 0 175
VTF2_ALARM
1
10s
62 0.2s 0 t
OVG &
≥1 VTF2
568 100ms
EFL 1
[VTF2EN] 173:VTF
≥1 & 1 NON VTF
+
"ON", “OPT-ON”
1642 VTF_BLOCK 1
1541 EXT_VTF
1643 VTF_ONLY_ALM 1
Figure 2.4.13.1 VTFS Logic
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the VTFS and their setting ranges are as follows:
UVFS 50 - 100 V 1V 88 V Phase - to - phase undervoltage
UVFG 10 - 60 V 1V 51 V Phase - to - earth undervoltage
EFL 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual overcurrent
( 0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.20 A) (*)
[VTF1EN] Off/On/OPT-On On VTF1 supervision
[VTF2EN] Off/On/OPT-On On VTF2 supervision
[VTF-Z4] Off / On On Z4 blocked by VTF
The following elements have fixed setting values.

OCD Fixed to 0.5 A Current change detection
(Fixed to 0.1 A)
OVG Fixed to 20 V Residual overvoltage
(*) Current value shown in the parentheses is in the case of 1 A rating. Other current value is in the
case of 5 A rating.
When setting the UVFS, UVFG and EFL, the maximum detection sensitivity of each element
should be set with a margin of 15 to 20% taking account of variations in the system voltage, the
asymmetry of the primary system and CT and VT error.
⎯ 90 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.14 Power Swing Blocking
When a power swing occurs on the power system, the impedance seen by the distance measuring
element moves away from the load impedance area into the operating zone of the distance
measuring element. The operation of the distance measuring element due to the power swing
occurs in many points of interconnected power systems. Therefore, tripping due to the operation
of the distance measuring element during a power swing is generally not allowed. The power
swing blocking function (PSB) of the GRZ100 detects the power swing and blocks tripping by the
distance measuring element. The GRZ100 provides PSBSZ and PSBGZ for phase fault measuring
elements and earth fault measuring elements. Their functions and characteristics are same.
Once the PSB is in operation, tripping of zone 1 to zone 3 of the time-stepped distance protection,
zone 1 extension protection, additional forward zone ZF, backup protection for reverse faults and
command protection using distance measuring elements can be blocked. These tripping blocks can
be disabled by setting the scheme switches.
Tripping of the non-directional zone ZND is not blocked. If a zero-phase current has been
detected, the PSB is inhibited. This allows tripping in the event of an earth fault during a power
swing or high resistance earth fault by which the resistance at the fault point changes gradually.
GRZ100 can provide a high-speed protection for one- and two-phase faults which occur during a
power swing by using negative sequence directional element and any of the command protection
PUP, POP, UOP and BOP.
Three-phase faults during a power swing are eliminated by distance and overcurrent backup
protection.
Scheme logic
A power swing is detected by using two PSB elements PSBIN and PSBOUT. They are composed
of blinder elements and reactance elements as shown in Figure 2.4.14.1. PSBOUT encloses
PSBIN with a settable width of PSBZ.
Figure 2.4.14.2 shows the power swing detection logic. During a power swing, the impedance
viewed from the PSB elements passes through the area between the PSBOUT and PSBIN in a
certain time. In the event of a system fault, the impedance passes through this area
instantaneously. Therefore, a power swing is detected in a time which commences on operation of
the PSBOUT until PSBIN starts to operate, if longer than the set value of delayed pick-up timer
TPSB. If the residual overcurrent element EFL operates, detection of the power swing is inhibited.
The trip block signal PSB generated as a result of the detection of a power swing is reset 500 ms
after the PSBOUT is reset by delayed timer T2.
X
PSBZ
Z3
PSBIN PSBOUT
0 R
PSBZ PSBZ
ZR2
Z4
PSBZ
Figure 2.4.14.1 Power Swing Blocking Element
⎯ 91 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PSBSZ and PSBGZ have same functions and characteristics as shown in Figures 2.4.14.1 and
2.4.14.2, and block tripping of phase and earth fault elements respectively.
49:PSBSOUT-AB
50:PSBSOUT-BC
PSBSOUT 51:PSNSOUT-CA
323:PSBSIN-AB TPSB
324:PSBSIN-BC
325:PSBSIN-CA & t 0 702
PSBSIN S Q PSBS_DET
F/F
568
EFL 0.02 - 0.06s
≥1 R
1605 PSB_BLOCK T2
t 0
176
& ≥1 PSB_DET
≥1
0.5s
565:PSBGOUT-A
566:PSBGOUT-B
PSBGOUT 567:PSNGOUT-C
561:PSBGIN-A TPSB
562:PSBGIN-B
563:PSBGIN-C & t 0 703
PSBGIN S Q PSBG_DET
F/F
0.02 - 0.06s
R
T2
t 0
& ≥1
0.5s
1651 PSB_F.RESET
Figure 2.4.14.2 Power Swing Detection Logic
One- and two-phase faults can be protected with the command protection even during a power
swing.
The PSB can be disabled or reset by the PLC signal PSB_BLOCK or PSB_F.RESET.
Figure 2.4.14.3 shows the scheme logic to control the sending signal of PUP, POP, UOP or BOP.
The scheme logic is valid when the scheme switch [PSB-TP] is set to "ON". CS1 is an original
sending signal for the distance and DEF command protection and CS2 is a controlled sending
signal. When a power swing is continuing (PSB_DET=1) and an internal fault is not detected
(PSB-CS=0), the sending signal of PUP or POP is forced to be 0 (that is, a trip permission signal
sending is blocked), and that of UOP or BOP is forced to be 1 (that is, a trip block signal is
continuously sent).
PSB_DET
"ON" &
+
[PSB-TP]
CS1 225:EXT_CAR-S
& ≥1 CS2
(POP) (PUP)
&
≥1
&
(UOP) (BOP)
PSB-CS
Figure 2.4.14.3 Sending Signal Control
⎯ 92 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
When an internal fault occurs during the power swing and all of the following conditions are
established, C/R SEND-PSB (PSB-CS) becomes 1 and the trip permission signal is sent for the
PUP or POP, and the trip block signal sending is stopped for the UOP or BOP as shown in Figure
2.4.14.4.
• Power swing is continuing (PSB_DET=1).
• Current change detection element operates (OCDP=1).
• Reverse looking negative sequence directional element does not operate (DOCNR=0).
• Forward looking negative sequence directional element operates (DOCNF=1).
• Scheme switch PSB-TP is on.
• Command protection is in service.
When a trip permission signal is received for the PUP or POP (CR=1), or no trip block signal is
received for the UOP or BOP (CR=0) as well as the conditions mentioned above are established
(PSB-CS=1), three-phase tripping signal is output (M-TRIP=1).
Reverse looking DOCNR is used for the current reversal logic (for current reversal logic, see
Section 2.4.3.6) in all the command protections.
[PSB-TP]
+
"ON"
PSB DET
357:OCDP-A
358:OCDP-B
OCDP 359:OCDP-C
0 t 0 t
DOCN-R 361 20ms 100ms ≥1

& & PSB-CS
DOCN-F 360
& M-TRIP
CR-DEF
(POP) (PUP)
CR-DEF 1
(UOP) (BOP)
Figure 2.4.14.4 Scheme Logic to Protect Faults during Power Swing
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the PSB and their setting ranges are as shown in the table
below.
PSBSZ 0.50 - 15.00Ω 0.01Ω 2.00Ω PSBS detection zone
( 2.5 - 75.0Ω 0.1Ω 10.0Ω) (*)
PSBGZ 0.50 - 15.00Ω 0.01Ω 2.00Ω PSBG detection zone
( 2.5 - 75.0Ω 0.1Ω 10.0Ω) (*)
EFL 0.5 - 5.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A Residual overcurrent
( 0.10 - 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.20 A)
TPSB 20 - 60 1 ms 40 ms Power swing timer
OCDP 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1A 4.0 A Current change
( 0.1 – 2.0 A 0.1 A 0.8 A) detection element
⎯ 93 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

DOCNF 4.0 A fixed Forward looking negative
( 0.8A fixed) sequence directional element
6 V fixed
DOCNR 4.0 A fixed Reverse looking negative
( 0.8A fixed) sequence directional element
6 V fixed
PSB-Z1 OFF/ON ON Z1 blocked under power swing
PSB-Z1X OFF/ON ON Z1X blocked under power swing
PSB-Z2 OFF/ON ON Z2 blocked under power swing
PSB-Z3 OFF/ON OFF Z3 blocked under power swing
PSB-CR OFF/ON ON Carrier trip blocked under power swing
PSB-ZF OFF/ON OFF ZF blocked under power swing
PSB-ZR1 OFF/ON OFF ZR1 blocked under power swing
PSB-ZR2 OFF/ON OFF ZR2 blocked under power swing
PSB-TP OFF/ON ON Command protection for faults under power swing
(*) Values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1A rating. Other values are in the case of 5A
rating.
Residual overcurrent element EFL is used in common with the following functions.
• VT failure detection
• Earth fault distance protection
The PSBIN reach is set automatically to coordinate with the Z3 and Z4 settings.
Note: In the case of the quadrilateral characteristic, if the ZF and ZR2 reach is larger than the Z3 and
Z4 respectively, the PSBIN reach depends on the ZF and ZR2 reach. Therefore, the ZF and
ZR2 must be set less than the Z3 and Z4 respectively whether the ZF and ZR2 used or not.
The right side forward and reverse blinders for PSBIN are shared with the right side forward and
reverse blinders of the distance protection characteristic, BFRS/BFRG and BRRS/BRRG
respectively, ensuring that the PSB element coordinates properly with the protection, for both mho
and quadrilateral characteristics.
The positive reactive reach setting is fixed so that the setting makes the reactance element
tangential to the Z3 distance element when the Z3 is mho-based or takes the same value as the Z3
reactive reach setting when the Z3 is quadrilateral-based.
The negative resistive reach takes the same value as that of the positive reach. The negative
reactive reach setting is fixed so that the setting makes the reactance element tangential to the Z4
distance element when the Z4 is mho-based or takes the same value as the Z4 reactive reach setting
when the Z4 is quadrilateral-based.
PSBOUT encloses PSBIN and the margin between the two is determined by the user-settable
power swing detection zone width, PSBSZ and PSBGZ, for phase and earth fault characteristics
respectively.
⎯ 94 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.15 Tripping Output Signals
The single-phase tripping signals drive the high-speed tripping output relays according to the
tripping logic in Figure 2.4.15.1.
Two sets of output relays are provided for each phase and each relay has one normally open
contact.
The tripping output relays reset 60ms(*) after the S-TRIP or M-TRIP signal disappears by clearing
the fault. The tripping circuit must be opened with a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the
trip relay resetting in order to prevent the tripping relay from directly interrupting the circuit
breaker tripping coil current.
(*) Reset time is adjustable by PLC function. Default setting is 60ms.
In the following cases, per-phase-based tripping is converted to three-phase tripping.
• When autoreclose is prohibited by a binary input signal (ARC_BLOCK = 1)
• When the tripping mode selection switch [TPMODE] is set to "3PH"
(This applies to the GRZ100 model 100s which does not have autoreclose.)
• When the autoreclose mode selection switch [ARC-M] is set to "EXT3P"
• PLC command “3P_TRIP” is established.
For the following trips, the logic level of M-TRIPA becomes 1, and single-phase tripping is then
forced to convert to three-phase tripping. For details of M-TRIPA, see Figure 2.6.2.1.
• Tripping while reclaim is in progress.
• Tripping when the reclose mode selection switch [ARC-M] is set to "Disabled" or "TPAR"
The signals TRIP-A, TRIP-B and TRIP-C are used to start the autoreclose.
The signal TRIP is used to initiate the breaker failure protection.
⎯ 95 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
≥1 TRIP
Tripping output
relay
A 623 0 t 240 A-phase
≥1 ≥1 trip
60ms TP-A1
by PLC
624 241 B-phase
S-TRIP B
≥1 ≥1
0 t trip
60ms TP-B1
by PLC
625 242 C-phase
C
≥1 ≥1
0 t trip
60ms TP-C1
by PLC
≥1 243 A-phase
& trip
TP-A2
[TPMODE]
+ ≥1 B-phase (∗)
244
[ARC-M] "3PH" trip
+ ≥1 TP-B2
"EXT3P" C-phase
245
1727 3P_TRIP trip
TP-C2
M-TRIP
TRIP-A
M-TRIPA TRIP-B
(See Figure 2.6.2.1) TRIP-C
CBF_RETRIP-A
CBF_RETRIP-B (∗): Models 204, 205 and 206 are not
CBF_RETRIP-C provided with these contacts.
Figure 2.4.15.1 Tripping Logic
A tripping output relay is user configurable for the adjacent breakers tripping in the breaker failure
protection. For the default setting, see Appendix D.
Setting
The setting element necessary for the tripping output circuit and its setting range is as follows:

TPMODE 1PH/ 3PH 3PH Model 100 series
The switch [TPMODE] is used to combine Model 100 series with external autoreclose equipment.
When the external autorelose is set to the single-phase or single- or three-phase mode, set the
switch to "1PH". GRZ100 outputs a single-phase tripping command in a single-phase fault and
three-phase trip command in multi-phase fault.
When the external autoreclose is set to the three-phase mode, set the switch to "3PH". GRZ100
outputs a three-phase tripping command in single- and multi-phase fault.
If the signal No.1727 “3P_TRIP”assigned by PLC is activated, GRZ100 outputs a three-phase
tripping command without regard to faulted phase.
⎯ 96 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.4.16 Fault Detector
GRZ100 model 400s and 500s are provided with a fault detector (FD) which functions as a check
relay and enhances security, or prevents false tripping due to a single failure in the protection
system.
The FD is an independent module and incorporates the following six fault detection elements. The
FD output signal is an ORing of the elements output signals shown in Figure 2.4.16.1.
• Current change detection element (OCDF)

• Multi-level overcurrent element (OCMF)
• Earth fault overcurrent element (EFF)
• Undervoltage element for earth fault detection (UVGF)
• Undervoltage element for phase fault detection (UVSF)
• Undervoltage change detection element (UVDF)
OCDF
UVDF
≥1 0 t
UVGF FD1
UVSF 0.06s
EFF
0 t
OCMF FD2
& &
≥1
0.06s
&
J2:3-4
+
Figure 2.4.16.1 Fault Detector Logic
The FD output signal drives two sets of high-speed checking output relays. The checking output
relay resets 60ms(*) after the fault detection elements are reset by clearing the fault.
(*) Reset time is adjustable by PLC function. Default setting is 60ms.
The OCDF operates in response to load current if it is a steeply fluctuating one. When the relay is
used for a line with such a load current, the OCDF can be disabled by short-circuiting dedicated
paired pins on the module with a receptacle.
All the FD elements have fixed operating threshold levels. But if the earth fault current due to
unbalance in the network is significant, the EFF can be desensitized in the same way as described
above.
Note: To give high independency to the module, the human machine interface on the front panel or
PC has no access to the FD module except for the user configurable binary output relays
mounted on it.
When it is desirable to disable the OCMF, disable the OCDF or desensitize the EFF, take the
following steps:
• Pull out the FD module. For a description of how the module is removed, refer to Section6.7.3.
• Four pairs of pins J1 and J2 are arranged lengthwise on the front at the top of the module as
shown in Figure 2.4.16.2.
⎯ 97 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Lever
J1
2
1
Four pairs of pins
8
7
J2
1
2
Connector
Front Rear
8
7
plug
Ribbon cable
receptacle
Figure 2.4.16.2 FD Module
• Short-circuit the pins 1-2 (located topmost) for the J1 to disable the OCMF.
Short-circuit the pins 3-4 (located second from the top) for the J1 to disable the OCDF.
• Short-circuit the pins 3-4 for the J2 to energize the output auxiliary relay FD2 only by
the OCMF.
• Short-circuit the pins 5-6 (located second from the bottom) and open-circuit the pins 7-8
(located bottom) to change the EFF operating threshold level to 15% of the rated
current.
Short-circuit pins 7-8 and open-circuit pins 5-6 to change the EFF operating threshold
level to 20% of rated current.
In other cases, the nominal operating threshold level (10% of the rated current) is kept.
Short-circuit both of the pins 5 - 6 and 7 - 8 to disable the EFF.
• The pins 1-2 for the J2 is used to set the rated frequency. It is fixed before shipping.
Caution: Do not change the pins 1-2 for the J2.
Element Setting Pairs of pins for J1 Pairs of pins for J2

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 1-2 3-4
OCMF Enabled Open
Disabled Short
OCDF Enabled Open
Disabled Short
EFF Disabled Short Short
10% of rated current Open Open
15% of rated current Short Open
20% of rated current Open Short
FD 50Hz rating Open
60Hz rating Short
FD2 Normal Open
Only OCMF Short
All the FD elements retain the nominal operating threshold when none of the paired pins are
⎯ 98 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
short-circuited.
Figure 2.4.16.3 shows the tripping output circuit when the FD is in service. The checking output
contact is connected with A- to C-phase tripping output contacts in series. They are connected
outside the relay as shown by the broken line.
Checking output relay
(+)
FD 0 t FD1
60ms
Tripping output relay
0 t TP-A1 A-phase trip
60ms by PLC
Tripping
logic 0 t B-phase trip
TP-B1
60ms by PLC
0 t TP-C1 C-phase trip
60ms by PLC
Figure 2.4.16.3 Tripping Output
Setting
All the fault detection elements have fixed settings as follows:
OCMF L1:0.1In, L2:0.16In, L3:0.26In, L4:0.41In, In: Rated current
L5:0.66In, L6:1.05In, L7:1.68In
OCDF 0.1In
EFF 0.1In, 0.15 In, 0.2 In
UVGF 46V 0.8 × 100V/ 3
UVSF 80V 0.8 × 100V
UVDF 0.93Vr Vr: Pre-fault voltage
⎯ 99 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5 Characteristics of Measuring Elements

2.5.1 Distance Measuring Elements Z1, Z1X, Z2, ZF, Z3, Z4, ZR1, ZR2, ZND and PSB
The GRZ100 provides eight distance measuring zones with mho-based characteristics or
quadrilateral characteristics.
As shown in Figure 2.5.1.1, mho-based zone characteristics are composed of mho element, offset
mho element, impedance element, reactance element, and blinder element for phase fault
protection and earth fault protection.
Z1 (zone 1), Z1X (zone 1 extension), Z2 (zone 2), ZF (zone F) and ZR1 (reverse zone 1) are a
combination of the reactance element, mho element and blinder element.
Z3 (zone 3), ZR2 (reverse zone 2), and Z4 use the mho element and blinder element, but Z4 for
phase faults uses the offset mho element instead of mho element. This makes it possible to detect a
reverse close-up fault at high speed if Z4 for phase faults is used for the command protection.
ZND (non-directional zone) uses the impedance element and blinder element.
The blinder element is normally used to restrict the resistive reach of the mho or offset mho
element if their operating range encroaches upon the load impedance.
can be set independently or set common to forward zones by the scheme switch [BLZONE].
X X
ZNDS ZNDG
Z3S Z3G
BFRG
BFRS
BNDS BNDG
BFLS ZFS ZFG
BFLG
BNDS
Z2S Z2G
BNDG
Z1XS Z1XG
Z1S Z1Sθ1 Z1G Z1Gθ1
75° 75°
Z4Sθ Z1Sθ2 R R
Z4Gθ Z1Gθ2
Z3Sθ
Z3Gθ
ZR1S ZR1G
BRLS BRLG
BRRS BRRG
ZR2S ZR2G
Z4S Z4G
Figure 2.5.1.1 Mho-based Characteristics
As shown in Figure 2.5.1.2, quadrilateral zone characteristics are composed of reactance element,
directional element and blinder element. Z4 for phase faults uses the offset directional element to
ensure a reverse close-up fault detection.
The forward offset reach of reverse zones (ZR1, ZR2) for both mho-based and quadrilateral
characteristics is fixed as 7.5 ohms for 1A rating or 1.5 ohms for 5A rating. However, when they
are used for back-up tripping ([ZR∗BT]= "ON"), the forward offset reach is limited to the zone 1
reach setting, as shown in Figure 2.5.1.3. Z4, on the other hand, is normally used to provide
⎯ 100 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
blocking in the command schemes, and its offset is not limited by the zone 1 reach setting. It is
fixed at 7.5Ω (or 1.5Ω) in order to give reliable, fast blocking for a close-up reverse fault.
X X
ZNDS ZNDG
Z3S Z3G BFRG
BFRS
ZFS ZFG
BFLS BFLG
Z2S Z2G
BNDS BNDG
Z1XS BNDG Z1XG
BNDS Z1Sθ1 Z1Gθ1
Z1S Z1Sθ2 75° Z1G Z1Gθ2 75°
R R
ZBSθ ZBGθ
ZR1S ZR1G
BRLS BRRG BRLG
BRRS
ZR2S ZR2G
Z4S Z4G
ZNDS ZNDG
Figure 2.5.1.2 Quadrilateral Four Zone Characteristics
X
X
Z1S
Z1S
R R
ZR1S/ZR2S
ZR1S/ZR2S
(a) Mho-based characteristic (b) Quadrilateral characteristic
Figure 2.5.1.3 ZR1S and ZR2S Characteristic Offset Reach for Backup Tripping
Zone 1, zone 1X, zone 2 and zone F can trip on condition that zone 3 has operated, in both
characteristics.
The power swing blocking elements (PSBS and PSBG) are a combination of the reactance element
and blinder element as shown in Figure 2.5.1.4. The outer element PSBOUT encloses the inner
element PSBIN with a settable width of PSBZ.
⎯ 101 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PSBZ
Z3
PSBIN PSBOUT
0 R
PSBZ PSBZ
ZR2
Z4
PSBZ
Figure 2.5.1.4 Power Swing Blocking Element
Mho element
The characteristic of the mho element is obtained by comparing the phases between signals S1 and
S2. If the angle between these signals is 90° or more, it means that the fault is within the mho
characteristic, and the mho element will operate.
S1 = V − IZs
S2 = Vp
where,
V = fault voltage
I = fault current
Zs = zone reach setting
Vp = polarizing voltage
Figure 2.5.1.5 is a voltage diagram, which shows that the mho characteristic is obtained by the
phase comparison if V and Vp are in-phase.
The mho characteristic on the impedance plane is obtained by dividing the voltage in Figure
2.5.1.5 by current I.
X
S1 = V − IZs
S2 = Vp
IZs
Figure 2.5.1.5 Mho Element
⎯ 102 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Both the phase fault mho element and earth fault mho element of the GRZ100 employ a dual
polarization (self-polarization plus cross-polarization). Its polarizing voltage Vp is expressed by
the following equations.
For B-to-C-phase phase fault element
Vpbc = 3 (Va − V0) ∠ − 90° + Vbc
For an A-phase earth fault element
Vpa = 3 (Va − V0) + Vbc ∠90°
where,
Va = A-phase voltage
V0 = zero-sequence voltage
Vbc = B-to-C-phase voltage
The dual-polarization improves the directional security when applied to heavily loaded lines or
weak infeed terminals.
The polarizing voltage for the phase fault mho element has a memory action for the close-up
three-phase fault. Va and Vbc mentioned above are the memorized pre-fault voltages. This
memory is retained for two cycles after a fault occurs. The polarizing voltage for the earth fault
mho element has no memory action.
When a three-phase fault occurs within zone 1, the phase fault mho element for zone 1 is modified
to an offset mho characteristic as shown in Figure 2.5.1.6. This, together with voltage memory
action, enables zone 1 to perform tripping with a time delay as well as instantaneous tripping for
the close-up three-phase fault.
The Z1X, Z2, ZF and Z3 do not have the modifying function mentioned above.
X
Figure 2.5.1.6 Offset of Z1 in Three-phase Fault
Offset mho element

Three independent offset mho elements are used for Z1 for phase faults, reverse zone ZR2 and Z4
for phase faults.
The characteristics of each offset mho element are obtained by comparing the phases between
signals S1 and S2.
If the angle between these signals is 90° or more, the offset mho element operates.
S1 = V − IZs
S2 = V + IZso
⎯ 103 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
where,
V = fault voltage
I = fault current
Zs = zone reach setting
Zso = offset zone reach setting
Figure 2.5.1.7 is a voltage diagram showing the offset mho characteristics obtained by the phase
comparison between S1 and S2.
The offset mho characteristic on the impedance plane is obtained by dividing the voltage in Figure
2.5.1.7 by current I.
X
S1 = V − IZs
IZs
−IZso
S2 = V + IZso
Figure 2.5.1.7 Offset Mho Element
Reactance element
The reactance elements of Z1 and Z1X have a composite characteristic with the two straight lines,
one is parallel and the other is gradual descent toward the R-axis as shown in Figure 2.5.1.8.
The characteristic is defined by the reach setting Xs and the angle settings θ1 and θ2. This
composite characteristic is obtained only when the load current is transmitted from local to remote
terminal. When the load current flows from remote to local terminal or the load current does not
flow or θ1 is set to 0°, the reactance element characteristic is a horizontal line which is parallel to
the R-axis.
The characteristic is expressed by the following equations.
For horizontal characteristic
X ≤ Xs
For gradient characteristic
R ≤ Xs tan ( 90° − θ2 ) + ( Xs − X ) tan ( 90° − θ1 )
where,
R = resistance component of measured impedance
X = reactance component of measured impedance
Xs = reach setting
The reactance element characteristic of Z2, ZF and ZR1 is given by a parallel line to the R axis.
R and X are calculated using an integration approximation algorithm. The reactance element
provides high measurement accuracy even in the presence of power system frequency fluctuations
and distorted transient waveforms containing low-frequency spectral components.
⎯ 104 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
A decision to operate is made 6 times in each power frequency cycle using the above-mentioned
equation. The reactance element operates when two consecutive measurements are made if the
distance to a fault is within 90% of the reach setting. If the distance to a fault is more than 90%, the
reactance element operates when four consecutive measurements are made.
This decision method prevents transient overreaching occurring for faults close to the element
boundary.
X X
θ1
90°
θ2
R R
(a) Z1 and Z1X (b) Z2 and ZF
Figure 2.5.1.8 Reactance Element
The setting of θ1(Z1θ1) and θ2(Z1θ2) are set to the following:

Z1θ2 < tan-1( X / RF )
Where,
X = reactance component
RF = fault resistance
Z1θ1 < tan-1{ILmax / (ILmax + IFmin )}

ILmax = maximum load current
IFmin = minimum fault current
Blinder element
The blinder element is commonly applicable to Z1, Z1X, Z2, ZF, Z3, ZR1, ZR2 and Z4. As shown
in Figure 2.5.1.9, the blinder element provides the forward blinder and the reverse blinder. The
operating area of the forward blinder is the zone enclosed by the lines BFR and BFL, and that of
the reverse blinder is the zone enclosed by the lines BRR and BRL. The BFR has an angle θ of 75°
to the R-axis and BFL 90° to 135°. The angle of BRL is linked with that of BFL.
X X
BFL BFR -Rs Rs

R
75° θ
θ
75°
Rs R
R
BRR BRL
(a) Forward blinder (b) Reverse blinder
Figure 2.5.1.9 Blinder element
⎯ 105 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The characteristic of the BFR is obtained by the following equation.

X ≥ (R − Rs) tan 75°
where,
Rs = reach setting
The characteristic BFL is obtained by the following equation. Polarizing voltage employed is the
same as employed for mho element.
Vp I cos ( φ + θ − 90° ) > 0
where,
I = fault current
φ = lagging angle of I to Vp
θ = angle setting
A blinder applicable to the offset mho element for the power swing blocking also has the same
characteristics as BFR.
The characteristics of BRR and BRL are expressed by the following equations.
For BRR
X ≤ (R + Rs) tan 75°
For BRL
X ≤ (R − Rs) tan (180° − θ)
where,
Rs = reach setting
The reach settings of BFR and BRR are made on the R-axis. The BRL setting is interlinked with
the BRR setting.
If the minimum load impedance is known, then assuming a worst case load angle of 30° and a
margin of 80%, then the following equation can be used to calculate the blinder element resistive
settings:
sin30
Rset < 0.8 × ZLmin × (cos30 − tan75 )
⎯ 106 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Directional element
The directional element is used for the quadrilateral four zone characteristics.
Vp
lag
θ I
Figure 2.5.1.10 Directional Element
The characteristic of the directional element is obtained by the following equation.

I･Vp cos ( θ − φ ) ≥ 0
where,
I = fault current
φ = lagging angle of I to Vp
θ = directional angle setting
The polarizing voltage Vp is the same one as employed in the mho element.
For B-to-C-phase phase fault element
Vpbc = 3 (Va − V0) ∠ − 90° + Vbc
For an A-phase earth fault element
Vpa = 3 (Va − V0) + Vbc ∠90°
where,
Va = A-phase voltage
V0 = zero-sequence voltage
Vbc = B-to-C-phase voltage
The polarizing voltage for the phase fault element has a memory action for the close-up
three-phase fault. Va and Vbc mentioned above are the memorized pre-fault voltages. This
memory is retained for two cycles after a fault occurs. The polarizing voltage for the earth fault
element has no memory action.
When a three-phase fault occurs within zone 1, the phase fault element for zone 1 is modified to an
offset characteristic as shown in Figure 2.5.1.11. This, together with voltage memory action,
enables zone 1 to perform tripping with a time delay as well as instantaneous tripping for the
close-up three-phase fault.
The Z1X, Z2, ZF and Z3 do not have the modifying function mentioned above.
⎯ 107 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
X
Reactance
Blinder
Directional
Figure 2.5.1.11 Quadrilateral characteristic
Offset directional element

The offset directional element is used only in Z4 for phase faults in the quadrilateral four zone
characteristics.
X
ZB θ
Figure 2.5.1.12 Offset Directional Element
The characteristic of the offset directional element is obtained by the following equation.
X + R tanθ ≦ ZB
where,
θ = directional angle setting (interlinked with directional element angle setting)
ZB = offset reach setting (fixed to 1.5Ω in 5A rating and 7.5Ω in 1A rating)
⎯ 108 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5.2 Phase Selection Element UVC
The phase selection element has the undervoltage characteristic shown in Figure 2.5.2.1 and is
used to select a faulty phase in case of a single-phase-to-earth fault.
IZs
I
Vs
Figure 2.5.2.1 Phase Selection Element
The characteristic is obtained by a combination of the equations below. If equation (1) or equation
(2), or both equations (3) and (4) are established, the UVC operates.
|V| ≤ Vs (1)
|V − IZs| ≤ Vs (2)
−Vs ≤ V sinθ ≤ Vs (3)
0 ≤ V cosθ ≤ |IZs| (4)
where,
V = fault voltage
I = fault current
θ = angle difference between V and IZs
Zs = impedance setting
Vs = undervoltage setting
When the value and angle of Zs are set to those similar to the impedance of the protected line, the
phase selection element will detect all single-phase earth faults that have occurred on the protected
line even with a strong source and the voltage drop is small.
As a result of current compensation, the operating zone expands only in the direction leading the
current by the line impedance angle. Therefore, the effect of current compensation is very small
under load conditions where the current and voltage have almost the same phase angle.
2.5.3 Directional Earth Fault Elements DEFF and DEFR
There are two types of directional earth fault element, the forward looking element (DEFF) and
reverse looking element (DEFR). Their characteristics are shown in Figure 2.5.3.1.
Both the DEFF and DEFR use a residual voltage as their polarizing voltage and determine the fault
direction based on the phase relationship between the residual current and polarizing voltage.
⎯ 109 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
DEFR
Isr DEFF
−3V0
θ + 180° φ
θ
3I0
Isf
Figure 2.5.3.1 Directional Earth Fault Element
The operation decision is made using the following equation.

DEFF
3I0 ⋅ cos(φ − θ) ≥ Isf
3V0 ≥ Vsf
DEFR
3I0 cos(φ − θ − 180°) ≥ Isr
3V0 ≥ Vsr
where,
3I0 = residual current
3V0 = residual voltage
−3V0 = polarizing voltage
φ = lagging angle of (3I0) to (−3V0)
θ = characteristic angle setting (lagging to polarizing voltage)
Isf, Isr = current setting
Vsf, Vsr = voltage setting
⎯ 110 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5.4 Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) OC, EF, DEF Elements
As shown in Figure 2.5.4.1, the IDMT element has one long time inverse characteristic and three
inverse time characteristics in conformity with IEC 60255-3. One of these characteristics can be
selected.
(s) T = 1.0
200
100
50
20
10
Operating Long-time
time t I
5
Standard Inverse
2
Very Inverse
0.5
0.2 Extremely Inverse
0.1
1 2 5 10 20 30
Current I (Multiple of setting)
Figure 2.5.4.1 IDMT Characteristics
These characteristics are expressed by the following equations.

Long Time Inverse
120
t=T×
(I/Is)−1
Standard Inverse
0.14
t=T×
(I/Is)0.02 − 1
⎯ 111 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Very Inverse
13.5
t=T×
(I/Is) − 1
Extremely Inverse
80
t=T×
(I/Is)2 − 1
where,
t = operating time
I = fault current
Is = current setting
T = time multiplier setting
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is provided.
If the delay period is set to instantaneous (TOCIR, TEFIR, TDEFR or TDERR=0.0s), then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
2.5.5 Out-of-Step Element OST
The out-of-step element used for out-of-step tripping contains two impedance measuring elements
with quadrilateral characteristics, ZM and ZN. Figure 2.5.5.1 shows their characteristics. The
quadrilateral characteristic of ZM is formed by the reactance lines parallel to the R-axis and the
ohm lines with a leading angle of 75° to the R-axis.
The characteristics of ZN can be obtained by shifting ZM in the −R-axis direction by
(OSTR1-OSTR2).
X
OSTXF
ZN C B A ZM
75°
R
−OSTR2 OSTR1
−OSTXB
Figure 2.5.5.1 Out-of-Step Element
⎯ 112 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Operation of the impedance measuring element Z1 is expressed by the following equations.

−OSTXB ≤ X ≤ OSTXF
(R − OSTR1)tan75° ≤ X ≤ (R − OSTR2)tan75°
where,
X = measured reactance
R = measured resistance
OSTXB, OSTXF = reactive reach setting
OSTR1, OSTR2 = resistive reach setting
2.5.6 Voltage and Synchronism Check Elements OVL, UVL, OVB, UVB, and SYN
The voltage check and synchronism check elements are used for autoreclose.
The output of the voltage check element is used to check whether the line and busbar are dead or
live. The voltage check element has undervoltage detectors UVL and UVB, and overvoltage
detectors OVL and OVB for the line voltage and busbar voltage check. The under voltage detector
checks that the line or busbar is dead while the overvoltage detector checks that it is live. These
detectors function in the same manner as other level detectors described later.
Figure 2.5.6.1 shows the characteristics of the synchronism check element used for the autoreclose
if the line and busbar are live.
The synchronism check element operates if both the voltage difference and phase angle difference
are within their setting values.
VL
θs
θ
VB
SY1OV
SY1UV
Figure 2.5.6.1 Synchronism Check Element
For the element SYN1, the voltage difference is checked by the following equations.
SY1OV ≤ VB ≤ SY1UV
SY1OV ≤ VL ≤ SY1UV
where,
VB = busbar voltage
VL = line voltage
SY1OV = lower voltage setting
⎯ 113 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
SY1UV = upper voltage setting

The phase difference is checked by the following equations.
VB ⋅ VL cos θ ≥ 0
VB ⋅ VL sin (SY1θs) ≥ VB ⋅ VL sinθ
where,
θ = phase difference between VB and VL
SY1θs = phase difference setting
A detected slip cycle is determined by the following equation:
θs
f=
180°×TSYN
where,
f = slip cycle
TSYN = synchronism check timer setting
2.5.7 Current Change Detection Elements OCD and OCDP
As shown in Figure 2.5.7.1, the current change detection element operates if the vectorial
difference between currents IM and IN observed one cycle apart is larger than the fixed setting.
Therefore, the operating sensitivity of this element is not affected by the quiescent load current
and can detect a fault current with high sensitivity.
The OCD element is used for the VT failure supervision circuit and the OCDP element used for
the fault detection during a power swing.
IN
Is
IM
Figure 2.5.7.1 Current Change Detection
The operation decision is made by the following equation.

|IM − IN| > Is
where,
IM = present current
IN = current one cycle before
Is = fixed setting (10% of rated current)
⎯ 114 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5.8 Negative Sequence Directional Elements DOCNF and DOCNR
There are two types of negative sequence directional element, the forward looking element
(DOCNF) and reverse looking element (DOCNR). They are used to detect faults during a power
swing. Their characteristics are shown in Figure 2.5.8.1.
Both the DOCNF and DOCNR use negative sequence current and voltage and determine a fault
direction based on the phase relationship between the current and voltage.
The operation decision is made using the following equation.
DOCNF
ZkI22 − V2I2 sinφ ≥ V2k|I2|
I2 ≥ I2k
DOCNR
ZkI22 + V2I2 sinφ ≥ V2k|I2|
I2 ≥ I2k
where,
I2 = negative sequence current
V2 = negative sequence voltage
φ = lagging angle of I2 to V2
I2k = 0.267 ×rated current (fixed)
V2k = 6 V (fixed)
Zk = 2.5 ohm (1A rating, fixed) / 0.5 ohm (5A rating, fixed)
V2k − ZkI2
DOCN-R
I2
0
φ
DOCN-F
− (V2k − ZkI2)
Figure 2.5.8.1 Negative Sequence Directional Element
⎯ 115 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5.9 Level Detectors
In addition to those explained above, GRZ100 has overcurrent, overvoltage, and undervoltage
level detectors described below.
All level detectors except for undervoltage level detectors UVFS and UVFG, and overcurrent
level detector OCBF which require high-speed operation, operate in a similar manner.
That is, the operation decision is made by comparing the current or voltage amplitude with the
relevant setting.
Overcurrent detector OCH and OC

This detector measures A, B, and C phase currents and its sensitivity can be set. The detector OCH
is commonly used for the SOTF and stub protection. The detector OC is commonly used for
backup protection.
Residual overcurrent detector EF and EFL

This detector measures a residual current and its sensitivity can be set. The EF is used for backup
protection. The EFL is used for the earth fault detection of distance protection and VT failure
supervision.
Overvoltage detector OVS1/OVS2/OVG1/OVG2 and undervoltage detector UVS1/UVS2/UVG1/UVG2

The OVS∗ and UVS∗ measure a phase-to-phase voltage while the OVG∗ and UVG∗ measure a
phase-to-earth voltage. These detectors are used for overvoltage and undervoltage protection as
described in Section 2.4.9.
Residual overvoltage detector OVG

This detector measures a residual voltage and its sensitivity is fixed at 20V. This detector is used
for supervision of VT failure.
Undervoltage detector UVLS and UVLG

The UVLS measures a phase-to-phase voltage while the UVLG measures a phase-to-earth
voltage. Their sensitivity can be set. These detectors are used for weak infeed tripping.
Undervoltage detector UVFS and UVFG

The UVFS measures a phase-to-phase voltage while the UVFG measures a phase-to-earth voltage.
Their sensitivity can be set. These detectors are commonly used for the VT failure supervision and
signal channel test.
Undervoltage detector UVPWI

The UVPWI measures a phase-to-earth voltage and its sensitivity is 30V fixed. The UVPWI is
used for countermeasures for overreaching of a leading-phase distance element at positive phase
weak infeed condition.
Broken conductor detector BCD

The BCD measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F).
Overcurrent detector OCBF

This detector measures A, B, and C phase currents and its sensitivity can be set. This detector is
used for breaker failure protection and resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating
value.
⎯ 116 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.5.10 Fault Detector Elements
The fault detector incorporates the following six fault detection elements.
Multi-level overcurrent element OCMF

The OCMF is used as a fault detector for the out-of-step protection.
The current fluctuates in an out-of-step situation. To detect this current securely, the OCMF has
seven current level detectors. Each current level detector LD1 to LD7 operates when the current
exceeds each setting L1 to L7 and resets when the current falls below 80 % of the setting. The
settings are fixed as shown in Table 2.5.10.1 as a ratio to the rated current In.
Table 2.5.10.1 Level Detector Settings
Detector Operate Reset

LD1 0.10×In 0.08×In
LD2 0.16×In 0.13×In
LD3 0.26×In 0.21×In
LD4 0.41×In 0.33×In
LD5 0.66×In 0.53×In
LD6 1.05×In 0.84×In
LD7 1.68×In 1.34×In
(In: Rated current)
Figure 2.5.10.1 shows the characteristics of the OCMF element.
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7
0 I
D.O./P.U.=0.8
Figure 2.5.10.1 OCMF Element
Figure 2.5.10.2 shows the OCMF output logic. The OCMF operates and keeps operating for five
seconds when any of the level detectors operate and reset without time delay when all of the level
detectors reset.
The level detection is performed for phase-to-phase current on A- and B-phase.
⎯ 117 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Single Shot
LD1
5s &
≥1 OCMF
Output
LD2
5s &
• • •
• • •
• • •
LD7
5s &
Figure 2.5.10.2 OCMF Output Logic
Current change detection element OCDF

The characteristic of the OCDF is same as the OCD element, see Section 2.5.7.
Undervoltage change detection element UVDF

The UVDF operates if a voltage drops by 7 percent compared to that of one cycle before.
Therefore, the operating sensitivity of this element is related not to the rated voltage but to the
running voltage.
The following are the level detectors and the operation decision is made by comparing the current
or voltage amplitude with the relevant setting.
Earth fault overcurrent element EFF

The EFF measures the residual current and its detecting level is fixed at 10% of the rated current.
Undervoltage element UVSF and UVGF

The UVSF measures a phase-to-phase voltage while the UVGF measures a phase-to-earth voltage.
Their detecting level is fixed at 80V and 46V, respectively. However, in case of fault with more
than 80V, the undervoltage change detection element UVDF detects the fault.
⎯ 118 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.6 Autoreclose
2.6.1 Application
Most faults that occur on high voltage or extra-high voltage overhead lines are transient faults
caused by lightning. If a transient fault occurs, the circuit breaker is tripped to isolate the fault, and
then reclosed following a time delay to ensure that the gases caused by the fault arc have
de-ionized. This makes it possible to recover power transmission.
The time between clearing the fault and reclosing the circuit breaker, that is, the dead time, should
be made as short as possible to keep the power system stable. From the viewpoint of de-ionization
of the fault arc, the fault arc is de-ionized more thoroughly as the period of this dead time is
extended. The de-ionization commences when the circuit breakers for all terminals of the line are
tripped. Therefore, the dead time can be set at its minimum level if all terminals of the line are
tripped at the same time.
Autoreclose of the GRZ100 is started by any of the following protections that ensure high-speed
protection of all terminals.
• command protection
• zone 1 extension protection
• specific zone 1 tripping
The GRZ100 provides two autoreclose systems, single-shot autoreclose and multi-shot
autoreclose.
Single-shot autoreclose
Three types of single-shot autoreclose modes are provided: single-phase autoreclose, three-phase
autoreclose, and single- and three-phase autoreclose. An optimal mode is selected form among
"Off (disable)" "SPAR", "TPAR", "SPAR&TPAR", "EXT1P" and "EXT3P" by the autoreclose
mode selection switch [ARC-M] or PLC signals (No.1683 – 1688). The PLC signals have priority
over the switch [ARC-M] setting. In any case, autoreclose is performed only once. If the fault state
still continues after reclosing, three-phases final tripping is activated.
Single-phase autoreclose:
In this mode, only the faulty phase is tripped, and then reclosed if a single-phase earth fault occurs.
In the case of a multi-phase fault, three phases are tripped, but reclosing is not made. Since power
can be transmitted through healthy phases even during dead time, this mode is convenient for
maintaining power system stablility. On the other hand, the capacitive coupling effect between the
healthy phase and faulty phase may cause a longer de-ionization time when compared to a
three-phase autoreclose. As a result, a longer dead time is required.
It is essential to correctly determine a faulty phase. The GRZ100 is equipped with an undervoltage
element with current compensation to correctly determine the faulty phase(s).
For single-phase autoreclose, each phase of the circuit breaker must be segregated.
This reclosing mode is simply expressed as "SPAR" in the following descriptions.
Three-phase autoreclose:
In this autoreclose mode, three phases are tripped, and then reclosed regardless of the fault mode,
whether single-phase fault or multi-phase fault. A shorter dead time can be set in this mode when
compared to the single-phase autoreclose. For the three-phase autoreclose, synchronism check and
voltage check between the busbar and the line are required.
This reclosing mode is simply expressed as "TPAR" in the following descriptions.
⎯ 119 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Single- and three-phase autoreclose:

In this autoreclose mode, single-phase tripping and reclosing are performed if a single-phase fault
occurs, while three-phase tripping and reclosing are performed if a multi-phase fault occurs.
This reclosing mode is simply expressed as "SPAR & TPAR" in the following descriptions.
Shingle-shot autoreclose can be applied to one-breaker reclosing and two-breaker reclosing in the
one-and-a-half breaker busbar system.
Multi-shot autoreclose
In the multi-shot autoreclose, any of two- to four-shot reclosing can be selected. In any case, the
first shot is selected from three types of autoreclose modes as described in the above single-shot
autoreclose. All successive shots (up to three times), which are applied if the first shot fails, are
three-phase tripping and reclosing.
Multi-shot autoreclose cannot be applied to two-breaker reclosing in the one-and-a-half breaker
busbar system..
The autoreclose can also be activated from an external line protection. At this time, all autoreclose
modes described above are effective.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, three-phase final tripping is performed and
autoreclose is blocked.
• Reclosing block signal is received from external unit locally or remotely.
• Throughout the reclaim time
For evolving faults that occurred during the dead time between single-phase tripping and
reclosing, "SPAR & TPAR" functions as follows.
For evolving faults that occurred within the period of time set from the first fault, the reclosing
mode enters the three-phase autoreclose mode. At this time, the total dead time becomes the dead
time for three-phase autoreclose added to the dead time for single-phase autoreclose which has
been used until the evolving fault occurs.
For evolving faults occurred after the set time, three-phase final tripping is performed, and
reclosing is not performed.
If an evolving fault occurs when "SPAR" is selected, three-phase final tripping is performed, and
reclosing is not performed.
⎯ 120 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.6.2 Scheme Logic
2.6.2.1 One-breaker Autoreclose

Figure 2.6.2.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the single-shot autoreclose. Autoreclose for a
further fault incident is available when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB1
READY=1), the autoreclose mode by the switch [ARC-M] or the PLC is set to "SPAR", "TPAR"
or "SPAR & TPAR" and the on-delay timer TRDY1 is picked up. The TRDY1 is used to
determine the reclaim time.
[ARC-M] ARC1 READY
+ TRDY1 TSPR1 TW1
"SPAR", "TPAR", "SPAR & TPAR" t 0 t 0
& ARC
& F/F & & ≥1 (For Leader CB)
1545 CB1_READY Single-phase trip & 0.1 - 10s
5-300s 0.01-10s
52A [ARC-M]
& + 1824 SPR.L-REQ ARC(*)
52B "SPAR", "SPAR & TPAR"
"Default =CONSTANT 1"
52C
TTPR1 MSARC
t 0
TRIP-A & &
≥1 Multi-phase trip & 0.01-100s
[ARC-M]
+ M-TRIPA
≥1 ≥1 (For Leader CB)
TRIP-B TP "TPAR", "SPAR & TPAR" 0.1s
( To Figure 1825 TPR.L-REQ
≥1
2.10.2.8. ) "Default =SYN-OP"
[ARC-M]
TRIP-C +
"Disable" &
≥1
CT-DG
[ARC-DEF] & FT
[ARC-EXT] + & ≥1 (For Leader CB)
"OFF" ≥1 0.2s
1556 EXT_TRIP-A [ARC-BU]
BUP
"ON" "OFF"
1544 ARC_BLOCK
≥1
1557 EXT_TRIP-B 1564 ARC_BLOCK1
Trip when ARC1 READY not operated.
"ON"
1558 EXT_TRIP-C Multi phase trip in SPAR.
TEVLV
Single-phase trip t 0
&
FT 0.01-10s
(For Leader CB) ≥1
Multi-phase trip
(*)ARC
(For Leader CB) [ARC-M]
+ TRR
"TPAR", "SPAR & TPAR"
t 0
ARC FAIL 0.01-100s

&
(For Leader CB)
[ARC-SUC]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.6.2.1 Autoreclose Scheme Logic
If the autoreclose is ready, the internal tripping signal TRIP-A, B, C or external tripping signal
EXT_TRIP-A, B, C for each phase of the circuit breaker activates the autoreclose. These tripping
signals are output from the command protection, zone 1 extension protection, and specific zone 1
tripping. Whether or not the external trip signals are used to activate the reclosing is selected by
the scheme switch [ARC-EXT].
Once this autoreclose is activated, it is maintained by a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose is not activated in the following conditions.
• When the tripping is output by the directional earth fault command protection (CT-DG =1)
and the autoreclose selection switch [ARC-DEF] is set to "OFF".
• When the tripping is performed by the out-of-step protection (OSTT =1), stub fault protection
(STUB=1), switch-onto-fault protection (SOTF =1) breaker failure protection (RETRIP=1) or
⎯ 121 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
time-delayed backup protection (BUP =1).

• When an autoreclose prohibiting binary input signal is applied (ARC_BLOCK =1)
If autoreclosing is not ready, a three-phase tripping command M-TRIP is output for all tripping
modes. At this time, autoreclose is not activated.
If all three phases of CB are closed, autoreclose is reset though it is initiated.
Autoreclose for single-phase fault
If the autoreclose mode is set to "SPAR" or "SPAR & TPAR", single-phase tripping is performed.
The dead time counter TSPR for single-phase reclosing is started by any of the tripping signals
TRIP-A to C. After the dead time has elapsed, reclosing command ARC is output.
If the autoreclose mode is set to "TPAR", three-phase tripping is performed and the dead time
counter TTPR1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed, reclosing
command ARC is output based on the operating conditions of the voltage and synchronism check
elements output signal SYN-OP.
If the autoreclose mode is set to "Disable"("Off"), three-phase tripping is performed and
autoreclose is not started. Even though the autoreclose is started, the autoreclose is reset if all
phases of the CB are closing.
Autoreclose for multi-phase fault
Regardless of the autoreclose mode, three-phase tripping is performed and TRIP-A to C are
activated. If the autoreclose mode is set to "TPAR" or "SPAR & TPAR", the dead time counter
TTPR1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed, reclosing command
ARC is output based on the operating conditions of the voltage and synchronism check elements
output signal SYN-OP. (The SYN-OP is assigned by the PLC as a default setting.)
If the autoreclose mode is set to "SPAR" or "Disable"("Off"), autoreclose is not activated.
If the operating conditions of the voltage and synchronism check elements are not satisfied during
three-phase reclosing, TRR is then picked up and reclosing is reset.
Autoreclose for evolving fault
Figure 2.6.2.2 shows the sequence diagram of autoreclose for an evolving fault. If single-phase
tripping is performed, the evolving fault detection timer TEVLV is started at the same time as the
TSPR is started. If no evolving faults occur, single-phase reclosing is performed when TSPR is
picked up.
First fault Evolving fault
Fault
1φ trip 3φ trip 1φ reclosing 3φ reclosing

Trip
TSPR
TSPR
TEVLV
TEVLV
TTPR1
TTPR1
Figure 2.6.2.2 Autoreclose for Evolving Fault
⎯ 122 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
As shown in the figure, if an evolving fault occurs before TEVLV is picked up, three-phase
tripping is performed. If this occurs, TSPR and TEVLV are reset, and TTPR1 is now started.
After TTPR1 is picked up, three-phase reclosing is performed based on the status of the voltage
and synchronism check elements output signal SYN-OP. If an evolving fault occurs after the
TEVLV has picked up, autoreclose is reset and reclosing is not performed.
Voltage and synchronism check

There are four voltage modes as shown below when all three phases of the circuit breaker are
opened. The voltage and synchronism check is applicable to voltage modes 1 to 3 and controls the
energizing process of the lines and busbars in the three-phase autoreclose mode.
Voltage Mode 1 2 3 4
Busbar voltage (VB) live live dead dead
Line voltage (VL) live dead live dead
The synchronism check is performed for voltage mode 1 while the voltage check is performed for
voltage modes 2 and 3.
[VCHK]
+
"OFF"
"LB"
"DB"
"SY"
86 TLBD1
OVB LBDL &
&
273
0.01 – 1.00S ≥1 SYN-OP
87 TDBL1
UVB DBLL &
&
89 0.01 – 1.00S
OVL1 T3PLL
397
3PLL
90 0.01 – 1.00S (Three phase live line)
UVL1
TSYN1
88
SYN1
0.01 – 10.00S
Figure 2.6.2.3 Energizing Control Scheme
Figure 2.6.2.3 shows the energizing control scheme. The voltage and synchronism check output
signal SYN-OP is generated when the following conditions have been established;
• Synchronism check element SYN1 operates and on-delay timer TSYN1 is picked up.
• Busbar overvoltage detector OVB and line undervoltage detector UVL1 operate, and on-delay
timer TLBD1 is picked up. (This detects live bus and dead line condition.)
• Busbar undervoltage detector UVB and line overvoltage detector OVL1 operate, and on-delay
timer TDBL1 is picked up. (This detects dead bus and live line condition.)
Using the scheme switch [VCHK], the energizing direction can be selected.
⎯ 123 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Setting of [VCHK] Energizing control

LB Reclosed under "live bus and dead line" condition or with synchronism check
DB Reclosed under "dead bus and live line" condition or with synchronism check
SY Reclosed with synchronism check only.
OFF Reclosed without voltage and synchronism check.
When [VCHK] is set to "LB", the line is energized in the direction from the busbar to line under
the "live bus and dead line" condition. When [VCHK] is set to "DB", the lines are energized in the
direction from the line to busbar under the "dead bus and live line" condition.
When a synchronism check output exists, autoreclose is executed regardless of the position of the
scheme switch.
When [VCHK] is set to "SY", a three-phase autoreclose is performed with synchronism check
only.
When [VCHK] is set to "OFF", three-phase autoreclose is performed without voltage and
synchronism check.
The voltage and synchronism check require a single-phase voltage from the busbar or line as a
reference voltage. If the three-phase voltages that are used for the distance protection are supplied
from the line voltage transformer, the reference voltage has to be supplied from the busbar voltage
transformer. On the contrary, if the three-phase voltages that are used for the distance protection
are supplied from the busbar voltage transformer, the reference voltage has to be supplied from the
line voltage transformer.
Additionally, it is not necessary to fix the phase of the reference voltage.
The signal 3PLL shown in Figure 2.6.2.3 is output when all three phase voltages are live, and it is
available by the [3PH-VT] = LINE setting.
To match the busbar voltage and line voltage for the voltage and synchronism check option
mentioned above, the GRZ100 has the following three switches and VT ratio settings as shown in
Figure 2.6.2.4.
[VTPH-SEL]: This switch is used to match the voltage phases. If the A-phase voltage or
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used as a reference voltage, "A" is selected.
[VT-RATE]: This switch is used to match the magnitude and phase angle. "PH/G" is
selected when the reference voltage is a single-phase voltage while "PH/PH" is
selected when it is a phase-to-phase voltage.
[3PH-VT]: "Bus" is selected when the three-phase voltages are busbar voltages while
"Line" is selected when they are the line voltages.
VT: This setting is set to the VT ratio of busbar or line voltage for distance
protection
VTs1: This setting is set to the VT ratio of line or busbar reference voltage for voltage
check and synchronism check.
⎯ 124 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Distance
Measuring
Busbar or line Va
voltages Vb
Voltage check
Vc &
Synchronism check
Line or busbar Vref
reference voltage
[VTPH - SEL]
+ "A"
+
"B"
+
"C"
[VT - RATE]
+
"PH/PH"
+
"PH/G"
[3PH - VT]
+
"Bus"
+
"Line"
Figure 2.6.2.4 Matching of Busbar Voltage and Line Voltage
Autoreclosing requirement
Using PLC function, various reclose requirements can be designed. In Figure 2.6.2.1, a reclose
requirement for "SPAR", "TPAR" or "SPAR&TPAR" can be respectively assigned to the
following signals by PLC:
"SPAR": [SPR.L-REQ]
"TPAR": [TPR.L-REQ]
"SPAR&TPAR": [SPR.L-REQ], [TPR.L-REQ]
The default setting is as follows:
Reclose requirement Default setting Remarks
"SPAR" [SPR.L-REQ] = CONSTANT_1 No condition
"TPAR" [TPR.L-REQ] = SYP-ON Voltage and synchronism check
Permanent fault
When reclose-onto-a-fault is activated when a permanent fault exists, three-phase final tripping is
performed. However, this operation is performed only in the single-shot autoreclose mode. In the
multi-shot autoreclose mode, reclosing is retried as described below.
In multi-shot autoreclose, low-speed autoreclose is executed up to three times after high-speed
autoreclose fails. The first shot is high-speed autoreclose that functions in the same manner as
described for single-shot autoreclose. Figure 2.6.2.5 shows the simplified scheme logic for the
low-speed autoreclose of the second to fourth shot.
The multi-shot mode, two to four shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC-SM].
⎯ 125 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
STEP COUNTER
[ARC-SM] SP1
FT F/F 1 CLR
+ SP2
"S2", "S3", "S4" ≥1 CLOCK
MSARC SP3
TS2
ARC1 & t 0
MSARC1 F/F
5 - 300s &
FT ≥1 303
TP SP1 t 0 TS2R MSARC1 ≥1 0 t MULT.ARC
F/F
SP2
0.1s
5 - 300s
TS3
SP1 & t 0
ARC1 MSARC2 F/F
ARC FT ≥1 5 - 300s &
≥1
ARC t 0 TS3R MSARC2
FT
5 - 300s
TS4
SP2 &
t 0
MSARC3 F/F
FT ≥1 5 - 300s &
t 0 TS4R MSARC3
5 - 300s
SYN-OP
[ARC-SM]
FT1 308
"S2" & ≥1 MAR-FT
FT2 ≥1
SP1 0.5s
"S3" &
SP2
"S4"
&
SP3 FT3
Figure 2.6.2.5 Scheme Logic for Multi-Shot Autoreclose
In low-speed autoreclose, the dead time counter TS2 for the second shot is activated if high-speed
autoreclose is performed (ARC = 1), but tripping occurs again (TP = 1). Second shot autoreclose is
performed only when the voltage and synchronism check element operates (SYN-OP = 1) after a
period of time set on TS2 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 = 1, SP2 =
0, and SP3 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two-shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode.
Therefore, the tripping following the "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final tripping (FT1 = 1).
If the voltage and synchronism check element does not operate within the period of time set on the
timer TS2R which is started at the same time as TS2 is started, the multi-shot autoreclose is
cancelled (MAR-FT = 1).
When the three shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after
the above tripping occurs. At this time, the TS3 and TS3R are started. The third shot autoreclose is
performed only when the voltage and synchronism check element operates after the period of time
set on the TS3 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 = 0, SP2 = 1, and SP3
= 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then completed. Therefore, the tripping following the
"reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final tripping (FT2 = 1).
If the voltage and synchronism check element does not function within the period of time set on
the TS3R, multi-shot autoreclose is cancelled.
When four-shot autoreclose is selected, low-speed autoreclose is further retried once again for
tripping that occurs after the "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the
three-shot autoreclose.
⎯ 126 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Use of external automatic reclosing equipment

To use external automatic reclosing equipment instead of the built-in autoreclose function of the
GRZ100, the autoreclose mode is set to "EXT1P" or "EXT3P". When "EXT1P" is selected, the
GRZ100 performs single-phase tripping for a single-phase fault and three-phase tripping for a
multi-phase fault. When "EXT3P" is selected, three-phase tripping is performed for all faults. At
the same time, one binary signal for individual phase is output as an autoreclose start signal.
2.6.2.2 Two-breaker autoreclose

As shown in Figure 2.6.2.6, in the one-and-a-half breaker busbar arrangement, two circuit
breakers, the busbar breaker and the center breaker, must be reclosed. The GRZ100 series 300s
and 500s are provided with the two-breaker autoreclose scheme.
Multi-shot autoreclose is not applicable to two-breaker autoreclose; the scheme switch [ARC-SM]
is set to "OFF" for a default setting.
Autoreclose is not activated when an autoreclose prohibiting binary input signal is applied at the
local or remote terminal.
• ARC_BLOCK signal common for leader and follower CB
• ARC_BLOCK1 signal for leader CB
• ARC_BLOCK2 signal for follower CB
The autoreclose scheme is different depending on the reclosing mode.
Busbar Protected line

breaker
VB
Center
breaker
VL1
Adjacent line
VL2
Figure 2.6.2.6 One-and-a-Half Breaker Busbar Arrangement
Single-phase autoreclose and single- and three-phase autoreclose

The breaker(s) to be reclosed and the reclosing order can be set by the scheme switch [ARC-CB]
as follows:
Setting of [ARC-CB] Autoreclose mode
ONE (Set when applied to a one-breaker system)
O1 Only the busbar breaker is reclosed and the center breaker is subjected to final tripping.
O2 Only the center breaker is reclosed and the busbar breaker is subjected to final tripping.
L1 Single-phase autoreclose: Both breakers are reclosed simultaneously.(*1)
Three-phase autoreclose: The busbar breaker is reclosed first. If successful, then the center
breaker is reclosed.
⎯ 127 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Setting of [ARC-CB] Autoreclose mode

L2 Single-phase autoreclose: Both breakers are reclosed simultaneously.(*1)
Three-phase autoreclose: The center breaker is reclosed first. If successful, then the busbar
breaker is reclosed.
Note : "ONE" is set only when the relay is applied to a one-breaker system. Trip and reclose commands
are output only for CB1(bus CB).
(∗1): Sequential autoreclose can be applied by changing of the dead timer setting or the PLC
setting.
The autoreclose scheme logic for the two circuit breakers are independent of each other and are
almost the same. The autoreclose scheme logic of the circuit breaker to be reclosed first (lead
breaker) is the same as that shown in Figure 2.6.2.1. The scheme logic of the circuit breaker to be
reclosed later (follower breaker) is different from that shown in Figure 2.6.2.7 in that the condition
that a reclosing command is output to the leader breaker is added to the start of the dead time
counter of the three-phase autoreclose.
[ARC-M]
+ TRDY2 ARC2 READY TSPR2 TW2
"SPAR", "TPAR", "SPAR & TPAR" t 0 t 0
& ARC
& F/F & & & ≥1
Single-phase trip ≥1 (For Follower CB)
1546 CB2_READY 5-300s & 0.01-10s 0.1 - 10s
[ARC-M] 1826 SPR.F-REQ
52A
+ ARC(*)
& "SPAR", "SPAR & TPAR" "Default =CONSTANT 1"
52B
TSPR1
52C
t 0
TP 1828 SPR.F-ST.REQ & &
( From Figure 2.6.2.1. ) "Default =CONSTANT 1" 0.01-10s
1833 SPR.F2-REQ
TTPR2
t 0
& & ≥1
Multi-phase trip & &
0.01-10s
[ARC-M]
+
"TPAR" 1827 TPR.F-REQ
1829 TPR.F-ST.REQ TTPR1 ≥1

0.1s (For Follower CB)
"Default ="ARC-SET" t 0
& &
1832 R.F-ST.REQ
0.01-100s
1834 TPR.F2-REQ
[ARC-M]
+
"Disable" &
CT-DG
[ARC-DEF] & FT
+ & ≥1 (For Follower CB)
"OFF"
≥1 0.2s
[ARC-BU]
BUP
"OFF"
1544 ARC_BLOCK &
FT ≥1 Trip when ARC2 READY not operated.

(For Follower CB)
(*)ARC Multi phase trip in SPAR.

(For Follower CB)
TEVLV
Single-phase trip t 0
&
0.01-10s
Multi-phase trip
[ARC-M]
+ TRR
"TPAR", "SPAR & TPAR"
t 0
ARC FAIL 0.01-100s

&
(For Follower CB)
[ARC-SUC]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.6.2.7 Autoreclose Scheme for Follower Breaker
⎯ 128 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The start of the dead time counter can be configured by the PLC. In the default setting, the
single-phase autoreclose is started instantaneously after tripping, and the three-phase autoreclose
is started after the ARC-SET condition is satisfied.
The “ARC-SET” is a scheme signal whose logical level becomes 1 when a lead breaker’s
autoreclose command is output.
In default setting, therefore, the dead time of the follower breaker is as follows:
• Three-phase autoreclose: equal to the sum of the dead time setting of the two breakers.
(TTPR1 + TTPR2)
• Single-phase autoreclose: TSPR2
However, the dead time can be set that of the leader breaker by the PLC setting “RF.ST-REQ”.
The shortening of the dead time can be also applied when the leader breaker is final-tripped
because it is no ready.
Autoreclose start requirement

Using PLC function, various autoreclose start requirements can be designed. In Figure 2.6.2.7, a
reclose start requirement for "SPAR", "TPAR" or "SPAR&TPAR" can be respectively assigned to
the following signals by PLC:
"SPAR": [SPR.F-ST.REQ]
"TPAR": [TPR.F-ST.REQ]
"SPAR&TPAR": [SPR.F-ST.REQ], [TPR.F-ST.REQ]
The default setting for the follower CB autoreclose start requirement is as follows:
Reclose start Default setting Remarks
requirement
"SPAR" [SPR.F-ST.REQ] = CONSTANT_1 No condition
"TPAR" [TPR.F-ST.REQ] = ARC-SET ARC-SET becomes “1” when the leader
CB is reclosed.
Autoreclose requirement
The autoreclose requirement can be designed by assigning a reclose requirement to the signals
[SPR.F-ST.REQ] and [TPR.F-ST.REQ] same as above.
The default setting for the follower CB autoreclose requirement is as follows:
Reclose requirement Default setting Remarks
"SPAR" [SPR.F-ST.REQ] = CONSTANT_1 No condition
"TPAR" [TPR.F-ST.REQ] = SYP-ON Voltage and synchronism check
Others
If the autoreclose start requirement is designed such as starting the follower CB in no-ready
condition of the leader CB, it is assigned to the signal [R.F-ST.REQ].
By assigning the autoreclose start requirement to the signal [R.F-ST.REQ], both the leader CB and
the follower CB are set the same dead time. The reclose requirement is assigned to the signals
[SPR.F2-ST.REQ] and [TPR.F2-ST.REQ].
The default setting for the follower CB is as follows:
⎯ 129 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Requirement Default setting

Reclose requirement [R.F-ST.REQ] = CONSTANT_0 (No used)
Reclose start requirement

"SPAR" [SPR.F2-REQ] = CONSTANT_0 (No used)
"TPAR" [TPR.F2-REQ] = CONSTANT_0 (No used)
Figure 2.6.2.8 shows the energizing control scheme of the two circuit breakers in the three-phase
autoreclose. OVB and UVB are the overvoltage and undervoltage detectors of busbar voltage VB
in Figure 2.6.2.6. OVL1 and UVL1 are likewise the overvoltage and undervoltage detectors of line
voltage VL1.
OVL2 and UVL2 are likewise the overvoltage and undervoltage detectors of line voltage VL2.
VL2 in the center breaker is equivalent to the busbar voltage VB in the busbar breaker.
SYN1 and SYN2 are the synchronism check elements to check synchronization between the two
sides of the busbar and center breakers, respectively.
TPARL-SET is a scheme signal whose logical level becomes 1 when a three-phase autoreclose
command is output to the lead breaker. SYN-OP is a voltage and synchronism check output.
[VCHK]
+
"OFF"
"LB1"
"LB2"
"DB"
"SY"
86 TLBD1
OVB ≥1
& &
& ≥1 &
0.01 – 1.00s
≥1 273
87 TDBL1
UVB & SYN
&
& ≥1 -OP
0.01 – 1.00s
TSYN1 & &
88
SYN1 ≥1
&
0.01 – 10.00s
89
T3PLL
OVL1 397
3PLL
0.01 – 1.00S
(Three phase live line)
90
UVL1
TLBD2
91 &
OVL2 0.01 – 1.00s &
TDBL2
92 &
UVL2 &
0.01 – 1.00s
TSYN2
93
SYN2
&
0.01 – 10.00s
[ARC-CB]
+
"ONE"
"01"
1
"02"
TPARL-SET 1
"L1"
"L2"
Note : [ARC-CB] is set to "ONE" only when the relay is applied to one-breaker system. Trip and reclose
commands are output only for CB1(bus CB).
Figure 2.6.2.8 Energizing Control Scheme for Two Circuit Breakers
⎯ 130 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The voltage and synchronism check is performed as shown below according to the [ARC-CB]
settings:
Setting of [ARC-CB] Voltage and synchronism check
ONE or O1 A voltage and synchronism check is performed using voltages VB and VL1.
O2 A voltage and synchronism check is performed using voltages VL1 and VL2.
L1 Since the logical level of TPARL-SET is 0, a voltage and synchronism check is performed
for the busbar breaker using voltages VB and VL1. Then, the logical level of TPARL-SET
becomes 1 and a voltage and synchronism check is performed for the center breaker
using voltages VL1 and VL2 and a reclosing command is output to the center breaker.
L2 A voltage and synchronism check is performed for the center breaker using voltages VL1
and VL2. Then, the logical level of TPARL-SET becomes 1 and a voltage and synchronism
check is performed for the busbar breaker using voltages VB and VL1.
Note : "ONE" is set only when the relay is applied to one-breaker system. Trip and reclose commands
are output only for CB1(bus CB).
The energizing control for the two circuit breakers can be set by the scheme switch [VCHK] as
follows:
Setting of [VCHK] Energizing control
LB1 The lead breaker is reclosed under the "live bus and dead line" condition or with
synchronism check, and the follower breaker is reclosed with synchronism check only.
LB2 The leader breaker is reclosed under the "live bus and dead line" condition or with
synchronism check, and the follower breaker is reclosed under the "dead bus and live line"
condition or with synchronism check.
DB Both breakers are reclosed under the "dead bus and live line" condition or with
synchronism check.
SYN Both breakers are reclosed with synchronism check only.
OFF Both breakers are reclosed without voltage and synchronism check.
The scheme switch [ARC-SUC] is used to check the autoreclose succeeds. If all three phase CB
contacts have been closed within TSUC time after ARC shot output, it is judged that the
autoreclose has succeeded (AS). If not, it is judged that the autoreclose has failed (AF), and
becomes the final tripping (FT).
The relay provides the user configurable switch [UARCSW] with three-positions (P1, P2, P3) to
be programmed by using PLC function. Any position can be selected. If this switch is not used for
the PLC setting, it is invalid.
2.6.3 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below.
VT 1 - 20000 1 2000 VT ratio for distance protection
VTs1 1 - 20000 1 2000 VT ratio for voltage and synchronism check
TSPR1 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.80 s Dead time for single - phase autoreclose
TTPR1 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.01 s 0.60 s Dead time for three - phase autoreclose
TRR 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.01 s 2.00 s Autoreclose reset time
TEVLV 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 0.30 s Dead time reset for evolving fault
TRDY1 5 - 300 s 1s 60 s Reclaim time
⎯ 131 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

SYN1 Synchronism check
SY1 θ 5 - 75° 1° 30°
SY1UV 10 - 150 V 1V 83 V
SY1OV 10 - 150 V 1V 51 V
OVB 10 - 150 V 1V 51 V Live bus check
UVB 10 - 150 V 1V 13 V Dead bus check
OVL1 10 - 150 V 1V 51 V Live line check
UVL1 10 - 150 V 1V 13 V Dead line check
TSYN1 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Synchronism check time
TLBD1 0.01 - 1.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time
TDBL1 0.01 - 1.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Voltage check time
T3PLL 0.01 - 1.00 s 0.01 s 0.05 s Three phase live line check
TW1 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.2 s Reclosing signal output time
TS2 5.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 s 20.0 s Second shot dead time
TS3 5.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 s 20.0 s Third shot dead time
TS4 5.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 s 20.0 s Fourth shot dead time
TS2R 5.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s Second shot reset time
TS3R 5.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s Third shot reset time
TS4R 5.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s Fourth shot reset time
ARC - M Disabled/SPAR/TPAR/ SPAR & TPAR Autoreclose mode
SPAR & TPAR/EXT1P/EXT3P
ARC - DEF OFF/ON OFF DEF autoreclose
ARC-BU OFF/ON OFF Backup trip autoreclose
ARC-EXT OFF/ON OFF External start
ARC - SM OFF/S2/S3/S4 OFF Multi - shot autoreclose mode
ARC-SUC OFF/ON OFF Autoreclose success checking
VCHK OFF/LB/DB/SY LB Energizing direction
VTPHSEL A/B/C A Phase of reference voltage
VT - RATE PH/G / PH/PH PH/G VT rating
3PH - VT BUS/LINE LINE Location of three - phase VTs
[UARCSW] P1/P2/P3 (P1)(∗) User ARC switch for PLC
(∗) If this switch is not used for PLC setting, it is invalid.
“VT” is VT ratio setting of distance protection, and “VTs1” is VT ratio setting of a reference
voltage input for voltage and synchronism check element as shown in Figure 2.6.3.1.
In a voltage setting, set “SY1UV”, “SY1OV”, “OVB”, “UVB”, “OVL1” and “UVL1” based on
the VT rating for voltage and synchronism check. (When a voltage rating between line VT and
busbar VT is different as shown in Figure 2.6.3.1, the voltage input from “VT” is matched to the
rating of “VTs1” using the setting of “VT” and “VTs1”.)
Busbar
CB
Line
X GRZ100
VT setting
For distance
Line VT protection
VL
Busbar VT VTs1 setting

Reference voltage
VB for voltage and
synchronism check
Figure 2.6.3.1 VT and VTs1 Ratio Setting for Busbar or Line Voltage
⎯ 132 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors,
de-ionization time and power system stability, into consideration which normally contradict one
other.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required for a higher line voltage or larger fault current.
For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles. In single-phase
autoreclose, the secondary arc current induced from the healthy phases may affect the
de-ionization time. Therefore, it is necessary to set a longer dead time for single-phase autoreclose
compared to that for three-phase autoreclose.
In three-phase autoreclose, if the voltage and synchronism check does not operate within the
period of time set on the delayed pick-up timer TRR which is started at the same time as the dead
time counter TTPR1 is started, reclosing is not performed and three-phase autoreclose is reset to
its initial state. Therefore, for example, TRR is set to the time setting of the TTPR1 plus 100 ms.
The TEVLV determines the possibility of three-phase reclosing for an evolving fault.
When the TEVLV is set to the same setting as the TSPR, three-phase reclosing is performed for all
evolving faults. As the setting for the TEVLV is made shorter, the possibility of three-phase
reclosing for an evolving fault becomes small and that of three-phase final tripping becomes large.
For the two-breaker autoreclose, the following additional settings are required.
VTs2 1 - 20000 1 2000 VT ratio for voltage and synchronism check SYN2
TSPR2 0.1 – 10.0s 0.1s 0.1s Dead time for single-phase autoreclose of follower breaker
TTPR2 0.1 – 10.0s 0.1s 0.1s Dead time for three-phase autoreclose of follower breaker
TRDY2 5 – 300s 1s 60s Reclaim time of follower breaker
SYN2 Synchronism check
SY2θ 5 – 75° 1° 30°
SY2UV 10 – 150V 1V 83V
SY2OV 10 – 150V 1V 51V
OVL2 10 – 150V 1V 51V Live line check
UVL2 10 – 150V 1V 13V Dead line check
TSYN2 0.01 – 10.00s 0.01s 1.00s Synchronism check time
TLBD2 0.01 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.05s Voltage check time
TDBL2 0.01 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.05s Voltage check time
TW2 0.1 – 10.0s 0.1s 0.2s Reclosing signal output time
[ARC-CB] ONE/O1/O2/L1/L2 L1 Two breaker autoreclose mode
[VCHK] OFF/LB1/LB2/DB/SYN LB1 Energizing direction
Note : [ARC-CB] is set to "ONE" only when the relay is applied to one-breaker system. Trip and reclose
commands are output only for CB1(bus CB).
2.6.4 Autoreclose Output Signals
The autoreclose scheme logic has two output reclosing signals: ARC1 and ARC2. ARC1 is a
reclosing signal for a single breaker autoreclose or a reclosing signal for the busbar breaker in a
two-breaker autoreclose scheme.
ARC2 is the reclosing signal for the center breaker of the two-breaker autoreclose scheme.
The assignment of these reclosing signals to the output relays can be configured, which is done
using the setting menu. For more information on this, see Section 3.2.2 and 4.2.6.9. For the default
setting, see Appendix D.
⎯ 133 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2.7 Fault Locator

2.7.1 Application
The fault locator incorporated in the GRZ100 measures the distance to fault on the protected line
using local voltages and currents. The measurement result is expressed as a percentage (%) of the
line length and the distance (km) and is displayed on the LCD on the relay front panel. It is also
output to a local PC or RSM (relay setting and monitoring) system.
To measure the distance to fault, the fault locator requires minimum 3 cycles as a fault duration
time.
In distance to fault calculations, the change in the current before and after the fault has occurred is
used as a reference current, alleviating influences of the load current and arc voltage. As a result,
the location error is a maximum of ±2.5 km for faults at a distance of up to 100 km, and a
maximum of ±2.5% for faults at a distance between 100 km and 250 km.
Note: If abnormal settings far from actual transmission line impedance, e.g. resistance value
so larger than reactance value, etc., are done, the location error will be larger.
The fault locator cannot correctly measure the distance to fault during a power swing.
Fault location is enabled or disabled by setting "Fault locator" to "ON" or "OFF" on the "Fault
record" screen in the "Record" sub-menu.
2.7.2 Distance to Fault Calculation
The distance to fault x1 is calculated from equation (1) and (2) using the local voltage and current
of the fault phase and a current change before and after the fault occurrence. The current change
before and after the fault occurrence represented by Iβ" and Iα" is used as the reference current.
The impedance imbalance compensation factor is used to maintain high measuring accuracy even
when the impedance of each phase has great variations.
Distance calculation for phase fault (in the case of BC-phase fault)
Im(Vbc ⋅ Iβ") × L
x 1 = {I (R ⋅ I × Iβ") + R (X ⋅ I ⋅ Iβ")} × K (1)
m 1 bc e 1 bc bc
where,
Vbc = fault voltage between faulted phases = Vb − Vc
Ibc = fault current between faulted phases = Ib − Ic
Iβ" = change of fault current before and after fault occurrence = (Ib-Ic) − (ILb-ILc)
ILb, ILc = load current
R1 = resistance component of line positive sequence impedance
X1 = reactance component of line positive sequence impedance
Kbc = impedance imbalance compensation factor
Im( ) = imaginary part in parentheses
Re( ) = real part in parentheses
L = line length (km)
⎯ 134 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Distance calculation for earth fault (in the case of A-phase earth fault)
Im(Va ⋅ Iα") × L
x1 =
{Im(R1 ⋅ Iα ⋅ Iα" + R0 ⋅ I0S ⋅ Iα" + R0m ⋅ I0m ⋅ Iα") + Re(X1 ⋅ Iα ⋅ Iα" + X0 ⋅ I0S ⋅ Iα" + X0m ⋅ I0m ⋅ Iα")} × Ka (2)
where,
Va = fault voltage
Iα = fault current = (2Ia − Ib − Ic)/3
Iα" = change of fault current before and after fault occurrence
2Ia − Ib − Ic 2ILa − ILb − ILc
= −
3 3
Ia, Ib, Ic = fault current
ILa, ILb, ILc = load current
I0s = zero sequence current
I0m = zero sequence current of parallel line
R1 = resistance component of line positive sequence impedance
X1 = reactance component of line positive sequence impedance
R0 = resistance component of line zero sequence impedance
X0 = reactance component of line zero sequence impedance
R0m = resistance component of line mutual zero sequence impedance
X0m = reactance component of line mutual zero sequence impedance
Ka = impedance imbalance compensation factor
Im( ) = imaginary part in parentheses
Re( ) = real part in parentheses
L = line length (km)
Equations (1) and (2) are general expressions when lines are treated as having lumped constants
and these expressions are sufficient for lines within 100 km. For lines exceeding 100 km,
influences of the distributed capacitance must be considered. For this fault locator, the following
equation is used irrespective of line length to find the compensated distance x2 with respect to
distance x1 which was obtained in equation (1) or (2).
3
x1
x2 = x1 − k2 ⋅ 3 (3)
where,
k = propagation constant of the protected line = 0.001km-1 (fixed)
2.7.3 Starting Calculation
Calculation of the fault location is initiated by one of the following tripping signals.
• command protection trip
• zone 1 trip
• zone 2 trip
• zone 3 trip
⎯ 135 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• zone F trip
• zone 1 extension trip
• external main protection trip
2.7.4 Displaying Location
The measurement result is stored in the "Fault record" and displayed on the LCD of the relay front
panel or on the local or remote PC. For displaying on the LCD, see Section 4.2.3.1.
In the two-terminal line, the location is displayed as a distance (km) and a percentage (%) of the
line length.
“∗OB” and “∗NC” may display after the location result. These mean the followings:
∗OB: Fault point is over the boundary.
∗NC: Fault calculation has not converged.
In case of a fault such as a fault duration time is too short, the fault location is not displayed and the
"---" marked is displayed.
2.7.5 Setting
The setting items necessary for the fault location and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below. The settings of R0m and X0m are only required for the double circuit lines. The reactance
and resistance values are input in expressions on the secondary side of CT and VT.
When there are great variations in the impedance of each phase, equation (4) is used to find the
positive sequence impedance, zero sequence impedance and zero sequence mutual impedance,
while equation (5) is used to find imbalance compensation factors Kab to Ka.
When variations in impedance of each phase can be ignored, the imbalance compensation factor is
set to 100%.
Z1 = {(Zaa + Zbb + Zcc) − (Zab + Zbc + Zca)}/3

Z0 = {(Zaa + Zbb + Zcc) + 2(Zab + Zbc + Zca)}/3 (4)
Z0m = (Zam + Zbm + Zcm)/3
Kab = {(Zaa + Zbb)/2 − Zab}/Z1

Kbc = {(Zbb + Zcc)/2 − Zbc}/Z1
Kca = {(Zcc + Zaa)/2 − Zca}/Z1 (5)
Ka = {Zaa − (Zab + Zca)/2}/Z1
Kb = {Zbb − (Zbc + Zab)/2}/Z1
Kc = {Zcc − (Zca + Zab)/2}/Z1
The scheme switch [FL-Z0B] is used for zero sequence compensation in double circuit line.
The switch [FL-Z0B] is set to "OFF" when the current input to the earth fault measuring element is
compensated by residual current of the parallel line. When not, the switch [FL-Z0B] is set to "ON"
and Z0B-L and Z0B-R are set instead of R0m and X0m as follows:
Z0B-L = zero sequence back source impedance at local terminal
Z0B-R = zero sequence back source impedance at remote terminal
In double circuit line, however, it is recommended that the current input compensated by residual
⎯ 136 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
current of the parallel line is used in order for the earth fault measuring element to correctly
measure the impedance.
In the case of single circuit line, the switch [FL-Z0B] is set to "OFF".
Item Range Step Default Remarks
R1 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 0.20Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 1.0Ω) (*)
X1 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 2.00Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 10.0Ω)
R0 0.0 - 999.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 0.70Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 3.5Ω)
X0 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 6.80Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 34.0Ω)
R0m 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 0.20Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 1.0Ω)
X0m 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 2.00Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 10.0Ω)
Kab 80 - 120% 1% 100%
Kbc 80 - 120% 1% 100%
Kca 80 - 120% 1% 100%
Ka 80 - 120% 1% 100%
Kb 80 - 120% 1% 100%
Kc 80 - 120% 1% 100%
Line 0.0 - 399.9 km 0.1 km 50.0km Line length from local terminal to
junction if three-terminal application
FL-Z0B OFF/ON OFF
ZOB-L 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 2.00Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 10.0Ω)
ZOB-R 0.0 - 199.99 Ω 0.01 Ω 2.00Ω
(0.0 - 999.9 Ω 0.1 Ω 10.0Ω)
UVLS 50 – 100V 1V 77V Phase fault detection
case of 5A rating.
⎯ 137 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The GRZ100 models are classified into two types by their case size. Models 101, 102, 201, 204
and 301 have type A cases, while models 202, 203, 205, 206, 302, 303, 401 and 501 have type B
cases. Case outlines are shown in Appendix F.
The hardware structures of their models are shown in Figure 3.1.1.1 to Figure 3.1.1.5. The front
view shows the equipment without the human machine interface module.
The GRZ100 consists of the following hardware modules. The human machine interface module
is provided with the front panel. The hardware modules depend on the relay model.
• Transformer module (VCT)
• Signal processing module (SPM)
• Binary input and output module 1 (IO1)
• Human machine interface module (HMI)
• Binary output module 3 (IO3)
• Fault detector module (FD)
Front view
VCT IO#2 SPM IO#1

IO#1: IO1
IO#2: IO2
Figure 3.1.1.1 Hardware Structure (Model: 101)
⎯ 138 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
VCT IO#3 IO#2 SPM IO#1

IO#1: IO1(Model 102, 201, 301), IO8(Model 204)
IO#2: IO2
IO#3: IO3(Model 102, 201, 301), IO6(Model 204)
Figure 3.1.1.2 Hardware Structure (Model: 102, 201, 204, 301)
VCT IO#2 SPM IO#1 IO#3

IO#1: IO1(Model 202, 302), IO8(Model 205)
IO#2: IO2
Figure 3.1.1.3 Hardware Structure (Model: 202, 205, 302)
⎯ 139 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
VCT IO#2 SPM IO#4 IO#1 IO#3

IO#2: IO2
IO#4: IO4
Figure 3.1.1.4 Hardware Structure (Model: 203, 206, 303)
VCT IO#2 SPM IO#4 IO#1 IO#3

IO#1: IO1
IO#2: IO2
IO#3: IO4
IO#4: FD
Figure 3.1.1.5 Hardware Structure (Model: 401, 501)
⎯ 140 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The relationship between each model and module used is as follows:

Models 101 102, 201 202 204 205 206 203 401
Module 301 302 303 501
VCT × × × × × × × ×
SPM × × × × × × × ×
IO1 × × × × ×
IO2 × × × × × × × ×
IO3 ×
IO4 × × ×2 ×
IO5 × ×
IO6 ×
IO8 × × ×
FD ×
HMI × × × × × × × ×
Note: The VCT and SPM modules are not interchangeable among different models.
The hardware block diagrams of the GRZ100 using these modules are shown in Figure 3.1.1.6 and
Figure 3.1.1.8.
⎯ 141 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Binary I/O Module (IO#1)
DC/DC
Converter DC
supply
Transformer Signal Processing and
Module (VCT) Communication Module
(SPM)
Photocoupler
×15(IO1) or Binary input
I
×12(IO8)
CT×5 Analog A/D
filter Converter Auxiliary relay Binary output
MPU1 (High speed) Trip
AC input ×6(IO1) or command
×3(IO8)
V
VT×4
(or VT×5)
Auxiliary relay
Opt. I/F
or ×14 Binary output
Ethernet
External IRIG-B LAN I/F
clock Photocoupler
port
×3 Binary input
RS485
Transceiver
Remote PC
Human Machine Interface(HMI) Remote PC
Liquid crystal display Binary I/O Module (IO#3)

40characters×4lines Photocoupler
0(IO3) or Binary input
LEDs Operation keys ×7(IO6)
RS232C Monitoring jacks Auxiliary relay

Local PC I/F ×10(IO3) or Binary output
×6(IO6)
Figure 3.1.1.6 Hardware Block Diagram (Models 101, 102, 201, 202, 204, 205, 301 and 302)
⎯ 142 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
DC/DC
Converter DC
supply
(SPM)
Photocoupler
I
×12(IO8)
CT×5 Analog A/D
AC input ×6(IO1) or command
×3(IO8)
V
VT×4
(or VT×5)
Auxiliary relay
Opt. I/F
Ethernet
clock Photocoupler
port
×3 Binary input
RS485
Transceiver
Remote PC
Human Machine Interface(HMI) Remote PC
Liquid crystal display

40characters×4lines
Photocoupler
LEDs Operation keys
×10(IO5)
RS232C Monitoring jacks

I/F Auxiliary relay
Local PC
×14(IO4) or Binary output
×10(IO5)
Photocoupler
×3 Binary input
Auxiliary relay
×14 Binary output
Figure 3.1.1.7 Hardware Block Diagram (Models 203, 206 and 303)
⎯ 143 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
DC/DC
Converter DC
supply
(SPM)
Photocoupler
×15(IO1) Binary input
I
CT×5 Analog A/D
AC input ×6(IO1) command
V
VT×4
(or VT×5)
Auxiliary relay
Opt. I/F
Ethernet
clock Photocoupler
port
×3 Binary input
RS485
Transceiver
Remote PC
Human Machine Interface(HMI)

Remote PC
Liquid crystal display Binary I/O Module (IO#3)

40characters×4lines Photocoupler
×14 Binary input
LEDs Operation keys
Auxiliary relay
×14 Binary output
RS232C Monitoring jacks
Local PC I/F
Fault Detector Module (IO#4)
Filter A/D CPU
Binary output Trip

(High speed) command
×2
Binary output
×8
Figure 3.1.1.8 Hardware Block Diagram (Models 401 and 501)
⎯ 144 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.2 Transformer Module
The transformer module (VCT module) provides isolation between the internal and external AC
circuits through an auxiliary transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit
the electronic circuits. The AC input signals are as follows:
• three-phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic)
• residual current (3 I0)
• residual current of parallel line (3 I0m)
• three-phase voltages (Va, Vb and Vc)
• autoreclose reference voltage (Vs1)
• autoreclose reference voltage (Vs2)
Figure 3.1.2.1 shows a block diagram of the transformer module. There are 5 auxiliary CTs
mounted in the transformer module, and 4 or 5 auxiliary VTs depending on the relay model. (The
relationship between the relay model and number of AC input signals, is given in Table 3.2.1.1.)
"3I0m" in Figure 3.1.2.1 is the residual current from the parallel line in a double-circuit line, and is
used for mutual coupling compensation. Vs1 and Vs2 are the busbar or line voltages necessary for
the voltage and synchronism check for the autoreclose.
The transformer module is also provided with an IRIG-B port. This port collects the serial IRIG-B
format data from the external clock for synchronization of the relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B
port is insulated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler. A BNC connector is used as the input
connector.
Transformer module
Ia
Ib
Ic
3Io
3Iom
Signal
processing
module
Va
Vb
Vc
Vs1
Vs2
IRIG-B port
External
clock
BNC connector
Figure 3.1.2.1 Transformer Module
⎯ 145 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.3 Signal Processing Module
The signal processing and communication module (SPM) incorporates a signal processing
circuit and a communication control circuit. Figure 3.1.3.1 shows the block diagram.
The signal processing circuit consists of an analog filter, multiplexer, analog to digital (A/D)
converter, main processing unit (MPU1) and memories (RAM and ROM), and executes all kinds
of processing including protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analog filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current and voltage signals.
The SPM contains a lithium-ion battery, which should be removed at the end-of-life of the
product. The nominal backup time of a lithium-ion battery is one year at continuous use after the
shipment from the factory.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 16 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies
of 2400Hz (at 50Hz) and 2880Hz (at 60Hz).
The MPU1 carries out operations for the measuring elements and scheme logic operations for
protection, recording, displaying and signal transmission control. It implements 60 MIPS and
uses two RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) type 32-bit microprocessors.
The SPM can be provided with Optical interface or Ethernet LAN interface for serial
communication system.
Analog filter
A/D
converter MPU1 Other
Analog Analog filter Multiplexer
modules
input
RAM ROM
Analog filter Link with Serial

Optical I/F
(Option) communication
system
Ethernet LAN
I/F (Option)
Figure 3.1.3.1 Signal Processing and Communication Module
⎯ 146 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.4 Binary Input and Output Module
3.1.4.1 IO1 and IO8 Module

IO1 and IO8 provide a DC/DC converter, binary inputs and binary outputs for tripping.
As shown in Figure 3.1.4.1, the IO1 module incorporates a DC/DC converter, 15 photo-coupler
circuits (BI) for binary input signals and 6 auxiliary relays (TP-A1 to TP-C2) dedicated to the
circuit breaker tripping command.
As shown in Figure 3.1.4.2, the IO8 module incorporates a DC/DC converter, 12 photo-coupler
circuits (BI) for binary input signals and 3 auxiliary relays (TP) dedicated to the circuit breaker
tripping command. The 12 binary inputs have dedicated positive and negative inputs suitable for
double-pole switching.
The input voltage rating of the DC/DC converter is 24V, 48V, 110V/125V or 220V/250V. The
normal range of input voltage is −20% to +20%.
The six or three tripping command auxiliary relays are the high-speed operation type and have
one normally open output contact.
DC
(+) Line filter DC/DC
supply
(−) converter
FG
Photo-coupler
Auxiliary relay
BI
(high speed)
BI -
TP-A1
Binary BI TP-B1
input
signals TP-C1
(× 15) Tripping
command
TP-A2
BI
TP-B2
BI
TP-C2
Figure 3.1.4.1 IO1 Module
⎯ 147 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IO8 module
(+) Line filter DC/DC

DC (−) converter
supply
FG
Photo-coupler Auxiliary relay
(high speed)
BI
BI -TP
Tripping
Binary BI TP command
input (× 3)
signals TP
(× 12)
BI
BI
⎯ 148 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.4.2 IO2 Module

As shown in Figure 3.1.4.3, the IO2 module incorporates 3 photo-coupler circuits (BI) for binary
input signals, 14 auxiliary relays (BOs and FAIL ) for binary output signals and an RS485
transceiver.
The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally closed contact, and operates when a relay failure or
abnormality in the DC circuit is detected. Each BO has one normally open contact. BO13 is a
high-speed operation type.
The RS485 is used for the link with serial communication system such as RSM (Relay Setting and
Monitoring) or IEC60870-5-103 etc. The external signal is isolated from the relay internal signal.
IO2 module Auxiliary relay
BO
Photo-coupler
BI BO
Binary
input BI
signals Binary
BI FAIL output
(× 3)
signals
Auxiliary relay
(High speed) (BO × 13,
BO13 FAIL × 1)
RS-485
Link with serial
communication
system such as
RSM or
IEC103, etc.
⎯ 149 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.4.3 IO3 and IO4 Modules

The IO3 and IO4 modules are used to increase the number of binary outputs.
The IO3 module incorporates 10 auxiliary relays (BO) for binary outputs. The IO4 module
incorporates 14 auxiliary relays (BO) for binary outputs and 3 photo-coupler circuits (BI). All
auxiliary relays each have one normally open contact.
Auxiliary relay
BO
BO
Binary
output
BO signals
(× 10)
BO
Auxiliary relay
Photo-coupler BO
BI
Binary BO
input BI Binary
signals output
(× 3) BI signals
(× 14)
BO
BO
⎯ 150 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.4.4 IO5 and IO6 Modules

The IO5 and IO6 modules are used to increase the number of binary inputs and outputs.
The IO5 module incorporates 10 photo-coupler circuits (BI) for binary inputs and 10 auxiliary
relays (BO) for binary outputs. The IO6 module incorporates 7 photo-coupler circuits (BI) for
binary inputs and 6 auxiliary relays (BO) for binary outputs. All auxiliary relays each have one
normally open contact.
Auxiliary relay
Photo-coupler BO
BI
BO
BI Binary
Binary output
input signals
BO
signals (× 10)
(× 10) BI
BO
BI
Auxiliary relay
Photo-coupler
BO
BI
BO
BI Binary
output
Binary signals
input (× 6)
signals
(× 7) BO
BI
BO
BI
⎯ 151 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.5 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module
The operator can access the GRZ100 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.5.1, the HMI module has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 40 columns by 4 rows with a backlight and displays record, status and setting
data.
There are a total of 8 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when relay is in service.
TRIP Red Lit when trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when failure is detected.
TESTING Red Lit when automatic monitoring function is off.
LED1 Red Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when
relay operates.
relay operates.
relay operates.
relay operates.
LED1 to LED4 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
The model 100, 200 and 300 series provide the scheme switch [AOLED] which controls whether
the TRIP LED is lit or not by an output of alarm element such as THM_ALARM, OV∗2_ALARM
and UV∗2_ALARM, etc.
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD backlight.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" or "Variable Timer List" and setting it in
the window and the signals can be output to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the
"Signal List" or "Variable Timer List", see Appendix B or C.)
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
⎯ 152 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Liquid
crystal
display
Light
emitting
diode
204B-21-10
100/110/115/120V
Operation
Monitoring keys
jack
•
RS232C connector
Figure 3.1.5.1 Front Panel
⎯ 153 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.1.6 Fault Detector Module
Models 400 and 500 series have an independent fault detector in the form of a check relay, and
provide the highest order of security against non-power system fault tripping.
As shown in Figure 3.1.6.1, the fault detector module consists of an analog filter, multiplexer,
analog to digital (A/D) converter, main processing unit (MPU) and output auxiliary relays. The
entire processing from filtering to operation for the measuring elements and output control is
carried out within this module.
The fault detector module receives 3 voltage (Va, Vb, Vc) inputs and 4 current (Ia, Ib, Ic, 3I0)
inputs. The analog filter carries out low-pass filtering for the corresponding current and voltage
signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies of
2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
The MPU implements 60 MIPS and uses a RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) type 32-bit
microprocessor. Once the fault detector measuring elements start operating, the high-speed
auxiliary relays FD1 and FD2 operate.
The fault detector module incorporates 8 binary output auxiliary relays (BO1-BO8) each with one
normally open contact.
Fault detector module
Auxiliary relay
Analog filter (high speed)
FD1
Analog filter A/D MPU Tripping
Analog
Multiplexer converter command
input
FD2
Auxiliary relay
Analog filter
BO1
Binary
output
signals
BO8
Figure 3.1.6.1 Fault Detector Module
⎯ 154 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 Input Signals
AC input signals
Table 3.2.1.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for each of the GRZ100 models and their
respective input terminal numbers. The AC input signals are input via terminal block TB1 for all
models.
For single or double busbar applications, one voltage signal is required for voltage and
synchronism check of autoreclose function, while for one-and-a-half circuit breaker
arrangements, two voltage signals are required.
Table 3.2.1.1 AC Input Signals
Terminal No. GRZ100-101, 102, 201, 202, 203, GRZ100-301, 302, 303, 501
204, 205, 206, 401
1-2 A phase Current A phase Current
3-4 B phase Current B phase Current
5-6 C phase Current C phase Current
7-8 Residual Current (Protected line) Residual Current (Protected line)
9-10 Residual Current (Parallel line) Residual Current (Parallel line)
11-14 A phase Voltage A phase Voltage
12-14 B phase Voltage B phase Voltage
13-14 C phase Voltage C phase Voltage
15-16 Voltage for Autoreclose Voltage for Autoreclose
17-18 Voltage for Autoreclose
20 (earth) (earth)
Binary input signals

Input signals are configurable and depend on the GRZ100 models. See Appendix G for the default
settings and external connections.
The binary input circuit of the GRZ100 is provided with a logic level inversion function as shown
in Figure 3.2.1.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISW which can be used to select either
normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or
normally closed contact.
If a signal is not input, the function concerned is disabled.
Further, all binary input functions are programmable by PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)
function.
The operating voltage (pick-up) of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating
and 138V DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC
rating and 125V DC at 220/250V DC.
⎯ 155 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Table 3.2.1.2 Default Binary Input Allocation

Model Model
No. NO-ARC,NO-FD 1CB-ARC,NO-FD 2CB-ARC,NO-FD 1CB-ARC,FD 2CB-ARC,FD 1CB-ARC,NO-FD
101 102 201 202 203 301 302 303 401 501 204 205 206
BI1 CB1-A CB1-A
BI2 CB1-B CB1-B

BI3 CB1-C CB1-C
BI4 Signal Receive(CH1) Signal Receive(CH1)
BI5 Signal Receive(CH2) or Z1X init Signal Receive(CH2) or Z1X init

BI6 EXT VTF EXT VTF
BI7 DS-N/O DS-N/O

BI8 DS-N/C DS-N/C
BI9 Carrier block Carrier block
BI10 (SPARE) CB1 ready IND.RESET

BI11 (SPARE) (SPARE) CB2 ready (SPARE) CB2 ready PROT BLCOK
BI12 (SPARE) REC BLOCK Z1X INIT

BI13 IND.RESET --
BI14 M-prot Trip --

BI15 M-prot On --
BI16 EXT trip-A EXT trip-A
BI17 EXT trip-B EXT trip-B

BI18 EXT trip-C EXT trip-C
BI19 -- (SPARE) -- CB2-A (SPARE) CB2-A OCI BLOCK

BI20 -- (SPARE) -- CB2-B (SPARE) CB2-B EFI BLOCK
BI21 -- (SPARE) -- CB2-C (SPARE) CB2-C OC BLOCK
BI22 -- DEF BLOCK

BI23 -- EXTTP BLOCK
BI24 -- STUB BLOCK

BI25 -- SOTF BLOCK
BI26 -- -- ARC BLOCK
BI27 -- -- CB1 READY

BI28 -- -- CBF BLOCK
BI34 -- (SPARE) -- (SPARE) -- -- (SPARE)

(+) (−) Signal No.

[BISW1] BI1 command
BI1 Protection
BI function
BI1 "Norm" schemes
1 Programmable
"Inv"
[BISW2] BI2 command logic
BI2
BI2 "Norm" (PLC)
1
"Inv"
[BISWn] BIn command

BIn
BIn "Norm"
1
"Inv"
0V
Figure 3.2.1.1 Binary Input Circuit
⎯ 156 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The binary input signals of circuit breaker auxiliary contact are transformed as shown in Figure
3.2.1.2 to use in the scheme logic.
BI1_command 1536 CB1_CONT-A
& 101
BI2_command 1537 CB1_CONT-B CB-AND
BI3_command 1538 CB1_CONT-C
[Default setting] ≥1 102

CB-OR
& 1
& CB-DISCR
&
≥1
&
&
Figure 3.2.1.2 Circuit Breaker Signals Transformation
3.2.2 Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals vary depending on the relay
models. For all models, all outputs except the tripping command and relay failure signal can be
configured.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relay individually
or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit
with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2.1. The output circuit can be configured according to the
setting menu. Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
A 0.2s delayed drop-off timer can be attached to these assigned signals. The delayed drop-off time
is disabled by the scheme switch [BOTD].
The GRZ100 can implement transmission of signals to the remote terminal either by opening or
closing the output contact in response to a request from the telecommunication equipment. The
transmission signal is assigned to BO13 of IO2 by the binary output setting.
The relay failure contact closes the contact when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power
supply circuit is detected.
[BOTD]
Signal List +
"ON"
&
0 t Auxiliary relay
Appendix B 6 GATES &
≥1
or 0.2s
≥1
6 GATES
Figure 3.2.2.1 Configurable Output
⎯ 157 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
GRZ100 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logics on binary
signals. The sequence logics with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logics, etc. can be
produced by using the PC software “PLC editor tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs, binary outputs and LEDs, and the initiation trigger of disturbance
record are programmed by the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated
logics or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC editor tool. For PLC editor tool, refer
to PLC editor instruction manual.
Figure 3.2.3.1 Sample Screen of PLC Editor
⎯ 158 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is
suitable for implementing this automatic supervision function of the protection system. The
GRZ100 implements the automatic supervision function taking advantage of this feature based on
the following concept:
• The supervising function should not affect protection performance.
• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
• When a failure occurs, it should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.
Note: Automatic supervision function includes automatic monitor function and automatic test
function. For the terminology, refer to IEC IEV 448.
In a fault during automatic testing, the tripping outputs are blocked for approximately 100 ms.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing
The following items are supervised:
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC voltage and current inputs are monitored to check that the following equations are
satisfied and the health of the AC input circuits is checked.
• Zero sequence voltage monitoring
|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 ≥ 6.35 (V)
• Negative sequence voltage monitoring
|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 ≥ 6.35 (V)
where,
a = Phase shifter of 120°
• Zero sequence current monitoring
|Ia + Ib + Ic − In| / 3 ≥ 0.1 × Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) + k0
where,
In = Residual current
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 5% of rated current
These zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity
detection of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the
voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected
with the incorrect phase sequence.
The zero sequence current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures irrespective of
⎯ 159 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
the presence of the zero sequence current on the power system by introduction of the residual
circuit current.
Only zero sequence monitoring is carried out for the current input circuit, because zero sequence
monitoring with the introduction of the residual circuit current can be performed with higher
sensitivity than negative sequence monitoring.
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range and that
the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
The memories are monitored as follows depending on the type of the memory and checked that the
memory circuits are healthy:
• Random access memory monitoring: Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage
function.
• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
• Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancy between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer which is cleared periodically by software is provided and it is checked that the
software is running normally.
DC Supply monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored and checked that the
DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
3.3.3 CT Circuit Current Monitoring
The CT circuit is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of the
CT circuit is checked.
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) − 4 × Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) ≥ k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred
in the AC input circuit. This monitoring can be disabled by the scheme switch [CTSV].
3.3.4 Signal Channel Monitoring and Testing
Signal channel monitoring

In the PUP, POP or UOP schemes, when a trip permission signal is received consecutively for 10
seconds, this is considered to be an error of the signal channel and an alarm is issued. When the
signal modulation is a frequency shift method, if neither the trip permission signal nor the guard
signal can be received, an alarm of "Ch-R1. fail" is issued.
⎯ 160 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal channel testing

In the BOP scheme, the signal circuit including the remote end is automatically tested at a
prescribed time interval. Testing commences when a signal is transmitted from the local to remote
end. When the remote end receives the signal, it returns the signal on condition that there is no
fault on the power system. The terminal which is carrying out the testing checks that the
transmission path is healthy by receiving the return signal from the remote end within a prescribed
time after the carrier signal is transmitted from the local end.
If the signal cannot be received after the prescribed time, an alarm signal of carrier channel failure
is generated and a message " Remote 1 fail" is displayed on the LCD when manual testing.
To start the channel testing, the switch [CHMON] is set to "ON" and set the channel test interval.
The channel test interval can be set from 1 to 12 hours. And then, the OR logic output of the signal
No.225:EXT_CAR-S and the signal No.252:SBT is assigned the binary output BO13 of IO2.
Note 1: The time count for test interval is initialized when manual test is started or DC supply is turned on.
Note 2: Under any of the following conditions, the signal channel test does not start.
• BOP is not selected as the protection scheme.
• Telecommunication equipment is out-of-service.
• Scheme switch [CHMON] is set to "Off".
• Undervoltage elements operate.
• Circuit breaker is open.
3.3.5 Disconnector Monitoring
The disconnector is monitored because a disconnector contact signal is used for the stub fault
protection in a one-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement.
To monitor the disconnector, one pair of normally open contact and normally closed contact is
introduced. Disconnector failure is detected when both contacts are simultaneously in the open or
closed state for a prescribed period.
Monitoring is blocked by setting the scheme switch [LSSV] to "OFF". Default setting of the
[LSSV] is "OFF" to prevent a false failure detection when the disconnector contacts are not
introduced.
3.3.6 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording if a signal assigned. Table 3.3.6.1 summarizes the
supervision items and alarms.
The alarms are retained until the failure has recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting
is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watch Dog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
⎯ 161 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Table 3.3.6.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision item LCD message LED LED External Event record

"IN SERVICE" "ALARM" alarm message
AC input imbalance V0 err / V2 err /
(1) on/off (5) on (4)
monitoring Vo, V2, Io I0 err
CT circuit monitoring (1) on/off (6) on (4) CT err
A/D accuracy check A/D err off on (3) Relay fail
Memory monitoring (1)
Watch Dog Timer ⎯ off on (3) ⎯
DC supply monitoring ⎯ off (2) (3) Relay fail-A
Signal channel monitoring Ch-R1. fail (7) on -- (4) Ch-R1. fail
Disconnector monitoring DS fail on on (4) DS fail
VT monitoring VT fail on on (4) VTF
(1) There are various messages such as "xxxerr" and "xxxfail "as shown in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2) It depends on the degree of voltage drop.
(3) The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
(4) The binary output relay "FAIL", etc. operates if the supervision function is applied.
(5) The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK".
(6) The LED is on when the scheme switch [CTSV] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM & BLK".
(7) It is displayed only when manual testing.
3.3.7 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists and is restored when the failure is removed:
• A/D accuracy checking
• Memory monitoring
• Watch Dog Timer
• DC supply monitoring
The trip function is valid when a failure is detected by tripping output monitoring or disconnector
monitoring.
When a failure is detected by AC input imbalance monitoring or CT circuit current monitoring, the
scheme switch [SVCNT] or [CTSV] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked
and an alarm is output, or, if only an alarm is output. The CT circuit current monitoring can be
disabled by the [CTSV].
3.3.8 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the automatic supervision and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
[LSSV] OFF/ON OFF Disconnector monitoring
[SVCNT] ALM&BLK/ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and/or blocking selection
[CHMON] OFF/ON ON Carrier monitoring/testing
Chann 1-24 hours 1 hour 8 hours Signal channel testing interval
[CTSV] OFF/ALM&BLK/ALM OFF CT circuit monitoring
⎯ 162 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.4 Recording Function

The GRZ100 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC. For
samples of LCD screen, see Section 4.2.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRZ100, a tripping command of the
external main protection or PLC command by user-setting (max. 4) and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time of fault occurrence
Faulted phase
Tripping phase
Tripping mode
Fault location
Relevant events
Power system quantities
Up to 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have been
stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.
To be precise, this is the time at which a tripping command has been output, and thus it is
approximately 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault.
Fault phase
The faulted phase is displayed when tripping by a distance measuring element. The fault phase is
determined by the "fault phase detection logic". However, the fault phase depends on the setting of
the phase selection element UVC.
In case of the tripping by a backup protection, the fault phase is not displayed and the "---" marked
is displayed.
Tripping phase
This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.
Tripping mode
This shows the protection scheme that the tripping command is output.
Fault location
The fault location is displayed against the fault within the protected line tripped by a distance
measuring element. The distance to the fault point calculated by the fault locator is recorded.
⎯ 163 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The distance is expressed in km and as a percentage (%) of the line length.

For the fault locator, see Section 2.7.4.
Relevant events
Such events as autoreclose, re-tripping following the reclose-on-to-a fault or autoreclose and
tripping for evolving faults are recorded with time-tags.
Power system quantities

The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded. The pre-fault
power system quantities are values at 10 seconds before tripping.
(However, the power system quantities are not recorded for evolving faults.)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage for autoreclose (Vs1, Vs2)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase current (Iab, Ibc, Ica)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current (I1, I2, I0)
- Magnitude of parallel line zero sequence current (I0m)
- Resistive and reactive component of phase impedance (Ra, Rb, Rc, Xa, Xb, Xc)
- Resistive and reactive component of phase-to-phase impedance (Rab, Rbc, Rca, Xab, Xbc,
Xca)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage as a reference phase
angle. Phase impedance and phase-to-phase impedance are the ones seen by the reactance
elements.
⎯ 164 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.4.2 Event Recording
The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. The user
can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event items can be
assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On” (only
recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by setting.
The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger events”
is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On” mode.
The name of an event cannot be set on LCD. It can set only by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters
can be set and can be viewed on both of the LCD and RSM Setting(view) screen. But the LCD
screen of event record displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11
characters are set.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix H.
BITRN 0 - 128 1 100 Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events
EV1 – EV128 0 - 3071 Assign the signal number
Up to 480 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 480 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when overcurrent or undervoltage starter elements operate or a

tripping command is output, or PLC command by user-setting (max. 4) is outputted. The records
include 8 analog signals (Va, Vb, Vc, Ia, Ib, Ic, 3I0, 3I0m), 32 binary signals and the dates and
times at which recording started. Any binary signal in shown in Appendix B can be assigned by
the binary signal setting of disturbance record. The default setting of binary signal is shown in
Appendix H.
The name of binary signal can be set only by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set and can
be viewed on both of the LCD and RSM Setting(view) screen. But the waveform data analysis
screen of disturbance record displays up to 11 characters of them. Therefore, it is recommended
the maximum 11 characters are set.
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and the post-fault recording time can be set between
0.1 and 3.0s and the default setting is 1.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time and the relay model. The
typical number of records stored in 50Hz and 60Hz power system is shown in Table 3.4.3.1.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.3.1 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s

50Hz 40 20 15 10 8 7 6
60Hz 40 20 10 9 7 5 5
⎯ 165 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Timer 0.1-3.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s Post-fault recording time
OCP-S 0.5-250.0 A 0.1 A 10.0 A Overcurrent detection (phase fault)
(0.1-50.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A) (*)
OCP-G 0.5-250.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A Overcurrent detection (earth fault)
(0.1-50.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A)
UVP-S 0-132 V 1V 88 V Undervoltage detection (phase fault)
UVP-G 0-76 V 1V 51 V Undervoltage detection (earth fault)
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are for the case of a 1A rating. Other current values are
for the case of a 5A rating.
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter elements listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches with identical names with the starter
elements except the switch [TRIP].

TRIP OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
OCP-S OFF/ON ON Start by OCP-S operation
OCP-G OFF/ON ON Start by OCP-G operation
UVP-S OFF/ON ON Start by UVP-S operation
UVP-G OFF/ON ON Start by UVP-G operation
⎯ 166 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.5 Metering Function

The GRZ100 performs continuous measurement of the analog input quantities. The currents and
voltages at remote terminals can be also displayed. The measurement data shown below is updated
every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage for autoreclose (Vs1, Vs2)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase current (Iab, Ibc, Ica)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current (I1, I2, I0)
- Magnitude of parallel line zero sequence current (I0m)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%) except for model 400 and 500 series
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Active power and reactive power (P, Q)
- Frequency
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,
where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
determined by the setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio and VT
ratio as well. For the setting method, see "Setting the line parameters" in 4.2.6.7.
The signing of active and reactive power flow direction can be set positive for either power
sending or power receiving. The signing of reactive power can be also set positive for either
lagging phase or leading phase. For the setting method, see 4.2.6.6.
⎯ 167 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and
Monitoring), IEC103 communication via an RS485, optical fibre or Ethernet LAN etc.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of
the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 4.1.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diode (LED), operation keys, view and reset keys, monitoring jack and RS232C
connector.
LCD
LED
204B-21-10
100/110/115/120V
Operation
keys
Monitoring
jack
RS232C
connector
Figure 4.1.1.1 Front Panel
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 4-line, 40-character back light, provides the user with detailed
information of the relay interior such as records, status and setting. The LCD screen is normally
unlit, but pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than
VIEW and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens go OFF by pressing the RESET key or END key. Leaving any display without
operation for 5 minutes or more causes the back light to go OFF.
⎯ 168 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
LED
There are 8 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
TESTING Red Lit when disabling automatic monitoring function and operating a
binary output forcibly, etc..
relay operates.
relay operates.
relay operates.
relay operates.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off.
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, to input or
change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
c 0-9, −: Used to enter a selected number, numerical values and a text string. Keys 2, 4, 6 and
8 marked with , , , and are also used to enter a text string.
d , : Used to move lines displayed within a screen
e CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen
f END : Used to end entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the display
g ENTER : Used to store or establish entries
VIEW and RESET keys
Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault" and "Auto-
supervision".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
Monitoring jacks
The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" in
Appendix B and setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or output
to an oscillo-scope via a monitoring jack.
RS232C connector
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector (straight type) for serial RS232C connection.
This connector is used to connect with a local personal computer.
⎯ 169 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following 3 individual interfaces are mounted as the communication ports:

• RS232C port
• Serial communication port (RS485 port, optional Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN etc.)
• IRIG-B port
(1) RS232C port

This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and
mounted on the front panel. By connecting with a personal computer using this connector, setting
operation and display functions can be performed on the personal computer.
(2) Serial communication port

One or two serial communication ports can be provided. In the single-port type, it is connected to
the RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring system) via the protocol converter G1PR2 or
IEC60870-5-103 communication via BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to
connect between relays and to construct a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in
Section 4.4.)
In the case of the two-port type, one port (COM1) can be used for the relay setting and monitoring
(RSM) system or IEC60870-5-103 communication, while the other port (COM2) is used for
IEC60870-5-103 communication only.
Screw terminal for RS485, ST connector for fibre optic or RJ45 connector for Ethernet LAN
(10Base-T) is provided on the back of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.2.1.
(3) IRIG-B port

The IRIG-B port is mounted on the transformer module. This port collects serial IRIG-B format
data from the external clock to synchronize the relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated
from the external circuit by using a photocoupler. A BNC connector is used as the input connector.
This port is provided on the back of the relay and Figure 4.1.2.1 shows the location of this
connector.
⎯ 170 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
36-pin terminal block

20-pin terminal block
IRIG BNC
connector
RS485
connection
terminal
RJ45 connector
(option)
Relay rear view (Case Type A)
IRIG BNC
connector
RS485
connection
RJ45 connector terminal
ST connector for serial
(option)
communication (option)
Relay rear view (Case Type B)
Figure 4.1.2.1 Locations of Communication Port
⎯ 171 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples of typical model.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation

When the GRZ100 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the LCD will display the "Metering",
"Latest fault" and "Auto-supervision" screens in turn. The last two screens are displayed only
when there is some data. These are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the
menu screens.
Ｍｅｔｅｒｉｎｇ１０８／Ｄｅｃ／１９９７２２：５６
Ｖａｂ２２０．０ｋＶＩａ１．０５ｋＡ＋３７０．２５ＭＷ
Ｖｂｃ２１９．８ｋＶＩｂ１．０５ｋＡ－３０．１３ＭＶａｒ
Ｖｃａ２２０．０ｋＶＩｃ１．０５ｋＡ６０．１Ｈｚ
Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Displays in tripping
Ｌａｔｅｓｔｆａｕｌｔ０８／Ｄｅｃ／１９９７２２：５６：３８．２５０
ＰｈａｓｅＡＮＴｒｉｐＡ
Ｚ１，ＣＲＴ
５９．３ｋｍ（３８％）
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is initiated when the LCD is off, the "Latest fault" screen
is displayed on the LCD automatically and the red "TRIP" LED and, if signals assigned to trigger
by tripping, other configurable LEDs light.
Press the VIEW key to display the digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Auto-supervision" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED4) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED4 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.
⎯ 172 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation
LED lighting status

Operation "TRIP" LED Configurable LED
(LED1 - LED4)
Step 1 Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit turn off
Step 2 Then, press the RESET key in short

period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off
If the tripping command is initiated when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen
remains displayed and the red "TRIP" LED lights.
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.
• Press the RESET key to turn off the "TRIP" LED and LCD.
Displays in automatic supervision operation

Ａｕｔｏ－ｓｕｐｅｒｖｉｓｉｏｎ０８／Ｄｅｃ／１９９７２２：５６
ＤｌＯｅｒｒ
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED4) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an
alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
⎯ 173 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET key
again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED4 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.
While any of the menu screen is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
• Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRZ100. The main menu has five sub-menus,
"Record", "Status", "Setting (view)", "Setting (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu
hierarchy, see Appendix E.
⎯ 174 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Menu Record Fault record

Event record
Disturbance record
Automatic test
Autoreclose count
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync source
Clock adjustment
Direction
Setting (view) Version

Description
Communication
Record
Status
Protection
Binary input
Binary output
LED
Setting (change) Password

Description
Communication
Record
Status
Protection
Binary input
Binary output
LED
Test Switch
Manual test
Binary output
Timer
Logic circuit
Figure 4.2.2.1 Relay Menu
⎯ 175 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault record, event record and disturbance record can be displayed or
erased. Furthermore, autoreclose and automatic test functions can be displayed in a counter form
or reset.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronization (IRIG-B, RSM or IEC) and
adjusts the clock.
Setting (view)
The "Setting (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name, and the current settings of relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate, etc. in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Setting (change)
The "Setting (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate, etc. in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches, to test the trip circuit, to forcibly operate binary
output relays, to measure variable timer time and to observe the binary signals in the logic circuit.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
M ENU
1=Re cord 2=Status
3=Se tting(view) 4=Setting(change)
5=Te st
To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to turn
off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer of
the screen, screen title and total number of lines of the screen. The last item is not displayed for all
screens. "/6" displayed on the far left, for example, means that the screen is in the sixth hierarchical
layer, while 1/8 displayed on the far right means that the screen has eight lines excluding the top
line and the cursor is on the first line.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the and keys.
⎯ 176 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/6 Scheme switch 1 /1 0
ARC-EXT 0=Off 1=On 0
ARC-DEF 0=Off 1=On 0
ARC-BU 0=Off 1=On 0
VCHK 0=Off 1=LB 2=DB 3=SY 1
ARC-SM 0=Off 1=S2 2 =S3 3 =S4 0
ARC-SUC 0=Off 1=On 0
VTPHSEL 1=A 2=B 3=C 1
VT-RATE 1=PH/G 2=PH/PH 1
3PH-VT 1=Bus 2=Line 1
UARCSW 1=P1 2=P2 3 =P 3 1
To move to the lower screen or move from the left side screen to the right screen in Appendix E,
select the appropriate number on the screen. To return to the higher screen or move from the right
side screen to the left side screen, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same depth, first return to the higher screen and then move to the
lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Records" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
autoreclosing output count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:
• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
• Select 1 (= Record) to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 Rec ord
1 =Faul t record 2=Event record
3 =Dist urbance record 4 = A u t o m a t i c t es t
5 =Auto reclose count
• Select 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.

/ 2 Fa u l t r e c o rd
1=Display 2=Clear
• Select 1 (= Display) to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the
top in new-to-old sequence.
/3 Fau l t re co rd 1/ 8
#1 16 / Oc t/ 19 97 18:13:57.031
#2 20 / Se p/ 19 97 15:29 :22 .463
#3 04 / Ju l/ 19 97 11:54:53.977
• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press the
⎯ 177 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record. For displayed items, see Section 3.4.1.
／４Ｆａｕｌｔｒｅｃｏｒｄ＃１３／＊
Date and Time ０４／Ｎｏｖ／１９９７１５：０９：５８．４４２
Fault phase ＰｈａｓｅＡＢＣＮＴｒｉｐＡＢＣ Tripping
phase
Tripping mode Ｚ１
Fault location ＊＊＊＊．＊ｋｍ（＊＊＊＊％）＊ＯＢ＊ＮＣ
Ｐｒｅｆａｕｌｔｖａｌｕｅｓ
Ｖａ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉａ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｂ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｂ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｃ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｃ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖａｂ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉａｂ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｂｃ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｂｃ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｃａ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｃａ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｓ１＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊
Ｖ１＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ０．０° Ｉ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ２＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ０＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉ０＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Power system
quantities Ｉ０ｍ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｆａｕｌｔｖａｌｕｅｓ
Ｖａ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉａ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｂ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｂ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｃ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｃ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖａｂ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉａｂ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｂｃ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｂｃ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｃａ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｃａ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｓ１＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊
Ｖ１＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ０．０° Ｉ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ２＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ０＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉ０＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ０ｍ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｒａ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω Ｘａ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω
Ｒｂ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω Ｘｂ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω
Ｒｃ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω Ｘｃ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω
Ｒａｂ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω Ｘａｂ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω
Ｒｂｃ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω Ｘｂｃ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω
Ｒｃａ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω Ｘｃａ＊＊＊＊．＊＊ Ω
ＴＨＭ＊＊＊＊．＊％
０４／Ｎｏｖ／１９９７１５：０９：５９．８１７
Relevant events ＴＰＡＲ１，ＴＰＡＲ２
０４／Ｎｏｖ／１９９７１５：１０：００．０２９
Ｚ１，ＣＲＴ，ＦＴ１、ＦＴ２
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.
To clear fault records, do the following:
• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.
• Select 2 (= Clear) to display the following confirmation screen.
/2 Fault record
Clear all fault records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
⎯ 178 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Press the ENTER (= Yes) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display events records, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.
/ 2 E v e n t ｒe c oｒd
1 = Disp lay 2=Clear
• Select 1 (= Display) to display the events with date and time from the top in new-to-old
sequence.
/3 Eve nt record 2/96
16/Oct /1998 23:18:04.294 Trip Off
16/Oct /1998 23:18:03.9 13 Trip On
12/Feb /1998 03:51:37.622 Rly.set change
To clear event records, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.
/2 Event record
Clear all event records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
• Press the ENTER (= Yes) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of the disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only(*); the LCD displays
only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

• Select 3 (= Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
⎯ 179 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/ 2 Dis t u rban c e reco rd

1 = Display 2=Clear
• Select 1 (= Display) to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/3 Dis t ur ba nc e reco rd 3 /12
#1 16 / Oc t/ 19 97 18: 13:57.031
#2 20 / Se p/ 19 97 15: 29 :22 .463
#3 04 / Ju l/ 19 97 11: 54:53.977
To clear disturbance records, do the following:

• Select 3 (=Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/2 Disturbance record
Clear all disturbance records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
• Press the ENTER (= Yes) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile
memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Automatic Test

The "Automatic test" screens show the cumulative number of times the automatic test has been
carried out(*) and the automatic test interval(**).
(*) The manual tests described in Section 4.2.7.2 are also added to these counts.
(**) For setting the test interval, see Section 4.2.6.5.
The telecommunication channel test is carried out in all the GRZ100 models when BOP command
protection is selected.
The test count and test interval can be displayed or the test count can be reset to zero as follows.
To display the count and interval of the telecommunication channel test on the LCD, do
the following:
• Select 1 (= Record) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Record" screen.
• Select 4 (= Automatic test) to display the "Automatic test" screen.
/ 2 A u t o m a t i c t es t
1=Telecomm channel test
• Select 1 (= Telecomm channel test) to display the "Telecomm channel test" screen.
⎯ 180 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/3 Telecomm channel test

1=Display count & interval
2=Reset count
• Select 1 (= Display counts & interval) to display the test count and test interval of the
telecommunication channel.

Test count: 11
Test interval: 12 hours
To reset the telecommunication channel test count, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Reset count) on the "Telecom channel test" screen to display the following
confirmation screen.

1=Display count & interval
2=Reset count
• Press the ENTER key to reset the test count to zero and return to the previous screen.
4.2.3.5 Displaying Autoreclose Count

The autoreclose output counts can be displayed or can be reset to zero as follows.
To display the autoreclose output counts on the LCD, do the following (for models 200 to 500):
• Select 1 (= Record) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select 5 (= Autoreclose count) to display the "Autoreclose count" screen.
/2 Autoreclos e coun t
1 = Disp lay 2=Reset
• Select 1 (= Display) to display the autoreclose count.
/3 Autoreclose count
SPAR TPAR
CB1 [ 46] [ 46]
SPAR and TPAR mean single-phase and three-phase autoreclose respectively.
To reset the autoreclose output count, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Reset) on the "Autoreclose count" screen to display the "Reset autoreclose count"
screen.
/3 Reset autoreclo s e count
1=CB1
⎯ 181 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Select 1 (=CB1) to display the following confirmation screen.

/ 3 Rese t aut o r eclo s e coun t
Reset counts?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
• Press the ENTER key to reset the count to zero and return to the previous screen.
4.2.4 Displaying Status Information
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status conditions can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronization source
Load current direction
This data is updated every second.
This sub-menu is also used to adjust the time of the internal clock.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following.
• Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
／１Ｓｔａｔｕｓ
１＝Ｍｅｔｅｒｉｎｇ２＝ＢｉｎａｒｙＩ／Ｏ
３＝Ｒｅｌａｙｅｌｅｍｅｎｔ４＝Ｔｉｍｅｓｙｎｃｓｏｕｒｃｅ
５＝Ｃｌｏｃｋａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ６＝Ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
• Select 1 (= Metering) to display the "Metering" screen.

／２Ｍｅｔｅｒｉｎｇ１２／Ｆｅｂ／１９９８２２：５６３／１７
Ｖａ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉａ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｂ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｂ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｃ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｃ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖａｂ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉａｂ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｂｃ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｂｃ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖｃａ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉｃａ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖs１＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖs２＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ１＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ０．０° Ｉ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ２＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ０＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊° Ｉ０＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ０ｍ＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
ＴＨＭ＊＊＊＊．＊％
Ⅰ２／Ⅰ１＊＊．＊＊
Ａｃｔｉｖｅｐｏｗｅｒ＋＊＊＊＊．＊＊ＭＷ
Ｒｅａｃｔｉｖｅｐｏｗｅｒ－＊＊＊＊．＊＊Ｍｖａｒ
Ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ＊＊．＊Ｈｚ
Metering data is expressed as primary values or secondary values depending on the setting. For
setting, see Section 4.2.6.6.
⎯ 182 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
• Select 2 (= Binary I/O) to display the binary input and output status.
/2 Bin ary input & outp ut 3/ 8

Input ( I O# 1 ) [00 0 000 000 000 ]
Input ( I O# 2 ) [00 0 ]
Input ( I O# 3 ) [00 0 000 000 0 ]
I n p u t ( I O# 4 ) [0 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 1 - t r i p ) [0 00 000 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 2 ) [0 00 000 000 000 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 3 ) [0 00 000 000 0 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 4 ) [0 00 000 000 000 00 ]
The display format is shown below.
[ ]
Input (IO#1) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 — — —
Input (IO#2) BI16 BI17 BI18 — — — — — — — — — — — —
Input (IO#3) BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 — — — — —
Input (IO#4) BI34 BI35 BI36 — — — — — — — — — — — —
Output (IO#1-trip) TPA1 TPB1 TPC1 TPA2 TPB2 TPC2 — — — — — — — — —
Output (IO#2) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 FAIL BO13 —
Output (IO#3) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 — — — — —
Output (IO#4) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 —
Lines 1 to 4 show the binary input status. BI1 to BI36 correspond to each binary input signal. For
the binary input signals, see Appendix G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit. IO#1 to IO#4 in the table indicate the name of the module
containing the binary input circuits.
Lines 5 to 8 show the binary output status. TPA1 to TPC2 of line 4 correspond to the tripping
command outputs. FAIL of line 6 correspond to the relay failure output. Other outputs expressed
with BO1 to BO14 are configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1"
or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energized when the
status is "1".
IO#1 to IO#4 in the table indicate the names of the module containing the binary output relays.
To display all the lines, press the and keys.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
• Select 3 (= Relay element) to display the status of the relay elements.
⎯ 183 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／２Ｒｅｌａｙｅｌｅｍｅｎｔ３／＊＊
ＺＧ［０００００００００００００００］
ＺＧ２［００００００００００００］
ＺＳ［０００００００００００００００］
ＺＳ２［００００００００００００］
ＢＬ［００００００００００００］
ＯＣ［０００００００００００００００］
ＤＥＦ，ＯＶ［０００００］
ＯＶ１［００００００］
ＯＶ２［００００００］
ＵＶ１［０００００００００００００００］
ＵＶ２［０００］
ＵＶ３［０００００００００］
ＵＶ４［０００００００００］
ＣＢＦ，ＰＳＢ，ＯＳＴ，ＢＣＤ［００００００００００００００］
ＰＳＢ，ＴＨＭ［００００００００］
Ａｕｔｏｒｅｃｌｏｓｅ［０００００００００］
The display format is as shown below.

[ ]
ZG A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
Z1G Z1XG Z2G Z3G Z4G
ZG2 A B C A B C A B C A B C
ZFG ZR1G ZR2G ZNDG
ZS AB BC CA AB BC CA AB BC CA AB BC CA AB BC CA
Z1S Z1XS Z2S Z3S Z4S
ZS2 AB BC CA AB BC CA AB BC CA AB BC CA
ZFS ZR1S ZR2S ZNDS
BL AB BC CA AB BC CA A B C A B C
— — —
BFS BRS BFG BRG
OC A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
OCH OCD OC OCI OCDP
DEF, OV DEFF DEFR EFI EF OVG — — — — — — — — — —
OV1 AB BC CA AB BC CA
OVS1 OVS2
OV2 A B C A B C
OVG1 OVG2
UV1 A B C AB BC CA AB BC CA A B C A B C
UVC UVFS UVLS UVFG UVLG
UV2 A B C
UVPWI
UV3 AB BC CA AB BC CA AB BC CA
UVS1 UVS2 UVSBLK
UV4 A B C A B C A B C
UVG1 UVG2 UVGBLK
CBF, PSB, OST A B C AB BC CA AB BC CA ZM ZN DOCNF DOCNR BCD —
BCD OCBF PSBSOUT PSBSIN OST
PSB, THM A B C A B C A T
PSBGOUT PSBGIN THM
Autoreclose OVB UVB SYN1 OVL1 UVL1 SYN2 OVL2 UVL2 3PLL — — — — — —
⎯ 184 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Lines 1 to 4 show the operation status of distance measuring elements for earth faults and phase
faults respectively. Line 5 shows the operation status of blinder elements.
Lines 6 to 9 show the status of overcurrent, directional earth fault and overvoltage elements. Lines
10 to 13 show the status of undervoltage elements. Line 14 shows the status of the overcurrent
element for breaker failure protection, power swing blocking element, out-of-step protection
element and broken conductor detection element. Line 15 shows the status of the power swing
blocking element and thermal overload element.
Line 16 shows the status of elements used for autoreclose.
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
To display all the lines on the LCD, press the and keys.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronization Source

The inner clock of the GRZ100 can be synchronized with external clocks such as the IRIG-B time
standard signal clock or RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) clock or by an
IEC60870-5-103 control system. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active or
inactive and which clock the relay is synchronized with, do the following:
• Select 4 (= Time sync source) to display the status of time synchronization sources.
／２Ｔｉｍｅｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎｓｏｕｒｃｅ
＊ＩＲＩＧ：Ａｃｔｉｖｅ
ＲＳＭ：Ｉｎａｃｔｉｖｅ
ＩＥＣ：Ｉｎａｃｔｉｖｅ
The asterisk on the far left shows that the inner clock is synchronized with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the inner clock runs locally.
For the setting time synchronization, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Adjusting the Time

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
• Select 5 (= Clock adjustment) to display the setting screen.
/2 1 2/Feb /1998 22:56:19 [Local] 1/ 5
Minute ( 0- 59): 41
Hour ( 0- 23): 22
Day ( 1- 31): 12
Month ( 1- 12): 2
Year ( 1990- 2089): 1998
Line 1 shows the current date, time and time synchronization source with which the internal clock
is synchronized. The time can be adjusted only when [Local] is indicated on the top line, showing
that the clock is running locally. When [IRIG] or [RSM] or [IEC] is indicated, the following
adjustment is invalid.
• Enter a numerical value within the specified range for each item and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
⎯ 185 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END key is pressed, "Error: Incorrect
date" is displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Adjust again.
4.2.4.6 Displaying the Direction of Load Current

To display the direction of load current on the LCD, do the following:
• Select 6 (= Direction) to display the status of the relay elements.
／２Ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ＰｈａｓｅＡ：Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
ＰｈａｓｅＢ：Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
ＰｈａｓｅＣ：Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
Note: If the load current is less than 0.04xIn, the direction is expressed as “----“.
The BFL element is used to detect the direction of load current and shared with blinder. (See
Figure 2.4.1.13.)
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Setting (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Setting
(change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address in the RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter a number on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.
• Press 3 (= Setting (view)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (view)" screen.
/1 Setting(view)
1=Version 2=Description 3=Comm.
4=Record 5=Status 6=Protection
7=Binary input 8=Binary output 9=LED
• Press 1 (= Version) on the "Setting (view)" screen and the "Relay version" screen appears.
⎯ 186 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／２Ｒｅｌａｙｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ３／６
Ｒｅｌａｙｔｙｐｅ：＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
ＳｅｒｉａｌＮｏ．：＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Ｍａｉｎｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅ：＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
ＦＤｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅ：＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
ＰＬＣｄａｔａ：＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊（＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊）
ＩＥＣ１０３ｄａｔａ：＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊（＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊）
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comm.", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary input", "Binary output"
and "LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Setting (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Setting (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Address in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 communication
Recording
Status
Protection
Binary input
Binary output
LED
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Setting (view)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows.
- To enter a selective number
- To enter numerical values
- To enter a text string
To enter a selected number

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform the setting as follows.
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/3 Metering 3 /3
Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1
Power (P/Q) 1=Send 2=Receive 1
Current 1=Lag 2=Lead 1
• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Enter the selected number. (Numbers other than those displayed cannot be entered.)
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry and the cursor will move to the next line below.
⎯ 187 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
(On the lowest line, the entered number blinks in reverse video.)
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper menu.
To correct the entered number, do the following:
• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new number.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new number.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any of the entry is confirmed by pressing the
ENTER key, all the entries performed so far on the screen concerned are canceled and
screen returns to the upper one.
When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.

The number to the right of "Current No. = " shows the current setting.
/6 Protection scheme
1=3 ZONE 2 =Z1 -EXT 3 =PUP 4 =POP 5 =UOP 6 =BOP
7=P O P + D E F 8 = U O P + D E F 9 = B O P + D E F 10 = P U P + D E F
C urrent No.= 2 Select No. =
• Enter a number to the right of "Select No. = ". (Numbers other than those displayed cannot be
entered.)
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry and the entered number blinks in reverse video.
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered number, do the following:
• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new number.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, enter the new number.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform the setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/7 Distance 1/36
Z1S ( 0.01- 50.00): 0.01 _ Ω
Z1XS ( 0.01- 50.00): 0.01 Ω
Z1Sθ1( 0- 45): 0 deg
• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Enter the numerical value.
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry and the cursor will move to the next line below.
(If a numerical value outside the displayed range is entered, "Error: Out of range" appears on
the top line and the cursor remains on the line. Press the CANCEL key to clear the entry.)
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
⎯ 188 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following:

• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any of the entry is confirmed by pressing the
ENTER key, all the entries performed so far on the screen concerned are canceled and
screen returns to the upper one.
To enter a text string

Text strings are entered in the bracket on the "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
To select a character, use keys 2, 4, 6 and 8 to move blinking cursor down, left, right and up, "→"
and "←" on each of lines 2 to 4 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22
characters can be entered within the brackets.
/3 Plant name [ _ ]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ()[]@_ ← →
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz { } * / + - < = > ←→
0123456789 !” #$%&’ :;,.^` ←→
• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.
• Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.
• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the bracket on
the top line.
• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the followings:
• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key, and enter the new
character.
• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To complete the setting

Even after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Setting (change)" sub-menu.
/2 ******************
Change settings ?
Enter= Yes Cancel=No
• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
⎯ 189 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel the entries. In the latter case, the screen turns
back to the setting screen to enable reentries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made
so far and to turn to the "Setting (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of setting changes, password protection can be set as follows;
• Press 4 (= Setting (change)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (change)"
screen.
/1 Setting(change )
1=Password 2=Description 3 =C o m m.
• Press 1 (= Password) to display the "Password" screen.
/2 Password
1=Setting
2=Test
• Press 1 (= Setting) to set the password for the setting change.
/2 Password
Input new password [ ]
Retype new password [ ]
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets of "Input new password" and press the ENTER
key.
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets of "Retype new password" and
press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different
from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password"
screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Mismatch-password unchanged"
Reentry is then requested.
• Press 2 (= Test) on the "Password" screen to set the password for the test.
/2 Test
Input new password [ ]
Retype new password [ ]
Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
⎯ 190 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
If 4 (= Setting (change)) is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" sub-menu screens.
Password
Input password [ ]
Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Setting (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRZ100 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Description
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
screen.
• Press 2 (= Description) to display the "Description" screen.
/2 Description
1 =P lant na me 2=Des cri ption
• To enter the plant name, select 1 (= Plant name) on the "Description" screen.
/3 Plant name [ _ ]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ()[]@_ ←→
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! ”# $ % & ’：；，．^ ` ←→
To enter special items, select 2 (= Description) on the "Description" screen.

/3 Descrip tio n [ _ ]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ()[]@ ←→
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! ” # $ % & ’ ：；，．^ ` ←→
• Enter the text string.

The plant name and special items entered are viewed with the "Setting (view)" sub-menu and
attached to disturbance records when they are displayed on a local or a remote PC.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103, the
relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
⎯ 191 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
screen.
• Press 3 (= Comm.) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Communication" screen.
/2 Communicat i on
1 =A ddress /Parameter
2 =S witch
• Press 1 (= Address/Parameter) to enter the relay address number.

／３Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ／Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ１／１５
ＨＤＬＣ（１－３２）：１＿
ＩＥＣ（０－２５４）：２
ＳＹＡＤＪ（－９９９９－９９９９）：０ｍｓ
ＩＰ１－１（０－２５４）：０
ＩＰ１－２（０－２５４）：０
ＩＰ１－３（０－２５４）：０
ＩＰ１－４（０－２５４）：０
ＳＭ１－１（０－２５４）：０
ＳＭ１－２（０－２５４）：０
ＳＭ１－３（０－２５４）：０
ＳＭ１－４（０－２５４）：０
ＧＷ１－１（０－２５４）：０
ＧＷ１－２（０－２５４）：０
ＧＷ１－３（０－２５４）：０
ＧＷ１－４（０－２５４）：０
• Enter the address number on "HDLC" column for RSM and/or "IEC" column for
IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation value on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time
synchronization of protocol used. (−: lags the time, +: leads the time) And enter IP address for
IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, and Default gateway for GW1-1 to GW1-4.
IP address: ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗
IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4
Subnet mask SM1-1 to SM1-4 and Default gateway GW1-1 to GW1-4: same as above.
• Press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not overlap the number in a network.
• Press 2 (= Switch) on the "Communication" screen to select the protocol and transmission
speed (baud rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103.
／３Ｓｗｉｔｃｈ１／＊
ＰＲＴＣＬ１１＝ＨＤＬＣ２＝ＩＥＣ１０３２＿
２３２Ｃ１＝９．６２＝１９．２３＝３８．４４＝５７．６４
ＩＥＣＢＲ１＝９．６２＝１９．２２
ＩＥＣＢＬＫ１＝Ｎｏｒｍａｌ２＝Ｂｌｏｃｋｅｄ１
• Select the number corresponding to the system and press the ENTER key.
<PRTCL1>
PRTCL1 is used to select the protocol for channel 1 (COM1 or OP1) of the serial communication
port RS485 or FO (fibre optic).
⎯ 192 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• When the remote RSM system applied, select 1 (=HDLC). When the IEC60870-5-103
applied, select 2 (=IEC103).
<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: The default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
When using the IEC60870-5-103 communication, set to 1 (=Normal).
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
screen.
• Press 4 (= Record) to display the "Record" screen.
/ 2 Rec ord
1 =Faul t record 2=Event record
3 =Dist urbance record
4 =Auto m a t i c t es t i n t e r va l
Setting the fault recording

• Press 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.
/3 Fault record 1/ 1
Fault locator 0=Off 1=On 1 _
• Enter 1 (= On) to record the fault location.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to record the fault location.
• Press the ENTER key.
Setting the event recording

• Press 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.
⎯ 193 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／３Ｅｖｅｎｔｒｅｃｏｒｄ１／１２９

ＢＩＴＲＮ（０－１２８）：１２８＿
ＥＶ１（０－３０７１）：０
ＥＶ２（０－３０７１）：１
ＥＶ３（０－３０７１）：１
ＥＶ４（０－３０７１）：１
ＥＶ５（０－３０７１）：３０７１
ＥＶ６（０－３０７１）：３０７１
ＥＶ７（０－３０７１）：３０７１
ＥＶ８（０－３０７１）：３０７１
ＥＶ９（０－３０７１）：３０７１
ＥＶ１０（０－３０７１）：３０７１
：
：
：
ＥＶ１２８（０－３０７１）：３０７１
<BITRN>
• Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If enter 20, both
status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is
recorded for EV21 to EV128 events.
<EV∗>
• Enter the signal number to record as the event in Appendix B. It is recommended that this
setting can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD
screen. (Refer to Section 3.4.2.)
Setting the disturbance recording

• Press 3 (= Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/3 D i s t u r bance r e c o rd
1=Re cord time & starter
2=Sc he me switch
3=Bi nar y signal
• Press 1 (= Record time & starter) to display the "Record time & starter" screen.
/４ Record time & starter 1/5

Time ( 0.1- 3.0): 2.0 _ A
OCP-S( 0.5- 250.0): 10.0 A
OCP-G( 0.5- 250.0): 10.0 A
UVP-S( 0- 132): 100 V
UVP-G( 0- 76): 57 V
• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:

• Press 2 (= Scheme switch) on the "Disturbance record" screen to display the "Scheme switch"
screen.
⎯ 194 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/4 Scheme swit ch 1/ 5
TR IP 0= O ff 1=O n 1
OCP- S 0= Off 1=On 1
OCP- G 0= Off 1=On 1
UVP- S 0=Off 1=On 1
UVP- G 0=Off 1=On 1
• Enter 1 to use as a starter.

• Press 3 (= Binary signal) on the "Disturbance record" screen to display the "Binary signal"
screen.
/４ B inary signal 1/32

SIG1 ( 0- 3071): 1_
SIG2 ( 0- 3071): 2
SIG3 ( 0- 3071): 3
SIG4 ( 0- 3071): 4
SIG32( 0- 3071): 0
• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B. It is recommended that this
setting can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD screen.
(Refer to Section 3.4.3.)
Setting the automatic testing

• Press 4 (= Automatic test interval) to display the "Automatic test interval" screen.
/3 Automatic test interval 1/1

Chann( 1- 24): 12 _ hrs
• Enter the test intervals of the signal channel.
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following.
• Press 5 (= Status) on the "Setting (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/2 Status
1=Metering
2=Time synchronization
3=Time zone
Setting the metering

• Press 1 (= Metering) to display the "Metering" screen.
/3 Metering 1/ 3
Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1
Power (P/Q) 1=Send 2=Receive 1
Current 1=Lag 2=Lead 1
• Enter the selected number and press the ENTER key. Repeat this for all items.
⎯ 195 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Note: Power and Current setting

Active Power Display
Power setting=1(Send) Power setting=2(Receive)
－＋＋－
V V
I I
－＋＋－
Reactive Power Display
Current setting=1(Lag) Current setting=2(Lead)
＋＋－－
V V
I I
－－＋＋
Setting the time synchronization

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with external IRIG-B time standard signal,
RSM clock or IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows:
• Press 2 (= Time synchronization) to display the "Time synchronization" screen.
／３Ｔｉｍｅｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ
０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＩＲＩＧ２＝ＲＳＭ３＝ＩＥＣ
ＣｕｒｒｅｎｔＮｏ．＝０ＳｅｌｅｃｔＮｏ．＝＿
• Enter the selected number and press the ENTER key.

Note: When to select IRIG-B, RSM, or IEC, check that they are active on the "Time synchronization
source" screen in "Status" sub-menu. If it is set to an inactive IRIG-B, RSM, or IEC, the
calendar clock runs locally. IEC is available only for relay model with IEC60870-5-103
communication.
Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
• Press 3 (= Time zone) to display the "Time zone" screen.
/3 Time zone 1/1

GMT ( -12- +12): +9 _ hrs
• Enter the difference between GMT and local time and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRZ100 can have 8 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system. One setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, proceed
as follows:
• Press 6 (= Protection) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
⎯ 196 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/2 Protec ti on
1=Change ac tive group
2=Change se tting
3=Copy gr ou p
Changing the active group

• Press 1 (= Change active group) to display the "Change active group" screen.
/3 C ha nge a ct iv e group(Act ive gr ou p= *)
1=Gr ou p1 2 =G ro up2 3=Grou p3 4= Gr oup4
5=Gr ou p5 6 =G ro up6 7=Grou p7 8= Gr oup8
Cu rr ent N o. = * S elect No . =
• Enter the selected number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product was shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix D and H.
To change the settings, do the following:
• Press 2 (= Change setting) to display the "Change setting" screen.
/3 Change setting (Active group= *)

1 =Group1 2 =Group2 3 =Group3 4 =Group4
5 =Group5 6 =Group6 7 =Group7 8 =Group8
• Press the group number to change the settings and display the "Protection" screen. (In model
100 series, 3 = Autoreclose is not displayed.)
／４Ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔｉｏｎ（Ｇｒｏｕｐ＊）
１＝Ｌｉｎｅｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
２＝Ｔｒｉｐ
３＝Ａｕｔｏｒｅｃｌｏｓｅ
Setting the line parameters

Enter the line name, VT&CT ratio and settings for the fault locator as follows:
• Press 1 (= Line parameter) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Line parameter" screen.
/5 Line parameter (Group *)
1=Line name
2=VT & CT ratio
3=Fault locator
• Press 1 (= Line name) to display the "Line name" screen.

• Enter the line name as a text string.
• Press the END key to return the display to the "Line parameter" screen.
• Press 2 (= VT&CT ratio) to display the "VT&CT ratio" screen.
⎯ 197 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／６ＶＴ＆ＣＴｒａｔｉｏ１／４
ＶＴ（１－２００００）：２２００＿
ＶＴｓ１（１－２００００）：２２００
ＶＴｓ１（１－２００００）：２２００
ＣＴ（１－２００００）：４００
• Enter the VT ratio for protection function and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the VTs1 ratio and/or VTs2 ratio for autoreclose function and press the ENTER key.
VTs1 is used for the VT ratio setting for voltage and synchronism check of autoreclose
function. VTs2 is used for the VT ratio setting for the other voltage and synchronism check at
the time of two-breaker autoreclose.
• Enter the CT ratio for protection function and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return the display to the "Line parameter" screen.
• Press 3 (= Fault locator) to display the "Fault locator" screen.
/6 F au lt l o c a to r 1/13
X1 ( 0.00 - 199.99) : 10.00 Ω
X0 ( 0.00 - 199.99) : 34.00 Ω
X0m ( 0.00 - 199.99) : 2.00 Ω
R1 ( 0 00. - 199.99) : 0.2 0 Ω
R0 ( 0 00. - 199.99) : 0.2 0 Ω
ZOB-L ( 0 00. - 199.99) : 10.0 0 Ω
Z0B-R( 0 00. - 199.99) : 10.0 0 Ω
Kab ( 80 - 120) : 10 0 %
Kbc ( 80 - 120) : 10 0 %
Kca ( 80 - 120) : 10 0 %
Ka ( 80 - 120) : 10 0 %
Kb ( 80 - 120) : 10 0 %
Kc ( 80 - 120) : 10 0 %
Line ( 0.0 - 399.9) : 80.0 km
• Enter the setting and press the ENTER key for each item.
• Press the END key after completing the settings to return the display to the "Line
parameters" screen.
Setting the protection function

To set the protection schemes, scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
Protection elements are the measuring elements and timers.
Note: Depending on the selected protection scheme and scheme switch setting, some of the scheme
switches and protection elements are not used and so need not be set. The protection function
setting menu of the GRZ100 does not display unnecessary setting items. Therefore, start by
setting the protection scheme, then set the scheme switch, then the protection elements.
As a result of the above, note that some of the setting items described below may not appear in
the actual setting.
• Press 2 (= Trip) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Trip" screen.
⎯ 198 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/5 Tri p (Group *)
1=Prot ection scheme
2=Sche me switch
3=Prot ection element
Protection scheme setting

• Press 1 (= Protection scheme) on the "Trip" screen to display the "Protection scheme" screen.
/6 Protection scheme
1=3 ZONE 2 = Z1 -E XT 3 =PUP 4 = POP 5 =UO P 6 = BOP
7=P O P + D E F 8 = U O P + D E F 9 = B O P + D E F 10 = P U P + D E F
C urrent No.= 2 Select No. =
• Select the protection scheme to be used by entering the number corresponding to the
protection scheme and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Trip" screen.
Setting the scheme switches

• Press 2 (= Scheme switch) on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme switch" screen.
⎯ 199 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／６Ｓｃｈｅｍｅｓｗｉｔｃｈ１／＊＊
ＺＳ－Ｃ１＝Ｍｈｏ２＝Ｑｕａｄ１＿
ＺＧ－Ｃ１＝Ｍｈｏ２＝Ｑｕａｄ１
ＢＬＺＯＮＥ１＝ＣＯＭ２＝ＩＮＤ１
Ｚ１ＣＮＴ１＝１２＝２３＝３４＝４５＝５１
ＰＳＢ－Ｚ１０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
：：
ＰＳＢ－ＴＰ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
ＵＶＰＷＩＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＳＣＦＣＮＴ１＝ＢＬＫ２＝ｔｒｉｐ２
ＳＴＵＢ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＳＯＴＦ－ＤＬ１＝ＣＢ２＝ＵＶ３＝Ｂｏｔｈ１
：：
ＳＯＴＦ－ＮＤ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＺＦＢＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
：：
ＯＣＩＢＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＭＯＣＩ１＝Ｌｏｎｇ２＝Ｓｔｄ３＝Ｖｅｒｙ４＝Ｅｘｔ２
ＥＦＢＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＥＦＢＴＡＬ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＤＥＦＦＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＤＴ２＝ＩＤＭＴ０
ＤＥＦＲＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＤＴ２＝ＩＤＭＴ０
ＤＥＦＢＴＡＬ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＤＥＦＩ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＮＯＤ２＝Ｆ３＝Ｒ０
ＭＥＦＩ１＝Ｌｏｎｇ２＝Ｓｔｄ３＝Ｖｅｒｙ４＝Ｅｘｔ２
ＯＶＳ１ＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＤＴ２＝ＩＤＭＴ０
ＯＶＳ２ＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
：：
ＵＶＧ１ＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＤＴ２＝ＩＤＭＴ０
ＵＶＧ２ＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＶＢＬＫＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＢＣＤＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＣＲＳＣＭ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
ＣＨＳＥＬ１＝Ｓｉｎｇｌｅ２＝Ｇｕａｒｄ３＝Ａｎｄ１
ＢＯＳＷ１＝Ｎｏｒｍａｌ２＝Ｉｎｖｅｒｓｅ１
ＺＯＮＥＳＥＬ１＝Ｚ２２＝Ｚ３１
ＥＣＨＯ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
ＷＫＩＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
ＣＨ－ＤＥＦ１＝ＣＨ１２＝ＣＨ２１
ＢＯＤＥＦＳＷ１＝Ａｃｔｉｖｅ２＝Ｉｎａｃｔｉｖｅ１
ＢＦ１０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｔ２＝ＴＯＣ０
ＢＦ２０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＢＦＥＸＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＯＳＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｔｒｉｐ２＝ＢＯ０
ＴＨＭＴ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＴＨＭＡＬ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＶＴＦ１ＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ２＝ＯＰＴ－Ｏｎ１
ＶＴＦ２ＥＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ２＝ＯＰＴ－Ｏｎ１
ＶＴＦ－Ｚ４０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
ＣＨＭＯＮ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
ＬＳＳＶ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＳＶＣＮＴ０＝ＡＬＭ＆ＢＬＫ１＝ＡＬＭ０
ＣＴＳＶ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝ＡＬＭ＆ＢＬＫ２＝ＡＬＭ０
ＦＬ－Ｚ０Ｂ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ０
ＡＯＬＥＤ０＝Ｏｆｆ１＝Ｏｎ１
• Enter the number corresponding to the switch status to be set and press the ENTER key for
each switch.
⎯ 200 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• After setting all switches, press the END key to return to the "Trip" screen.
Setting the protection elements

• Press 3 (= Protection element) to display the "Protection element" screen.
/6 Protection element (Group *)

1=Distance 2=PSB&OST 3=OC,DEF&UV
4=Command trip
<Distance>
• Press 1 (= Distance) to display the "Distance" screen. The measuring elements and timers used
in the distance protection are set using this screen.
⎯ 201 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／７Ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ１／＊＊
Ｚ１Ｓ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１＿ Ω
Ｚ１ＸＳ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
Ｚ１Ｓθ１（０－４５）：０ｄｅｇ
Ｚ１Ｓθ２（４５－９０）：９０ｄｅｇ
ＢＦＲ１Ｓ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＢＦＲＸＳ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
Ｚ２Ｓ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
ＢＦＲ２Ｓ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＺＦＳ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
ＢＦＲＦＳ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
Ｚ３Ｓ（０．０１－５０．００）：１．００ Ω
Ｚ３Ｓθ （４５－９０）：６０ｄｅｇ
ＺＢＳθ （０－４５）：５ｄｅｇ
ＢＦＲＳ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＢＦＬＳθ（９０－１３５）：１２０ｄｅｇ
ＺＲ１Ｓ（０．０１－５０．００）：１．００ Ω
ＺＲ２Ｓ（０．０１－５０．００）：１．００ Ω
Ｚ４Ｓ（０．０１－５０．００）：１．００ Ω
ＢＲＲＳ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＺＮＤＳ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
ＢＮＤＳ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＴＺ１Ｓ（０．００－１０．００）：０．００ｓ
：：：：
ＴＺＮＤＳ（０．００－１０．００）：０．００ｓ
Ｚ１Ｇ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
Ｚ１ＸＧ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
Ｚ１Ｇθ１（０－４５）：０ｄｅｇ
Ｚ１Ｇθ２（４５－９０）：９０ｄｅｇ
ＢＦＲ１Ｇ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＢＦＲＸＧ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
Ｚ２Ｇ（０．０１－５０．００）：０．０１ Ω
ＢＦＲ２Ｇ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＺＦＧ（０．０１－１００．００）：０．０１ Ω
ＢＦＲＦＧ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
Ｚ３Ｇ（０．０１－１００．００）：１．００ Ω
Ｚ３Ｇθ （４５－９０）：６０ｄｅｇ
ＺＢＧθ （０－４５）：５ｄｅｇ
ＢＦＲＧ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＢＦＬＧθ（９０－１３５）：１２０ｄｅｇ
ＺＲ１Ｇ（０．００－５０．００）：０．００ Ω
ＺＲ２Ｇ（０．００－１００．００）：０．００ Ω
Ｚ４Ｇ（０．０１－１００．００）：１．００ Ω
ＢＲＲＧ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
Ｋｒｓ（０－１０００）：０％
Ｋｘｓ（０－１０００）：０％
Ｋｒｍ（０－１０００）：０％
Ｋｘｍ（０－１０００）：０％
ＫｒｓＲ（０－１０００）：０％
ＫｘｍＲ（０－１０００）：０％
ＺＮＤＧ（０．０１－１００．００）：０．０１ Ω
ＢＮＤＧ（０．１０－２０．００）：０．１０ Ω
ＴＺ１Ｇ（０．００－１０．００）：０．００ｓ
：：：：
ＴＺＮＤＧ（０．００－１０．００）：０．００ｓ
ＺＩＣ（０．００－５．００）：０．００Ａ
Ｖｎ（１００－１２０）：１１０Ｖ
⎯ 202 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key for each element.
• After setting all elements, press the END key to return to the "Protection element" menu.
<PSB&OST>
• Press 2 (= PSB&OST) to display the "PSB & OST" screen. The measuring elements and
timers used in the power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping are set using this screen.
／７ＰＳＢ＆ＯＳＴ１／９
ＰＳＢＳＺ（０．５０－１５．００）：０．５０＿ Ω
ＰＳＢＧＺ（０．５０－１５．００）：０．５０＿ Ω
ＴＰＳＢ（２０－６０）：４０ｍｓ
ＯＳＴＲ１（３．０－３０．０）：１．０ Ω
ＯＳＴＲ２（１．０－１０．０）：１．０ Ω
ＯＳＴＸＦ（１．０－５０．０）：１．０ Ω
ＯＳＴＸＢ（０．２－１０．０）：０．２ Ω
ＴＯＳＴ１（０．０１－１．００）：０．０１ｓ
ＴＯＳＴ２（０．０１－１．００）：０．０１ｓ
<OC, DEF&UV>
• Press 3 (= OC, DEF&UV) to display the "OC, DEF&UV" screen. The overcurrent,
undervoltage and directional earth fault elements and timers are set using this screen.
⎯ 203 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
／７ＯＣ，ＤＥＦ＆ＵＶ１／＊＊
ＯＣＨ（２．０－１５．０）：２．０＿Ａ
ＴＳＯＴＦ（０－３００）：５ｓ
ＯＣＢＦ（０．５－１０．０）：０．５Ａ
ＴＢＦ１（５０－５００）：５０ｍｓ
ＴＢＦ２（５０－５００）：５０ｍｓ
ＤＥＦＦＩ（０．５－５．０）：０．５Ａ
ＤＥＦＦＶ（１．７－２１．０）：１．７Ｖ
ＤＥＦＲＩ（０．５－５．０）：０．５Ａ
ＤＥＦＲＶ（１．７－２１．０）：１．７Ｖ
ＤＥＦθ （０－９０）：０ｄｅｇ
ＴＤＥＦ（０．００－１０．００）：３．００ｓ
ＴＤＥＲ（０．００－１０．００）：３．００ｓ
ＯＣ（０．５－１００．０）：０．５Ａ
ＴＯＣ（０．００－１０．００）：１．００ｓ
ＯＣＩ（０．５－２５．０）：０．５Ａ
ＴＯＣＩ（０．０５－１．００）：１．００
ＴＯＣＩＲ（０．０－１０．０）：０．０ｓ
ＥＦ（０．５－５．０）：０．５Ａ
ＴＥＦ（０．００－１０．００）：１．００ｓ
ＥＦＩ（０．５－５．０）：０．５Ａ
ＴＥＦＩ（０．０５－１．００）：１．００
ＴＥＦＩＲ（０．０－１０．０）：０．０ｓ
ＥＦＬ（０．５－５．０）：０．５Ａ
ＵＶＣＶ（１０－６０）：１０Ｖ
ＵＶＣＺ（０．０－５０．０）：０．０ Ω
ＵＶＣθ （４５－９０）：６０ｄｅｇ
ＵＶＦＳ（５０－１００）：５０Ｖ
ＵＶＬＳ（５０－１００）：５０Ｖ
ＵＶＦＧ（１０－６０）：１０Ｖ
ＵＶＬＧ（１０－６０）：１０Ｖ
ＯＣＤＰ（０．５－１０．０）：４．０Ａ
ＯＶＳ１（５．０－１５０．０）：１２０．０Ｖ
ＴＯＳ１Ｉ（０．０５－１００．０）：１０．００
ＴＯＳ１（０．００－３００．００）：０．１０ｓ
ＴＯＳ１Ｒ（０．０－３００．０）：０．０ｓ
ＯＳ１ＤＰ（１０－９８）：９５％
：：：：
ＴＵＧ２（０．００－３００．００）：０．１０ｓ
ＶＧＢＬＫ（５．０－２０．０）：１０．０Ｖ
ＢＣＤ（０．１０－１．００）：０．２０
ＴＢＣＤ（０．００－３００．００）：０．００ｓ
ＴＨＭ（２．０－１０．０）：５．０Ａ
ＴＨＭＩＰ（０．０－５．０）：０．０Ａ
ＴＴＨＭ（０．５－３００．０）：１０．０ｍｉｎ
ＴＨＭＡ（５０－９９）：８０％
<Command trip>
• Press 4 (= Command trip) to display the "Command trip" screen. The timers used in the
command protection are set using this screen(*).
⎯ 204 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/ 7 Command trip 1/ 7
T DEFF( 0.00- 0.30): 0.00 _ s
T DEFR( 0.00- 0.30): 0.00 s
T CHD ( 0- 50): 12 ms
TCHDE( 0- 50): 20 ms
TREBK( 0.00- 10.00): 0.10 s
TECCB( 0.00-200.00): 0.10 s
TSBCT( 0.00- 1.00): 0.10 s
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key for each timer.
• After setting all timers, press the END key to return to the "Protection element setting"
menu.
(*) As described in the "Notes on setting", if the protection scheme is set to 3ZONE, Z1-EXT, PUP,
POP or UOP, no setting items are displayed in the "Command trip" screen. Press the END key
to return to the upper screen.
Setting the autoreclose function

To set the autoreclose mode, scheme switches and autoreclose elements, do the following:
Note: Depending on the autoreclose mode and scheme switch setting, some of the scheme switches
and autoreclose elements are not used and so do not need to be set. The autoreclose function
setting menu of the GRZ100 does not display unnecessary setting items. Therefore, start by
setting the autoreclose mode, and proceed to set the scheme switch, then the autoreclose
elements.
As a result of the above, note that some of the setting items described below may not appear in
the actual setting.
• Press 3 (= Autoreclose) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Autoreclose" screen.
/5 Aut oreclose (Group *)
1=Auto reclose mode
2=Sche me switch
3=Auto reclose element
Setting the Autoreclose mode

• Press 1 (= Autoreclose mode) to display the "Autoreclose mode" screen.
/6 A ut oreclose mode
1 =D i sa ble 2 =SP AR 3=TPAR 4 =SP AR&TPAR
5=EX T1 P 3=EXT3P
Cu rr ent No.= 4 Select No. =
• Select the autoreclose mode to be used by entering the number corresponding to the
autoreclose mode and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Autoreclose" screen.
Setting the scheme switches

• Press 2 (= Scheme switch) to display the "Scheme switch" screen.
⎯ 205 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/6 Scheme switch 1 /1 0
ARC-EXT 0=Off 1=On 0
ARC-BU 0=Off 1=On 0
VCHK 0 =Off 1=LB 2=DB 3=SY 1
ARC-SM 0 =Off 1=S2 2 =S3 3 =S4 0
ARC-SUC 0 =Off 1=On 0
VTPHSEL 1 =A 2=B 3=C 1
VT-RATE 1 =PH/G 2=PH/PH 1
3PH-VT 1 =Bus 2=Line 1
UARCSW 1 =P1 2=P2 3 =P 3 1
• Enter the number corresponding to the switch status to be set and press the ENTER key for
each switch.
• After setting all switches, press the END key to return to the "Autoreclose" screen.
Setting the autoreclose elements

• Press 3 (= Autoreclose element) to display the "Autoreclose element" screen.
/6 Autoreclose element (Group *)

1=Autoreclose timer
2=Synchrocheck
<Autoreclose timer>
• Press 1 (= Autoreclose timer) to display the "Autoreclose timer" screen.
/ 7 Au toreclose ti m e r 1/13
T EVLV ( 0.01- 10. 0 ) : 1.00 _ s
T RDY1 ( 5- 30 0 ) : 60 s
T SPR1 ( 0.01- 10. 0 ) : 0.80 s
TTPR1( 0.01-100.00): 0.60 s
TRR ( 0.01-100.00): 2.00 s
TW1 ( 0.1- 10.0): 0.3 s
TS2 ( 5.0- 300.0): 20.0 s
TS2R ( 5.0- 300.0): 30.0 s
TS3 ( 5.0- 300.0): 20.0 s
TS3R ( 5.0- 300.0): 30.0 s
TS4 ( 5.0- 300.0): 20.0 s
TS4R ( 5.0- 300.0): 30.0 s
TSUC ( 0.1- 10.0): 3.0 s
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key for each timer.
• After setting all timers, press the END key to return to the "Autoreclose element" menu.
<Synchrocheck>
• Press 2 (= Synchrocheck) to display the "Synchrocheck" screen for voltage check and
synchronism check elements.
⎯ 206 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/7 Synchrocheck 1/11
OVB ( 10- 150): 51 _ V
UVB ( 10- 150): 13 V
OVL1 ( 10- 150): 51 V
U V L 1 ( 10- 150): 13 V
S Y 1 U V( 10- 150): 83 V
S Y 1 O V( 10- 150): 51 V
S Y 1 θ ( 5- 75): 30 deg
T S Y N 1( 0 . 01- 10 .00): 0 .01 s
T D B L 1( 0 . 01- 1 .00): 0 .01 s
T L B D 1( 0 . 01- 1 .00): 0 .01 s
T 3 P L L( 0 . 01- 1 .00): 0 .05 s
• After setting all elements, press the EN D key to return to the "Autoreclose element" menu.
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
• Press 3 (= Copy group) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy group A to B" screen.
/3 Copy group A to B (Active group= *)

A ( 1- 8)：
B ( 1- 8)：
• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requisite described in the Table 3.2.2.
• Press 7 (= Binary input) on the "Setting (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary input"
screen.
/2 Binary input 1 /∗∗
BIS W 1 1=N orm 2=Inv 1
BISW 4 1=Norm 2=Inv 1
BISW 5 1=Norm 2=Inv 1
BISW16 1=Norm 2=Inv 1

BIS W26 1 =N or m 2 =I nv 1
⎯ 207 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Enter 1 (= Normal) or 2 (= Inverted) and press the ENTER key for each binary input.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRZ100 except the tripping command, signal for command
protection and relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to
6 ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach a delayed drop-off delay time of 0.2 seconds to these signals. The delay
drop-off time is disabled by the scheme switch [BOTD].
Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output module

• Press 8 (= Binary output) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Binary output"
screen. The available output module(s) will be shown. (The screen differs depending on the
relay model.)
/2 Binary output
1 =IO#2 2 =IO#3
• Press the number corresponding to the selected output module to display the "Binary output"
screen.
/3 Binary output (*****)
Select BO ( 1- **)
Select No.=
Note: This setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary output is not used, enter
0 to the logic gates #1-#6 in assigning signals.
Selecting the output relay

• Enter the output relay number and press the ENTER key to display the "Setting" screen.
/4 Setting (BO1 of IO#2)

1=Logic gate type & delay timer
2=Input to logic gate
Setting the logic gate type and timer

• Press 1 to display the "Logic gate type and delay timer" screen.
/5 Logic gate type & delay timer 1/ 2

Logic 1=OR 2=AND 1
BOTD 0=Off 1=On 1
• Enter 1 or 2 to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 or 1 to add 0.2s delayed drop-off time to the output relay if required and press the
ENTER key.
⎯ 208 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Press the END key to return to the "Setting" screen.
Assigning signals
• Press 2 on the "Setting" screen to display the "Input to logic gate" screen.
/5 Input to logic g a te 1/ 6
In #1 ( 0- 307 1 ) ： 21
In #2 ( 0- 307 1 ) ： 4
In #3 ( 0- 307 1 ) ： 67
In #4 ( 0- 3071)： 0
In #5 ( 0- 3071)： 0
In #6 ( 0- 3071)： 0
• Assign signals to gates (In #1- #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1-#6, enter 0 to the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.10 LED
Four LEDs of the GRZ100 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be
programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset
characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. The signals listed in
Appendix B can be assigned to each LED as follows.
Selection of LED
• Press 9 (= LED) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/2 LED
Select LED ( 1- 4)
Select No.=
• Enter the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "Setting" screen.
/3 Setting (LED1)
1=Logic gate type & reset
Setting the logic gate type and reset

• Press 1 to display the "Logic gate type and reset" screen.
/4 Logic gate type & reset 1/ 2

Logic 1=OR 2=AND 1
Reset 0=Inst 1=Latch 1
• Enter 1 or 2 to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 or 1 to select “Instantaneous reset” or “Latch reset” and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Setting" screen.
⎯ 209 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.
Assigning signals
• Press 2 on the "Setting" screen to display the "Input to logic gate" screen.
/4 Input to logic g a te 1/ 4
In #1 ( 0- 307 1 ) ： 21
In #2 ( 0- 307 1 ) ： 4
In #3 ( 0- 307 1 ) ： 67
In #4 ( 0- 3071)： 0
• Assign signals to gates (In #1- #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1-#4, enter 0 to the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for other LEDs to be configured.
4.2.7 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as setting of test switches, manual starting of
automatic tests, forced operation of binary outputs, time measurement of the variable setting timer
and logic signal observation. The password must be entered in order to enter the test screens
because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.)
4.2.7.1 Setting the Switches

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "Off."
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to the A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
Note: Set the switch [A.M.F] to "Off" before applying the test inputs, when the A.M.F is disabled.
When a three-phase voltage source is not available, the distance measuring element operation can
be tested using a single-phase voltage source by setting the switch [Z1S-1PH] to "On". This is not
fit for the high-accuracy test, though.
The switch [ZB-CTRL] is used to test the Z1 characteristic with offset or not. When the switch
[ZB-CTRL] is set to "1", the Z1 is an offset characteristic. When the switch [ZB-CTRL] is set to
"2", the Z1 is a characteristic without offset.
X X
R
Offset
characteristic
(a) Mho (setting "1") (b) Quadrilateral
Figure 4.2.7.1 Z1 Characteristics by [ZB-CTRL] Setting
The gradient characteristic of Zone 1 and Zone 1X reactance elements is obtained only when the
⎯ 210 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
load current is transmitted from local to remote terminal. So, the switch [XANGLE] is used to fix
the gradient characteristic for testing. When testing, the switch [XANGLE] is set to "1".
X
Z1Sθ1 or Z1Gθ1
Figure 4.2.7.2 Gradient Characteristic of Zone 1 and Zone 1X
DOCN element can operate during a power swing condition. So, to test the DOCN characteristic,
the switch [DOCN-C] is used. When testing, the switch [DOCN-C] is set to "1".
The switches [Z1S-1PH], [ZB-CTRL], [XANGLE] and [DOCN-C] are implemented only for the
function test.
While the switch [A.M.F] is set to "0", [Z1S-1PH] is set to "1", [ZB-CTRL] is set to "1" or "2",
[XANGLE] is set to "1", [DOCN-C] is set to "1", the red "TESTING" LED is lit for alarming.
Caution: Be sure to restore these switches after the tests are completed.
Disabling automatic monitoring

• Press 5 (= Test) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/1 Test
1=Switch 2=Manual test
3=Binary o tput 4=Timer
5=Logic circuit
• Press 1 (= Switch) to display the Switch screen.

• Enter 0 for A.M.F to disable the automatic monitoring function and enter 1 for Z1S-1PH to
enable the test to use a single-phase voltage source.
/2 Switch 1/ 8
A.M.F. 0=Of f 1=On 1
Z1S-1PH 0=Of f 1=On 0
ZB-CTRL 0=No rm 1=OF ST 2 =No n-OF ST 0
XA NGLE 0 = Of f 1 = On 0
DO CN-C 0 = Of f 1 = On 0
IE CTST 0 = Of f 1 = On 0
TH MRST 0 = Of f 1 = On 0
UV TEST 0 = Of f 1 = On 0
Testing the offset characteristic of Z1

• Enter 0 for A.M.F to disable the automatic monitoring function and enter 1 for ZB-CTRL to
modify the offset characteristic forcibly.
• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
Testing the gradient characteristic of Zone 1 and Zone 1X

• Enter 0 for A.M.F to disable the automatic monitoring function and enter 1 for XANGLE to
modify the gradient characteristic forcibly.
⎯ 211 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Testing the characteristic of DOCN

• Enter 0 for A.M.F to disable the automatic monitoring function and enter 1 for DOCN-C to
enable the DOCN element to operate.
IECTST
• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
THMRST
The switch [THMRST] is used to set the reset delay time to instantaneous reset or not and to test
the hot curve characteristic of THM. The function is active when the [THMRST] is ON. The
[THMRST] is displayed only for model 100, 200 and 300 series.
• Enter 1(=On) for testing the thermal overload element, and press the ENTER key.
UVTEST
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=On) to set disable/enable the UV blocking (UVBLK) and press the
E N TE R key.
• Press the EN D key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Manual Testing

The automatic test of the telecommunication circuit can be performed manually by key operations.
The manual test performed here is also counted as the count displayed in Section 4.2.3.4.
• Press 2 (= Manual test) on the "Test" screen to display the "Manual test" screen.
/2 M anua l t est
1=Telecomm channel test
Press number to start test.
Performing the signal channel test

• Press 1 on the "Manual test" screen to start the test. The display shown below appears.
/2 Manual test
Telecomm channel testing...
If the test is completed normally, the display shown below appears on the LCD for 5 seconds and
then changes to the "Manual test" screen.
⎯ 212 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
/2 Manual test
Completed.
If an abnormality is found during testing, the LCD displays the following indication for 5 seconds
and returns to the "Manual test" screen. The "ALARM" LED remains lit.
/2 Manual test
Remote 1 failed.
Note: Under any of the following conditions, the test will not start. Neither "Completed" nor the
"Failed" screen is displayed.
- BOP is not selected as the protection scheme.
- Telecommunication equipment is out of service.
- Scheme switch [CHMON] is set to "OFF."
- Circuit breaker is open.
4.2.7.3 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time for each
module.
• Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen.
/2 Binary output
1 =IO# 1 2 =IO#2 3 =IO#3
The LCD displays the output modules installed depending on the model.
• Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. Then the LCD
displays the name of the module, the name of the output relay, the name of the terminal block
and the terminal number to which the relay contact is connected.
/3 BO (0 =Disable 1=Enable) 1 /14
IO# 2 BO1 1
IO# 2 BO2 1
IO# 2 BO3 1
IO# 2 B O4 0
IO# 2 B O5 0
IO# 2 B O6 0
IO# 2 B O7 0
IO# 2 B O8 0
IO# 2 B O9 0
IO# 2 B O10 0
IO# 2 B O11 0
IO# 2 B O12 0
IO# 2 F AIL 0
IO# 2 B O13 0
⎯ 213 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
/3 BO
Keep pressing 1 to operate.
Press CANCEL to cancel.
• Keep pressing the 1 key to operate the assigned output relays.

• Release pressing the 1 key to reset the operation.
• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper screen.
4.2.7.4 Timer
The pick-up or drop-off delay time of the variable timer used in the scheme logic can be measured
with monitoring jacks A and B. Monitoring jacks A and B are used to observe the input signal and
output signal to the timer respectively.
• Press 4 (= Timer) on the "Test" screen to display the "Timer" screen.
/2 Timer 1/ 1
Timer( 1- 60)： 1
• Enter the number corresponding to the timer to be observed and press the ENTER key. The
timers and related numbers are listed in Appendix C.
• Press the END key to display the following screen.
/2 Timer
Press ENTER to operate.
• Press the ENTER key to operate the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns on, and the timer is
initiated and the following display appears. The input and output signals of the timer can be
observed at monitoring jacks A and B respectively. The LEDs above monitoring jacks A or B
are also lit if the input or output signal exists.
/2 Tim e r
Operat i ng...
Press E ND to reset.
Press C ANCEL to cancel.
• Press the C A N C E L key to test other timers.
• Press the EN D key to reset the input signal to the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns off.
To measure the drop-off delayed time, press the EN D key after the LED above jack B lights.
4.2.7.5 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix B with monitoring
⎯ 214 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
jacks A and B.
• Press 5 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/2 Logic circuit 1/ 2
TermA( 0- 3071)： 1
TermB( 0- 3071)： 48
• Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.
⎯ 215 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel. On
the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault voltage and current are
available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
• Display of voltage and current waveform: Oscillograph, vector display
• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via a telecommunication network using a remote PC.
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
Figure 4.4.1 shows the typical configuration of the RSM system via a protocol converter G1PR2.
The relays are connected through twisted pair cables, and the maximum 256 relays can be
connected since the G1PR2 can provide up to 8 ports. The total length of twisted pair wires should
not exceed 1200 m. Relays are mutually connected using an RS485 port on the relay rear panel and
connected to a PC RS232C port via G1PR2. Terminal resistor (150 ohms) is connected the last
relay. The transmission rate used is 64 kbits/s.
Figure 4.4.2 shows the configuration of the RSM system with Ethernet LAN (option). The relays
are connected to HUB through UTP cable using RJ-45 connector at the rear of the relay. The relay
recognizes the transmission speed automatically.
In case of the optional fiber optic interface (option), the relays are connected through graded-index
multi-mode 50/125μm or 62.5/125μm type optical fiber using ST connector at the rear of the
relay.
Twisted paired
cable
G1PR2
Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System (1)
⎯ 216 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
UTP cable
(10Base-T)
214B-13-10
100/110/115/120V
Other
HUB. relays
PC Relay
Figure 4.4.2 Relay Setting and Monitoring System (2)
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRZ100 can support the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand, status data and general command from the relay to the control system.
• Measurand data: current, voltage, active power, reactive power, frequency
• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The IEC60870-5-103 function in the relay can be customized with the original software “IEC103
configurator”. It runs on a personal computer (PC) connected to the relay, and can help setting of
Time-tagged messages, General command, Metering, etc. For details of the setting method, refer
to “IEC103 configurator” manual. For the default setting of IEC60870-5-103, see Appendix N.
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port on the relay rear panel and can be also used
through the optional fibre optical interface. The relay connection is similar to Figure 4.4.1.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.4.
4.6 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
• Event records
• Disturbance records
• Fault records
• Metering
• Automatic supervision
• Display of the system quantities on the digest screen
• Display of the fault records on the digest screen
• Display of the automatic monitoring results on the digest screen
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with the external IRIG-B time standard
signal, RSM or IEC clock. This can be selected by setting.
If it is necessary to synchronise with the IRIG-B time standard signal, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time by setting.
When the relays are connected to the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1, the calendar clock of
each relay is synchronized with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronized with the
external time standard (GPS clock etc.), then all the relay clocks are synchronized with the
external time standard.
⎯ 217 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Check that the following accessories are attached.
• 3 pins for the monitoring jack, packed in a plastic bag.
• An attachment kit required in rack-mounting, if ordered. (See Appendix F.)
1 large bracket with 5 round head screws, spring washers and washers (M4×10)
1 small bracket with 3 countersunk head screws (M4×6)
2 bars with 4 countersunk head screws (M3×8)
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting

Either a rack or flush mounting relay is delivered as designated by the customer. The GRZ100
models are classified into two types by their case size, type A and type B. Appendix F shows the
case outlines.
If the customer requires a rack-mounting relay, support metal fittings necessary to mount it in the
19-inch rack are also supplied with the relay.
When to mount the relay in the rack, detach the original brackets fixed on both sides of the relay
and seals on the top and bottom of the relay. Attach the larger bracket and smaller bracket on the
left and right side of the relay respectively and the two bars on the top and bottom of the relay.
How to mount the attachment kit, see Appendix F.
Dimensions of the attachment kits EP-101 and EP-102 is also shown in Appendix F.
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not take out any modules outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potential of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can
cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, precautions should be taken to preserve
⎯ 218 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
CAUTION
• Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
• Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
• Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
• Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
• Do not place modules in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried
out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the IEC 60747.
5.5 External Connections

External connections are shown in Appendix G.
⎯ 219 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRZ100 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Autoreclose
Metering and recording
Fault locator
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test
Tripping and reclosing circuit test
⎯ 220 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
• The relay rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is grounded.
• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and
attach the cover provided on top of it.
• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests
CAUTION
• While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the printed
circuit board (PCB).
• While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
• Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
• Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
⎯ 221 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
1 Single-phase current source
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meter
1 AC ammeter
1 DC voltmeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For the details, see the separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
⎯ 222 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and an AC voltage and
current source are required.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD display
• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD displays the "Auto-supervision" screen when the DC voltage is
applied.
• Press the RESET key for 1 second when the LCD is off, and check that black dots appear on
the whole screen.
LED display
• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
• Press the RESET key for 1 second when the LCD is off, and check that seven LEDs under
the "IN SERVICE" LED and two LEDs for monitoring jacks A and B are lit in red.
VIEW and RESET keys

• Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Metering" screen is displayed
on the LCD.
• Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Keypad
• Press any key on the keypad when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the
"MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Repeat this for all keys.
⎯ 223 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.1.

GRZ100
(+) TB BI1
(−)
BI2
:
:
BI15
TB
BI16
BI17
BI18
TB
BI19
BI20
:
:
BI28
TB BI34
BI35
BI36
DC + TB4 -A16
power
supply − -A17
Terminal block (TB) and Terminal numbers are
depending on the relay model. Refer to Appendix G.
E
Figure 6.4.2.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
• Display the "Binary input & output status" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

Input ( I O# 1 ) [00 0 000 000 000 ]
Input ( I O# 2 ) [00 0 ]
Input ( I O# 3 ) [00 0 000 000 0 ]
I n p u t ( I O# 4 ) [0 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 1 - t r i p ) [0 00 000 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 2 ) [0 00 000 000 000 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 3 ) [0 00 000 000 0 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 4 ) [0 00 000 000 000 00 ]
• Apply rated DC voltage to terminals of each binary input circuit.
Note: Terminal number depends on the relay model. So see Appendix G for details.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal changes from 0 to 1. (For the
binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all terminals at once.
⎯ 224 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
• Press 3 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen. The LCD
displays the output modules installed depending on the model.
• Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. The LCD will display
the name of the module, the name of the output relay, the name of the terminal block and the
terminal number to which the relay contact is connected.
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all of the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
/3 BO
K eep pressing 1 to operate.
• Keep pressing the 1 key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
• Release the 1 key to reset the operation.
⎯ 225 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying known values of voltage and current to the AC input
circuits and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD
screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.4.1. A three-phase voltage source and a single-phase
current source are required.
GRZ100
V V V
TB1 -11
Va
Three-phase -12
voltage
Vb
source -13 Vc
-14
φ φ φ
A TB1 -1
Ia
Single-phase
-2
current
source -3
Ib
-4
-5
Ic
-6
-7
3Io
-8
-9
-10 3Iom
+ TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply − -A17
Figure 6.4.4.1 Testing AC Input Circuit
• Check that the metering data is set to be expressed as secondary values (Display value = 2) on
the "Metering" screen.
"Setting (view)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
If the setting is Primary (Display value = 1), change the setting in the "Setting (change)"
sub-menu. Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
• Apply AC rated voltages and currents and check that the displayed values are within ± 5% of the
input values.
⎯ 226 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.5 Function Test

CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
/2 Logi c circuit 1/ 2
TermA( 0- 3071)： 0
TermB( 0- 3071)： 0
When a signal number is entered for the TermA line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the TermB line, observed at monitoring jack B.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +15V ±3V for logic level "1" when measured by
an instrument with 10kΩ input impedance, and less than 0.1V for logic level "0".
CAUTION
• Use test equipment with more than 1 kΩ of internal impedance when observing the
output signal at the monitoring jacks.
• Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
In case of a three-phase element, it is enough to test a representative phase. A-phase and AB-phase
elements are selected for the earth fault element and phase fault element respectively hereafter.
⎯ 227 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.5.1.1 Distance Measuring Element Z1, Z1X, Z2, Z3, Z4, ZF, ZR1, ZR2 and PSBS
Phase fault element reach test

The test voltage and current input test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.1.
GRZ100
V V V
TB1 -11
Va
Three-phase -12
voltage Vb
source -13
Vc
-14
A
Monitoring
φ φ φ jack
0V
A TB1 -1
Ia
Single-phase IT -2
current
source -3
Ib
-4
+ TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply − -A17
DC
voltmeter
Figure 6.5.1.1 Testing Phase-Fault Element
Phase fault elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Measuring element Signal number
Z1S-AB 34
Z1XS-AB 37
Z2S-AB 40
Z3S-AB 43
Z4S-AB 46
ZFS-AB 577
ZR1S-AB 553
ZR2S-AB 557
ZNDS-AB 581
PSBSIN-AB 323
PSBSOUT-AB 49
⎯ 228 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Apply three-phase rated voltage.

• Choose a test current IT by referring to the table below, the table shows the relationship
between the reach setting, test current and measuring error.
Reach setting IT Error
0.01 - 0.05Ω 25A ±10%
(0.1 - 0.2Ω 5A)(*)
0.06 - 0.09Ω 20A ±7%
(0.3 - 0.4Ω 4A)
0.10 - 1.00Ω 10A ±5%
(0.5 - 5.0Ω 2A)
1.01 - 10.00Ω 5A ±5%
(5.1 - 50.0Ω 1A)
10.01 - 20.00Ω 2.5A ±5%
(50.1 – 100.0Ω 0.5A)
20.01 - 50.00Ω 1A ±7%
(100.1 – 250.0Ω 0.2A)
(*) Values shown in parentheses are in the case of 1A rating.
Other values are in the case of 5A rating.
• Set the voltage and current phase relationship as shown below. That is, Va lags Vc by 90°, Vb
= - Va and IT lags Va by θ or θ + 180°. θ is the characteristic angle (90°) when testing.
Vc
Vc IT
90°
Vb Va Vb Va
θ
θ + 180°
IT
Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, ZFS, ZNDS, Z3S and PSB ZR1S,ZR2S and Z4S
• Adjust the magnitude of Va and Vb while retaining the conditions above and measure the
voltage Va at which the element operates.
• The theoretical operating voltage is obtained by 2IT × ZS when the setting reach is ZS. Check
that the measured voltage is within the above-mentioned error of the theoretical voltage value
when it is expressed with 2Va (= Va − Vb).
Element reach setting (ZS) IT 2IT × ZS Measured voltage (2Va)

Z1S
Z1XS
Z2S
Z3S
Z4S
⎯ 229 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
ZFS
ZR1S
ZR2S
ZNDS
PSBSIN
PSBSOUT
[Testing of Zone 1 bending characteristic]

The test circuit and test method is same as above.
The operating voltage of Zone 1 bending characteristic can be calculated as follows:
X
(X1, R1)
θ1
θ1: Z1Sθ1 setting angle
θ2: Z1Sθ2 setting angle

θ2
0 R
⎛ tan θ1 ⎞
X 1 ⎜⎜1 + ⎟⎟
1 tan θ 1
V = X pI ⋅ = ⎝ 2 ⎠
⋅I ⋅
sin θ ⎛ tan θ1 ⎞ sin θ
⎜1 + ⎟
⎝ tan θ ⎠
where,
X1 is the Z1S setting reach.
θ is the angle difference between voltage and current.
Note: Toshiba recommend that a minimum of three values for θ be tested to check that the
correct relay settings have been applied.
Care must be taken in choosing values of θ to ensure that the testing points come within
the operating boundary defined by the Z1S θ2 setting and either the load blinder or mho
settings, as appropriate
⎯ 230 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Earth fault element reach test

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.2.
GRZ100
V
TB1 -11
Va
Three-phase -12
voltage Vb
source -13
Vc
-14
A
Monitoring
φ jack
0V
A TB1 -1
Single-phase IT Ia
-2
current
source -7
3Io
-8 (for Zero-sequence
-9 current of own line)
3Iom
-10 (for Zero-sequence
current of parallel line)
DC + TB4 -A16
power
supply − -A17
DC
voltmeter
Figure 6.5.1.2 Testing Earth-Fault Element
Earth fault elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Z1G-A 19
Z1XG-A 22
Z2G-A 25
Z3G-A 28
Z4G-A 31
ZFG-A 593
ZR1G-A 569
ZR2G-A 573
ZNDG-A 597
PSBGIN-A 561
PSBGOUT-A 565
• Press 5 (= Logic circuit) on the Test screen to display the Logic circuit screen.
• Apply three-phase rated voltage.
• Choose a test current IT by referring to the table below, the table shows the relationship
between the reach setting, test current and measuring error.
⎯ 231 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Reach setting IT Error

0.01 - 0.05Ω 25A ±10%
(0.1 - 0.2Ω 5A)(*)
0.06 - 0.09Ω 20A ±7%
(0.3 - 0.4Ω 4A)
0.1 - 1.0Ω 10A ±5%
(0.5 - 5.0Ω 2A)
1.01 - 10.0Ω 5A ±5%
(5.1 - 50.0Ω 1A)
10.01 - 20.0Ω 2.5A ±5%
(50.1 - 100Ω 0.5A)
20.01 - 50.0Ω 1A ±7%
(100.1 - 250Ω 0.2A)
50.01 - 100Ω 0.6A ±10%
(250.1 - 500Ω 0.12A)
(*) Values shown in parentheses are in the case of 1A rating. Other values are in the case of 5A rating.
• Set the test voltage and test current phase relation as shown below. That is, Va, Vb, and Vc are
balanced, and IT lags Va by θ or θ + 180°. θ is the characteristic angle (90°) when testing.
Va Va
IT
θ
θ+180°
IT
Vc Vb Vc Vb
Z1G, Z1XG, ZFG, ZNDG, Z2G, and Z3G ZR1G, ZR2G andZ4G
• Adjust the magnitude of Va while retaining the conditions above and measure the voltage at
which the element operates.
• The theoretical operating voltage Vop is obtained by the following equations when the setting
reach is ZG. Check that the measured voltage is within the above-mentioned error of the
theoretical voltage. (Refer to Section 2.4.1.3.)
Kxs Kxm
−1
100 100
Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G: Vop = ZG × ( IT + 3 × IT + 3 × IT )
Kxs
100 − 1
ZR1G: Vop = ZG × ( IT + 3 × IT )
Z3G, ZFG, Z4G: Vop = IT × ZG

Element ZG IT Vop Measured voltage
Z1G
Z1XG
Z2G
Z3G
Z4G
⎯ 232 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
ZFG
ZR1G
ZR2G
ZNDG
PSBGIN
PSBGOU
T
[Testing of Zone 1 bending characteristic]
The test circuit and test method is same as above.

The operating voltage of Zone 1 bending characteristic can be calculated as follows:
X
(X1, R1)
θ1
θ1: Z1Gθ1 setting angle
θ2: Z1Gθ2 setting angle

θ2
0 R
⎛ tan θ1 ⎞
X 1 ⎜⎜1 + ⎟
1 ⎝ tan θ 2 ⎟⎠ 1
V = X p I 'x ⋅ = ⋅ I 'x ⋅
sin θ ⎛ tan θ1 I ' x ⎞ sin θ
⎜⎜1 + ⋅ ⎟⎟
⎝ tan θ I ' r ⎠
where,
k xs − 100 k k − 100 k
I 'x = I + I 0 + xm I 0 m , I ' r = I + rs I 0 + rm I 0 m
100 100 100 100
X1 is the Z1G setting reach.
θ is the angle difference between voltage and current.
Note: Toshiba recommend that a minimum of three values for θ be tested to check that the
correct relay settings have been applied.
Care must be taken in choosing values of θ to ensure that the testing points come within
the operating boundary defined by the Z1G θ2 setting and either the load blinder or mho
settings, as appropriate
6.5.1.2 Out-of-step Element OST

The output signal numbers of the OST-ZM and OST-ZN elements are as follows:
OST-ZM 84
OST-ZN 85
The followings are the cases for OST-ZM. (The test procedure for OSTR1 and OSTR2 must be
⎯ 233 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
changed in case of OST-ZN.)

• Enter 84 as a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
• Apply a three-phase rated voltage.
• Choose a test current IT by referring to the table below, which shows the relation of setting
reach and test current.
Reach setting IT
0.2 – 3.0Ω 10A
(1 - 15Ω 2.0A)(*)
3.1 – 10.0Ω 5A
(16 - 50Ω 1.0A)
10.1 – 20.0Ω 2.5A
(51 - 100Ω 0.5A)
20.1 – 30.0Ω 1.5A
(101 - 150Ω 0.3A)
30.1 – 50.0Ω 1A
(151 - 250Ω 0.2A)
(*) Values shown in parentheses are in the case of 1A rating.
Other values are in the case of 5A rating.
OSTXF
• Set the voltage and current phase relation as shown below. That is, Va lags Vc by 90°, Vb = −
Va and IT lags Va by 90°.
Vc
90°
Vb Va
90°
IT
• The theoretical operating voltage is obtained by 2IT × ZOST when the setting reach is ZOST.
Check that the measured voltage is within ±5% of the theoretical voltage value when it is
expressed with 2Va (= Va − Vb).
Element ZOST IT 2IT × ZOST Measured voltage (2Va)
OSTXF
OSTXB
• Set the voltage and current phase relation as shown below. That is, Va lags Vc by 90°, Vb =
−Va and IT leads Va by 90°.
⎯ 234 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Vc
IT
90°
Vb Va
Element ZOST IT 2IT × ZOST Measured voltage (2Va)
OSTXB
OSTR1
• Set the voltage and current phase relation as shown below. That is, Va lags Vc by 90°, Vb = −
Va and IT is in phase with Va.
Vc
90°
Vb Va
IT
Element ZOST IT 2IT×ZOST Measured voltage (2Va)
OSTR1
OSTR2
• Set the voltage and current phase relation as shown below. That is, Va lags Vc by 90°, Vb =
−Va and IT is in counter-phase with Vb.
Vc
90°
Vb Va
IT
⎯ 235 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Element ZOST IT 2IT×ZOST Measured voltage (2Va)
OSTR2
6.5.1.3 Phase Selection Element UVC

UVC elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
UVC-A 66
UVC-B 67
UVC-C 68
The following shows the case when testing UVC-A.

• Apply a three-phase rated voltage.
• Set the test current IT to zero ampere and adjust the voltage. Measure the voltage at which the
element operates. Check that the voltage is within ±5% of the setting UVCV. (The default
setting of the UVCV is 48 V.)
• Choose a test current IT by referring to the table below, which shows the relation of setting
reach UVCZ, test current IT and measuring error.
UVCZ IT Error
0.0- 2.0Ω 10A ±5%
(0 - 10Ω 5A) (*)
2.1 – 10.0Ω 5A ±5%
(11 - 50Ω 1A)
10.1 – 20.0Ω 2.5A ±5%
(51 - 100Ω 0.5A)
20.1 – 50.0Ω 1A ±7%
(101 - 250Ω 0.2A)
(*) Values shown in parentheses are in the case of 1A rating. Other values are in the case of 5A
rating.
• Set the test voltage and test current phase relation as shown below. That is, Va, Vb, and Vc are
balanced, and IT lags Va by UVC characteristic angle UVC θ.
(The default setting of UVC θ is 85°.)
⎯ 236 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Va
IT
θ
Vc Vb
• Adjust the magnitude of Va while retaining the conditions above and measure the voltage Va
at which the element operates.
• The theoretical operating voltage is obtained by (IT × UVCZ + UVCV) when the setting reach
is UVCZ. Check that the measured voltage is within the above-mentioned error of the
theoretical voltage value. (The default setting of the UVCZ is 2.0 ohm for 5A rating and 10
ohm for 1A rating.)
Element UVCV UVCZ IT IT×UVCZ + UVCV Measured voltage
UVCZ
6.5.1.4 Directional Earth Fault Element DEF

DEF elements and their output signal number are listed below.

DEFF 59
DEFR 58
The following shows the case when testing DEFF.

Residual current level detection is verified as follows:
• Apply three-phase rated voltage and single-phase test current IT (= 3Io).
Set IT to lag Va by DEFF characteristic angle DEF θ. (The default setting of DEF θ is 85°.)
• Lower Va to 10 V to generate a residual voltage. Changing the magnitude of IT while retaining
the phase angle with the voltages, and measure the current at which the element operates.
Check that the measured current magnitude is within ± 5% of the current setting.
Va
Va IT
θ
Vc
Vb
3Vo
⎯ 237 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Residual voltage level detection is verified as follows:

• Set IT to rated current and the three-phase voltage to rated voltage. Lower the magnitude of Va
while retaining the phase angle with the current and measure the voltage Va at which the
element operates. Operating residual voltage is expressed by (VR-Va), where VR is the rated
voltage. Check that the (VR-Va) is within 5% of the residual voltage setting.
6.5.1.5 Negative Sequence Directional Element DOCN

DOCN elements and their output signal number are listed below.
DOCNF 360
DOCNR 361
The following shows the case when testing DOCNF.

• Press 1 (= Switch) on the Test screen to display the switch screen and enter 1 for DOCN-C to
test the DOCN elements.
• Apply single-phase rated current Ia and single-phase test voltage V.
Set V to lag Ia by 90°.
• Changing the magnitude of test voltage while retaining the phase angle with the current, and
measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that the measured voltage
magnitude is within ± 5% of 15.5V.
The test of the DOCNR is same as that of DOCNF except for the voltage leading the current Ia by
90°.
GRZ100
V
TB1 -11
Single-phase Va
voltage
source -14
A TB1 -1 Ia
Single-phase
current
source -2
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC + TB4 -A16
power
supply − -A17
DC
voltmeter
Figure 6.5.1.3 Testing DOCN Element
⎯ 238 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.5.1.6 Inverse Definite Minimum Time Overcurrent Element (IDMT) OCI, EFI
GRZ100
TB1 -1
A
Single-phase Ia
current -2
source -7
3Io
-8
A
Monitoring
+ TB4 -A16 jack
DC 0V
power
supply − -A17
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
Figure 6.5.1.4 Testing IDMT
One of the four inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
are as follows:
Element Signal number
OCI-A 97
OCI-B 98
OCI-C 99
EFI 61
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MEFI or MOCI on the "Scheme
switche" screen.
"Setting (change)" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Trip" screen → "Scheme switch" screen
The test procedure is as follows:

• Enter a signal number to observe the OCI or EFI output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 20 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.5.4. Check that the measured operating time is within IEC 60255-3 class 5 for standard, very
and long-time inverse or IEC 60255-3 class 7.5 for extremely inverse.
6.5.1.7 Thermal overload element THM-A and THM-T

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.4.
The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.
⎯ 239 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element Signal No.
THM-A 560
THM-T 556
To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in Section
6.5.1.
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 10 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
2.4.6. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.8Broken conductor detection element BCD

GRZ100
Ia TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase Ib
Current A -3
source -4
Ic
A -5
-6
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
+ TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply − -B17
DC +
voltmeter
0V
Figure 6.5.1.5 Testing BCD element

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element Signal No.
BCD 766
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
⎯ 240 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
Then, check the BCD element operates.
6.5.1.9 Overvoltage / undervoltage elements OVS1, OVS2, OVG1, OVG2, UVS1, UVS2, UVG1, UVG2
GRZ100
V TB1
+ -11
Variable-
− A
-12 or Monitoring
Voltage source
-14(*) jack
0V
+ TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply − -B17
DC +
voltmeter
0V
(∗) TB1-12 for OVS1, OVS2, UVS1 and UVS2, TB1-14 for OVG1, OVG2, UVG1 and UVG2.
Figure 6.5.1.6 Operating Value Test Circuit

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal number are listed below.
Element Signal No.
OVS1-AB 436
OVS2-AB 439
OVG1-A 442
OVG2-A 445
UVS1-AB 454
UVS2-AB 457
UVG1-A 460
UVG2-A 463
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
Operating value test of OVS1, OVS2, OVG1, OVG2

• Apply a rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.6.
• Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UVS1, UVS2, UVG1, UVG2

• Apply a rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.6.
• Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.
⎯ 241 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Operating time check of OVS1, OVG1, UVS1, UVG1 IDMT curves

• Apply a rated voltage at the IDMT time multiplier setting 10.0 of the relay.
• Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time. Test voltage: 1.5 × (setting voltage) or 0.5 × (setting voltage)
2.4.9.1 and 2.4.9.2. Check the measured operating time within ±5%.
6.5.1.10 Voltage and Synchronism Check Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.7. If scheme switch [3PH-VT] is set to "Bus", the
three-phase voltage simulates the busbar voltage, and the single-phase voltage simulates the line
voltage. If the switch is set to "Line", the opposite is true.
GRZ100
V
TB1 -11 Va
Three-phase -12 Vb
voltage
source -13 Vc
-14
A
(**) Monitoring
φ jack A
V 0V
-15
Single-phase Vs1
voltage -16
source
-17
(*) Vs2
-18
TB4 -A16
DC +
power
supply − -A17
DC
voltmeter
(*) In case of testing OVL2, UVL2, and SYN2.
(**) In case when [VT-RATE] is set to "PH/PH".
Figure 6.5.1.7 Testing Synchronism Check Elements
When testing OVL2, UVL2 and SYN2, the single-phase voltage must be applied to terminal 17
and 18, instead of 15 and 16 and 3PH-VT is set to "Line".
Voltage and synchronism check elements and their output signal number are listed below. OVL2,
UVL2 and SYN2 are used for two-breaker autoreclose and provided in Model 300s and 501.
OVB 86
UVB 87
OVL1 89
UVL1 90
OVL2 91
UVL2 92
SYN1 88
SYN2 93
⎯ 242 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Connect a phase angle meter to the three-phase voltages taking the scheme switch [VT-RATE]
and [VTPHSEL] setting into consideration. The phase angle meter connection shown in Figure
6.5.1.7 is the case for the default settings, that is, [VT-RATE] and [VTPHSEL] are set to "PH/G"
and "A" respectively.
[VT-RATE] setting [VTPH-SEL] setting Meter connection phase
PH/G A A-N
B B-N
C C-N
PH/PH A A-B
B B-C
C C-A
Voltage check element OVB, UVB, OVL1, UVL1, OVL2, and UVL2
• Press 5 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" screen to display the Logic circuit screen.
• Enter a signal number for TermA line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER
key.
• Apply three-phase rated voltage and single-phase rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.7.
OVB and UVB :
• Change the magnitude of the three-phase voltage if the scheme switch [3PH-VT] is set to
"Bus" or adjust the magnitude of the single-phase voltage if it is set to "Line". Measure the
value at which the element operates and check that it is within ± 5% of the setting.
OVL1 and UVL1 :
• Adjust the magnitude of the single-phase voltage if the scheme switch [3PH-VT] is set to
"Bus"; adjust the magnitude of the three-phase voltage if the scheme switch [3PH-VT] is set to
"Line". Measure the value at which the element operates and check that it is within ± 5% of the
setting.
OVL2 and UVL2 :
• Adjust the magnitude of voltage applied to terminal 17 and 18 and measure the value at which
the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.
Synchronism check element SYN1

• Enter a signal number for TermA line to observe at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER
key.
• Apply a three-phase rated voltage and a single-phase rated voltage as shown Figure 6.5.1.7.
Voltage check:
• Set the three-phase voltage to any value over the SY1OV setting. (The default setting of
SY1OV is 51 V.)
Whilst keeping Vs1 in-phase with Va, increase the single-phase voltage Vs1 from zero volt.
Measure the voltage at which the element operates. Check that the measured voltage is within
± 5% of the SY1UV setting.
• Further increase Vs1 and measure the voltage at that the element resets. Check that the
measured voltage is within ±5% of the SY1OV setting.
⎯ 243 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Phase angle check:

• Set Va and Vs1 to any value between the SY1OV and SY1UV settings keeping Va in-phase
with Vs1. Then the SYN1 element operates.
• Shift the angle of Vs1 from that of Va, and measure the angle at which the element resets.
• Check that the measured angle is within ±5° of the SY1θ setting. (The default setting of SY1θ
is 30°.)
• Change Va and Vs1, and repeat the above.
Synchronism check element SYN2

• Apply a single-phase rated voltage to terminal 17 and 18 as shown with broken lines in Figure
6.5.1.7 and set the scheme switch [3PH-VT] to "Line". The test can be performed taking the
same step as testing SYN1.
6.5.1.11 Current Change Detection Elements OCD and OCDP

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.8.
GRZ100
TB1 -1
A
Single-phase
current -2
source
A
Monitoring
TB4 -A16 jack
DC + 0V
power
supply − -A17
DC
voltmeter
Figure 6.5.1.8 Testing Current Change Detection Element
The output signal number of the OCD and OCDP is as follows:

OCD-A 63
OCD-B 64
OCD-C 65
OCDP-A 357
OCDP-B 358
OCDP-C 359
Operation must be verified by abruptly changing the test current from 0 A to 1.2 × Setting value or
vice versa.
OCD has a fixed setting of 0.5 A and 0.1 A for 5 A rating and 1 A rating respectively.
6.5.1.12 Level Detectors OCH, OC, EF, EFL, OVG, UVLS and UVLG, UVFS and UVFG, OCBF
Voltage or current level detectors are tested by applying voltage or current individually. A
⎯ 244 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
single-phase test source is adequate for these tests.

Change the magnitude of the voltage or current applied and measure the value at which the
element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting.
Level detectors and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Measuring element Signal number Remarks
OCH-A 55 A-phase current
OC-A 94 A-phase current
EF 60 Residual current
EFL 568 Residual current
OVG 62 Residual voltage
UVFS-AB 69 A-to-B-phase voltage
UVFG-A 75 A-phase voltage
UVLS-AB 72 A-to-B-phase voltage
UVLG-A 78 A-phase voltage
OCBF-A 81 A-phase current
⎯ 245 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.5.2 Timer Test
The delayed pick-up time of the variable timer can be measured by connecting the monitoring
jacks A and B to a time counter as shown in Figure 6.5.2.1. Jacks A and B are used to observe the
input signal and output signal of the timer respectively.
GRZ100
+ TB4 -A16
DC A
power
supply − -A17 Monitoring B
jack
E 0V
Start
Time
counter Stop
0V
Figure 6.5.2.1 Testing Variable Timer
• Press 4 (= Timer) on the "Test" screen to display the "Timer" screen.

• Enter the number corresponding to the timer to be observed. The timers and assigned numbers
are listed in Appendix C.
• Enter the number corresponding to the timer output signal. The timer output signal numbers
are listed in Appendix B.
• After completing both settings, press the END key to display the following screen.
/2 Timer
Press ENTER to operate.
• Press the ENTER key to operate the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns on, and the timer is
initiated and the following display appears. The input and output signals of the timer can be
observed at monitoring jacks A and B respectively. The LEDs above monitoring jacks A or B
are also lit if the input or output signal exists.
Check that the measured time is within 10 ms of the setting time.
/2 Timer
Operati ng......
Press END to reset.
• Press the END key to reset the input signal to the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns off.
Press CANCEL key to test other timers. Repeat the above testing.
To measure the drop-off delay time, press the END key after the LED above jack B lights. The
off-delay time is the time from a signal at the monitoring jack A resets till a signal at the
monitoring jack B resets.
⎯ 246 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.5.3 Protection Scheme
In the following protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set with a three-phase voltage source and
current source is required to simulate power system pre-fault, fault and post-fault conditions.
In the following command tripping test, the remote end is not simulated and the receiving signal is
simulated by energizing a binary input circuit locally. If an end-to-end synchronized test is
possible, then it should be conducted.
The autoreclose function can be tested together with these tests. A permanent fault should be
applied to test a reclose-onto-fault.
Zone 1 tripping
This performs instantaneous or time-delayed, and single-phase or three-phase tripping depending
on the fault types, setting of trip mode control switch [Z1CNT] and autoreclose mode switch
[ARC-M].
Zone 1 tripping should be checked for the fault at 50% of the zone 1 reach setting.
Operating time is measured on operation of the trip output relay. It will typically be 1 cycle in case
of instantaneous tripping.
Check that the indications and recordings are correct.
Zone 2 tripping
Check that three-phase time-delayed final tripping is performed for all kinds of faults. Faults
should be set midway between zone 1 and zone 2.
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle plus zone 2 timer setting.
Zone F tripping
should be set midway between zone 2 and zone F.
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle plus zone F timer setting.
Zone 3 tripping
should be set midway between zone 2 and zone 3.
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle plus zone 3 timer setting.
Zone R1 tripping
Set the scheme switches [ZR1BT] and [ZR2BT] to "On". (The [ZR1BT] and [ZR2BT] default
setting is "Off".)
should be set in the center of zone R1.
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle plus zone R1 timer setting.
⎯ 247 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Zone R2 tripping
Set the scheme switch [ZR2BT] to "On". (The [ZR2BT] default setting is "Off".)
should be set midway zone R1 and zone R2.
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle plus zone R2 timer setting.
Zone ND tripping
Set the scheme switch [ZNDBT] to "On". (The [ZNDBT] default setting is "Off".)
should be set midway zone 3 and zone ND.
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle plus zone ND timer setting.
Zone 1X tripping
Set the scheme switch [SCHEME] to "Z1EXT", and [ARC-M] to "TPAR" or "SPAR&TPAR" or
"SPAR". CB ready condition (binary input signal BI10) and 52A, 52B and 52C must be
established.
Faults should be set midway between zone 1 and zone 1X.
Check that it performs instantaneous single-phase or three-phase tripping depending on the fault
types and setting of autoreclose mode selection switch [ARC-M].
Check that the operating time is 1-1.5 cycle or less.
Command Protection
The followings are described as default setting for binary inputs and binary outputs.
PUP tripping
Set the scheme switch [SCHEME] to "PUP".
Energize the binary input BI4 ("Trip signal") to simulate a trip permission signal reception and
apply a zone 2 fault.
Check that instantaneous single-phase or three-phase tripping is performed depending on the fault
De-energize the binary input BI4 and apply a zone 2 fault. Check that PUP tripping does not occur.
Apply a zone 1 fault, and check that binary output relay BO13 ("Send signal") operates.
POP tripping
Set the scheme switch [SCHEME] to "POP", [WKIT] and [ECHO] to "off".
Energize the binary input BI4 to simulate a trip permission signal reception and apply a zone 2
fault.
⎯ 248 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Set [WKIT] and [ECHO] to "On" and apply a weak-infeed fault. Check that instantaneous tripping
is performed.
De-energize the binary input BI4 and apply a zone 2 fault. Check that POP tripping does not occur.
Apply a zone 2 fault, and check that binary output relay BO13 operates.
Set the scheme switch [ECHO] to "On".
De-energize the binary inputs BI1, BI2 and BI3 to simulate the breaker being open.
Check that binary output relay BO13 operates when the binary input BI4 is energized.
Apply a zone 4 fault (reverse fault) while the binary inputs BI1, BI2 and BI3 are energized, and
check that the binary output relay BO13 does not operate when the binary input BI4 is energized.
UOP tripping
Set the scheme switch [SCHEME] to "UOP", [WKIT] and [ECHO] to "Off".
De-energize the binary input BI4 to simulate interruption of a trip block signal reception and apply
a zone 2 fault.
Set [WKIT] and [ECHO] to "On" and apply a weak-infeed fault. Check that instantaneous tripping
is performed.
Energize the binary input BI14 to simulate trip block signal reception and apply a zone 2 fault.
Check that UOP tripping does not occur.
Check that binary output relay BO13 operates in the normal condition.
Apply a zone 2 fault, and check that the BO13 resets.
Set the scheme switch [ECHO] to "On".
De-energize the binary inputs BI1, BI2 and BI3 to simulate the breaker being open.
Check that binary output relay BO13 resets when the binary input BI4 is de-energized.
Apply a zone 4 fault (reverse fault) while the binary inputs BI1, BI2 and BI3 are energized, and
check that the binary output relay BO13 remains operated when the binary input BI4 is
de-energized.
BOP tripping
Set the scheme switch [SCHEME] to "BOP".
Check that the binary input BI4 is de-energized and apply a zone 2 fault.
Energize the binary input BI4 to simulate trip block signal reception and apply a zone 2 fault.
Check that BOP tripping does not occur.
Apply a zone 2 fault, and check that binary output relay BO13 does not operate. Apply a zone 4
fault (reverse fault), and check that BO13 operates.
SOTF tripping
SOTF tripping is carried out by distance measuring element Z1 to Z4 operation or overcurrent
⎯ 249 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
element OCH operation. Z1 to Z4 can perform the SOTF tripping by setting.

The SOTF function is activated when the breaker has been open for timer TSOTF (0 – 300s)
setting and active for an additional 500ms after the breaker is closed.
The SOTF function is checked as follows:
• Set the scheme switch [SOTF-OC] to "On" and [SOTF-Z] to "Off".
De-energize the binary input signals BI1 to BI3 (terminal number A4, B4 and A5 of terminal block
TB4) for more than TSOTF (0 – 300s) setting.
• Energize the binary input signals and apply a zone 1 fault at the same time.
Check that the operating time is within 1-1.5 cycle.
• Set the scheme switch [SOTF-OC] to "Off" and [SOTF-Z] to "On" and repeat the above.
Breaker failure tripping

Set the scheme switch [BF1] to "T" or "TOC" and BF2 to "On".
• Enter a signal number 199 for the TermA line to observe the retrip signal at monitoring jack A
and 200 for the TermB line to observe the adjacent circuit breaker trip signal at monitoring
jack B and press the ENTER key.
• Apply a zone 1 fault and maintain it. Check that the retrip signal is generated after the time
setting of TBF1 and the adjacent circuit breaker trip signal is generated after the time setting of
the TBF2.
Out-of-step tripping
Set the scheme switch [OST] to "On".
To simulate out-of-step, the impedance seen by the OST element must be moved slowly from the
first quadrant to the second quadrant or vice versa.
The following shows the case of the former.
• Enter signal number 203 for the TermA line to observe the out-of-step tripping signal at
monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
• Apply a three-phase rated voltage and current.
• Gradually lower the voltage to zero, keeping the voltage and current sources in-phase. Then
gradually raise the voltage from zero to the rated value, while keeping the phase angle of
voltage and current in anti-phase.
During this process, keep the current at the rated value.
• Check that out-of-step tripping takes places at monitoring jack A.
• Check that out-of-step tripping does not take place if the voltage was lowered or raised steeply
or was gradually raised while retaining the phase angle of voltage and current in-phase, not
anti-phase.
Voltage transformer failure supervision

A voltage transformer (VT) failure is detected when an undervoltage element or residual
overvoltage element operates but a current change detection element or residual overcurrent
element does not operate accordingly.
⎯ 250 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
VT failure detection is checked as follows:

• Set the circuit breaker closed condition by applying a "1" signal to binary inputs BI1, BI2 and
BI3.
• Enter signal number 172 for the TermA line to observe the VT failure alarm signal, and 173
for the TermB line to observe the VT failure detection signal at monitoring jack A and B. Press
the ENTER key.
• Apply a three-phase rated voltage. Then, remove single-, two- or three-phase voltage. Check
that the signals are instantly observed at jack B and observed at jack A after a 10s delay.
Blocking of the voltage-dependent protection is checked as follows:

• Apply a three-phase rated voltage. Then, remove single-, two- or three-phase voltage and at
the same time apply a zone 1 fault. During this process, do not change the current.
Check that neither zone 1 tripping nor command tripping takes place.
• In the similar manner, apply a zone 1 extension, zone 2 or zone 3 fault and check that tripping
does not take place.
Check that VT failure is recorded on the event record.
Power swing blocking

A power swing is detected when the condition that the PSBSOUT element operates and PSBSIN
element and residual overcurrent element EFL do not operate, for a period of TPSB setting or
more.
Power swing detection is checked as follows:
• Enter signal number 176 for the TermA line to observe the power swing blocking signal at
monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
• Apply a phase fault which is set to midway between PSBSIN and PSBSOUT. Check that the
signal is generated with a delay of TPSB setting after the PSBSOUT operates. The PSBSOUT
operating time will be 1-2 cycles.
• Reset the fault and check that the monitoring signal resets with a 500ms delay after PSBSOUT
resets.
• Apply an earth fault which is set to midway between PSBSIN and PSBSOUT. Check that the
signal is not generated.
Power swing blocking is checked as follows:

• Apply a zone 1 phase fault after generating the power swing blocking signal. The blocking
signal is generated in the way as mentioned above. Check that zone 1 tripping takes place if
scheme switch [PSB-Z1] is set to "Off" and does not take place if set to "On".
• In the similar manner, apply zone 1x, zone 2, zone 3, zone F, zone R1 and zone R2 faults, and
check that tripping takes place or does not take place depending on the "On" or "Off" setting of
scheme switch [PSB-Z1X], [-Z2], [-Z3], [-ZF], [-ZR1] and [-ZR2].
Check that power swing blocking is recorded on the event record.
⎯ 251 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.5.4 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault records"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the applied fault.
The default setting of events is shown in Appendix H. Event recording on the external events such
as CB1 ready, Ind.reset, etc., can be checked by changing the status of binary input signals.
Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that
the description displayed on the "Event Records" screen is correct.
Note: The choice of whether to record or not can be set for each event. Change the status of the binary
input signal after confirming that the related event is set to record. (The default setting enables
all the events to be recorded.)
Some of the internal events such as Trip, VTF, etc., can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance records"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.5.5 Fault Locator
In the fault locator tests, a dynamic test set with a three-phase voltage source and current source is
required to simulate power system pre-fault, fault and post-fault conditions.
The fault locator starts measurement with one of the following tripping signals: command trip,
zone 1, zone 2 and zone 3 trip, zone 1 extension trip and external main protection trip. Therefore,
it is preferable to test it while testing the protection schemes by applying a fault.
The line parameter settings must be changed to meet those of the test set.
The measurement result is expressed as a percentage of the line length and the distance and
displayed on the "Fault Record" screen of the LCD.
Note: If abnormal settings far from actual transmission line impedance, e.g. resistance value
so larger than reactance value, etc., are done, the location error will be larger.
⎯ 252 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test
With the relay connected to the line which is carrying a load current, it is possible to check the
polarity of the voltage transformer and current transformer and the phase rotation with the
metering displays on the LCD screen.
• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/2 Metering 3/13
Va 63.5V + 0.0° la 2.10A + 4.9°
Vb 63.4V -120.0° lb 2.10A -1 15.0°
Vc 63.5V +120.1° lc 2.15A +1 2 5 . 1 °
...
...
Active power + 318.50M W
Reactive power - 2 9 . 0 0 M va r
Frequency 60.0 Hz
Note: The magnitude of voltage, current and power can be set in values on the primary side or on the
secondary side by the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
Phase angles are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage as the reference angle.
The sign of the phase angle can be set positive for either lagging phase or leading phase. (In the
default setting, it is set positive when the phase is leading to the reference angle.)
The sign of the power flow direction can be set positive for either power sending or power
receiving. (The default setting is power sending.)
• And/or open the following "Direction" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the
direction of load current. (See Section 4.2.4.6.)
／２Ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ＰｈａｓｅＡ：Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
ＰｈａｓｅＢ：Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
ＰｈａｓｅＣ：Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ
• Check that the phase rotation is correct.

• Verify the phase relationship between the voltage and current with the known load current
direction.
6.6.2 Signaling Circuit Test
This test is performed when a command protection using a signaling channel is applied. The test is
carried out after the signal receive and send contacts are connected to the telecommunication
circuit.
The signal send circuit from the relay to the telecommunication equipment is checked by forcibly
operating the signal send relay and monitoring the signal at the telecommunication equipment.
Signal sending is performed on the LCD using the "Test" sub-menu as follows.
• Press 3 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen. The LCD
displays the output modules installed depending on the model.
• Enter 2 to select the IO#2 module, the LCD will display the screen shown below, indicating
⎯ 253 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

IO#2 BO1 0
IO#2 BO2 0
IO#2 BO3 0
.
.
IO#2 BO13 1
• Move the cursor to the bottom line to select the BO13 output relay by pressing the key,
then enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below.
/3 BO
• Keep pressing the 1 key to operate the BO13 output relay forcibly. Then the BO13 output
contact will close. Monitor this at the telecommunication equipment.
The signal receive circuit from the telecommunication equipment to the relay is checked with the
"Binary input & output" screen on the LCD as follows:
Note: The receive signal is assigned to any of the binary inputs by the user setting. The following
description is the case of BI4 and BI5 assigned.
• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu. Position BI4 indicates a receive
signal status. Position BI5 indicates the status of the guard signal in case of frequency shift
signaling.

Input ( I O# 1 ) [00 0 000 000 000 ]
Input ( I O# 2 ) [00 0 ]
Input ( I O# 3 ) [00 0 000 000 0 ]
I n p u t ( I O# 4 ) [0 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 1 - t r i p ) [0 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 2 ) [0 00 000 000 000 00 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 3 ) [0 00 000 000 0 ]
O u t p u t ( I O# 4 ) [0 00 000 000 000 00 ]
• Send a signal or interrupt sending a signal at the telecommunication equipment and monitor on
the screen that the status of BI4 or BI5 changes accordingly.
If the signaling circuit connection is completed from the local relay to the remote relay, the test
above can be extended to an end-to-end test.
• Send the signal by operating the BO13 output relay at one end with the "Test" sub-menu as
described above and monitor the signal reception at the other end on the "Binary input &
output" screen.
In the BOP scheme, the end-to-end test can be carried out more simply on the "Manual test" screen
of the "Test" sub-menu. For the details, see Section 4.2.7.2.
⎯ 254 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Note: In these tests it is recommended to block the tripping circuit to prevent false tripping.
6.6.3 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test
The tripping and reclosing circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating
the output relay and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped or reclosed.
Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on the "Binary output" screen of the "Test"
sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
• Set the breaker to be closed.
• Press 3 (= Binary output) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary output" screen.
The LCD displays the output modules mounted.
• Enter 1 to select the IO#1 module, then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
/3 BO (0 =Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 3
IO#1 TP-A1 0
IO#1 TP-B1 0
IO#1 TP-C1 0
TP-A1, B1 and C1 are output relays with one normally open contact, and trip the A-phase,
B-phase and C-phase circuit breakers.
• Enter 1 for TP-A1 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
/3 BO
• Keep pressing the 1 key to operate the output relay TP-A1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
• Repeat the above for all the phases.
Reclosing circuit
The test is applied to the autoreclose function if used.
• Ensure that the circuit breaker is open.
• Press 3 (= Binary output) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary output" screen.
The LCD displays the output modules mounted.
• Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. The LCD will display
Note: The autoreclose command is assigned to any of the output relays by the user setting. The
following description is the case for the default setting of model 201.
In the default setting, the autoreclose command is set to BO10 of the IO#2 module.
⎯ 255 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
• Enter 2 to select the IO#2 module, then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
IO#2 BO1 0
IO#2 BO2 0
IO#2 BO3 0
...
I O#2 BO10 1
I O#2 BO11 0
I O#2 BO12 0
I O#2 FAIL 0
I O#2 SBX 0
Note: Terminal block number depends on the relay model. So see Appendix G for details.
Move the cursor by pressing the key and select BO10. BO10 is an autoreclose command output
relay with one normally open contact.
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
/3 BO
• Keep pressing the 1 key to forcibly operate the output relay BO10 and check that the circuit
breaker is closed.
• In case of two-breaker autoreclose, repeat the forcible operation for BO11.
⎯ 256 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits which can not be supervised are
binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore regular testing can be minimized to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test
procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output signal of
FAIL (*) and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is
also recorded in the event record.
(*) Failure signals on the external circuits, that is signaling channel, VT circuit and isolator circuit,
can be allotted to any of the binary output relays by the user. Failure signals of the signaling
channel and VT circuit are set to BO12 of the IO module as the default setting.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Auto-supervision" screen on the
LCD.
If any messages are shown on the LCD, the failed module or failed external circuits can be located
by referring to the Table 6.7.2.1.
This table shows the relationship between message displayed on the LCD and estimated failure
location. The location marked with (1) has a higher probability than the location marked with (2).
As shown in the table, some of the messages cannot identify the fault location definitely but
suggest plural possible failure locations. In these cases, the failure location is identified by
replacing the suggested failed modules with spare modules one by one or investigating and
restoring the monitored external circuits (that is signaling channel, VT circuit and isolator circuit)
until the "Alarm" LED is turned off.
The replacement or investigation should be performed first for the module or circuit with higher
probability in the table.
If there is a failure and the LCD is not working such as a screen is frozen or not displayed, the
failure location is any one of SPM and HMI module.
⎯ 257 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Table 6.7.2.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location
VCT SPM IO1 or IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 FD HMI Channel Discon- AC VT
IO8 nector cable
Checksum err ×
ROM data err ×
ROM-RAM err ×
SRAM err ×
BU-RAM err ×
DPRAM err ×
EEPROM err ×
A/D err ×
V0 err × (2) × (1) × (2)
V2 err × (2) × (1) × (2)
I0 err × (2) × (1) × (2)
CT err × (2) × (2) × (1)
DIO err × (2) × (1) × (1) × (1) × (1) × (1) × (1)
RSM err × (1) × (2)
FD:checksum err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD: ROM-RAM err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD: SRAM err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:Sampling err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:DO err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:ROM data err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:Unbalanced err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD: A/D err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD stopped × (2) × (1)
DS fail × (2) × (2) × (1)
Ch. fail × (2) × (2) × (2) × (1)
VT fail × (2) × (1)
No-working of × (2) × (1)

LCD
The location marked with (1) has a higher probability than the location marked with (2).
⎯ 258 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors mounted on the SPM module. Then check the "ALARM"
LED. If it is off, the failure is in the DC power supply circuit. It is lit, open the relay front panel and
check the LEDs mounted on the SPM module. If the LED is off, the failure is in the DC power
supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors.
In the former case, check if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
If so, replace the IO1 or IO8 module mounting the DC/DC converter and confirm that the "Alarm"
LED is turned off.
In the latter case, replace the SPM module mounting the processors and confirm that the "Alarm"
LED is turned off.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, it will not be difficult to identify the failed
module to be replaced.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules
If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (VCT, SPM, IO2, etc.) and
hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the SPM and FD modules should have
the same software name.
The module name is indicated on the bottom front of the relay case. The hardware type-form is
indicated on the module in the following format:
Module name Hardware type-form
VCT G1PC1-∗∗∗∗
SPM G1SP∗ -∗∗∗∗
IO1 G1IO1-∗∗∗∗
IO2 G1IO2-∗∗∗∗
IO3 G1IO3-∗∗∗∗
IO4 G1IO2-∗∗∗∗
IO4#1 G1IO2-∗∗∗∗
IO4#2 G1IO2-∗∗∗∗
IO5 G1IO3-∗∗∗∗
IO6 G1IO3-∗∗∗∗
IO8 G1IO8-∗∗∗∗
FD G1FD1 - ∗∗∗∗
HMI ---------
⎯ 259 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The software name is indicated on the memory device on the module with letters such as
GS1ZM1-∗∗∗, GS1ZF1-∗∗∗, etc.
CAUTION When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed
wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many
of the electronic components could suffer damage.
CAUTION After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the PLC
and IEC103 setting data are restored the original settings.
The initial replacement procedure is as follows:

• Switch off the DC power supply.
• Disconnect the trip outputs.
• Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs.
WARNING Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to
discharge.
• Unscrew the relay front cover.
Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

• Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of
the front panel.
• Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
• Remove the two retaining screws and one earthing screw on the relay case side, then detach
the front panel from the relay case.
• Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
Replacing the Transformer Module

• Open the right-side front panel (HMI module) by unscrewing the two binding screws located
on the left side of the panel.
• Open the left-side front panel (blind panel) (*) by unscrewing the two binding screws located
on the right side of the panel.
(*) This blind panel is attached only to models assembled in the type B case.
• Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the
bar.
• Unplug the ribbon cable on the SPM by nipping the catch.
• Remove the metal cover by unscrewing the binding screw located at the top and bottom of the
cover.
• Pull out the module by grasping the handles.
• Insert the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
Replacing other modules

• Open the right-side front panel (HMI module) by unscrewing the two binding screws
located on the left side of the panel.
• Open the left-side front panel (blind panel) (*) by unscrewing the two binding screws located
on the right side of the panel.
⎯ 260 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
(*) This panel is attached only to models assembled in the type B case.
• Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the
bar.
• Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of black
connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the connector.
• Pull out the module by pulling up or down at the top and bottom levers.
• Insert the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
• After replacing the SPM module, input the user setting values again.
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed module or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to service.
• Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
Note: Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the
ribbon cables are plugged in.
• If the telecommunication circuit was repaired, perform a "Manual test" and check that the
circuit is normal. For the "Manual test", refer to Section 4.2.7.2.
• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard
60255-6 the storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C
is recommended for long-term storage.
⎯ 261 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing
commissioning or maintenance tests.
• Check that all external connections are correct.
• Check the setting of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are
correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during
the tests.
• Reset the counter figures of automatic test and autoreclose, if necessary. For resetting the
count, see Section 4.2.3.4 and 4.2.3.5.
• Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the
"Auto-supervision" screen.
• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
⎯ 262 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix A
Block Diagram
⎯ 263 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
UVC
Zone 1 Trip
Phase
Z1G &
≧1 & ≧1 CB Trip Command
t 0 Selection
Z1XG & TZ1G

t 0 TZ2G Zone Back-up Trip
Z2G & ≧1
≧1 & ≧1
t 0 TZ3G
Z3G &
t 0 TZFG
ZFG &
t 0 TZR1G
ZR1G &
t 0 TZR2G
ZR2G &
t 0 TZNDG
ZNDG &
Z1S
t 0 Zone 1 Extension
TZ1S Trip
Z1XS Zone 1 extension
&
scheme logic
t 0 TZ2S
Z2S ≧1
t 0 TZ3S
Z3S
t 0 TZFS Z1-EXT
ZFS
tt 0 TZR1S
ZR1S
t 0 TZR2S
ZR2S
t 0 TZNDS
ZNDS
& Command protection Trip
Z4G Command protection scheme logic
Z4S
Phase &
- PUP/PUP+DEF Selection
UVL - POP/POP+DEF
- UOP/UOP+DEF Signal receive
DEFF - BOP/BOP+DEF
Signal Send
DEFR
t 0 TDEF
≧1 DEF
t 0 TDER Back-up Trip
EF
EF t 0 TEF Back-up Trip
≧1
Directional ≧1
EFI OC Back-up
control
tt 0 TOC Trip
OC
≧1
OCI
THM Trip
THM
OCH SOTF scheme

SOTF Trip
Z1,Z2,Z3, ZF, logic
ZR1, ZR2 or ZND CB
STUB scheme Related CB Trip Command
CB logic
UVPWI 1 Stub Trip
Isolator
t 0 TBF1 CBF Re-trip
OCBF
t 0 TBF2 CBF Related CB trip
EFL &
Trip
VTF scheme : Measuring element
OVG logic ≧1 ≧1
UVF MCB trip : Binary input/output
of VT
OCD
PSB scheme
PSB logic
Out of step trip
OST scheme
OST
logic
BCD t 0 TBCD BCD Trip
OVS1 OV & UV Trip

t 0
≧1
TOS1
OVG1
tt 0
TOG1
UVS1
t 0
TUS1
UVG1
tt 0
TUG1
OVS2
t 0 TOS2
OV Alarm
tt 0 TOG2
OVG2
UVS2
t 0 TUS2
UV Alarm
t 0 TUG2
UVG2
Model 101, 102
⎯ 264 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
UVC
Zone 1 Trip
Phase
Z1G &
t 0 Selection
Z1XG & TZ1G

Z2G & ≧1
≧1 & ≧1
t 0 TZ3G
Z3G &
t 0 TZFG
ZFG &
t 0 TZR1G
ZR1G &
t 0 TZR2G
ZR2G &
t 0 TZNDG
ZNDG & CB Reclose Command
Z1S
Trip Autoreclose scheme logic
TZ1S
&
scheme logic - SPAR
t 0 TZ2S
Z2S ≧1 - TPAR
t 0 TZ3S (with synchronism check)
Z3S
- SPAR+TPAR
t 0 TZFS Z1-EXT - Multi-shot Autoreclose (4shots)
ZFS
tt 0 TZR1S
ZR1S
t 0 TZR2S
ZR2S
t 0 TZNDS
ZNDS
& Command protection Trip SYN
Phase & UV
Z4S
OV
UVL - POP/POP+DEF
DEFF - BOP/BOP+DEF
Signal Send
DEFR
tt 0 TDEF
≧1 DEF
EF
≧1
Directional ≧1
EFI OC Back-up
control
tt 0 TOC Trip
OC
≧1
OCI
THM Trip
THM
OCH SOTF scheme

SOTF Trip
Z1,Z2,Z3, ZF, logic
ZR1, ZR2 or ZND CB
CB logic
UVPWI 1 Stub Trip
Isolator
OCBF
EFL &
Trip
OVG logic ≧1 ≧1
of VT
OCD
PSB scheme
PSB logic
Out of step trip
OST scheme
OST
logic
OVS1 OV & UV Trip

t 0
≧1
TOS1
OVG1
tt 0
TOG1
UVS1
t 0
TUS1
UVG1
tt 0
TUG1
OVS2
t 0 TOS2
OV Alarm
tt 0 TOG2
OVG2
UVS2
t 0 TUS2
UV Alarm
t 0 TUG2
UVG2
Model 201, 202, 203
⎯ 265 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
UVC
Zone 1 Trip
Phase
Z1G &
t 0 Selection
Z1XG & TZ1G

Z2G & ≧1
≧1 &
t 0 TZ3G
Z3G &
t 0 TZFG
ZFG &
t 0 TZR1G
ZR1G &
t 0 TZR2G
ZR2G &
t 0 TZNDG
Z1S
TZ1S
&
scheme logic - SPAR
t 0 TZ2S
Z2S ≧1 - TPAR
Z3S
- SPAR+TPAR
ZFS
tt 0 TZR1S
ZR1S
t 0 TZR2S
ZR2S
t 0 TZNDS
ZNDS
Phase & UV
Z4S
OV
UVL - POP/POP+DEF
DEFF - BOP/BOP+DEF
Signal Send
DEFR
t 0 TDEF
≧1 DEF
tt 0 TDER Back-up Trip
EF
Directional ≧1
EFI OC Back-up ≧1
control
tt 0 TOC Trip
OC
≧1
OCI
THM Trip
THM
OCH SOTF scheme

SOTF Trip
Z1,Z2,Z3, ZF, logic
ZR1, ZR2 or ZND CB
CB logic
UVPWI 1 Stub Trip
Isolator
OCBF
EFL &
Trip
OVG logic ≧1 ≧1
of VT
OCD
PSB scheme
PSB logic
Out of step trip
OST scheme
OST
logic
BCD tt 0 TBCD BCD Trip
OVS1 OV & UV Trip

t 0
≧1
TOS1
OVG1
tt 0
TOG1
UVS1
t 0
TUS1
UVG1
t 0
TUG1
t 0 TOS2
OVS2
OV Alarm
OVG2
tt 0 TOG2
t 0 TUS2
UVS2
UV Alarm
UVG2
t 0 TUG2
Model 204, 205, 206
⎯ 266 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
UVC
Zone 1 Trip
Phase
Z1G &
≧1 & ≧1 Bus CB Trip Command
tt 0 Selection
Z1XG & TZ1G

Z2G & ≧1
≧1 & ≧1 Center CB Trip Command
tt 0 TZ3G
Z3G &
tt 0 TZFG
ZFG &
t 0 TZR1G
ZR1G & Bus CB Reclose Command
t 0 TZR2G
ZR2G &
t 0 TZNDG
ZNDG & Center CB Reclose Command
Z1S
TZ1S
&
scheme logic - SPAR
tt 0 TZ2S
Z2S ≧1 - TPAR
Z3S
- SPAR+TPAR
ZFS
- 1.5CB busbar application
t 0 TZR1S
ZR1S
t 0 TZR2S
ZR2S
t 0 TZNDS
ZNDS
Phase & UV
Z4S
OV
UVL - POP/POP+DEF
DEFF - BOP/BOP+DEF
Signal Send
DEFR
t 0 TDEF
≧1 DEF
EF
≧1
Directional ≧1
EFI OC Back-up
control
t 0 TOC Trip
OC
≧1
OCI
THM Trip
THM
OCH SOTF scheme

SOTF Trip
Z1,Z2,Z3, ZF, logic
ZR1, ZR2 or ZND CB
CB logic
UVPWI 1 Stub Trip
Isolator
OCBF
EFL &
Trip
OVG logic ≧1 ≧1
of VT
OCD
PSB scheme
PSB logic
Out of step trip
OST scheme
OST
logic
OVS1 OV & UV Trip

t 0
≧1
TOS1
OVG1
t 0
TOG1
UVS1
t 0
TUS1
UVG1
t 0
TUG1
t 0 TOS2
OVS2
OV Alarm
OVG2
t 0 TOG2
t 0 TUS2
UVS2
UV Alarm
UVG2
t 0 TUG2
Model 301, 302, 303
⎯ 267 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
OCDF Fault Detection

(FD) unit
OCMF ≧1
UVDF
UVGF
UVSF
EFF
UVC
Zone 1 Trip
Phase
Z1G &
t 0 Selection
Z1XG & TZ1G

Z2G & ≧1
≧1 & ≧1
t 0 TZ3G
Z3G &
t 0 TZFG
ZFG &
t 0 TZR1G
ZR1G &
t 0 TZR2G
ZR2G &
t 0 TZNDG
Z1S
TZ1S Trip Autoreclose scheme logic
&
scheme logic - SPAR
t 0 TZ2S
Z2S ≧1 - TPAR
Z3S
- SPAR+TPAR
ZFS
t 0 TZR1S
ZR1S
t 0 TZR2S
ZR2S
t 0 TZNDS
ZNDS
Phase & UV
Z4S
OV
UVL - POP/POP+DEF
DEFF - BOP/BOP+DEF
Signal Send
DEFR
t 0 TDEF
≧1 DEF
EF
Directional ≧1
EFI OC Back-up ≧1
control
t 0 TOC Trip
OC
≧1
OCI
THM Trip
THM
OCH SOTF scheme

SOTF Trip
Z1,Z2,Z3, ZF, logic
ZR1, ZR2 or ZND CB
CB logic
UVPWI 1 Stub Trip
Isolator
OCBF
EFL &
Trip
OVG logic ≧1 ≧1
of VT
OCD
PSB scheme
PSB logic
Out of step trip
OST scheme
OST
logic
OVS1 OV & UV Trip

t 0
≧1
TOS1
OVG1
t 0
TOG1
UVS1
t 0
TUS1
UVG1
t 0
TUG1
OVS2 t 0 TOS2
OV Alarm
OVG2 t 0 TOG2
UVS2 t 0 TUS2
UV Alarm
UVG2 t 0 TUG2
Model 401
⎯ 268 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
OCDF Fault Detection

(FD) unit
OCMF ≧1
UVDF
UVGF
UVSF
EFF
UVC
Zone 1 Trip Bus CB Trip Command
Phase
Z1G &
≧1 & ≧1
t 0 Selection
Z1XG & TZ1G

Z2G & ≧1
≧1 & ≧1
t 0 TZ3G
Z3G & Center CB Trip Command
t 0 TZFG
ZFG &
t 0 TZR1G
ZR1G &
t 0 TZR2G Bus CB Reclose Command
ZR2G &
t 0 TZNDG
ZNDG &
Center CB Reclose Command
Z1S
TZ1S Trip Autoreclose scheme logic
&
scheme logic
t 0 TZ2S - SPAR
Z2S ≧1 - TPAR
Z3S
- SPAR+TPAR
t 0 TZFS Z1-EXT
ZFS - Multi-shot Autoreclose (4shots)
t 0 TZR1S - 1.5CB busbar application
ZR1S
t 0 TZR2S
ZR2S
t 0 TZNDS
ZNDS
Phase & UV
Z4S
OV
UVL - POP/POP+DEF
DEFF - BOP/BOP+DEF
Signal Send
DEFR
t 0 TDEF
≧1 DEF
EF
Directional ≧1
EFI OC Back-up ≧1
control
t 0 TOC Trip
OC
≧1
OCI
THM Trip
THM
OCH SOTF scheme

SOTF Trip
Z1,Z2,Z3, ZF, logic
ZR1, ZR2 or ZND CB
CB logic
UVPWI 1 Stub Trip
Isolator
OCBF
EFL &
Trip
OVG logic ≧1 ≧1
of VT
OCD
PSB scheme
PSB logic
Out of step trip
OST scheme
OST
logic
OVS1 OV & UV Trip

t 0
≧1
TOS1
OVG1
t 0
TOG1
UVS1
t 0
TUS1
UVG1
t 0
TUG1
OVS2 t 0 TOS2
OV Alarm
OVG2 t 0 TOG2
UVS2 t 0 TUS2
UV Alarm
UVG2 t 0 TUG2
Model 501
⎯ 269 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 270 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix B
Signal List
⎯ 271 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
No. Signal Name Contents
0 CONSTANT 0 constant 0
1 CONSTANT 1 constant 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 CRT USE CARRIER IN SERVICE
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 Z1G-A EARTH FAULT RELAY Z1G
20 Z1G-B ditto
21 Z1G-C ditto
22 Z1XG-A EARTH FAULT RELAY Z1XG
23 Z1XG-B ditto
24 Z1XG-C ditto
26 Z2G-B ditto
27 Z2G-C ditto
29 Z3G-B ditto
30 Z3G-C ditto
32 Z4G-B ditto
33 Z4G-C ditto
34 Z1S-AB PHASE FAULT RELAY Z1S
35 Z1S-BC ditto
36 Z1S-CA ditto
37 Z1XS-AB PHASE FAULT RELAY Z1XS
38 Z1XS-BC ditto
39 Z1XS-CA ditto
41 Z2S-BC ditto
42 Z2S-CA ditto
44 Z3S-BC ditto
45 Z3S-CA ditto
47 Z4S-BC ditto
48 Z4S-CA ditto
49 PSBSOUT-AB POWER SWING BLOCK for ZS OUTER ELEMENT
50 PSBSOUT-BC ditto
51 PSBSOUT-CA ditto
52 OCCR-A OC RELAY FOR LINE VT
53 OCCR-B ditto
54 OCCR-C ditto
55 OCH-A HIGH SET OC RELAY
56 OCH-B ditto
57 OCH-C ditto
58 DEFR DIRECT. EF RLY (EXTERNAL)
59 DEFF DIRECT. EF RLY (INTERNAL)
60 EF EARTH FAULT RELAY
61 EFI EARTH FAULT IDMT RELAY
62 OVG EARTH OV RELAY
63 OCD-A CURRENT CHANGE DETEC. RELAY
64 OCD-B ditto
65 OCD-C ditto
66 UVC-A UV RELAY (PHASE SELECTOR)
67 UVC-B ditto
68 UVC-C ditto
69 UVFS-AB UV RELAY (High set)
70 UVFS-BC ditto
⎯ 272 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
71 UVFS-CA ditto
72 UVLS-AB UV RELAY (Low set)
73 UVLS-BC ditto
74 UVLS-CA ditto
75 UVFG-A UV RELAY (High set)
76 UVFG-B ditto
77 UVFG-C ditto
78 UVLG-A UV RELAY (Low set)
79 UVLG-B ditto
80 UVLG-C ditto
81 OCBF-A OC RELAY FOR CBF DETECTION
82 OCBF-B ditto
83 OCBF-C ditto
84 OST-ZM OST-ZM
85 OST-ZN OST-ZN
86 OVB OVB
87 UVB UVB
88 SYN1 SYN1
89 OVL1 OVL1
90 UVL1 UVL1
91 OVL2 OVL2
92 UVL2 UVL2
93 SYN2 SYN2
94 OC-A OC-A
95 OC-B OC-B
96 OC-C OC-C
97 OCI-A OCI-A
98 OCI-B OCI-B
99 OCI-C OCI-C
100 CHECKING CHECKING
101 CB-AND CB CONTACT (3PHASE AND)
102 CB-OR CB CONTACT (3PHASE OR)
103 Z1G-AX Z1G-AX
104 Z1G-BX Z1G-BX
105 Z1G-CX Z1G-CX
106 Z1XG-AX Z1XG-AX
107 Z1XG-BX Z1XG-BX
108 Z1XG-CX Z1XG-CX
109 Z2G-AX Z2G-AX
110 Z2G-BX Z2G-BX
111 Z2G-CX Z2G-CX
112 Z3G-AX Z3G-AX
113 Z3G-BX Z3G-BX
114 Z3G-CX Z3G-CX
115 Z4G-AX Z4G-AX
116 Z4G-BX Z4G-BX
117 Z4G-CX Z4G-CX
118 Z1S-ABX Z1S-ABX
119 Z1S-BCX Z1S-BCX
120 Z1S-CAX Z1S-CAX
121 Z1XS-ABX Z1XS-ABX
122 Z1XS-BCX Z1XS-BCX
123 Z1XS-CAX Z1XS-CAX
124 Z2S-ABX Z2S-ABX
125 Z2S-BCX Z2S-BCX
126 Z2S-CAX Z2S-CAX
127 Z3S-ABX Z3S-ABX
128 Z3S-BCX Z3S-BCX
129 Z3S-CAX Z3S-CAX
130 Z4S-ABX Z4S-ABX
131 Z4S-BCX Z4S-BCX
132 Z4S-CAX Z4S-CAX
133 PSBSOUT-ABX PSBSOUT-ABX
134 PSBSOUT-BCX PSBSOUT-BCX
135 PSBSOUT-CAX PSBSOUT-CAX
136 OCCROR OCCR0R
137 OCHOR OCHOR
138 OCDOR OCDOR
139 UVCOR UVCOR
140 UVFSOR UVFSOR
⎯ 273 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
141 UVLSOR UVLSOR
142 UVFGOR UVFGOR
143 UVLGOR UVLGOR
144 2PH 2PH
145 TZ1GA TZ1GA
146 TZ1GB TZ1GB
147 TZ1GC TZ1GC
148 Z1G TRIP Z1G TRIP
149 Z1G-A TRIP Z1G TRIP A ph.
150 Z1G-B TRIP Z1G TRIP B ph.
151 Z1G-C TRIP Z1G TRIP C ph.
152
154 Z2GOR Z2G RELAY OR LOGIC
155
158 Z1PTT ZONE1 RELAY O/P FOR PTTSCHEME
159 TZ1S Z1S TRIP TIMER
160 Z1S TRIP Z1S TRIP
161
163 Z2SOR Z2S RELAY OR LOGIC
164
167 Z1XG TRIP Z1XG TRIP
168 Z1X-A TRIP Z1XG TRIP A ph.
169 Z1X-B TRIP Z1XG TRIP B ph.
170 Z1X-C TRIP Z1XG TRIP C ph.
171 Z1XS TRIP Z1XS TRIP
172 VTF ALARM VTF ALARM
173 VTF VTF BLOCK SIGNAL
174 VTF1 ALARM 3PH VTF DETECT.
175 VTF2 ALARM 1 OR 2PH VTF DETECT
176 PSB DET PSB DETECTION
177 PSB-Z1 PSB FOR ZONE1 RELAY
178 PSB-Z1X PSB FOR ZONE1X RELAY
181 PSB-CR PSB FOR CARRIER TRIP
182 STUB TRIP STUB TRIP
183 SOTF TRIP SOTF TRIP
184 EFI TRIP EF IDMT TRIP
185 EF ALARM EF BACK-UP TRIP ALARM
186 DEF ALARM DEF BACK-UP TRIP ALARM
187 EF BU-TRIP EF or DEF BACK-UP TRIP
188 TZ4S Z4S BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
189 ZR1S TRIP ZR1S TRIP
190 ZR1SOR ZR1S RELAY OR LOGIC
191 TZ4G Z4G BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
192 ZR1G TRIP Z4G BACK-UP TRIP
193 ZR1GOR ZR1G RELAY OR LOGIC
194 BU TRIP BACK-UP TRIP
195 BURECLK BU RECLOSE BLOCK
196 CBF RETRIP-A RE-TRIP A ph. FOR CBF
197 CBF RETRIP-B RE-TRIP B ph. FOR CBF
198 CBF RETRIP-C RE-TRIP C ph. FOR CBF
199 CBF DET CBF DETECTION
200 CBF TRIP RELATED CB TRIP FOR CBF
201 TOST1 OS DETECTION TIMER 1
202 TOST2 OS DETECTION TIMER 2
203 OST TRIP OS TRIP
204 EXT CAR-R1 CARRIER RECEIVE FROM REMOTE TERM.1
205 C/R PUP CARRIER SEND FOR PUTT
206 CRG-PUP PUTT LOCAL TRIP
207 CRS-PUP ditto
208 ZGCX CARRIER CONTROL RELAY(Z2G/Z3G)
209 ZSCX CARRIER CONTROL RELAY(Z2S/Z3S)
210 C/R POUP CARRIER SEND FOR POTT/UNBLK
⎯ 274 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
211 CRG-POP/UOP POTT/UNBLK LOCAL TRIP
212 CRS-POP/UOP ditto
213 WI TRIP WEAK INFEED TRIP
214 REV BLK CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCK
215 DEFFCR DG CARRIER TRIP DELAY TIMER
216 DEFRCR CARR. COORDINATION DGO TIMER
217 C/R DEF DG CARR. SEND (PUTT,POTT,UNBLK)
218 DEFCAR TRIP DG CARR. TRIP (ditto)
219 C/R DEFBOP DG CARR. SEND (BLK)
220 DEFBOP TRIP DG CARR. TRIP (BLK)
221 C/R BOP CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCKING
222 CRG-BOP BLOCKING LOCAL TRIP
223 CRS-BOP ditto
224 LK-BOP CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCKING
225 EXT CAR-S EXTERNAL CARRIER SEND COMMAND
226 CAR-G TRIP CARRIER TRIP(G)
227 CAR-S TRIP CARRIER TRIP(S)
228 CAR-A TRIP DISTANCE or DG CARRIER TRIP (A ph.)
229 CAR-B TRIP DISTANCE or DG CARRIER TRIP (B ph.)
230 CAR-C TRIP DISTANCE or DG CARRIER TRIP (C ph.)
231 CAR TRIP DISTANCE or DG CARRIER TRIP
232 DEFCR TRIP DG CARRIER TRIP
233 WICAR TRIP WEAK CARRIER TRIP
234 TPMD3PH TRIP MODE 3ph.
235 TRIP-A TRIP A ph.
236 TRIP-B TRIP B ph.
237 TRIP-C TRIP C ph.
238 TRIP-OR TRIP O/P OR
239 TRIP TRIP SINGLE SHOT
240 TRIP-A1 TRIP O/P FOR BUS CB
241 TRIP-B1 ditto
242 TRIP-C1 ditto
243 TRIP-A2 TRIP O/P FOR CENTER CB
244 TRIP-B2 ditto
245 TRIP-C2 ditto
246 FDX1 FD OUTPUT 1 (OPTION)
247 FDX2 FD OUTPUT 2 (OPTION)
248 M-OR MAIN TRIP “OR”
249 M-AND MAIN TRIP “AND”
250 FD FD TRIP “OR”
251 FD-AND FD TRIP “AND”
252 SBT CARRIER SEND FOR TEST/MONITOR
253 CHF CARRIER CHANNEL FAILURE
254 RLYFAIL RELAY FAILURE
255 RLY O/P BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
256 SV-LOCK SV BLOCK
257 LSSV LS FAILURE
258 TEVLV EVOLVING FAULT WAITING TIMER
259 TSPR1 LEAD SPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
260 TTPR1 LEAD TPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
261 TRR1 LEAD RESET TIMER
262 TPARL-SET LEAD TPAR O/P CONFIRMED
263 TSPR2 FLW SPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
264 TTPR2 FLW TPAR TIMING
265 TRR2 FLW RESET TIMER
266 TPAR.F FLW TPAR O/P CONFIRMED
267 LB.DL-1 LEAD LIVE BUS & DEAD LINE
268 DB.LL-1 LEAD DEAD BUS & LIVE LINE
269 LB.LL.SYN-1 LEAD LIVE BUS & LIVE LINE +SYN.
270 LB.DL-2 FLW LIVE BUS & DEAD LINE
271 DB.LL-2 FLW DEAD BUS & LIVE LINE
272 LB.LL.SYN-2 FLW LIVE BUS & LIVE LINE SYN.
273 SYN-OP SYN. CONDITION FOR TPAR
274 SYN-SEL SYN. ELEMENT SELECT SIGNAL
275 TDBL1 VOLTAGE CHECK TIMER
276 TLBD1 ditto
277 TSYN1 LEAD SYN CHECK TIMER
278 TDBL2 VOLTAGE CHECK TIMER
279 TLBD2 ditto
280 TSYN2 FLW SYN CHECK TIMER
⎯ 275 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
281 REC.READY1 LEAD REC. READY SIGNAL
282 REC.READY2 FLW REC. READY SIGNAL
283 BRIDGE1 LEAD BRIDGE CONDITION
284 BRIDGE2 FLW BRIDGE CONDITION
285 IN-PROG1 LEAD REC. IN PROGRESS
286 IN-PROG2 FLW REC. IN PROGRESS
287 SPAR1 LEAD SPAR O/P
288 SPAR2 FLW SPAR O/P
289 TPAR1 LEAD TPAR O/P
290 TPAR2 FLW TPAR O/P
291 ARC1 REC OUTPUT FOR BUS CB
292 ARC2 REC OUTPUT FOR CENTER CB
293 94TT1 LEAD REMAINING PHASE TRIP
294 94TT2 FLW REMAINING PHASE TRIP
295 FT1 LEAD FINAL TRIP SIGNAL
296 FT2 FLW FINAL TRIP SIGNAL
297 TS2 MULTI.SHOT-2 DEAD TIMER
300 TS2R MULTI.SHOT-2 RESET TIMER
303 MULTI.ARC MULTI. SHOT REC. OUTPUT
304 MAR-OK0 1 SHOT REC. SUCCESS
308 MAR-FT MULTI. REC. FINAL TRIP
309 TRIP-H TRIP SIGNAL HOLD
310 SBT-INV CARRIER SEND FOR TEST/MONITOR
311 BFS-AB BLINDER FOR ZS (FORWARD)
312 BFS-BC ditto
313 BFS-CA ditto
314 BRS-AB BLINDER FOR ZS (REVERSE)
315 BRS-BC ditto
316 BRS-CA ditto
317 BFG-A BLINDER FOR ZG (FORWARD)
318 BFG-B ditto
319 BFG-C ditto
320 BRG-A BLINDER FOR ZG (REVERSE)
321 BRG-B ditto
322 BRG-C ditto
323 PSBSIN-AB POWER SWING BLOCK FOR ZS INNER ELEMENT
324 PSBSIN-BC ditto
325 PSBSIN-CA ditto
326 OC_TRIP OC BACK-UP TRIP
327 OCI_TRIP IDMT OC BACK-UP TRIP
328 OC_BU-TRIP OC or OCI BACK-UP TRIP
329 TSPR3 FLW DEAD LINE TIMER
330 TTPR3 FLW DEAD LINE TIMER
331 Z1GTORT Z1G TRIP
332 Z1STT Z1S TRIP
333
334
335
336
337 OST_BO OST BINARY OUTPUT
338 EXT_DEFCAR-S EXTERNAL DG CARRIER SEND COMMAND
339 S-DEFBOP2 DG CARRIER SEND2(BLOCKING)
340
341 Z1+Z1X+CRT MAIN TRIP
342 Z1_TRIP ZONE1 TRIP
343 Z1X_TRIP ZONE1 EXTENTION TRIP
346 ZR1_TRIP ZONE-R1 TRIP
347 Z2+Z3+ZR1 ZONE2-R1 TRIP
348 Z3+ZR1 ZONE3 AND ZONE-R1 TRIP
349 EF/DEF_ALARM EF/DEF/EFI ALARM
350 SOTF+STUB SOTF/STUB TRIP
⎯ 276 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
351 PUP TRIP PUP TRIP
352 PSBSIN-ABX PSBSIN-ABX
353 PSBSIN-BCX PSBSIN-BCX
354 PSBSIN-CAX PSBSIN-CAX
355 TP-2PH Multi phase trip signal
356 TP-MPH Multi phase trip signal
357 OCDP-A CURRENT CHANGE DET. DURING PS
358 OCDP-B ditto
359 OCDP-C ditto
360 DOCN-F NEGATIVE DIR.RELAY (FORWARD)
361 DOCN-R NEGATIVE DIR.RELAY (REVERSE)
362 UVPWI-A UV RELAY
363 UVPWI-B UV RELAY
364 UVPWI-C UV RELAY
365 TP-1PH single phase trip
366
367
368 ARC COM.ON Autorecloser active (for IEC103)
369 TELE.COM.ON Teleprotection active (for IEC103)
370 PROT.COM.ON Protection active (for IEC103)
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393 OVL-ABC OVL element output (for 3phase line voltage)
394 OVL-A OVL-A element output (for 3phase line voltage)
395 OVL-B OVL-B element output (for 3phase line voltage)
396 OVL-C OVL-C element output (for 3phase line voltage)
397 3PLL Three phase live line element output
398
399
400
401 OCMF-L1 MULTI-STEP OC RELAY LEVEL 1
402 OCMF-L2 ditto LEVEL 2
408 OCMF ditto OR LOGIC
409 OCDF-A CURRENT CHANGE DETECTION RELAY
410 OCDF-B ditto
411 OCDF-C ditto
412
413
414
415
416 EFF EARTH FAULT DETECTION RELAY
417 UVSF-AB UV RELAY
418 UVSF-BC ditto
419 UVSF-CA ditto
420
⎯ 277 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
421 UVGF-A ditto
422 UVGF-B ditto
423 UVGF-C ditto
424
425 UVDF-A VOLTAGE CHANGE DETECTION RELAY
426 UVDF-B ditto
427 UVDF-C ditto
428
429
430
431 52AND1 CB1 contact AND logic
432 52AND2 CB2 contact AND logic
433 LB Selected live bus mode
434 DB Selected dead bus mode
435 SYN Selected Synchronism check mode
436 OVS1-AB OVS1-AB relay element output
437 OVS1-BC OVS1-BC relay element output
438 OVS1-CA OVS1-CA relay element output
439 OVS2-AB OVS2-AB relay element output
440 OVS2-BC OVS2-BC relay element output
441 OVS2-CA OVS2-CA relay element output
442 OVG1-A OVG1-A relay element output
443 OVG1-B OVG1-B relay element output
444 OVG1-C OVG1-C relay element output
445 OVG2-A OVG2-A relay element output
446 OVG2-B OVG2-B relay element output
447 OVG2-C OVG2-C relay element output
448 OVS1-AB INST OVS1-AB relay element start
449 OVS1-BC INST OVS1-BC relay element start
450 OVS1-CA INST OVS1-CA relay element start
451 OVG1-A INST OVG1-A relay element start
452 OVG1-B INST OVG1-B relay element start
453 OVG1-C INST OVG1-C relay element start
454 UVS1-AB UVS1-AB relay element output
455 UVS1-BC UVS1-BC relay element output
456 UVS1-CA UVS1-CA relay element output
457 UVS2-AB UVS2-AB relay element output
458 UVS2-BC UVS2-BC relay element output
459 UVS2-CA UVS2-CA relay element output
460 UVG1-A UVG1-A relay element output
461 UVG1-B UVG1-B relay element output
462 UVG1-C UVG1-C relay element output
463 UVG2-A UVG2-A relay element output
464 UVG2-B UVG2-B relay element output
465 UVG2-C UVG2-C relay element output
466 UVS1-AB INST UVS1-AB relay element start
467 UVS1-BC INST UVS1-BC relay element start
468 UVS1-CA INST UVS1-CA relay element start
469 UVG1-A INST UVG1-A relay element start
470 UVG1-B INST UVG1-B relay element start
471 UVG1-C INST UVG1-C relay element start
472 UVSBLK-AB UVS BLK-AB relay element output
473 UVSBLK-BC UVS BLK-BC relay element output
474 UVSBLK-CA UVS BLK-CA relay element output
475 UVGBLK-A UVG BLK-A relay element output
476 UVGBLK-B UVG BLK-B relay element output
477 UVGBLK-C UVG BLK-C relay element output
478
479
480 ARCMD OFF Autoreclosing mode (Disable)
481 ARCMD SPAR ditto (SPAR)
482 ARCMD TPAR ditto (MPAR)
483 ARCMD S&T ditto (SPAR & TPAR)
484 ARCMD EXT1P ditto (EXT1P)
485 ARCMD EXT3P ditto (EXT3P)
486 ARC-SET output set signal in leader CB autoreclose
487 CB UNDRY.L ST Starting signal for final trip with CB unready
488 TSUC1 ARC.L success reset signal
489 TSUC2 ARC.F success reset signal
490 ARC SUCCESS1 leader CB autoreclose success signal
⎯ 278 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
491 ARC SUCCESS2 Follower CB autoreclose success signal
492 ARC FAIL1 leader CB autoreclose fail signal
493 ARC FAIL2 Follower CB autoreclose fail signal
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501 UARCSW P1 User ARC switch Position1
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513 BI1 COMMAND Binary input signal BI1
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553 ZR1S-AB PHASE FAULT RELAY ZR1S
554 ZR1S-BC ditto
555 ZR1S-CA ditto
556 THM-T Thermal trip relay
557 ZR2S-AB PHASE FAULT RELAY ZR2S
558 ZR2S-BC ditto
559 ZR2S-CA ditto
560 THM-A Thermal alarm relay
⎯ 279 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
561 PSBGIN-A POWER SWING BLOCK FOR ZG INNER ELEMENT
562 PSBGIN-B ditto
563 PSBGIN-C ditto
564
565 PSBGOUT-A POWER SWING BLOCK for ZG OUTER ELEMENT
566 PSBGOUT-B ditto
567 PSBGOUT-C ditto
568 EFL EARTH FAULT RELAY
569 ZR1G-A EARTH FAULT RELAY ZR1G
570 ZR1G-B ditto
571 ZR1G-C ditto
572
573 ZR2G-A EARTH FAULT RELAY ZR2G
574 ZR2G-B ditto
575 ZR2G-C ditto
576
577 ZFS-AB PHASE FAULT RELAY ZFS
578 ZFS-BC ditto
579 ZFS-CA ditto
580
581 ZNDS-AB PHASE FAULT RELAY ZNDS
582 ZNDS-BC ditto
583 ZNDS-CA ditto
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593 ZFG-A EARTH FAULT RELAY ZFG
594 ZFG-B ditto
595 ZFG-C ditto
596
597 ZNDG-A EARTH FAULT RELAY ZNDG
598 ZNDG-B ditto
599 ZNDG-C ditto
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609 ZR1S-ABX ZR1S-ABX
610 ZR1S-BCX ZR1S-BCX
611 ZR1S-CAX ZR1S-CAX
612 EXT CAR-R2 CARRIER RECEIVE FROM REMOTE TERM.2
613 OC TRIP-A OC trip signal (A-Phase)
614 OC TRIP-B OC trip signal (B-Phase)
615 OC TRIP-C OC trip signal (C-Phase)
616 OCI TRIP-A OCI trip signal (A-Phase)
617 OCI TRIP-B OCI trip signal (B-Phase)
618 OCI TRIP-C OCI trip signal (C-Phase)
619 C/R DISECHO Distance carrier echo signal
620 C/R DEFECHO DEF carrier echo signal
621 CHF-SV R1 CARRIER CHANNEL FAILURE (Remote terminal-1)
622 CHF-SV R2 CARRIER CHANNEL FAILURE (Remote terminal-2)
623 TP-A Trip A-phase command without off-delay timer
624 TP-B Trip B-phase command without off-delay timer
625 TP-C Trip C-phase command without off-delay timer
626 ZFG-AX ZFG-AX
627 ZFG-BX ZFG-BX
628 ZFG-CX ZFG-CX
629 ZR1G-AX ZR1G-AX
630 ZR1G-BX ZR1G-BX
⎯ 280 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
631 ZR1G-CX ZR1G-CX
632 ZR2G-AX ZR2G-AX
633 ZR2G-BX ZR2G-BX
634 ZR2G-CX ZR2G-CX
635 ZFS-ABX ZFS-ABX
636 ZFS-BCX ZFS-BCX
637 ZFS-CAX ZFS-CAX
638 ZR2S-ABX ZR2S-ABX
639 ZR2S-BCX ZR2S-BCX
640 ZR2S-CAX ZR2S-CAX
641 Z2G-A_TRIP Z2G TRIP A ph.
642 Z2G-B_TRIP Z2G TRIP B ph.
643 Z2G-C_TRIP Z2G TRIP C ph.
644 Z3G-A_TRIP Z3G TRIP A ph.
645 Z3G-B_TRIP Z3G TRIP B ph.
646 Z3G-C_TRIP Z3G TRIP C ph.
647 ZFG_TRIP ZFG TRIP
648 ZFG-A_TRIP ZFG TRIP A ph.
649 ZFG-B_TRIP ZFG TRIP B ph.
650 ZFG-C_TRIP ZFG TRIP C ph.
651 ZFS_TRIP ZFS TRIP
652 ZR1G-A_TRIP ZR1G TRIP A ph.
653 ZR1G-B_TRIP ZR1G TRIP B ph.
654 ZR1G-C_TRIP ZR1G TRIP C ph.
655 ZR2G_TRIP ZR2G TRIP
656 ZR2G-A_TRIP ZR2G TRIP A ph.
657 ZR2G-B_TRIP ZR2G TRIP B ph.
658 ZR2G-C_TRIP ZR2G TRIP C ph.
659 ZR2S_TRIP ZR2S TRIP
662 ZFGOR ZFG RELAY OR LOGIC
663 ZFSOR ZFS RELAY OR LOGIC
664 ZR2GOR ZR2G RELAY OR LOGIC
665 ZR2SOR ZR2S RELAY OR LOGIC
666 ZNDG-AX ZNDG-AX
667 ZNDG-BX ZNDG-BX
668 ZNDG-CX ZNDG-CX
669 ZNDS-ABX ZNDS-ABX
670 ZNDS-BCX ZNDS-BCX
671 ZNDS-CAX ZNDS-CAX
672 ZNDG_TRIP ZNDG TRIP
673 ZNDG-A_TRIP ZNDG TRIP A ph.
674 ZNDG-B_TRIP ZNDG TRIP B ph.
675 ZNDG-C_TRIP ZNDG TRIP C ph.
676 ZNDS_TRIP ZNDS TRIP
677 DEF_TRIP DEF BACK-UP TRIP
678 EF_TRIP EF BACK-UP TRIP
679 STUB-A_TRIP Stub TRIP A ph.
680 STUB-B_TRIP Stub TRIP B ph.
681 STUB-C_TRIP Stub TRIP C ph.
682 SOTF-A_TRIP SOTF-OCH TRIP A ph.
683 SOTF-B_TRIP SOTF-OCH TRIP B ph.
684 SOTF-C_TRIP SOTF-OCH TRIP C ph.
685 SOTF-Z_TRIP SOTF-Distance TRIP
686 OCH_TRIP OCH TRIP
687 OCH-A_TRIP OCH TRIP A ph.
688 OCH-B_TRIP OCH TRIP B ph.
689 OCH-C_TRIP OCH TRIP C ph.
690 THM_ALARM THERMAL ALARM
691 THM_TRIP THERMAL TRIP
692 CBF_RETRIP RE-TRIP FOR CBF
693 CBF_TRIP-A RELATED CB TRIP A ph. FOR CBF
694 CBF_TRIP-B RELATED CB TRIP B ph. FOR CBF
695 CBF_TRIP-C RELATED CB TRIP C ph. FOR CBF
696 PSBGOUT-AX PSBGOUT-AX
697 PSBGOUT-BX PSBGOUT-BX
698 PSBGOUT-CX PSBGOUT-CX
699 PSBGIN-AX PSBGIN-AX
700 PSBGIN-BX PSBGIN-BX
⎯ 281 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
701 PSBGIN-CX PSBGIN-CX
702 PSBS DET PSB for ZS DETECTION
703 PSBG DET PSB for ZG DETECTION
704 ZF TRIP ZONE-F TRIP
705 ZR2 TRIP ZONE-R2 TRIP
706 ZND TRIP ZONE-ND TRIP
707 SHOT NUM1 Trip/Auto-Reclosing shot number1 condition
712 Z1CNT INST Z1 CONTROL COMMAND (Instantly trip)
713 Z1CNT 3PTP Z1 CONTROL COMMAND (3-phase trip)
714 Z1CNT ARCBLK Z1 CONTROL COMMAND (Autoreclosing block)
715 Z1CNT TPBLK Z1 CONTROL COMMAND (Trip block)
716 ZNDGOR ZNDG RELAY OR LOGIC
717 ZNDSOR ZNDS RELAY OR LOGIC
718
719
720 ZGC-AX CARRIER CONTROL RELAY(Z2G/Z3G-A ph.)
721 ZGC-BX CARRIER CONTROL RELAY(Z2G/Z3G-B ph.)
722 ZGC-CX CARRIER CONTROL RELAY(Z2G/Z3G-C ph.)
723 C/R PUP-A CARRIER SEND FOR PUTT (ZG-A ph.)
724 C/R PUP-B CARRIER SEND FOR PUTT (ZG-B ph.)
725 C/R PUP-C CARRIER SEND FOR PUTT (ZG-C ph.)
726 C/R PUP-S CARRIER SEND FOR PUTT (ZS)
727 PUP TRIP-A PUTT LOCAL TRIP (A ph.)
728 PUP TRIP-B PUTT LOCAL TRIP (B ph.)
729 PUP TRIP-C PUTT LOCAL TRIP (C ph.)
730 C/R POUP-A CARRIER SEND FOR POTT/UNBLOCK (ZG-A ph.)
731 C/R POUP-B CARRIER SEND FOR POTT/UNBLOCK (ZG-B ph.)
732 C/R POUP-C CARRIER SEND FOR POTT/UNBLOCK (ZG-C ph.)
733 C/R POUP-S CARRIER SEND FOR POTT/UNBLOCK (ZS)
734 POUP TRIP-A POTT/UNBLOCK LOCAL TRIP (A ph.)
735 POUP TRIP-B POTT/UNBLOCK LOCAL TRIP (B ph.)
736 POUP TRIP-C POTT/UNBLOCK LOCAL TRIP (C ph.)
737 REV BLK-A CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCK (ZG-A ph.)
738 REV BLK-B CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCK (ZG-B ph.)
739 REV BLK-C CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCK (ZG-C ph.)
740 REV BLK-S CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCK (ZS)
741 C/R BOP-A CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCKING (ZG-A ph.)
742 C/R BOP-B CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCKING (ZG-B ph.)
743 C/R BOP-C CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCKING (ZG-C ph.)
744 C/R BOP-S CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCKING (ZS)
745 BOP TRIP-A BLOCKING LOCAL TRIP (A ph.)
746 BOP TRIP-B BLOCKING LOCAL TRIP (B ph.)
747 BOP TRIP-C BLOCKING LOCAL TRIP (C ph.)
748 C/R DEF-A DG CARRIER SEND (PUTT,POTT,UNBLOCK) (A ph.)
749 C/R DEF-B DG CARRIER SEND (PUTT,POTT,UNBLOCK) (B ph.)
750 C/R DEF-C DG CARRIER SEND (PUTT,POTT,UNBLOCK) (C ph.)
751 DEFCR TRIP-A DG CARRIER LOCAL TRIP (PUTT,POTT,UNBLOCK) (A ph.)
752 DEFCR TRIP-B DG CARRIER LOCAL TRIP (PUTT,POTT,UNBLOCK) (B ph.)
753 DEFCR TRIP-C DG CARRIER LOCAL TRIP (PUTT,POTT,UNBLOCK) (C ph.)
754 C/R DEFBOP-A DG CARRIER SEND (BLOCKING) (A ph.)
755 C/R DEFBOP-B DG CARRIER SEND (BLOCKING) (B ph.)
756 C/R DEFBOP-C DG CARRIER SEND (BLOCKING) (C ph.)
757 DEFBOP TRIP-A DG CARRIER LOCAL TRIP (BLOCKING) (A ph.)
758 DEFBOP TRIP-B DG CARRIER LOCAL TRIP (BLOCKING) (B ph.)
759 DEFBOP TRIP-C DG CARRIER LOCAL TRIP (BLOCKING) (C ph.)
760 POUP TRIP POUP TRIP
761 BOP TRIP BOP TRIP
762 REV BLK-DEF DG.CARRIER SEND FOR BLOCK
763 DEFR TRIP DEF BACK-UP TRIP
764 UVSBLK UVS BLOCK
765 UVGBLK UVG BLOCK
766 BCD BCD relay element output
767 BCD TRIP BCD TRIP
768 C/R DISECHO-A CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (ZG-A ph.)
769 C/R DISECHO-B CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (ZG-B ph.)
770 C/R DISECHO-C CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (ZG-C ph.)
⎯ 282 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
771 C/R DISECHO-S CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (ZS)
772 C/R DEFECHO-A DG CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (A ph.)
773 C/R DEFECHO-B DG CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (B ph.)
774 C/R DEFECHO-C DG CARRIER SEND FOR ECHO (C ph.)
775 WI TRIP-A WEEK INFEED LOCAL TRIP (A ph.)
776 WI TRIP-B WEEK INFEED LOCAL TRIP (B ph.)
777 WI TRIP-C WEEK INFEED LOCAL TRIP (C ph.)
778 DEFWI TRIP-A DG CARRIER WEEK INFEED LOCAL TRIP (A ph.)
779 DEFWI TRIP-B DG CARRIER WEEK INFEED LOCAL TRIP (B ph.)
780 DEFWI TRIP-C DG CARRIER WEEK INFEED LOCAL TRIP (C ph.)
781
782
783
784 DISCR TRIP DISTANCE CARRIER TRIP
785 DISCR-A TRIP DISTANCE CARRIER TRIP (A ph.)
786 DISCR-B TRIP DISTANCE CARRIER TRIP (B ph.)
787 DISCR-C TRIP DISTANCE CARRIER TRIP (C ph.)
788 DEFCR-A TRIP DG CARRIER TRIP (A ph.)
789 DEFCR-B TRIP DG CARRIER TRIP (B ph.)
790 DEFCR-C TRIP DG CARRIER TRIP (C ph.)
791 PSBTP TRIP PSBTP CARRIER TRIP
792 PSBTP-A TRIP PSBTP CARRIER TRIP (A ph.)
793 PSBTP-B TRIP PSBTP CARRIER TRIP (B ph.)
794 PSBTP-C TRIP PSBTP CARRIER TRIP (C ph.)
795
796
797
798
799
800 C/R SEND-A DISTANCE CARRIER SEND COMMAND (ZG-A ph.)
801 C/R SEND-B DISTANCE CARRIER SEND COMMAND (ZG-B ph.)
802 C/R SEND-C DISTANCE CARRIER SEND COMMAND (ZG-C ph.)
803 C/R SEND-S DISTANCE CARRIER SEND COMMAND (ZS)
804 C/R SEND-DEFA DG CARRIER SEND COMMAND (A ph.)
805 C/R SEND-DEFB DG CARRIER SEND COMMAND (B ph.)
806 C/R SEND-DEFC DG CARRIER SEND COMMAND (C ph.)
807
808
809
810
811
812 C/R SEND-PSBA PSBTP CARRIER SEND COMMAND (A ph.)
813 C/R SEND-PSBB PSBTP CARRIER SEND COMMAND (B ph.)
814 C/R SEND-PSBC PSBTP CARRIER SEND COMMAND (C ph.)
815 C/R SEND-PSB PSBTP CARRIER SEND COMMAND
816 CAR-R-R1 Distance carrier OR signal from remote term-1
817 DEFCAR-R-R1 DEF carrier OR signal from remote term-1
818 PSBCAR-R-R1 PSB carrier OR signal from remote term-1
819
820 CAR-R-R2 Distance carrier OR signal from remote term-2
821 DEFCAR-R-R2 DEF carrier OR signal from remote term-2
822 PSBCAR-R-R2 PSB carrier OR signal from remote term-2
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832 TR1 TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-1
833 TR1-A TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-1 (A ph.)
834 TR1-B TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-1 (B ph.)
835 TR1-C TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-1 (C ph.)
836 INTER TRIP1 INTER TRIP-1
837 INTER TRIP1-A INTER TRIP-1 (A ph.)
838 INTER TRIP1-B INTER TRIP-1 (B ph.)
839 INTER TRIP1-C INTER TRIP-1 (C ph.)
840 TR2 TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-2
⎯ 283 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
841 TR2-A TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-2 (A ph.)
842 TR2-B TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-2 (B ph.)
843 TR2-C TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-2 (C ph.)
844 INTER TRIP2 INTER TRIP-2
845 INTER TRIP2-A INTER TRIP-2 (A ph.)
846 INTER TRIP2-B INTER TRIP-2 (B ph.)
847 INTER TRIP2-C INTER TRIP-2 (C ph.)
848 LOCAL TEST LOCAL TESTING SW ON
849 ARCMD ALARM PLC Autoreclosing mode discrepancy alarm
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880 SEVERE CF Severe CF detection
881 SEVERE CF-L Severe CF detection at local terminal
882 DATA.CH1-DIS CH1 receiving data disable
883 DATA.CH2-DIS CH2 receiving data disable
884 BUCAR MODE Back up carrier mode condition
885
886
887
888 MASTER Being set to master terminal
889 SLAVE Being set to slave terminal
890 CH1.DATA USE CH1 comm.data using
891 CH2.DATA USE CH2 comm.data using
892
893
894
895
896 REM1 READY Remote term.1 ready condition
897 CF1 Remote term.1 comm.fail
898 SPF1 Remote term.1 SP.sync.fail
899
900 COMM1 FAIL Remote term.1 Comm.fail alarm (902+903+906+907)
901 READY1 Remote term.1 Ready alarm
902 UNREADY1 Remote term.1 Un-Ready alarm
903 CFSV1 Remote term.1 Comm.fail alarm
904 SPSV1 Remote term.1 SP.sync.fail alarm
905 TX LEVEL1 Remote term.1 Transmission signal level drop alarm
906 RX LEVEL1 Remote term.1 Receiving signal level drop alarm
907 CLK1 Remote term.1 Clock signal interruption alarm
908 CFSV1-L Remote term.1 Receiving Comm.fail alarm
909 CFSV1-R Remote term.1 Sending Comm.fail alarm
910
⎯ 284 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
911
912 REM2 READY Remote term.2 ready condition
913 CF2 Remote term.2 comm.fail
914 SPF2 Remote term.2 SP.sync.fail
915
916 COMM2 FAIL Remote term.2 Comm.fail alarm (918+919+922+923)
917 READY2 Remote term.2 Ready alarm
918 UNREADY2 Remote term.2 Un-Ready alarm
919 CFSV2 Remote term.2 Comm.fail alarm
920 SPSV2 Remote term.2 SP.sync.fail alarm
921 TX LEVEL2 Remote term.2 Transmission signal level drop alarm
922 RX LEVEL2 Remote term.2 Receiving signal level drop alarm
923 CLK2 Remote term.2 Clock signal interruption alarm
924 CFSV2-L Remote term.2 Receiving Comm.fail alarm
925 CFSV2-R Remote term.2 Sending Comm.fail alarm
926
927
928 CH1 CF Ch1 comm.fail (for Severe-CF detection)
929 CH1 CAN.CODE Ch1 cancel-code receiving (for Severe-CF detection)
930 CH1 CF-R1 Remote term 1 Ch1 comm.fail (for Severe-CF detection)
931 CH1 CAN-R1 Remote term 1 Ch1 cancel-code (for Severe-CF detection)
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944 CH2 CF Ch2 comm.fail (for Severe-CF detection)
945 CH2 CAN.CODE Ch2 cancel-code receiving (for Severe-CF detection)
946 CH2 CF-R1 Remote term 1 Ch2 comm.fail (for Severe-CF detection)
947 CH2 CAN-R1 Remote term 1 Ch2 cancel-code (for Severe-CF detection)
948
949 OVS1 TRIP OVS1 TRIP
950 OVS1-AB TRIP OVS1-AB TRIP
951 OVS1-BC TRIP OVS1-BC TRIP
952 OVS1-CA TRIP OVS1-CA TRIP
953 OVS2 ALARM OVS2 ALARM
954 OVS2-AB ALM OVS2-AB ALARM
955 OVS2-BC ALM OVS2-BC ALARM
956 OVS2-CA ALM OVS2-CA ALARM
957 OVG1 TRIP OVS1 TRIP
958 OVG1-A TRIP OVS1-AB TRIP
959 OVG1-B TRIP OVS1-BC TRIP
960 OVG1-C TRIP OVS1-CA TRIP
961 OVG2 ALARM OVS2 ALARM
962 OVG2-A ALM OVS2-AB ALARM
963 OVG2-B ALM OVS2-BC ALARM
964 OVG2-C ALM OVS2-CA ALARM
965 UVS1 TRIP UVS1 TRIP
966 UVS1-AB TRIP UVS1-AB TRIP
967 UVS1-BC TRIP UVS1-BC TRIP
968 UVS1-CA TRIP UVS1-CA TRIP
969 UVS2 ALARM UVS2 ALARM
970 UVS2-AB ALM UVS2-AB ALARM
971 UVS2-BC ALM UVS2-BC ALARM
972 UVS2-CA ALM UVS2-CA ALARM
973 UVG1 TRIP UVS1 TRIP
974 UVG1-A TRIP UVS1-AB TRIP
975 UVG1-B TRIP UVS1-BC TRIP
976 UVG1-C TRIP UVS1-CA TRIP
977 UVG2 ALARM UVS2 ALARM
978 UVG2-A ALM UVS2-AB ALARM
979 UVG2-B ALM UVS2-BC ALARM
980 UVG2-C ALM UVS2-CA ALARM
⎯ 285 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
981 OVS1-AB_RST OVS1-AB relay element delayed reset
982 OVS1-BC_RST OVS1-BC relay element delayed reset
983 OVS1-CA_RST OVS1-CA relay element delayed reset
984 OVG1-A_RST OVG1-A relay element delayed reset
985 OVG1-B_RST OVG1-B relay element delayed reset
986 OVG1-C_RST OVG1-C relay element delayed reset
987 UVS1-AB_RST UVS1-AB relay element delayed reset
988 UVS1-BC_RST UVS1-BC relay element delayed reset
989 UVS1-CA_RST UVS1-CA relay element delayed reset
990 UVG1-A_RST UVG1-A relay element delayed reset
991 UVG1-B_RST UVG1-B relay element delayed reset
992 UVG1-C_RST UVG1-C relay element delayed reset
993 OV/UV_TRIP OV/UV trip
994 C.CHK_INI_M Carrier channel testing start (manual)
995 C.HCK_INI_A ditto (automatic)
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040 FAULT_PHA_A fault_phase_A
1041 FAULT_PHA_B fault_phase_B
1042 FAULT_PHA_C fault_phase_C
1043 FAULT_PHA_N fault_phase_N
1044 FL_ERR fault location start up error
1045 FL_OB_FWD fault location out of bounds(forward)
1046 FL_OB_BACK fault location out of bounds(backward)
1047 FL_NC fault location not converged
1048 FL_COMPLETED fault location completed
1049 FL_OJ fault location over junction
1050 FL_Z One-terminal fault location(TERM=3TERM)
⎯ 286 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088 COM1-R1 Comm. data receive signal from remote term-1
1089 COM2-R1 ditto
1090 COM3-R1 ditto
1091 COM4-R1 ditto
1092 COM5-R1 ditto
1093 COM6-R1 ditto
1094 COM7-R1 ditto
1095 COM8-R1 ditto
1096 COM9-R1 ditto
1097 COM10-R1 ditto
1098 COM11-R1 ditto
1099 COM12-R1 ditto
1100 COM13-R1 ditto
1101 COM14-R1 ditto
1102
1103
1104 COM1-R1_UF Comm. data receive signal from remote term-1 (unfiltered)
1105 COM2-R1_UF ditto
1118
1119
1120 SUB_COM1-R1 Sub comm. data receive signal from term-1
⎯ 287 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1121 SUB_COM2-R1 ditto
1124 BUCAR-R1 Back up carrier mode in remote term-1 data
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136 COM1-R2 Comm. data receive signal from remote term-2
1137 COM2-R2 ditto
1138 COM3-R2 ditto
1139 COM4-R2 ditto
1140 COM5-R2 ditto
1141 COM6-R2 ditto
1142 COM7-R2 ditto
1143 COM8-R2 ditto
1144 COM9-R2 ditto
1145 COM10-R2 ditto
1146 COM11-R2 ditto
1147 COM12-R2 ditto
1148 COM13-R2 ditto
1149 COM14-R2 ditto
1150
1151
1152 COM1-R2_UF Comm. data receive signal from remote term-2 (unfiltered)
1166
1167
1168 SUB_COM1-R2 Sub comm. data receive signal from term-2
1172 BUCAR-R2 Back up carrier mode in remote term-2 data
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
⎯ 288 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked
1242 IEC_TESTMODE IEC61870-5-103 testmode
1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active
1251 RLY_FAIL RELAY FAILURE
1252 RLY_OP_BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
1253 AMF_OFF SV BLOCK
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258 RELAY_FAIL-A
1259
1260
⎯ 289 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1261 TRIP-H_ Trip signal hold
1262 CT_ERR_UF CT error(unfiltered)
1263 I0_ERR_UF I0 error(unfiltered)
1264 V0_ERR_UF V0 error(unfiltered)
1265 V2_ERR_UF V2 error(unfiltered)
1266 CT_ERR CT error
1267 I0_ERR I0 error
1268 V0_ERR V0 error
1269 V2_ERR V2 error
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276 50/60Hz Frequency pulse signal
1277
1278
1279 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up
1280 GEN_TRIP General trip
1281
1282
1283
1284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
⎯ 290 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
⎯ 291 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1401 LOCAL OP ACT local operation active
1402 REMOTE OP ACT remote operation active
1403 NORM LED ON IN-SERVICE LED ON
1404 ALM LED ON ALARM LED ON
1405 TRIP LED ON TRIP LED ON
1406 TEST LED ON TEST LED ON
1407
1408 PRG LED RESET Latched progammable LED RESET
1409 LED RESET TRIP LED RESET
1410
1411 ARC COM ON IEC103 communication command
1412 TELE COM ON IEC103 communication command
1413 PROT COM ON IEC103 communication command
1414 PRG LED1 ON PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434 F.Record DONE fault location completed
1435 F.Record CLR Fault record clear
1436 E.Record CLR Event record clear
1437 D.Record CLR Disturbance record clear
1438 Data Lost Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445 PLC data CHG PLC data change
1446
1447
1448 Sys.set change System setting change
1449 Rly.set change Relay setting change
1450 Grp.set change Group setting change
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status (1:pressed)
1457 KEY-RESET RESET key status (2:pressed)
1458 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status (3:pressed)
1459 KEY-END END key status (4:pressed)
1460 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status (5:pressed)
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
⎯ 292 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1471
1472 SUM_err Program ROM checksum error
1473
1474 SRAM_err SRAM memory monitoring error
1475 BU-RAM_err BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1476
1477 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitoring error
1478
1479 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484 DIO_err DIO card connection error
1485
1486 LCD_err LCD panel connection error
1487 ROM_data_err Data ROM checksum error
1488
1489 COM_DPRAMerr1 DP-RAM memory monitoring error
1490
1491 COM_SUM_err
1492
1493 COM_SRAM_err
1494 COM_DPRAMerr2
1495 COM_A/D_err
1496 COM_IRQ_err
1497 Sync1_fail
1498 Sync2_fail
1499 Com1_fail
1500 Com2_fail
1501 Com1_fail-R
1502 Com2_fail-R
1503 CLK1_fail
1504 CLK2_fail
1505 Term1_rdy_off
1506 Term2_rdy_off
1507 TX_level1_err
1508 TX_level2_err
1509 RX_level1_err
1510 RX_level2_err
1511 Td1_over
1512 Td2_over
1513 RYID1_err
1514 RYID2_err
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535 (reserved)
⎯ 293 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1536 CB1_CONT-A CB1 contact (A-phase)
1537 CB1_CONT-B (B-phase)
1538 CB1_CONT-C (C-phase)
1539
1540 Z1X_INIT Z1X protection initiation command
1541 EXT_VTF External VTF command
1542 DS_N/O_CONT DS N/O contact
1543 DS_N/C_CONT DS N/C contact
1544 ARC_BLOCK Autoreclosing block command
1545 CB1_READY Autoreclisng ready command of bus CB
1546 CB2_READY Autoreclisng ready command of center CB
1547 ARC_RESET Autoreclosing out of service command
1548 IND.RESET Indication reset command
1549 M-PROT_TRIP Duplicated Main protection trip command
1550 M-PROT_ON Duplicated Main protection in service command
1551
1552 CB2_CONT-A CB2 contact (A-phase)
1553 CB2_CONT-B (B-phase)
1554 CB2_CONT-C (C-phase)
1555
1556 EXT_TRIP-A External trip comand (A-Phase)
1557 EXT_TRIP-B (B-phase)
1558 EXT_TRIP-C (C-phase)
1559
1560 EXT_CBFIN-A External CBF initiation command (A-Phase)
1561 EXT_CBFIN-B (B-Phase)
1562 EXT_CBFIN-C (C-Phase)
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568 EXT_CAR.R1-1 Trip carrier from remote terminal-1
1569 EXT_CAR.R1-2 Guard/And carrier from remote terminal-1
1570 OPEN_TERM-R1 Remote terminal-1 out of service command
1571 SEVERE_CF-R1 Severe CF information command from remote terminal-1
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 EXT_CAR.R2-1 Trip carrier from remote terminal-2
1585 EXT_CAR.R2-2 Guard/And carrier from remote terminal-1
1586 OPEN_TERM-R2 Remote terminal-2 out of service command
1587 SEVERE_CF-R2 Severe CF information command from remote terminal-2
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600 PROT_BLOCK Protection block command
⎯ 294 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1601 CRT_BLOCK Carrier trip block command
1602 DISCRT_BLOCK Carrier protection out of service command
1603 DEFCRT_BLOCK DEF carrier trip block command
1604 PSBTP_BLOCK PSBTP block command
1605 PSB_BLOCK PSB detection block command
1606
1607
1608 OC-A_FS Fail safe command for OC-A trip
1609 OC-B_FS Fail safe command for OC-B trip
1610 OC-C_FS Fail safe command for OC-C trip
1611
1612 OCI-A_FS Fail safe command for OCI-A trip
1613 OCI-B_FS Fail safe command for OCI-B trip
1614 OCI-C_FS Fail safe command for OCI-C trip
1615 THMA_BLOCK Thermal alarm block command
1616 Z1G_BLOCK Z1G trip block command
1617 Z1XG_BLOCK Z1XG trip block command
1620 ZR1G_BLOCK ZR1G trip block command
1621 ZFG_BLOCK ZFG trip block command
1622 STUB_BLOCK Stub trip block command
1623 SOTF_BLOCK SOTF trip block command
1624 OCH_BLOCK OCH trip block command
1625 OC_BLOCK OC trip block command
1626 OCI_BLOCK OCI trip block command
1627 EF_BLOCK EF trip block command
1628 EFI_BLOCK EFI trip block command
1629 DEF_BLOCK DEF trip block command
1630 OST_BLOCK OST trip block command
1631 THM_BLOCK Thermal trip block command
1632 Z1S_BLOCK Z1S trip block command
1633 Z1XS_BLOCK Z1XS trip block command
1636 ZR1S_BLOCK ZR1S trip block command
1637 ZFS_BLOCK ZFS trip block command
1638 ZR2G_BLOCK ZR2G trip block command
1639 ZR2S_BLOCK ZR2S trip block command
1640 CBF_BLOCK CBF trip block command
1641 EXTTP_BLOCK External trip block command
1642 VTF_BLOCK VTF monitoering block command
1643 VTF_ONLY_ALM VTF only alarm command
1644 TR1_BLOCK Transfer trip 1 block command
1645 TR2_BLOCK Transfer trip 2 block command
1646 ZNDG_BLOCK ZNDG trip block command
1647 ZNDS_BLOCK ZNDS trip block command
1648 Z1S_G-BLK Z1S block by multi-phase ground fault command
1649 STUB_CB CB close command for stub protection
1650 OCHTP_ON OCH trip pemmisive command
1651 PSB.F_RESET PSB forcibly reset command
1652 DEF_PHSEL-A Fault phase selection command for DEF
1653 DEF_PHSEL-B ditto
1654 DEF_PHSEL-C ditto
1655 Z1_ARC_BLOCK Auto reclosing block command by Zone1 trip
1656 Z2G-A_FS Z2G-A fail-safe command
1657 Z2G-B_FS Z2G-B fail-safe command
1658 Z2G-C_FS Z2G-C fail-safe command
1659 Z1X_F.ENABLE Z1X forcibly enable command
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664 ZFG-A_BLOCK ZFG-A block command
1665 ZFG-B_BLOCK ZFG-B block command
1666 ZFG-C_BLOCK ZFG-C block command
1667
1668 ZNDG-A_COM ZNDG-A operating command
1669 ZNDG-B_COM ZNDG-B operating command
1670 ZNDG-C_COM ZNDG-C operating command
⎯ 295 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1671 ZNDS_COM ZNDS operating command
1672 Z2G-A_BLOCK Z2G-A block command
1673 Z2G-B_BLOCK Z2G-B block command
1674 Z2G-C_BLOCK Z2G-C block command
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680 TP-A_DELAY Trip command off-delay timer setting
1681 TP-B_DELAY Trip command off-delay timer setting
1682 TP-C_DELAY Trip command off-delay timer setting
1683 ARC_OFF Autoreclosing mode changing command
1684 ARC_SPAR ditto
1685 ARC_TPAR ditto
1686 ARC_S&T ditto
1687 ARC_EXT1P ditto
1688 ARC_EXT3P ditto
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696 Z1_INST_TP Z1 instantly trip command
1697
1700 ZR1_INST_TP ZR1 instantly trip command
1701 ZF_INST_TP ZF instantly trip command
1702 EF_INST_TP EF instantly trip command
1703 OC_INST_TP OC instantly trip command
1704
1705 DEF_INST_TP DEF instantly trip command
1706
1707 DEFR_INST_TP DEF instantly trip command
1708 ZR2_INST_TP ZR2 instantly trip command
1709 ZND_INST_TP ZND instantly trip command
1710
1711
1712 Z1_3PTP Z1 3-phase trip command
1713 Z1X_3PTP Z1X 3-phase trip command
1714 Z2_3PTP Z2 3-phase trip command
1715
1716 OC_3PTP OC 3-phase trip command
1717 OCI_3PTP OCI 3-phase trip command
1718
1719
1720 CAR_3PTP Distance CAR 3-phase trip command
1721 DEFCAR_3PTP DG.CAR 3-phase trip command
1722 PSBTP_3PTP PSBTP 3-phase trip command
1723
1724 TR1_3PTP Transfer trip 1 3-phase trip command
1725 TR2_3PTP Transfer trip 2 3-phase trip command
1726
1727 3P_TRIP 3-Phase trip command
1728 CAR-A-R1 Distance carrier command from remote term-1
1729 CAR-B-R1 ditto
1730 CAR-C-R1 ditto
1731 CAR-S-R1 ditto
1732 DEFCAR-A-R1 DEF carrier command from remote term-1
1733 DEFCAR-B-R1 ditto
1734 DEFCAR-C-R1 ditto
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740 PSBCAR-A-R1 PSBTP carrier command from remote term-1
⎯ 296 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1741 PSBCAR-B-R1 ditto
1742 PSBCAR-C-R1 ditto
1743
1744 TR1-A-R1 Transfer trip-1 command from remote term-1
1745 TR1-B-R1 ditto
1746 TR1-C-R1 ditto
1747
1749 TR2-B-R1 ditto
1750 TR2-C-R1 ditto
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760 CAR-A-R2 Distance carrier command from remote term-2
1761 CAR-B-R2 ditto
1762 CAR-C-R2 ditto
1763 CAR-S-R2 ditto
1764 DEFCAR-A-R2 DEF carrier command from remote term-2
1765 DEFCAR-B-R2 ditto
1766 DEFCAR-C-R2 ditto
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772 PSBCAR-A-R2 PSBTP carrier command from remote term-2
1773 PSBCAR-B-R2 ditto
1774 PSBCAR-C-R2 ditto
1775
1777 TR1-B-R2 ditto
1778 TR1-C-R2 ditto
1779
1781 TR2-B-R2 ditto
1782 TR2-C-R2 ditto
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792 IO#1-TP-A1 Binary output signal of TP-A1
1793 IO#1-TP-B1 TP-B1
1794 IO#1-TP-C1 TP-C1
1795 IO#1-TP-A2 Binary output signal of TP-A2
1796 IO#1-TP-B2 TP-B2
1797 IO#1-TP-C2 TP-C2
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808 OVS1_INST_TP OVS1 instantly trip command
1809 OVS2_INST_TP OVS2 instantly trip command
1810
⎯ 297 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
1811
1812 OVG1_INST_TP OVG1 instantly trip command
1813 OVG2_INST_TP OVG2 instantly trip command
1814
1815
1816 UVS1_INST_TP UVS1 instantly trip command
1817 UVS2_INST_TP UVS2 instantly trip command
1818
1819
1820 UVG1_INST_TP UVG1 instantly trip command
1821 UVG2_INST_TP UVG2 instantly trip command
1822
1823
1824 SPR.L-REQ Leader SPAR requirement
1825 TPR.L-REQ Leader TPAR requirement
1826 SPR.F-REQ Follower SPAR requirement
1827 TPR.F-REQ Follower TPAR requirement
1828 SPR.F-ST.REQ Follower SPAR starting requirement
1829 TPR.F-ST.REQ Follower TPAR starting requirement
1830
1831
1832 R.F-ST.REQ Follower AR starting requirement
1833 SPR.F2-REQ Follower SPAR requirement
1834 TPR.F2-REQ Follower TPAR requirement
1835
1836
1837
1838 ARC.L_TERM Leader terminal of Autoreclosing
1839 ARC.F_TERM Follower terminal of Autoreclosing
1840 ECHO_BLOCK Echo carrier block command
1841 WKIT_BLOCK Week infeed trip block command
1842 PSCM_TCHDEN TCHD timer enable command (for PUP/POP/UOP scheme)
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848 BCD_BLOCK BCD trip block command
1849 DEFF_BLOCK DEFF trip block command
1850
1851 DEFR_BLOCK DEFR trip block command
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 trip block command
1857 OVS2_BLOCK OVS2 trip block command
1858
1859
1860 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 trip block command
1861 OVG2_BLOCK OVG2 trip block command
1862
1863
1864 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 trip block command
1865 UVS2_BLOCK UVS2 trip block command
1866
1867
1868 UVG1_BLOCK UVG1 trip block command
1869 UVG2_BLOCK UVG2 trip block command
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
:
:
2040
⎯ 298 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048 COM1-S Communication on/off data send command
2049 COM2-S ditto
2050 COM3-S ditto
2051 COM4-S ditto
2052 COM5-S ditto
2053 COM6-S ditto
2054 COM7-S ditto
2055 COM8-S ditto
2056 COM9-S ditto
2057 COM10-S ditto
2058 COM11-S ditto
2059 COM12-S ditto
2060 COM13-S ditto
2061 COM14-S ditto
2062
2063
2064 SUB COM1-S Sub communication on/off data send command
2065 SUB COM2-S ditto
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
:
:
2580
⎯ 299 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET Alarm LED set
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1 Fault record stored command 1
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1 Disturbance record stored command 1
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1 Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group1)
2641 SET.GROUP2 2
2642 SET.GROUP3 3
2643 SET.GROUP4 4
2644 SET.GROUP5 5
2645 SET.GROUP6 6
2646 SET.GROUP7 7
2647 SET.GROUP8 8
2648
2649
2650
⎯ 300 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON TPMD1 User configrable trip mode in fault record
2657 CON TPMD2 ditto
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684 ARC COM RECV Auto-recloser inactivate command received
2685 TELE COM RECV Teleprotection inactivate command received
2686 PROT COM RECV protection inactivate command received
2687
2688 TPLED RST RCV TRIP LED RESET command received
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
:
:
2790
⎯ 301 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
⎯ 302 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
⎯ 303 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
⎯ 304 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal list
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
⎯ 305 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 306 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix C
Variable Timer List
⎯ 307 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Variable Timer List

Timer Timer No. Contents Timer Timer No. Contents
TZ1GA 1 Z1G TRIP TIMER T3PLL 61 THREE PHASE LIVE LINE TIMER
TZ1GB 2 ditto TDER 62 DEFR BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZ1GC 3 ditto TOS1 63 OVS1 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZ2G 4 Z2G TRIP TIMER TOS2 64 OVS2 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZ3G 5 Z3G TRIP TIMER TOG1 65 OVG1 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZ1S 6 Z1S TRIP TIMER TOG2 66 OVG2 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZ2S 7 Z2S TRIP TIMER TUS1 67 UVS1 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZ3S 8 Z3S TRIP TIMER TUS2 68 UVS2 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TEF 9 EF BACK-UP TRIP TIMER TUG1 69 UVG1 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TDEF 10 DEFF BACK-UP TRIP TIMER TUG2 70 UVG2 BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZR1S 11 ZR1S BACK-UP TRIP TIMER TBCD 71 BCD TRIP TIMER
TZR1G 12 ZR1G BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TBF1A 13 CBF DETECTION TIMER 1
TBF1B 14 ditto
TBF1C 15 ditto
TBF2A 16 CBF DETECTION TIMER 2
TBF2B 17 ditto
TBF2C 18 ditto
TOST1 19 OUT-OF-STEP DET. TIMER
TOST2 20 ditto
TDEFF 21 DEF CARRIER TRIP DELAY TIMER
TDEFR 22 CARR.COORDINATION DEFR TIMER
TCHD 23 CARRIER COORDINATION TIMER
TEVLV 26 EVOLVING FAULT WAITING TIMER
TRDY1 27 RECLAIM TIMER
TSPR1 28 SPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
TTPR1 29 TPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
TRR1 30 RESET TIMER
TW1 31 RECLOSING O/P FOR BUS CB
TRDY2 32 FLW RECLAIM TIMER
TSPR2 33 FLW SPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
TTPR2 34 FLW TPAR DEAD LINE TIMER
TRR2 35 FLW RESET TIMER
TW2 36 RECLOSING O/P FOR CENTER CB
TSYN1 37 LEAD SYN CHECK TIMER
TSYN2 38 FLW SYN CHECK TIMER
TDBL1 39 VOLTAGE CHECK TIMER
TDBL2 40 ditto
TLBD1 41 ditto
TLBD2 42 ditto
TS2 43 MULTI. SHOT DEAD TIMER
TS3 44 ditto
TS4 45 ditto
TS2R 46 MULTI. SHOT RESET TIMER
TS3R 47 ditto
TS4R 48 ditto
TOC 49 OC BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TPSB 50 PSB DETECTION TIMER
TSOTF 51 SOTF CHECK TIMER
TZFG 52 ZFG TRIP TIMER
TZFS 53 ZFS TRIP TIMER
TZR2G 54 ZR2G BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZR2S 55 ZR2S BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZNDG 56 ZNDG BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TZNDS 57 ZNDS BACK-UP TRIP TIMER
TREBK 58 CURRENT REVERSAL BLOCKING TIME
TECCB 59 ECHO ENABLE TIME FROM CB OPENED
TSBCT 60 SBCNT TIME
⎯ 308 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix D
Binary Input/Output Default Setting
List
⎯ 309 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Binary Input Default Setting List

Model Model
No. NO-ARC,NO-FD 1CB-ARC,NO-FD 2CB-ARC,NO-FD 1CB-ARC,FD 2CB-ARC,FD 1CB-ARC,NO-FD
101 102 201 202 203 301 302 303 401 501 204 205 206
BI1 CB1-A CB1-A
BI2 CB1-B CB1-B

BI3 CB1-C CB1-C
BI4 Signal Receive(CH1) Signal Receive(CH1)
BI5 Signal Receive(CH2) or Z1X init Signal Receive(CH2) or Z1X init

BI6 EXT VTF EXT VTF
BI7 DS-N/O DS-N/O

BI8 DS-N/C DS-N/C
BI9 Carrier block Carrier block
BI10 (SPARE) CB1 ready IND.RESET

BI11 (SPARE) (SPARE) CB2 ready (SPARE) CB2 ready PROT BLCOK
BI12 (SPARE) REC BLOCK Z1X INIT

BI13 IND.RESET --
BI14 M-prot Trip --

BI15 M-prot On --
BI16 EXT trip-A EXT trip-A
BI17 EXT trip-B EXT trip-B

BI18 EXT trip-C EXT trip-C
BI19 -- (SPARE) -- CB2-A (SPARE) CB2-A OCI BLOCK

BI20 -- (SPARE) -- CB2-B (SPARE) CB2-B EFI BLOCK
BI21 -- (SPARE) -- CB2-C (SPARE) CB2-C OC BLOCK
BI22 -- DEF BLOCK

BI23 -- EXTTP BLOCK
BI24 -- STUB BLOCK

BI25 -- SOTF BLOCK
BI26 -- -- ARC BLOCK
BI27 -- -- CB1 READY

BI28 -- -- CBF BLOCK

⎯ 310 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Binary Output Default Setting List (1)

Relay Model Module BO No. Terminal No. Signal Name Contents Setting
Name Signal No. LOGIC TIMER
(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB3:
GRZ100 IO#2 BO1 A2-A1 TRIP-A1 Trip O/P for bus CB 240 1 1
-101 BO2 A2-B1 TRIP-B1 Trip O/P for bus CB 241 1 1
BO3 A2-B2 TRIP-C1 Trip O/P for bus CB 242 1 1
BO4 A3-B3 TRIP-A1 Trip O/P for bus CB 240 1 1
BO5 A4-B4 TRIP-B1 Trip O/P for bus CB 241 1 1
BO7 A6-B6 CAR/Z1G/Z1S_ Distance or DG carrier/Z1G/ 231,148,160 1 1
TRIP Z1S trip
BO8 A7-B7 BU_TRIP Back-up trip 194 1 1
BO9 A8-B8 SOTF/STUB_TRIP SOTF/Stub trip 183,182 1 1
BO10 A9-B9 BURECLK BU reclose block 195 1 1
BO11 A10-B10 CBF_TRIP Related CB trip for CBF 200 1 1
BO12 A11-B11 CHF Carrier channel failure 253 1 1
BO13 A13-B13 EXT_CAR-S External carrier send 225 1 0
command
(FAIL) A12-B12 RELAY FAILURE -- -- -- --
TB3:
TRIP Z1S trip
BO12 A11-B11 CHF Carrier channel failure 253 1 1
command
TB2:
IO#3 BO1 A1-B1 TRIP-A1 Trip O/P for bus CB 240 1 1
BO10 A10-B10 TRIP-OR Trip O/P or 238 1 1
⎯ 311 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB3:
TRIP Z1S trip
BO5 A4-B4 Z2G/Z3G/ZR1G/ Z2G/Z3G/Z4G Back-up/ 153,156,192,162,165 1 1
Z2S/Z3S/ZR1S_ Z2S/Z3S/ZR1S trip ,189
TRIP
BO6 A5-B5 EF_BU-TRIP EF or DEF Back-up trip 187 1 1
BO10 A9-B9 ARC1 Rec output for bus CB 291 1 0
BO11 A10-B10 VTF_ALARM,CHF VTF alarm, Carrier channel 172,253 1 1
failure
BO12 A11-B11 CBF_DET CBF Detection 199 1 1
command
TB2:
IO#3 BO1 A1-B1 TRIP-A1 Trip O/P for bus CB 240 1 1
TB2:
TRIP Z1S trip
TRIP
BO6 A5-B5 EF_BU-TRIP EF or DEF Back-up trip 187 1 1
failure
command
TB5:
IO#3 BO1 A2-A1 TRIP-A1 Trip O/P for bus CB 240 1 1
⎯ 312 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB2:
TRIP Z1S trip
TRIP
BO6 A5-B5 EF_BU-TRIP EF or DEF back-up trip 187 1 1
failure
command
TB5:
TB3:
IO#4 BO1 A2-A1 Z1G_TRIP Z1G trip 148 1 1
BO2 A2-B1 Z2G_TRIP Z2G trip 153 1 1
BO4 A3-B3 Z1S_TRIP Z1S trip 160 1 1
BO7 A6-B6 STUB_TRIP Stub trip 182 1 1
BO8 A7-B7 SOTF_TRIP SOTF trip 183 1 1
BO10 A9-B9 ZR1G_TRIP Z4G back-up trip 192 1 1
BO11 A10-B10 ZR1S_TRIP ZR1S trip 189 1 1
BO13 A12-B12 DEFCR/WICAR_ DG/WEAK carrier trip 232,233 1 1
TRIP
⎯ 313 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB3:
GRZ100 IO#2 BO1 A2-A1 Z1G/Z1S_TRIP Z1G/ Z1S trip 148,160 1 1
-204 BO2 A2-B1 Z2G/Z2S_TRIP Z2G/ Z2S trip 153,162 1 1
BO3 A2-B2 Z3G/Z3S_TRIP Z3G/ Z3S trip 156,165 1 1
BO7 A6-B6 Z2G/Z2S OR Z2G/Z2S relay or logic 154,163 1 1
BO8 A7-B7 VTF_ALARM VTF alarm 172 1 1
BO9 A8-B8 EF_TRIP EF back-up trip 678 1 1
BO13 A13-B13 EXT_CAR-S command 225 1 0
External carrier send
command
TB2:
IO#3 BO1 A1-B1 TRIP-OR Trip O/P or 238 1 1
BO2 A2-B2 Z2G/Z3G/Z2S/Z3S Z2G/Z3G/Z2S/Z3S relay or 154,157,163,166 1 1
OR logic
BO3 A3-B3 OCI_TRIP IDMT OC back-up trip 327 1 1
BO4 A4-B4 EFI_TRIP EF IDMT trip 184 1 1
BO5 A5-B5 OC_TRIP OC back-up trip 326 1 1
BO6 A6-B6 DEF_TRIP DEF back-up trip 677 1 1
TB2:
command
TB5:
OR logic
BO10 A10-B10 IN-PROG1 Lead rec. in progress 285 1 0
⎯ 314 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB2:
command
TB5:
OR logic
BO10 A10-B10 IN-PROG1 Lead rec. in progress 285 1 0
TB3:
IO#4 BO1 A2-A1 CBF_RETRIP-A Re-trip A ph. for CBF 196 1 1
BO2 A2-B1 CBF_RETRIP-B Re-trip B ph. for CBF 197 1 1
BO3 A2-B2 CBF_RETRIP-C Re-trip C ph. for CBF 198 1 1
⎯ 315 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB3:
GRZ100 IO#2 BO1 A2-A1 TRIP-A1,2 Trip O/P for bus/center CB 240,243 1 1
-301 BO2 A2-B1 TRIP-B1,2 Trip O/P for bus/center CB 241,244 1 1
BO3 A2-B2 TRIP-C1,2 Trip O/P for bus/center CB 242,245 1 1
TRIP Z1S trip
TRIP
BO11 A10-B10 ARC2 Rec output for center CB 292 1 0
failure
command
TB2:
IO#3 BO1 A1-B1 TRIP-A1,2 Trip O/P for bus/center CB 240,243 1 1
BO2 A2-B2 TRIP-B1,2 Trip O/P for bus/center CB 241,244 1 1
BO4 A4-B4 TRIP-A1,2 Trip O/P for bus/center CB 240,243 1 1
TB2:
TRIP Z1S trip
Z2S/Z3S/ZR1S _ Z2S/Z3S/ZR1S trip ,189
TRIP
failure
command
TB5:
BO7 A6-B6 TRIP-A2 Trip O/P for center CB 243 1 1
BO8 A7-B7 TRIP-B2 Trip O/P for center CB 244 1 1
BO9 A8-B8 TRIP-C2 Trip O/P for center CB 245 1 1
⎯ 316 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB2:
TRIP Z1S trip
TRIP
failure
command
TB5:
TB3:
TRIP
BO14 A13-B13 ARC1/2 Rec output for bus/center CB 291,292 1 1
⎯ 317 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB2:
TRIP Z1S trip
TRIP
failure
command
TB3:
IO#4 BO1 A1-B1 FD FD trip “OR” 250 1 1
BO2 A2-B2 FD FD trip “OR” 250 1 1
TB5:
BO13 A12-B12 DEFCR/WICAR _ DG/WEAK carrier trip 232,233 1 1
TRIP
⎯ 318 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

(OR:1, AND:2) (OFF:0, ON:1)
TB2:
TRIP Z1S trip
TRIP
failure
command
TB3:
IO#4 BO1 A1-B1 FD FD trip “OR” 250 1 1
BO2 A2-B2 FD FD trip “OR” 250 1 1
TB5:
TRIP
BO14 A13-B13 ARC1/2 Rec output for bus/center CB 291,292 1 1
⎯ 319 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 320 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix E
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
⎯ 321 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
MENU
1=Record 2=Status
3=Setting(view) 4=Setting(change)
5=Test
/1 Record
1=Fault record 2=Event record
3=Disturbance record 4=Automatic test
5=Autoreclose count
/2 Fault record /3 Fault record 2/8 /4 Fault record #2 3/33

1=Display 2=Clear #1 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913
#2 12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622 Phase BC Trip ABC/ABC
#3 30/Jan/1997 15:06:11.835 Z1,CRT
/2 Fault record
Clear all fault records ?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Event record /3 Event record 2/48

1=Display 2=Clear 16/Oct/1998 23:18:04.294 Trip Off
16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913 Trip On
12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622 Rly.set change
/2 Event record
Clear all event records ?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Disturbance record /3 Disturbance record 1/ 11

1=Display 2=Clear #1 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913
#2 12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622
#3 30/Jan/1997 15:06:11.835
/2 Disturbance record
Clear all disturbance records ?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Automatic test /3 Telecomm channel test /4 Telecomm channel test

1=Telecomm channel test 1=Display count & interval Test count: 11
2=Reset count Test interval: 12 hours

Reset count ?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Autoreclose count /3 Autoreclose count

1=Display 2=Reset SPAR TPAR
CB1 [ 46] [ 46]
/3 Reset autoreclose count /3 Reset autoreclose count

1=CB1 Reset count ?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
a-1
⎯ 322 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a-1
/1 Status /2 Metering 12/Feb/1998 22:56 3/15
1=Metering 2=Binary I/O Va ***.*kV ***.* Ia **.**kA ***.*
3=Relay element 4=Time sync source Vb ***.*kV ***.* Ib **.**kA ***.*
5=Clock adjustment 6=Direction Vc ***.*kV ***.* Ic **.**kA ***.*
/2 Binary input & output 3/ 8

Input (IO#1) [000 000 000 000 ]
Input (IO#2) [000 ]
Input (IO#3) [000 000 000 0 ]
/2 Relay element 3/ 12
ZG [000 000 000 000 000]
ZG2 [000 000 000 000 ]
ZS [000 000 000 000 000]
/2 Time synchronization source

*IRIG: Active
RSM: Inactive
/1 Setting(view)
IEC: Inactive
1=Version 2=Description 3=Comm.
/2 12/Feb/1998 22:56:19 [local] 1/ 5
Minute ( 0 - 59) : 56 _
Hour ( 0 - 23) : 22
/2 Relay version 3/ 5
Day ( 1 - 31) : 12
Relay type : ********************
Serial No. : ********************
Main software: ********************
/2 Direction
Phase A: Forward
Phase B: Reverse
/2 Description 2/ 2
Phase C: _______
Plant name: ********************
Description: ********************
/2 Communication /3 Address/Parameter 1/ 2
1=Address/Parameter HDLC ( 1 )
2=Switch IEC ( 1 ) SYADJ ( 0 ms )
/3 Switch 3/ 4
PRTCLl 1=HDLC 2=IEC103 1
232C 1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 4
IECBR 1=9.6 2=19.2 2
/2 Record /3 Fault record 1/ 1 /4 Signal no. 3/ 65

1=Fault record 2=Event record Fault locator 0=Off 1=On 1 BITRN ( 128 ) EV1 ( 3071 )
3=Disturbance record EV2 ( 0 ) EV3 ( 1 )
4=Automatic test interval EV4 ( 1 ) EV5 ( 2 )
/3 Event record /4 Event name 3/128

1=Signal no. Event name1 [Event record name 1 ]
2=Event name Event name2 [ ]
Event name3 [ ]
/3 Disturbance record /4 Record time & starter 2/ 3

1=Record time & starter Time ( 3.0 s ) OCP-S ( 50.0 A )
2=Scheme switch OCP-G ( 50.0 A ) UVP-S ( 0 V )
3=Binary signal 4=Signal name UVP-G ( 0 V )
/4 Scheme switch 1/ 5
TRIP 0=Off 1=On 1
/3 Automatic test interval 1/ 1 OCP-S 0=Off 1=On 1
Chann( 6 hrs) OCP-G 0=Off 1=On 1
/4 Binary signal 3/ 16
SIG1 ( 128 ) SIG2 ( 3071 )
/2 Status /3 Metering 3/ 3 SIG3 ( 0 ) SIG4 ( 1 )
1=Metering Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1 SIG5 ( 1 ) SIG6 ( 2 )
2=Time Synchronization Power (P/Q) 1=Send 2=Receive 1
3=Time zone Current 1=Lag 2=Lead 1
/4 Signal name 3/ 32
Signal name1 [Signal name 1 ]
/3 Time synchronization Signal name2 [ ]
0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC Signal name3 [ ]
Current No.= 2
/3 Time zone 1/ 1
GMT ( +9 hrs )
a-1 a-2
⎯ 323 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a-1 a-2
/2 Protection (Active group= *)

1=Group1 2=Group2 3=Group3 4=Group4
/3 Protection (Group 1)
1=Line parameter
2=Trip
3=Autoreclose
/4 Line parameter (Group 1) /5 Line name 1/ 1

1=Line name Line name ********************
2=VT & CT ratio
3=Fault locator
/5 VT & CT ratio 2/ 2
VT ( 2000 ) VTs1 ( 2000 )
VTs1 ( 2000 ) CT ( 200 )
/5 Fault locator 3/ 7
X1 ( 32.60 Ω ) X0 ( 2.90 Ω )
X0m ( 14.00 Ω ) R1 ( 60.00 Ω )
R0 ( 5.00 Ω ) R0m ( 10.00 Ω )
/4 Trip (Group 1) /5 Protection scheme

1=Protection scheme 1=3ZONE 2=Z1-EXT 3=PUP 4=POP 5=UOP 6=BOP
2=Scheme switch 7=POP+DEF 8=UOP+DEF 9=BOP+DEF 10=PUP+DEF
3=Protection element Current No.=7
/5 Scheme switch 3/∗∗

Z1CNT 1=1 2=2 3=3 4=4 5=5 1
TPMODE 1=3PH 2=1PH
PSB-Z1 0=Off 2=On
/5 Protection element (Group 1) /6 Distance 3/∗∗

1=Distance 2=PSB&OST 3=OC,DEF&UV Z1S ( 0.01 Ω ) Z1Sθ1 ( 0 deg )
4=Command trip
Z1Sθ2 ( 90 deg ) Z1XS ( 0.01 Ω )
Z2S ( 0.01 Ω ) Z3S ( 1.0 Ω )
/6 PSB&OST 3/ 4
PSBSZ ( 0.50 Ω ) PSBGZ ( 0.50 Ω )
TPSB ( 40 ms ) OSTR1 ( 1.0 Ω)
OSTR2 ( 1.0 Ω ) OSTXF ( 0.2 Ω )
/4 Autoreclose (Group 1) /5 Autoreclose mode /6 OC,DEF&UV 3/14

1=Autoreclose mode 1=Disable 2=SPAR 3=TPAR 4=SPAR&TPAR OCH ( 2.0 A ) TPSB ( 40 ms )
2=Scheme switch 5=EXT1P 6=EXT3P OCBF ( 0.5 A ) TBF1 ( 50 ms )
3=Autoreclose element Current No.= 4 TBF2 ( 50 ms ) DEFFI ( 0.5 A)
/5 Scheme switch 3/ 8 /6 Command trip 1/ 2

ARC-CB 1=ONE 2=01 3=03 4=L1 5=L2 1 TDEF ( 0.00 s ) TDEFR ( 0.00 s )
ARC-EXT 0=Off 1=On 0 TCHD ( 12 ms )
/5 Autoreclose element (Group 1) /6 Autoreclose timer 3/ 8

1=Autoreclose timer TEVLV( 0.30 s ) TRDY1( 60 s )
2=Synchrocheck TSPR ( 0.80 s ) TTPR1( 0.60 s )
TRR ( 2.00 s ) TW1 ( 0.3 s )
/6 Synchrocheck 3/ 9
OVB ( 51 V ) UVB ( 13 V )
OVL1 ( 51 V ) UVL1 ( 13 V )
SY1UV( 83 V ) SY1OV( 51 V )
1=Line parameter
2=Trip
3=Autoreclose relay
1=Line parameter
2=Trip
3=Autoreclose relay
a-1 a-2
⎯ 324 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a-1 a-2
/2 Binary input 3/18

BISW1 1=Norm =Inv 1
BISW2 1=Norm =Inv 1
BISW3 1=Norm =Inv 1
/2 Binary output /3 Binary output (IO#2)3/12

1=IO#2 2=IO#3 3=IO#4 BO1 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) AND,D
BO2 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,
BO3 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,D
/3 Binary output (IO#4)3/12

BO1 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) AND,D
BO2 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,
BO3 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,D
/2 LED 2/ 4
LED1 ( 1, 309, 0, 0) AND, I
LED2 ( 0, 0, 0, 0) OR, I
LED3 ( 15, 16, 17, 0) OR, L
: Password trap
Password
/1 Setting(change) Input password [_ ]
1=Password 2=Description 3=Comm.
: Confirmation trap
/2 Password /2 *************
Input new password [ _ ] Change settings?
Retype new password [ ] ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Description /3 Plant name [ _ ]

1=Plant name 2=Description ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_← →
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=>← →
0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^ ← →
/3 Description [ _ ]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_← →
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=>← →
0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^ ← →
/2 Communication /3 Address/Parameter 1/ 3
1=Address/Parameter HDLC ( 1- 32): 1 _
2=Switch IEC ( 2- 254): 2
SYADJ ( -9999 - 9999): 0 ms
/3 Switch 1/ 4
Protocol 1=HDLC 2=IEC103 1 _
232C 1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 4
IECBR 1=9.6 2=19.2 2
/2 Record /3 Fault record 1/ 1

1=Fault record 2=Event record Fault locator 0=Off 1=On 1 _
3=Disturbance record
4=Automatic test interval
/3 Event record 1/129

BITRN ( 0- 128): 128 _
EV1 ( 0- 3071): 0
EV2 ( 0- 3071): 1
/3 Disturbance record /4 Record time & starter 1/ 5

1=Record time & starter Time ( 0.1- 3.0): 2.0 _ s
2=Scheme switch OCP-S ( 0.5- 250.0): 10.0 A
3=Binary signal OCP-G ( 0.5- 250.0): 10.0 A
TRIP 0=Off 1=On 1 _
OCP-S 0=Off 1=On
OCP-G 0=Off 1=On
/3 Automatic test interval 1/ 1 /4 Binary signal 3/32

Chann( 1- 24): 12 _ hrs SIG1 ( 0 - 3071) : 1
SIG2 ( 0 - 3071) : 1
SIG3 ( 0 - 3071) : 1 _
a-1 a-3
⎯ 325 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a-1 a-3
/2 Status /3 Metering 1/ 3
1=Metering Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1_
2=Time Synchronization Power (P/Q) 1=Send 2=Receive 1
3=Time zone Current 1=Lag 2=Lead 1
/3 Time synchronization
0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC
Current No/=0 Select No.= _
/3 Time zone 1/ 1
GMT ( -12 - +12): +9 _ hrs
/2 Protection
1=Change active group
2=Change setting
3=Copy group
/3Change active group(Active group= *)

Current No.= * Select No.= _
/3 Change setting (Active group= *)

1=Line parameter
2=Trip
3=Autoreclose
/5 Line parameter (Group 1) /6 Line name [ _ ]

1=Line name ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_← →
2=VT & CT ratio abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=>← →
3=Fault locator
0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^ ← →
/6 VT & CT ratio 1/ 3
VT ( 1- 20000): 2200 _
VTs1 ( 1- 20000): 2200
CT ( 1- 20000): 400
/6 Fault locator 1/13

X1 ( 0.00 - 199.99): 32.60 _ Ω
X0 ( 0.00 - 199.99): 2.90 Ω
X0m ( 0.00 - 199.99): 0.10 Ω
/5 Trip (Group 1) /6 Protection scheme

1=Protection scheme 1=3ZONE 2=Z1-EXT 3=PUP 4=POP 5=UOP 6=BOP
2=Scheme switch 7=POP+DEF 8=UOP+DEF 9=BOP+DEF 10=PUP+DEF
3=Protection element Current No.= 7 Select No.= _
/6 Scheme switch 1/∗∗

ZS-C 1=Mho 2=Quad 1 _
ZG-C 1=Mho 2=Quad 1
BLZONE 1=COM 2=IND 1
/6 Protection element (Group 1) /7 Distance 1/∗∗

1=Distance 2=PSB&OST 3=OC,DEF&UV Z1S ( 0.01 - 50.00): 0.01 _ Ω
4=Command trip
Z1XS ( 0.01 - 50.00): 0.01 Ω
Z1Sθ1( 0 - 45): 0 deg
/7 PSB&OST 1/ 9
PSBSZ ( 0.50 - 15.00): 0.50 _ Ω
PSBGZ ( 0.50 - 15.00): 0.50 Ω
TPSB ( 20 - 60): 40 ms
/7 OC,DEF&UV 1/21
OCH ( 2.0 - 10.0): 2.0 _ A
TSOTF( 0 – 300): 5 s
OCBF ( 0.5 - 10.0): 0.5 A
/7 Command trip 1/ 7
TDEFF ( 0.00- 0.30): 0.00 _ s
TDEFR ( 0.00- 0.30): 0.00 s
TCHD ( 0- 50): 12 ms
a-1 a-3 a-4 a-5 a-6 a-1
⎯ 326 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a-1 a-3 a-4 a-5 a-6
/5 Autoreclose (Group 1) /6 Autoreclose mode

1=Autoreclose mode 1=Disable 2=SPAR 3=TPAR 4=SPAR&TPAR
2=Scheme switch 5=EXT1P 6=EXT3P
3=Autoreclose element Current No.= 4 Select No.= _
ARC-EXT 0=Off 1=On 0 _
ARC-BU 0=Off 1=On 0
/6 Autoreclose element (Group 1) /7 Autoreclose timer 1/12

1=Autoreclose timer TEVLV ( 0.01- 10.00): 0.30 _ s
2=Synchrocheck TRDY1 ( 5- 300): 60 s
TSPR ( 0.01- 10.00): 0.80 s
/7 Synchrocheck 1/18
OVB ( 10 - 150): 51 _ V
UVB ( 10 - 150): 13 V
OVL1 ( 10 - 150): 51 V
1=Line parameter
2=Trip
3=Autoreclose
1=Line parameters
2=Trip
3=Autoreclose
/3 Copy groupA to B (Active group= 1)

A ( 1- 8): _
B ( 1- 8):
/2 Binary input 1/18

BISW1 1=Norm 2=Inv 1 _
/2 Binary output /3 Binary output (IO#2 )

1=IO#2 2=IO#3 3=IO#4 Select BO ( 1- 12)
Select No.= _
/4 Setting (BO 1 of IO#2 ) /5 Logic gate type & delay timer 1/ 2

1=Logic gate type & delay timer Logic 1=OR 2=AND 1 _
2=Input to logic gate BOTD 0=Off 1=On 1
/5 Input to logic gate 3/ 6

/4 Setting (BO 12 of IO#2 )
In #1 ( 0 - 3071): 21
1=Logic gate type & delay timer
In #2 ( 0 - 3071): 67
In #3 ( 0 - 3071): 12 _
/4 Binary output (IO#4 )

Select BO ( 1- 8)
Select No.=_
/2 LED /3 Setting (LED1) /4 Logic gate type & delay timer 1/ 2

Select LED ( 1 - 4) 1=Logic gate type & reset Logic 1=OR 2=AND 1 _
2=Input to logic gate Reset 0=Inst 1=Latch 1
Select No.=_
/4 Input to logic gate 1/ 4

/3 Setting (LED4)
In #1 ( 0 - 3071): 274 _
1=Logic gate type & reset
In #2 ( 0 - 3071): 289
In #3 ( 0 - 3071): 295
a-1
⎯ 327 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a-1
/1 Test /2 Switch 1/ 5
1=Switch 2=Manual test A.M.F. 0=Off 1=On 1 _
3=Binary output 4=Timer Z1S-1PH 0=Off 1=On 0
5=Logic circuit ZB-CTRL 0=Norm 1=OFST 2=Non-OFST 0
/2 Manual test /2 Manual test

1=Telecomm channel test Telecom channel testing . . .
Press number to start test.
/2 Manual test
Telecom channel testing . . .
Completed.
/2 Binary output
1=IO#1 2=IO#2 3=IO#3 4=IO#4
/3 BO (0=Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 3 /3 BO
IO#1 TP-A1 1 _ Press ENTER to operate.
IO#1 TP-B1 1
IO#1 TP-C1 1 Press CANCEL to cancel.
/3 BO
/3 BO (0=Disable 1=Enable) 1/14
Operating . . .
IO#4 BO1 1 _
Press END to reset.
IO#4 BO2 1
IO#4 BO3 1
/2 Timer 1/ 1 /2 Timer 1/ 1
Timer( 1 - 60): 8 _ Press ENTER to operate.
/2 Timer 1/ 1
Operating . . .
Press END to reset.
/2 Logic circuit 1/ 2
TermA( 0 - 3071): 12 _
TermB( 0 - 3071): 48
⎯ 328 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED

ITEMS
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN
MANUAL 1=RECORD
MODE
1=FAULT RECORD
2=EVENT RECORD
NORMAL 3=DISTURBANCE RECORD

(DISPLAY OFF)
4=AUTOMATIC TEST
PRESS ANY 5=AUTORECLOSE COUNT

BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR MENU
VIEW "VIEW" AND ( DISPLAY ON ) 2=STATUS
"RESET"
1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT
METERING 1 3=RELAY ELELMENT

( DISPLAY ON ) AUTO-
MODE 1 4=TIME SYNC SOURCE
TRIP OUTPUT 5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

ISSUED !
VIEW RESET
6=DIRECTION
TRIP 3=SETTING
( LED ON ) (VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION
2=DESCRIPTION
LATEST FAULT *
( DISPLAY ON )
AUTO-
3=COMMUNICATION
MODE 2
4=RECORD
RELAY
FAILED ! 5=STATUS
VIEW RESET
ALARM 6=PROTECTION
( LED ON )
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISON *
9=LED
( DISPLAY ON )
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS 4=SETTING
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA (CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
IS STORED
VIEW RESET
5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=MANUAL TEST
3=BINARY OUTPUT
4=TIMER
5=LOGIC CIRCUIT
⎯ 329 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 330 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix F
Case Outline
• Case Type-A: Flush Mount Type
• Case Type-B: Flush Mount Type
• Case Type-A, B: Rack Mount Type
⎯ 331 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
266
28
254 2 276.2 32
Front View Side view
4-φ5.5
TB4 TB3 TB2

CN1
190.5 260
E
TB1
6.2 223 34.75
216 235.4
220
Rear view Panel cut-out
TB3/TB4 TB2
A1 B1 A1 B1
TB2-TB4:
M3.5 Ring
terminal
TB1:
A10 B10
TB1 M3.5 Ring
terminal
1 2
A18 B18
19 20
Terminal block
Case Type-A: Flush Mount Type for Model 101, 102, 201, 204, 301
⎯ 332 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
266
28
364 2 276.2 32
Front View Side view
4-φ5.5
190.5 260
TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2

CN1
E
TB1
6.2 333 34.75
345.4
326
330
Rear view Panel cut-out

TB2 - TB5
A1 B1
TB2-TB5:
M3.5 Ring
terminal
TB1 TB1:
1 2 M3.5 Ring
terminal
A18 B18
19 20
Terminal block
Case Type-B: Flush Mount Type for Model 202, 203, 205, 206, 302, 303, 401, 501
⎯ 333 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
279
Attachment kit
(top bar)
Attachment kit Attachment kit

(large bracket) (small bracket)
Top View
4 HOLES - 6.8x10.3
2 6 5. 9
100/110/115/120V
3 7. 7
465.1
483.0
Front View
Rack Mount Type: Case Type-A for Model 101, 102, 201, 204, 301
⎯ 334 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
279
Attachment kit
(top bar)
Attachment kit Attachment kit

(large bracket) (small bracket)
Top View
4 HOLES - 6.8x10.3
2 6 5. 9
3 7. 7
465.1
483.0
Front View
Rack Mount: Case Type-B for Model 202, 203, 205, 206, 302, 303, 401, 501
⎯ 335 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
136
265.9
265.9
247.8 19.4 18.8
(a) Large Bracket (b) Small Bracket

18
216
(c) Bar for Top and Bottom of Relay
Parts
(a) 1 Large bracket, 5 Round head screws with spring washers and washers (M4x10)
(b) 1 Small bracket, 3 Countersunk head screws (M4x6)
(c) 2 Bars, 4 Countersunk head screws (M3x8)
Dimensions of Attachment Kit EP-101
⎯ 336 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
132
265.9
265.9
137.8 19.4 18.8
(a) Large Bracket (b) Small Bracket

18
326
(c) Bar for Top and Bottom of Relay
Parts
(a) 1 Large bracket, 5 Round head screws with spring washers and washers (M4x10)
(b) 1 Small bracket, 3 Countersunk head screws (M4x6)
(c) 2 Bars, 4 Countersunk head screws (M3x8)
Dimensions of Attachment Kit EP-102
⎯ 337 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
How to Mount Attachment Kit for Rack-Mounting

Caution: Be careful that the relay modules or terminal blocks, etc., are not damage while mounting.
Tighten screws to the specified torque according to the size of screw.
Step 1.
Remove case cover.

GPS ALARM
SYNC. ALARM
MODE 2A
CF
Right bracket
Left bracket
Seal
Step 2.
Screw
Remove the left and right brackets by

unscrewing the three screws respectively,
then remove two screws on left side of the
relay.
And then, remove four seals on the top
and bottom of the relay.
Seal
Step 3 Top bar

Mount the small bracket by screwing three
countersunk head screws(M4x6) and apply
adhesives to the screws to prevent them
from loosening.
Mount the large bracket by five round head
screws(M4x10) with washer and spring
washer.
And then, mount the top and bottom bars by
two countersunk head screws(M3x8)
respectively.
Small bracket
Large bracket Bottom bar
Step 4
Completed.
⎯ 338 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix G
Typical External Connections
⎯ 339 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
TB2-A1
GRZ100 BO1
TB1- 1 BUS VT TB3- A2 B1
CT 2 BO1
3 CT A1 A2
TB1 -1
4
2 BO2 BO2
5 B2
3 B1
6
4 BO3
7 A3
5
8 B2
6
9 B3
7
10 8
A3
To parallel line 9 A4
From parallel line 10 BO4
B3 BO4
B4
A4
11 A5
CB CB BO5
VT B4 BO5
12
B5
A5
13
14 BO6 A6
B5
BO6
15 B6
BUS VT A6
20 BO7 A7
(∗1) B6
Parallel line Protected line BO7
(CASE EARTH) B7
A7
BO8 A8
B7
BO8
[Default setting] (+) A8 B8
CB1-A TB4 -A4 BO9
B8 A9
BI1
CB auxiliary contacts BO9
A9 B9
(Closed when bus CB main B4
contact closed.) BI2 BO10
B9 A10
CB1-C A5 BO10
BI3 A10 B10
BO11
B10
Signal receive (CH1) B5
BI4
A11
Signal receive (CH2)
IO#3
A6 BO12
or Z1-EXT initiation B11
BI5
(∗2)
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6 TB3-A13

BI6 SIGNAL SEND
IO#1 BO13
B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
Disconnector N/O contact A7 A12
BI7 FAIL
RELAY FAILURE
B7 B12
Disconnector N/C contact
BI8
TB3-A18 For IEC103
COM2-A
Carrier protection block A8 TB3-A18
BI9 COM2-B A17
COM-A
B18 COM2-0V A16
B8 RS485 I/F (Two ports)
A17 B18
BI10 COM-B COM1-A
B17 RS485 I/F COM1-B B17
A9 (Single port)
A16 COM1-0V B16
BI11 COM-0V For RSM or IEC103
B16
B9
BI12
IO module
Ethernet LAN I/F
Indication reset A10 T
BI13
(option) IO#1 IO1
IO#2 IO2
Main protection trip B10
BI14 IO#3 IO3
Main protection ON A11
B11 BI15
(-) CN1
EXT trip-A IRIG-B CN1
TB3 -A14 TB4 TB3 TB2
A1 B1 A1 B1
BI16
External trip signals EXT trip-B TB4- A3
B14 (+)
(CBF Initiation) IO#2 B3 E
BI17
EXT trip-C TP-A1 A1
A15 TRIP-A
B15 BI18 B10
(-) TB1
TP-B1 A2 T IO#3
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-B BUS CB 1 2
≧1 (∗2)
DD FAIL. TP-C1 B2
TRIP-C
TB4-A16 +5Vdc TB4-A14 A18 B18 A18 B18
DC (+) B16 DC-DC B14 (+) IO#1 IO#2 19 20
SUPPLY A17
0V VCT
(-) B17 TP-A2 A12
A18 TRIP-A Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
B18
(∗1) A15 TP-B2 A13 (∗2) Model 102 is not provided with IO#3.
(∗1)These connections are connected TRIP-B CENTER CB
by short-bars before shipment. B15
TP-C2 B13
TRIP-C
E
CASE EARTH
Model 101/102
⎯ 340 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
TB2-A1
GRZ100
TB1- 1 BO1
BUS VT TB3- A2 B1
CT 2
BO1
3 CT TB1 -1 A1 A2
4
2
5 BO2 BO2
3 B2
6 B1
4
7 BO3
5 A3
8
6 B2
9 BO3
7
10 B3
8
To parallel line 9 A3
A4
From parallel line 10
BO4
B3 BO4
B4
11 A4
CB CB A5
VT BO5
12 B4 BO5
B5
13 A5
14 A6
BO6
B5
15 BO6
B6
BUS VT 16 A6
20
(∗1) BO7 A7
Parallel line Protected line B6
(CASE EARTH) BO7
B7
A7
BO8 A8
B7
(+) BO8
[Default setting] A8 B8
CB1-A TB4 -A4 BO9
B8 A9
BI1
CB1-B A9 B9
(Closed when bus CB main B4
B9 A10
CB1-C A5 BO10
BI3 A10 B10
BO11
B10
BI4
A11
IO#3
A6 BO12
or Z1-EXT initiation B11
BI5
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6 TB3-A13

BI6 SIGNAL SEND
IO#1 BO13
B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
Disconnector N/O contact A7 A12
BI7 FAIL
RELAY FAILURE
B7 B12
Disconnector N/C contact
BI8 For IEC103
TB2-A18
COM2-A
Carrier protection block A8 TB3-A18 COM2-B A17
BI9 COM-A
B18 COM2-0V A16
Dual RS485 I/F ports
CB ready condition B8 A17 COM1-A B18
BI10 COM-B
B17 RS485 I/F COM1-B B17
A9 (Single port) COM1-0V
A16 B16 For RSM or IEC103
BI11 COM-0V
B16
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9
BI12 IO module
Ethernet LAN I/F
Indication reset A10
BI13
T (option) IO#1 IO1
IO#2 IO2
BI14 IO#3 IO3
Main protection ON A11
B11 BI15
(-) CN1
EXT trip-A IRIG-B CN1
TB3 -A14 TB4 TB3 TB2
A1 B1 A1 B1
BI16
External trip signals EXT trip-B TB4- A3
B14 (+)
(CBF Initiation) BI17
IO#2 B3 E
EXT trip-C TP-A1 A1

A15 TRIP-A
B15 BI18 B10
(-) T TB1
TP-B1 A2 IO#3
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-B BUS CB 1 2
≧1
DD FAIL. TP-C1 B2
TRIP-C
TB4-A16 +5Vdc TB4-A14 A18 B18 A18 B18
DC (+) B16 DC-DC B14 (+) IO#1 IO#2 19 20
SUPPLY A17
0V VCT
(-) B17 TP-A2 A12
A18 TRIP-A Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
B18
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) A15 TP-B2 A13
TRIP-B CENTER CB
B15
by wire link before shipment.
TP-C2 B13
TRIP-C
Model 201
CASE EARTH
E
⎯ 341 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
GRZ100 TB5- A2
TB1- 1 TB2- A2 BO1
BUS VT
CT 2 A1
BO1
3 A1 BO2
CT TB1 -1
4 B1
2 BO2
5 B1 BO3
3
6
4 BO3 B2
7
5
8 B2
6
9 7 A3
10 8
A3 BO4
To parallel line 9 B3
From parallel line 10 BO4 B3
A4
A4 BO5
11 B4
CB CB BO5 B4
VT 12 A5
A5 BO6
13 B5
14 BO6 B5
A6
15
BUS VT 16 A6 BO7
B6
20 BO7
(∗1) B6
Parallel line Protected line A7
(CASE EARTH)
A7 BO8
[Default setting] (+) B7
BO8 B7
CB1-A TB4 -A4 A8
BI1 A8 BO9
CB auxiliary contacts B8
(Closed when bus CB main CB1-B B4 BO9 B8
contact closed.) BI2 A9
A9 BO10
CB1-C A5 B9
BI3 BO10 B9
A10
Signal receive (CH1) B5 A10 BO11
BI4 B10
BO11 B10
Signal receive (CH2) A6 A11
or Z1-EXT initiation BI5 A11 BO12
B11
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6 BO12 B11
BI6 A12
BO13
Disconnector N/O contact A7 B12
BI7
A13
Disconnector N/C contact B7
BO14
BI8 B13
IO#1
Carrier protection block A8
BI9 IO#3
B8
CB ready condition
BI10
TB2-A13
A9 SIGNAL SEND
BO13 B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
BI11
A12
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9 FAIL
RELAY FAILURE
BI12 B12 For IEC103
TB2-A18
COM2-A
Indication reset A10 COM2-B A17
TB2-A18
BI13 COM-A
COM2-0V A16
B18 Dual RS485 I/F ports
Main protection trip B10 B18
A17 COM1-A
BI14 COM-B
RS485 I/F COM1-B B17
Main protection ON A11 B17
(Single port) COM1-0V
(-) BI15
COM-0V
EXT trip-A B16
TB2 -A14
BI16
External trip signals EXT trip-B T
Ethernet LAN I/F IO module
B14 IO#2 (option)
(CBF Initiation)
BI17 IO#1 IO1
EXT trip-C
A15 OP1
T
For RSM OR IEC103 IO#2 IO2
R
(-) B15 BI18
Fibre Optic I/F (option) IO#3 IO4
TB5 -A14 T
OP2 For IEC103
(+) BI19 R
TB5 TB4 TB2 CN1
B14 IO#3 A1 B1
BI20
CN1 OP1
IRIG-B
A15 E
OP2
B15 BI21
(-)
TB4- A3 TB1
(+)
B3 1 2
T
TP-A1 A1
TRIP-A
A18 B18
RELAY FAIL. IO#3 IO#1 19 20
≧1 TP-B1 A2 IO#2
TRIP-B BUS CB VCT
DD FAIL.
TB4-A16 +5Vdc TP-C1 B2 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

TRIP-C
DC (+) B16 DC-DC TB4-A14
SUPPLY A17 (+)
0V B14
(-) B17
A18
B18 TP-A2 A12
TRIP-A
Model 202
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) A15
by wire link before shipment. B15 TP-B2 A13
TRIP-B Note: Only terminal blocks used for connections are
shown. (Non-used terminal block TB3 is not shown.)
CASE EARTH
E TP-C2 B13
TRIP-C
⎯ 342 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
GRZ100
TB1- 1 TB2- A2 TB5- A2 TB3- A2
BUS VT
CT 2 BO1 BO1 BO1
3 A1 A1 A1
CT TB1 -1
4 BO2
2 BO2 BO2
5 B1 B1 B1
3
6
4 BO3 BO3 BO3
7
5 B2 B2 B2
8
6
9
7
10 8 A3 A3 A3
To parallel line 9
BO4 BO4
From parallel line 10 BO4 B3 B3 B3
A4 A4 A4
11
CB CB BO5 BO5
BO5 B4 B4 B4
VT 12
A5 A5 A5
13
BO6 BO6
14 BO6 B5 B5 B5
15
BUS VT 16 A6 A6 A6
20 BO7 BO7
BO7 B6 B6 B6
(∗1)
Parallel line Protected line
(CASE EARTH)
A7 A7 A7
(+)
[Default setting] BO8 BO8
BO8 B7 B7 B7
CB1-A TB4 -A4
BI1 A8 A8 A8
CB auxiliary contacts
CB1-B BO9 BO9
(Closed when bus CB main B4 BO9 B8 B8 B8
contact closed.) BI2
A9 A9 A9
CB1-C A5
BO10 BO10
BI3 BO10 B9 B9 B9
Signal receive (CH1) B5 A10 A10 A10

BI4
BO11 BO11
BO11 B10 B10 B10
Signal receive (CH2) A6
or Z1-EXT initiation BI5 A11 A11 A11
BO12 BO12
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6 BO12 B11 B11 B11
BI6
A12 A12
Disconnector N/O contact A7
BO13 BO13
BI7 B12 B12

A13 A13
BI8
BO14 BO14
IO#1 B13 B13
BI9
CB ready condition
B8 IO#3 IO#4
BI10
TB2-A13
A9 SIGNAL SEND
BI11
A12
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9 FAIL TB2-A18 For IEC103
RELAY FAILURE COM2-A
BI12 B12
COM2-B A17
Indication reset A10 COM2-0V A16
TB2-A18
BI13 COM-A Dual RS485 I/F ports
COM1-A B18
B18
Main protection trip B10 COM1-B B17
A17
BI14 COM-B
RS485 I/F COM1-0V B16
Main protection ON (Single port)
BI15 A16
(-) COM-0V
EXT trip-A B16
TB2 -A14
IO module
BI16
Ethernet LAN I/F
External trip signals EXT trip-B B14 IO#2
T (option) IO#1 IO1
(CBF Initiation)
BI17 IO#2 IO2
EXT trip-C T
A15 OP1
R
For RSM OR IEC103 IO#3 IO4#1
(-) B15 BI18
TB5 -A14 T
Fibre Optic I/F (option) IO#4 IO4#2
(+) OP2 For IEC103
BI19 R
TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
B14 IO#3 A1 B1
BI20
CN1 OP1
IRIG-B
A15 E
OP2
(-) B15 BI21
TB4- A3
TB3 -A14 (+) TB1
(+) B3 1 2
BI34
T
B14 IO#4 TP-A1 A1
TRIP-A
BI35 A18 B18
19 20
IO#3 IO#1 IO#4
TP-B1 A2 IO#2
VCT
A15 TRIP-B BUS CB
(-) B15 BI36
TP-C1 B2 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
TRIP-C
RELAY FAIL. TB4-A14
≧1 B14 (+)
DD FAIL.
TB4-A16 +5Vdc TP-A2 A12

TRIP-A Model 203
DC (+) B16 DC-DC
SUPPLY A17 TP-B2 A13
0V TRIP-B
(-) B17
A18
B18 TP-C2 B13
TRIP-C
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) A15
by wire link before shipment. B15
CASE EARTH
E
⎯ 343 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
GRZ100 TB2-A1
TB1- 1 BUS VT BO1
CT 2 TB3- A2 B1
3 BO1
CT TB1 -1
4 A1 A2
2
5 BO2 BO2
3
6 B2
4 B1
7
5 BO3
8 A3
6
9 B2
7 BO3
10 B3
8
To parallel line 9
A3 A4
From parallel line 10
BO4 BO4
B3 B4
11
CB A4 A5
CB
VT 12 BO5 BO5
B4 B5
13
A5 A6
14
BO6 BO6
15 B5 B6
BUS VT 16
A6
20
(∗1)
B6 IO#3
(CASE EARTH)
A7
[Default setting] (+) BO8
B7
CB1-A TB4 -B4
CB1 contacts A4 BI1 A8
(Closed when CB main CB1-B B5 BO9
BI2 B8
contact closed.) A5
CB1-C B6 A9
A6 BI3
BO10
B7 B9
A7 BI4
A10
or Z1-EXT initiation A8 BI5 BO11
B10
B9
External VT failure (EXT VTF) BI6
A9 A11
B10 IO#1 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
Disconnector N/O contact BO12
A10 BI7 B11
B11
Disconnector N/C contact BI8 TB3-A13
A11
B12 SIGNAL SEND
Carrier block BO13
BI9 B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
A12
B13 A12
Indication reset BI10
FAIL
RELAY FAILURE
A13
B12
B14
Protection block BI11
TB3-A18 For IEC103
A14 COM2-A
B15 COM2-B A17
Z1X initiation BI12 TB3-A18
A15 COM-A COM2-0V A16
(-) Dual RS485 I/F ports
B18
EXT trip-A TB3 –A14 COM1-A B18
BI16 A17 COM1-B B17
COM-B
External trip signals EXT trip-B B14 B17 RS485 I/F
COM1-0V B16
BI17 IO#2 (Single port) For RSM or IEC103
(CBF Initiation) A16
EXT trip-C A15 COM-0V
BI18 B16
(-) B15
TB2 –A7
OCI block BI19 T
Ethernet LAN I/F
(option)
IO module
EFI block
B7
BI20 T
IO#1 IO8
OP1
A8 R
For RSM OR IEC103
IO#2 IO2
OC block Fibre Optic I/F (option)
BI21 T
For IEC103
IO#3 IO6
DEF block B8 OP2
R
BI22 IO#3
A9 CN1
EXTTP block IRIG-B TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
BI23 A1 B1
STUB block B9 OP1
BI24 TB4- A3
(+) E
SOTF block A10 B3 OP2
BI25
(-) B10
TP-A1 A1
TRIP-A
B10
TP-B1 T TB1
A2 IO#3 1 2
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-B
≧1
DD FAIL. TP-C1 B2
TRIP-C
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc A18 B18
DC (+) B16 DC-DC IO#1 IO#2 19 20
SUPPLY A17 VCT
0V
(-) B17
A18 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
(∗1)These connections are connected by (∗1) B18
wire link before shipment.
CASE EARTH
E
Model 204
⎯ 344 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
GRZ100 TB5- A1
TB1- 1 BUS VT
CT BO1
2 TB2- A2 B1
3 CT BO1
TB1 -1
4 A1 A2
2
5
3 BO2 BO2
6 B2
4 B1
7
5 BO3
8 A3
6
9 B2
7 BO3
10 B3
8
To parallel line 9
10 A3 A4
From parallel line
BO4 BO4
B3 B4
11
CB CB A4 A5
VT 12 BO5 BO5
B4 B5
13
14 A5 A6
BO6 BO6
15 B5 B6
BUS VT 16
20 A6 A7
(∗1)
Parallel line Protected line BO7 BO7
(CASE EARTH) B6 B7
A7 A8
[Default setting] (+)
BO8 BO8
CB1-A TB4 -B4 B7 B8
CB1 contacts A4 BI1
A8 A9
(Closed when CB main CB1-B B5
BI2 BO9 BO9
contact closed.) A5 B8 B9
CB1-C B6
BI3 A9 A10
A6
B7 BO10 BO10
Signal receive (CH1) B9 B10
A7 BI4
Signal receive (CH2) B8 A10
or Z1-EXT initiation A8 BI5 IO#3
BO11
B9 B10
A9
A11
Disconnector N/O contact BI7 BO12
A10 B11
B11
Disconnector N/C contact BI8
A11 TB2-A13
B12 SIGNAL SEND
Carrier block BI9 BO13
A12 B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
B13 A12
Indication reset BI10 FAIL
A13 RELAY FAILURE
B14 B12
Protection block BI11
A14
B15
Z1X initiation BI12
A15 For IEC103
(-) TB2-A18
EXT trip-A TB2 –A14 COM2-A
COM2-B A17
BI16 TB2-A18
COM-A COM2-0V A16
External trip signals EXT trip-B B14 B18 Dual RS485 I/F ports
BI17 IO#2 B18
(CBF Initiation) A17
COM1-A
EXT trip-C A15 COM-B COM1-B B17
BI18 B17 RS485 I/F
(-) B15 (Single port) COM1-0V B16 For RSM or IEC103
TB5 -A12 A16
COM-0V
OCI block BI19 B16
B12 Ethernet LAN I/F
EFI block BI20 T (option)
OC block A13
BI21
IO module
DEF block B13 IO#1 IO8
BI22 IO#3
A14 IO#2 IO2
EXTTP block
BI23
IO#3 IO5
STUB block B14
BI24 CN1
IRIG-B
SOTF block A15
BI25 TB5 TB4 TB2 CN1
A1 B1
B15 TB4- A3
ARC block (+)
BI26 B3
E
CB1 ready A16
BI27 TP-A1 A1
TRIP-A
TB1
CBF block B16 1 2
BI28 TP-B1 A2
A18 TRIP-B
(-) T
TP-C1 B2
TRIP-C A18 B18 19 20
IO#3 IO#1 IO#2
VCT
Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
RELAY FAIL.
DD FAIL.
≧1
Model 205
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc
DC (+) B16 DC-DC Note: Only terminal blocks used for connections are
SUPPLY A17
0V shown. (Non-used terminal block TB3 is not shown.)
(-) B17
A18
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) B18
CASE EARTH
E
⎯ 345 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
GRZ100 TB5- A1 TB3- A2

TB1- 1 BUS VT BO1
BO1
CT 2 TB2- A2 B1 A1
3 CT BO1 BO2
TB1 -1
4 A1 A2
2 B1
5
3 BO2 BO2 BO3
6 B2
4 B1
7 B2
5 BO3
8 A3
6
9 7 B2 BO3
10 B3 A3
8
To parallel line 9 BO4
10 A3 A4 B3
From parallel line
BO4 BO4
B3 B4 A4
11 BO5
CB CB A4 A5 B4
VT 12 BO5 BO5
B4 B5 A5
13 BO6
14 A5 A6 B5
BO6 BO6
15 B5 B6 A6
BUS VT 16
A6 A7 BO7
20 B6
(∗1)
Parallel line Protected line BO7 BO7
(CASE EARTH) B6 B7 A7
A7 A8 BO8
[Default setting] B7
(+)
BO8 BO8
CB1-A TB4 -B4 B7 B8 A8
CB1 contacts A4 BI1 BO9
A8 A9 B8
(Closed when CB main CB1-B B5
BI2 BO9 BO9
contact closed.) A5 B8 B9 A9
CB1-C B6 BO10
BI3 A9 A10 B9
A6
B7 BO10 BO10
Signal receive (CH1) B9 B10 A10
A7 BI4
Signal receive (CH2) B8 A10 BO11
B10
or Z1-EXT initiation A8 BI5 IO#3
BO11
B9 B10 A11
A9 BO12
A11 B11
Disconnector N/O contact BI7 BO12
A10 B11 A12
B11
Disconnector N/C contact BI8 BO13
A11 TB2-A13 B12
B12 SIGNAL SEND
Carrier block BI9 BO13 A13
B13 A12 BO14
Indication reset BI10 FAIL
B13
A13 RELAY FAILURE
B14 B12
Protection block BI11 IO#4
A14
B15
Z1X initiation BI12
A15
(-)
EXT trip-A TB2 –A14 TB2-A18 For IEC103
BI16 TB2-A18 COM2-A
COM-A COM2-B A17
External trip signals EXT trip-B B14
IO#2 B18 A16
(CBF Initiation) BI17 COM2-0V
A17 Dual RS485 I/F ports
EXT trip-C A15 COM-B B18
RS485 I/F COM1-A
BI18 B17 B17
(-) B15 (Single port) COM1-B
TB5 -A12 A16
COM-0V COM1-0V B16 For RSM or IEC103
OCI block BI19 B16
B12 Ethernet LAN I/F
EFI block BI20 T (option) IO module
OC block A13
BI21 T IO#1 IO8
DEF block B13 OP1 For RSM OR IEC103
BI22 IO#3
R
Fibre Optic I/F (option)
IO#2 IO2
EXTTP block A14 OP2
T
For IEC103 IO#3 IO5
BI23 R
B14
IO#4 IO4
STUB block CN1
BI24
IRIG-B
SOTF block A15
BI25 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
A1 B1
B15 TB4- A3
ARC block (+)
BI26 B3 OP1
E
CB1 ready A16 OP2
BI27 TP-A1 A1
TRIP-A
B16 TB1
CBF block TP-B1 A2 1 2
BI28 TRIP-B
(-) A18
T
TB3 -A14
(+) TP-C1 B2
BI34 TRIP-C A18 B18 19 20
IO#3 IO#1 IO#4 IO#2
B14 VCT
BI35 IO#4
Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
A15
BI36
(-) B15
RELAY FAIL.
≧1
DD FAIL. Model 206
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc
DC (+) B16 DC-DC
SUPPLY A17
0V
(-) B17
A18
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) B18
CASE EARTH
E
⎯ 346 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
TB2-A1
BUS VT
TB1 -1 BO1
TB3- A2 B1
2
CT 3 BO1
A1 A2
4
CB 5 BO2 BO2
B2
6 B1
7
BO3 A3
CB To Parallel Line 8
B2
From Parallel Line 9 BO3 B3
CT 10
VT 11 A3 A4
GRZ100
12 BO4 BO4
TB1-1 B3 B4
2
Protected Line
13
3 A4 A5
4 14
5 BO5 BO5
6 15 B4 B5
CB
7 BUS VT 16
8 A5 A6
9
10 17 BO6 BO6
B5 B6
Parallel Line
18
BUS
20 A6 A7
PARALLEL LINE VT (∗1)
(CASE EARTH) BO7 B6 BO7 B7
A7 A8
BO8 B7 BO8 B8
[Default setting] (+)
CB1-A A8 A9
TB4 -A4
(+) BI1 BO9 BO9
B8 B9
(Closed when bus CB main CB1-B B4
A9 A10
BO10 B9 BO10 B10
CB1-C A5
BI3
A10
B5 BO11
IO#3
BI4
A11
Signal receive (CH2) A6
or Z1-EXT initiation BI5 BO12 B11
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6

BI6 TB3-A13
IO#1 SIGNAL SEND
BO13
Disconnector N/O contact
BI7
A12
FAIL
B7 RELAY FAILURE
BI8

BI9 TB3-A18 TB3-A18 For IEC103
COM-A COM2-A
B8 B18 A17
CB1 ready condition COM2-B
BI10 A16
A17 COM2-0V
COM-B Dual RS485 I/F ports
A9 B17 RS485 I/F
CB2 ready condition COM1-A B18
BI11 (Single port)
A16 COM1-B B17
COM-0V
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9 B16 COM1-0V B16 For RSM or IEC103
BI12
A10
IO module
Indication reset Ethernet LAN I/F
BI13 T (option) IO#1 IO1
BI14
IO#2 IO2
Main protection ON A11 IO#3 IO3
B11 BI15
(-)
EXT trip-A CN1
TB3 -A14 IRIG-B
BI16 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
A1 B1 A1 B1
External trip signals EXT trip-B
(CBF Initiation) B14 IO#2 TB4- A3
BI17 (+)
B3 E
EXT trip-C
A15
B15 BI18 TP-A1 A1
(-) TRIP-A
B10
TP-B1 A2 T TB1
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-B BUS CB IO#3 1 2
≧1
DD FAIL. TP-C1 B2
TRIP-C
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc TB4-A14 A18 B18 A18 B18
DC (+) B16 DC-DC B14 (+)
IO#1 IO#2 19 20
SUPPLY A17
0V
(-) B17 TP-A2 A12
A18 TRIP-A
B18 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear View)
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) A15 TP-B2 A13
TRIP-B CENTER CB
TP-C2 B13
TRIP-C
Model 301
CASE EARTH
E
⎯ 347 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
BUS VT
TB1 -1
2
CT 3 TB5- A2 TB3- A2
4 TB2- A2 BO1 BO1
CB 5 BO1 A1 A1
6 A1
BO2 BO2
7
BO2 B1 B1
CB To Parallel Line 8
B1 BO3
From Parallel Line 9 BO3
CT 10 BO3 B2 B2
B2
VT 11
GRZ100 12 A3
TB1-1 A3
A3
Protected Line
2 13 BO4 BO4
3 B3 B3
14 BO4 B3
4
5 A4 A4
CB 6 15 A4
7 BUS VT 16 BO5 BO5
B4 B4
8 BO5
9
B4
10 17 A5 A5
Parallel Line
18 A5
BUS BO6 BO6
B5 B5
20 BO6 B5
PARALLEL LINE VT (∗1
A6 A6
(CASE EARTH)
(+) A6
BO7 BO7
[Default setting] B6 B6
CB1-A TB4- A4 BO7 B6
BI1 A7 A7
CB auxiliary contacts A7
(Closed when bus CB main CB1-B B4 BO8 BO8
B7 B7
contact closed.) BI2 BO8 B7
A8 A8
CB1-C A5
A8
BI3 BO9 BO9
B8 B8
BO9 B8
B5
Signal receive (CH1) A9 A9
BI4 A9
BO10 BO10
Signal receive (CH2) B9 B9
A6 BO10 B9
or Z1-EXT initiation BI5
A10 A10
A10
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6 BO11 BO11
BI6 BO11
B10 B10
B10
A11 A11
A7
BI7 BO12 BO12
B11 B11
BO12 B11
A12 A12
BI8
BO13 BO13
A8 B12 B12
Carrier protection block IO#1
BI9
A13 A13
CB1 ready condition B8 BO14
B13 BO14 B13
BI10
CB2 ready condition A9

BI11 IO#3 IO#4
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9
TB2-A13 (∗2)
BI12
SIGNAL SEND
BO13
Indication reset A10 B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY)
BI13
FAIL A12
B10 RELAY FAILURE TB2-A18 For IEC103
Main protection trip COM2-A
B12
BI14 A17
COM2-B
Main protection ON A11 TB2-A18
COM2-0V A16
COM-A Dual RS485 I/F ports
(-) B11 BI15
B18 COM1-A B18
EXT trip-A TB2 -A14
A17 COM1-B B17
COM-B
BI16 RS485 I/F COM1-0V
B17 B16 For RSM or IEC103
External trip signals EXT trip-B B14
(Single port)
(CBF Initiation) IO#2 A16
COM-0V
BI17
B16 IO module
EXT trip-C A15 Ethernet LAN I/F
T (option) IO#1 IO1
(-) B15 BI18
CB2-A TB5 -A14 T IO#2 IO2
OP1 For RSM OR IEC103
R
BI19
Fibre Optic I/F (option)
IO#3 IO4#1
CB auxiliary contacts CB2-B T
(Closed when bus CB main B14 IO#3 OP2
R
For IEC103 IO#4 (*2) IO4#2
CN1 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
CB2-C A15
BI21 IRIG-B A1 B1
B15
(-) OP1
TB3- A14 TB4-A3
E
(+) BI34 B3 OP2
B14 TP-A1 A1 TB1

BI35 IO#4(*2) TRIP-A 1 2
TP-B1 A2 T
A15 TRIP-B BUS CB
B15 BI36
A18 B18
(-) IO#3 IO#1 IO#4 19 20
TP-C1 B2 IO#2
TRIP-C (∗2) VCT
RELAY FAIL. TB4-A14
≥1
DD FAIL. B14 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc TP-A2 A12 (∗2) Model 302 is not provided with IO#4.
DC TRIP-A
B16 DC-DC
SUPPLY A17
0V TP-B2 A13
B17 TRIP-B CENTER CB
A18 Model 302/303
B18 TP-C2 B13
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) TRIP-C
A15
CASE EARTH
E
⎯ 348 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
TB3-A1
GRZ100 BO1
TB2- A2 B1 TB5- A2
TB1- 1 BUS VT
CT 2 BO1 A2 BO1
3 A1 A1
CT TB1 -1 BO2
4 B2 BO2
2 BO2
5 B1 B1
3
6 A3
4 BO3 BO3
7 BO3
5 B2 B3 B2
8
6
9
7 A4
10 8 A3 BO4 A3
To parallel line 9 B4 BO4
From parallel line 10 BO4 B3 B3
A10
A4 BO5 A4
11 B10
CB BO5
CB BO5 B4 B4
VT 12 A11
A5 BO6 A5
13 B11
BO6
14 BO6 B5 B5
A12
15 BO7
A6 B12 A6
BUS VT 16
BO7
20 BO7 B6 A13 B6
(∗1)
(CASE EARTH) A7 B13 A7
(+)
BO8
[Default setting] BO8 B7 B7
CB1-A TB4 -A4
BI1 A8 A8
(Closed when bus CB main CB1-B B4 BO9
BO9 B8 B8
A9 A9
CB1-C A5
BI3 BO10
BO10 B9 B9

A10 A10
BI4 A17
(+) BO11
BO11 B10 FD2 B17 B10
Signal receive (CH2) A6 (∗1)
or Z1-EXT initiation BI5 A18
A11 A11
B18 (∗1)
B6 BO12
External VT failure (EXT VTF) BO12 B11 B11
BI6 A15
(+)
FD1 B15 (∗1) A12
BO13
BI7 A16 B12
B16 (∗1)
A13
BI8
BO14
A8
IO#1 IO#4 B13
Carrier protection block
BI9
CB ready condition
B8 TB2-A13 IO#3
BI10 SIGNAL SEND
A9
A12
(*)Caution
BI11 FAIL
RELAY FAILURE Connect FD output contact with A- to
B12
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9 C-phase tripping output contacts in
BI12
COM-A
TB2-A18 series.
Indication reset A10 B18 TB2-A18 For IEC103
BI13 COM2-A
A17
COM-B COM2-B A17
Main protection trip B10 B17 RS485 I/F
COM2-0V A16
BI14 (Single port)
A16 Dual RS485 I/F ports
Main protection ON A11 COM-0V COM1-A B18
B11 BI15 B16 B17
(-) COM1-B
EXT trip-A Ethernet LAN I/F
T COM1-0V B16 For RSM or IEC103
TB2 -A14 (option)
BI16
T
External trip signals EXT trip-B B14 IO#2
OP1
R
For RSM OR IEC103 IO module
(CBF Initiation) Fibre Optic I/F (option)
BI17
T
For IEC103
IO#1 IO1
EXT trip-C OP2
A15 R IO#2 IO2
(-) B15 BI18
TB5 -A14
CN1
IRIG-B IO#3 IO4
(+) BI19 IO#4 FD
TB4- A3
B14 IO#3 (+)
B3
BI20 TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
A1 B1
TP-A1 A1
A15 TRIP-A
OP1
B15 BI21
TP-B1 A2 E
(-) TRIP-B BUS CB OP2
RELAY FAIL.
≧1 TP-C1 B2 TB1
DD FAIL. TRIP-C 1 2
TB4-A14
TB4-A16 +5Vdc T
B14
DC (+) B16 DC-DC (+)
A18 B18
SUPPLY A17 TP-A2 A12 IO#3 IO#1 IO#4 19 20
0V TRIP-A IO#2
(-) B17 VCT
A18
B18 TP-B2 A13 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
(∗1)These connections are connected (∗1) TRIP-B
A15
TP-C2 B13
CASE EARTH
TRIP-C Model 401
E
⎯ 349 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
BUS
BUS VT TB3-A1 TB5- A2

TB1 -1
BO1
2 TB2- A2 B1 A1
CT 3
BO1 BO1
4
CB 5
A1 A2 B1
6 BO2 BO2
BO2 B2
7 B1
CB To Parallel Line 8 B2
From Parallel Line 9 BO3 A3 BO3
CT 10 B2 BO3
VT 11 B3 A3
GRZ100 12 BO4
TB1-1 A3 A4 B3
Protected Line
2 13 BO4
3
14 BO4 B3 B4 A4
4
5 BO5
CB 6 15 A4 A10 B4
7 BUS VT 16
8 BO5
BO5 B4 B10 A5
9
10 17
BO6
Parallel Line
18 A5 A11 B5
BUS
20 BO6
PARALLEL LINE VT (∗1 BO6 B5 B11 A6
(CASE EARTH)
BO7
A6 A12 B6
BO7
(+) BO7 B6 B12 A7
[Default setting] CB1-A TB4 -A4 BO8
A7 A13 B7
BI1
BO8 B7 B13 A8
(Closed when bus CB main CB1-B B4
A8 B8
CB1-C A5
BO9 B8 A9
BI3
BO10
Signal receive (CH1) B5 A9 B9
BI4
BO10 B9 A17 A10
(+)
Signal receive (CH2) A6 FD2 B17
or Z1-EXT initiation BI5 (*) BO11
A10 B10
A18
External VT failure (EXT VTF) B6 BO11 (*)
B10 B18 (*) A11
BI6
BO12
A7 A11 A15 B11
Disconnector N/O contact (+)
BI7 FD1 B15
BO12 B11 A12
Disconnector N/C contact B7 (*)
BI8
A16 BO13
B12
IO#1 B16 (*)
BI9
A13
B8 IO#4 BO14
B13
CB ready condition
BI10 TB2-A13
A9 SIGNAL SEND
BO13
BI11 B13 (HIGH SPEED RELAY) IO#3
Autoreclose block (REC BLOCK) B9 A12
FAIL RELAY FAILURE
BI12
B12 TB2-A18 For IEC103
COM2-A
Indication reset A10
COM2-B A17
BI13 TB2-A18
COM-A COM2-0V A16
B10 B18 Dual RS485 I/F ports
BI14 COM1-A
A17 COM1-B B17
Main protection ON A11 COM-B
RS485 I/F
B11 BI15 B17 COM1-0V B16 For RSM or IEC103
(-) (Single port)
EXT trip-A A16
COM-0V
TB2 -A14
B16
(*)Caution
BI16
External trip signals EXT trip-B Ethernet LAN I/F Connect FD output contact with A- to
(CBF Initiation) B14
BI17
IO#2 T (option) C-phase tripping output contacts in
EXT trip-C T series.
A15 OP1 For RSM OR IEC103
R
(-) B15 BI18 Fibre Optic I/F (option)
IO module
T
TB5 -A14 OP2
R
For IEC103 IO#1 IO1
BI19
IO#2 IO2
B14 IO#3 CN1 IRIG-B
BI20 IO#3 IO4
A15
TB4-A3 IO#4 FD
B15 BI21 B3
TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
(-)
A1 B1
TP-A1 A1
TRIP-A
OP1
RELAY FAIL.
≥1 TP-B1 A2 OP2 E
DD FAIL. TRIP-B BUS CB
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc TP-C1 B2 TB1

TRIP-C
DC (+) B16 DC-DC TB4-A14 T
1 2
SUPPLY A17
0V B14
(-) B17
A18 A18 B18 19 20
B18 TP-A2 A12 IO#3 IO#1 IO#4 IO#2
TRIP-A VCT
(∗1) A15
(∗1)These connections are connected B15 TP-B2 A13 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
TRIP-B CENTER CB
CASE EARTH
E TP-C2 B13
TRIP-C Model 501
⎯ 350 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
• Relay Identification
Transmission line parameters
Distance scheme
Autoreclose scheme
• Contacts setting
• Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheets
• PLC default setting
⎯ 351 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Relay Setting Sheets
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency CT rating
VT rating dc supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Transmission line parameters

Line type Line length
Line impedance Z1 =
Z0 = Z0 (mutual) =
Zm =
VT ratio CT ratio
Tripping mode 1 + 3 phase/3 phase
3. Distance scheme
Basic (3zone)
Zone 1 extension
PUP
POP
UOP
BOP
POP + DEF
UOP + DEF
BOP + DEF
PUP + DEF
4. Autoreclose scheme
Not used
SPAR
SPAR + TPAR
TPAR
EX1P (external autoreclose SPAR + TPAR scheme)
EX3P (external autoreclose TPAR scheme)
1CB or 2CB reclosing
1 shot, 2 shots, 3 shots or 4 shots
⎯ 352 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
5. Contacts setting
(1) IO#2 BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
BO11
BO12
BO13
(2) IO#3 BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
BO11
BO12
BO13
BO14
(3) IO#4 BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
BO11
BO12
BO13
BO14
(Memo: For relay elements and scheme logic settings, the setting list as shown on the next page is made.)
⎯ 353 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
6. Default setting
Relay and protection scheme setting sheet
Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating) User
Range Contents
№ Name Units NO-ARC,NO-FD 1CB-ARC,NO-FD 2CB-ARC,NO-FD 1CB-ARC,FD 2CB-ARC,FD 1CB-ARC,NO-FD Setting
5A rating 1A rating Relay model 101 102 201 202 203 301 302 303 401 501 204 205 206
1 Active group 1-8 － Active setting group 1 1
2 Line name Specified by user － Line name Specified by user Specified by user
3 VT 1 -　20000 － VT ratio 2000 2000
4 VTs1 1 -　20000 － VT ratio -- 2000 2000
5 VTs2 1 -　20000 － VT ratio -- 2000 -- 2000 --
6 CT 1 -　20000 － CT ratio 400 400
7 X1 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω Fault location 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.0
8 X0 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 6.80 / 34.0 6.80 / 34.0
9 X0m 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.0
10 R1 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 0.20 / 1.0 0.20 / 1.0
11 R0 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 0.70 / 3.5 0.70 / 3.5
12 R0m 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 0.20 / 1.0 0.20 / 1.0
13 Z0B-L 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.0
14 Z0B-R 0.00 - 199.99 0.0 - 999.9 Ω ditto 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.0
15 Kab 80 - 120 % ditto 100 100
16 Kbc 80 - 120 % ditto 100 100
17 Kca 80 - 120 % ditto 100 100
18 Ka 80 - 120 % ditto 100 100
19 Kb 80 - 120 % ditto 100 100
20 Kc 80 - 120 % ditto 100 100
21 Line 0.0 - 399.9 km ditto 50.0 50.0
3ZONE - Z1-EXT - PUP - POP -

22 Protection scheme UOP - BOP - POP+DEF - － Protection scheme selection POP POP
UOP+DEF - BOP+DEF - PUP+DEF
23 ZS-C Mho - Quad － ZS relay characteristic Mho Mho

24 ZG-C Mho - Quad － ZG relay characteristic Mho Mho
25 BLZONE COM - IND － Blinder setting mode COM COM
26 Z1CNT 1-2-3-4-5 － Z1 trip mode 1 1
27 TPMODE 3PH - 1PH － Trip mode 1PH -- --
28 PSB-Z1 Off - On － PSB for Z1 element On On
29 PSB-Z1X Off - On － PSB for Z1X element On On
30 PSB-Z2 Off - On － PSB for Z2 element On On
31 PSB-Z3 Off - On － PSB for Z3 element Off Off
32 PSB-CR Off - On － PSB for carrier trip On On
33 PSB-ZF Off - On － PSB for ZF element Off Off
34 PSB-ZR1 Off - On － PSB for ZR1 element Off Off
35 PSB-ZR2 Off - On － PSB for ZR2 element Off Off
36 PSB-TP Off - On － Trip for under PSB On On
Countermeasure for lead phase
37 UVPWIEN Off - On － Off Off
overreaching
38 STUB Off - On － Stub protection Off Off
39 SOTF-DL CB - UV - Both － SOTF condition judged CB CB
40 SOTF-OC Off - On － SOTF OC trip On On
41 SOTF-Z1 Off - On － SOTF Zone1 trip Off Off
44 SOTF-F Off - On － SOTF Zone-F trip Off Off
45 SOTF-R1 Off - On － SOTF Zone-R1 trip Off Off
46 SOTF-R2 Off - On － SOTF Zone-R2 trip Off Off
47 SOTF-ND Off - On － SOTF Zone-ND trip Off Off
48 ZFBT Off - On － ZF element back-up trip Off Off
49 ZR1BT Off - On － ZR1 element back-up trip Off Off
50 ZR2BT Off - On － ZR2 element back-up trip Off Off
51 ZNDBT Off - On － Non-directional zone back-up trip Off Off
52 OCBT Off - On － OC back-up trip On On
53 OCIBT Off - On － OCI back-up trip On On
54 MOCI Long - Std - Very - Ext － OCI back-up trip Std Std
55 EFBT Off - On － EF back-up trip On On
56 EFBTAL Off - On － EF back-up trip alarm On On
57 DEF DEFFEN Off - On － Forward DEF back-up trip enable Off Off
58 BU-trip DEFREN Off - On － Reverse DEF back-up trip enable Off Off
59 DEFBTAL Off - On － DEF back-up trip alarm On On
60 DEFI Off - NOD - F - R － DEF back-up trip alarm Off Off
61 MEFI Long - Std - Very - Ext － EFI back-up trip Std Std
62 OVS OVS1EN Off - DT - IDMT － OVS1 enable Off Off
63 OVS2EN Off - On － OVS2 enable Off Off
64 OVG OVG1EN Off - DT - IDMT － OVG1 enable Off Off
65 OVG2EN Off - On － OVG2 enable Off Off
66 UVS UVS1EN Off - DT - IDMT － UVS1 enable Off Off
67 UVS2EN Off - On － UVS2 enable Off Off
68 UVG UVG1EN Off - DT - IDMT － UVG1 enable Off Off
⎯ 354 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

Range Contents
69 UVG UVG2EN Off - On － UVG2 enable Off Off
70 UVS/UVG VBLKEN Off - On － UV block enable Off Off
71 BCDEN Off - On － Broken conductor enable Off Off
72 CRSCM Off - On － Carrier out of service On On
73 CHSEL Single - Guard - And － Carr.Channel configuration Single Single
74 BOSW Normal - Inverse － Carrier sending signal Normal Normal
75 ZONESEL Z2 - Z3 － Carrier control element Z2 Z2
76 ECHO Off - On － ECHO carrier send On On
77 WKIT Off - On － Weak carrier trip(Echo) On On
78 CH-DEF CH1 - CH2 － DEF carrier channel setting CH1 CH1
79 BODEFSW Active - Inactive － Binary switch for DEF carr. Active Active
80 BF1 Off - T - TOC － CBF re-trip Off Off
81 BF2 Off - On － CBF related trip Off Off
82 BFEXT Off - On － CBF initiation by ext. trip Off Off
83 OST Off - Trip - BO － Out of step trip Off Off
84 THMT Off - On － Thermal trip enable Off Off
85 THMAL Off - On － Thermal alarm enable Off Off
86 VTF1EN Off - On - OPT-On － VTF1 enable On On
87 VTF2EN Off - On - OPT-On － VTF2 enable On On
88 VTF-Z4 Off - On － Z4-car blocked by VTF On On
89 CHMON Off - On － Carrier monitoring/testing On On
90 LSSV Off - On － LS monitoring Off Off
91 SVCNT ALM&BLK - ALM － Supervision control ALM&BLK ALM&BLK
92 CTSV Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － CT supervision control Off Off
93 FL-Z0B Off - On － Fault locator Off Off
94 AOLED Off - On － ALARM LED lighting control at alarm On On
95 ZS Z1S 0.01 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 Ω Z1S reactance 1.60 / 8.00 1.60 / 8.00
96 Z1BS 1.5 (fixed) 7.5 (fixed) Ω Z1S mho offset (back) -- --
97 Z1S-Uvm 5.5 (fixed) V Minimum voltage phase detector -- --
98 Z1XS 0.01 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 Ω Z1XS reactance 2.40 / 12.00 2.40 / 12.00
Z1S angle with reference to an X-
99 Z1Sθ1 0 - 45 deg 0 0
axis
Angle for Z1S hooked point with
100 Z1Sθ2 45 - 90 deg 90 90
reference to an R-axis
101 BFR1S 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for Z1S forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
102 BFRXS 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for Z1XS forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
103 Z2S 0.01 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 Ω Z2S reactance 3.00 / 15.00 3.00 / 15.00
104 BFR2S 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for Z2S forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
105 ZFS 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω ZFS reactance 4.00 / 20.0 4.00 / 20.00
106 BFRFS 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZFS forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
107 Z3S 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω Z3S mho 6.00 / 30.0 6.00 / 30.0
108 Z3Sθ 45 - 90 deg Line angle for Z3S(Mho) element 85 85
109 ZBSθ 0 - 45 deg Angle of direction(Quad) element 5 5
110 BFRS 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZS forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
111 BFRSθ 75 (fixed) deg Angle of BFRS -- --
112 BFLS 0 (fixed) Ω Blinder for ZS reverse (-R) -- --
113 BFLSθ 90 - 135 deg Angle of BFLS 120 120
114 ZR1S 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω ZR1S reactance 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.00
115 ZR2S 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω ZR2S reactance 4.00 / 20.0 4.00 / 20.00
116 Z4S 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω Z4S mho 8.00 / 40.0 8.00 / 40.0
117 Z4BS 1.5 (fixed) 7.5 (fixed) Ω Z4S offset-mho (back) -- --
118 Z4Sθ 45 - 90 deg Line angle for Z4S(Mho) element -- (Linked with Z3Sθ) -- (Linked with Z3Sθ)
119 Z4BSθ 0 - 45 deg Angle of Z4S(Quad) offset -- (Linked with ZBSθ) -- (Linked with ZBSθ)
120 BRRS 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZS reverse (-R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
121 BRRSθ 75 (fixed) deg Angle of BRRS -- --
122 BRLS 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZS reverse (-R) -- (Linked with BRRS) -- (Linked with BRRS)
123 BRLSθ 90 - 135 deg Angle of BRLS -- (Linked with BFLSθ) -- (Linked with BFLSθ)
124 ZNDS 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω ZNDS 10.00 / 50.0 10.00 / 50.0
125 BNDS 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZNDS 12.00 / 60.0 12.00 / 60.0
126 TZ1S 0.00 - 10.00 s Z1S time-delay trip 0.00 0.00
127 TZ2S 0.00 - 10.00 s Z2S back-up trip timer 0.30 0.30
128 TZFS 0.00 - 10.00 s ZFS back-up trip timer 0.35 0.35
129 TZ3S 0.00 - 10.00 s Z3S back-up trip timer 0.40 0.40
130 TZR1S 0.00 - 10.00 s ZR1S back-up trip timer 0.50 0.50
131 TZR2S 0.00 - 10.00 s ZR2S back-up trip timer 0.60 0.60
132 TZNDS 0.00 - 10.00 s Non-directional zone trip timer 0.70 0.70
⎯ 355 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

Range Contents
133 ZG Z1G 0.01 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 Ω Z1G reactance 1.60 / 8.00 1.60 / 8.00
134 Z1XG 0.01 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 Ω Z1XG reactance 2.40 / 12.00 2.40 / 12.00
Z1G angle with reference to an X-
135 Z1Gθ1 0 - 45 deg 0 0
axis
Angle for Z1G hooked point with
136 Z1Gθ2 45 - 90 deg 90 90
reference to an R-axis
137 BFR1G 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for Z1S forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
138 BFRXG 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for Z1XS forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
139 Z2G 0.01 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 Ω Z2G reactance 4.00 / 20.00 4.00 / 20.00
140 BFR2G 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for Z2S forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
141 ZFG 0.01 - 100.00 0.1 - 500.0 Ω ZFG reactance 6.00 / 30.0 6.00 / 30.00
142 BFRFG 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZFS forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
143 Z3G 0.01 - 100.00 0.1 - 500.0 Ω Z3G mho 8.0 / 40.0 8.0 / 40.0
144 Z3Gθ 45 - 90 deg Line angle for Z3S(Mho) element 85 85
145 ZBGθ 0 - 45 deg Angle of direction(Quad) element 30 30
146 BFRG 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZG forward ( R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
147 BFRGθ 75 (fixed) deg Angle of BFRG -- --
148 BFLG 0 (fixed) Ω Blinder for ZG forward (-R) -- --
149 BFLGθ 90 - 135 deg Angle of BFLG 120 120
150 ZR1G 0.01 - 50.00 0.1 - 250.0 Ω ZR1G reactance 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.00
151 ZR2G 0.01 - 100.00 0.1 - 500.0 Ω ZR2G reactance 4.00 / 20.0 4.00 / 20.00
152 Z4G 0.01 - 100.00 0.1 - 500.0 Ω Z4G mho 8.00 / 40.0 8.00 / 40.0
153 Z4Gθ 45 - 90 deg Line angle for Z4G(Mho) element -- (Linked with Z3Gθ) -- (Linked with Z3Gθ)
154 Z4BGθ 0 - 45 deg Angle of Z4G(Quad) offset -- (Linked with ZBGθ) -- (Linked with ZBGθ)
155 BRRG 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZG reverse (-R) 5.10 / 25.5 5.10 / 25.5
156 BRRGθ 75 (fixed) deg Angle of BRRG -- --
157 BRLG 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZG reverse ( R) -- (Linked with BRRG) -- (Linked with BRRG)
158 BRLGθ 90 - 135 deg Angle of BRLG -- (Linked with BFLGθ) -- (Linked with BFLGθ)
Zero phase current factor: Self line
159 Krs 0 - 1000 % 340 340
"R0/R1"
Zero phase current factor: Self line
160 Kxs 0 - 1000 % 340 340
"X0/X1"
Zero phase current factor: Adjacent
161 Krm 0 - 1000 % 300 300
line "Rom/R1"
Zero phase current factor: Adjacent
162 Kxm 0 - 1000 % 300 300
line "Xom/X1"
Zero phase current factor for ZR
163 KrsR 0 - 1000 % 100 100
element: Self line "R0/R1"
Zero phase current factor for Zr
164 KxsR 0 - 1000 % 100 100
element: Self line "X0/X1"
165 ZNDG 0.01 - 100.00 0.1 - 500.0 Ω ZNDG 10.00 / 50.0 10.00 / 50.0
166 BNDG 0.10 - 20.00 0.5 - 100.0 Ω Blinder for ZNDG 12.00 / 60.0 12.00 / 60.0
167 TZ1G 0.00 - 10.00 s Z1G time-delay trip 0.00 0.00
168 TZ2G 0.00 - 10.00 s Z2G back-up trip timer 0.30 0.30
169 TZFG 0.00 - 10.00 s ZFG back-up trip timer 0.35 0.35
170 TZ3G 0.00 - 10.00 s Z3G back-up trip timer 0.40 0.40
171 TZR1G 0.00 - 10.00 s ZR1G back-up trip timer 0.50 0.50
172 TZR2G 0.00 - 10.00 s ZR2G back-up trip timer 0.60 0.60
173 TZNDG 0.00 - 10.00 s Non-directional zone trip timer 0.70 0.70
174 ZIC 0.00 - 5.00 0.00 - 1.00 A Charging current compensation 0.00 0.00
175 Vn 100 - 120 V Rated voltage 110 110
176 ZPCC ZPCC 0.8 (Sensitivity ratio) － Zero phase current -- --
177 OCG 0.2 (fixed) 0.04 (fixed) A compensation controller -- --
178 PSB PSBSZ 0.50 - 15.00 2.5 - 75.0 Ω Power swing block for Ph-Ph 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.0
179 PSBGZ 0.50 - 15.00 2.5 - 75.0 Ω Power swing block for Ph-G 2.00 / 10.0 2.00 / 10.0
180 PSBRθ 75 (fixed) deg ditto -- --
181 PSBLθ 105 (fixed) deg ditto -- --
182 TPSB 20 - 60 ms PS detection timer 40 40
183 OST OSTR1 3.0 - 30.0 15 - 150 Ω Out of step relay 5.1 / 25 5.1 / 25
184 OSTR2 1.0 - 10.0 5 - 50 Ω ditto 2.5 / 12 2.5 / 12
185 OSTXF 1.0 - 50.0 5 - 250 Ω ditto 6.0 / 30 6.0 / 30
186 OSTXB 0.2 - 10.0 1 - 50 Ω ditto 1.0 / 5 1.0 / 5
187 TOST1 0.01 - 1.00 s ditto 0.04 0.04
188 TOST2 0.01 - 1.00 s ditto 0.04 0.04
189 OCH 2.0 - 15.0 0.4 - 3.0 A Overcurrent element 6.0 / 1.2 6.0 / 1.2
190 TSOTF 0 - 300 s CB open detect timer for SOTF 5 5
191 CBF OCBF 0.5 - 10.0 0.1 - 2.0 A Overcurrent element 4.0 / 0.8 4.0 / 0.8
192 TBF1 50 - 500 ms CBF timer for re-trip 150 150
193 TBF2 50 - 500 ms CBF timer for related trip 200 200
194 OCD 0.5 (fixed) 0.1 (fixed) A Curr. change detector -- --
195 OCCR 0.4 (fixed) 0.08 (fixed) A OC element -- --
⎯ 356 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

Range Contents
196 DEF DEFFI 0.5 - 5.0 0.10 - 1.00 A Directional earth fault element 1.0 / 0.20 1.0 / 0.20
197 DEFFV 1.7 - 21.0 V ditto 2.0 2.0
198 DEFRI 0.5 - 5.0 0.10 - 1.00 A ditto 1.0 / 0.20 1.0 / 0.20
199 DEFRV 1.7 - 21.0 V ditto 2.0 2.0
200 DEFθ 0 - 90 deg ditto 85 85
201 DEF TDEF 0.00 - 10.00 s Forward definite timer 3.00 3.00
202 BU-trip TDER 0.00 - 10.00 s Reverse definite timer 3.00 3.00
203 OC OC 0.5 - 100.0 0.1 - 20.0 A OC element 6.0 / 1.2 6.0 / 1.2
204 TOC 0.00 - 10.00 s ditto 3.00 3.00
205 OCI OCI 0.5 - 25.0 0.10 - 5.00 A IDMT OC element 1.0 / 0.20 1.0 / 0.20
206 TOCI 0.05 - 1.00 － ditto 0.50 0.50
207 TOCIR 0.0 - 10.0 s OC definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0
208 EF EF 0.5 - 5.0 0.10 - 1.00 A Earth fault OC element 1.0 / 0.20 1.0 / 0.20
209 TEF 0.00 - 10.00 s ditto 3.00 3.00
210 EFI EFI 0.5 - 5.0 0.10 - 1.00 A IDMT earth fault OC element 1.0 / 0.20 1.0 / 0.20
211 TEFI 0.05 - 1.00 － ditto 0.50 0.50
212 TEFIR 0.0 - 10.0 s EF definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0
213 EFL 0.5 - 5.0 0.10 - 1.00 A EF element for ZG fail safe 1.0 / 0.20 1.0 / 0.20
214 UVC UVCV 10 - 60 V 48 48
215 UVCZ 0.0 - 50.0 0.0 - 250.0 Ω 2.0 / 10.0 2.0 / 10.0
Undervoltage element with current
216 UVCθ 45 - 90 deg 85 85
compensation
217 UVCKrs 0 - 1000 % -- (Linked with Krs of ZG) -- (Linked with Krs of ZG)
218 UVCKxs 0 - 1000 % -- (Linked with Kxs of ZG) -- (Linked with Kxs of ZG)
219 OVG 20 (fixed) V OV element -- --
220 UVFS 50 - 100 V UV ph-ph element 88 88
221 UVLS 50 - 100 V UV ph-ph element "L" level 77 77
222 UVFG 10 - 60 V UV ph-g element 51 51
223 UVLG 10 - 60 V UV ph-g element "L" level 45 45
224 UVPWI 30 (fixed) V UV for positive weak infeed -- --
Curr. change detector for fault under
225 OCDP 0.5 - 10.0 0.1 - 2.0 A 4.0 / 0.8 4.0 / 0.8
PSB
226 OVS OVS1 5.0 - 150.0 V OVS1 element 120.0 120.0
227 TOS1I 0.05 - 100.00 － OVS1 IDMT timer 10.00 10.00
228 TOS1 0.00 - 300.00 s OVS1 definite timer 0.10 0.10
229 TOS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVS1 definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0
230 OS1DP 10 - 98 % OVS1 DO/PU ratio 95 95
231 OVS2 5.0 - 150.0 V OVS2 element 140.0 140.0
232 TOS2 0.00 - 300.00 s OVS2 definite timer 0.10 0.10
233 OS2DP 10 - 98 % OVS2 DO/PU ratio 95 95
234 OVG OVG1 5.0 - 150.0 V OVG1 element 70.0 70.0
235 TOG1I 0.05 - 100.00 － OVG1 IDMT timer 10.00 10.00
236 TOG1 0.00 - 300.00 s OVG1 definite timer 0.10 0.10
237 TOG1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVG1 definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0
238 OG1DP 10 - 98 % OVG1 DO/PU ratio 95 95
239 OVG2 5.0 - 150.0 V OVG2 element 80.0 80.0
240 TOG2 0.00 - 300.00 s OVG2 definite timer 0.10 0.10
241 OG2DP 10 - 98 % OVG2 DO/PU ratio 95 95
242 UVS UVS1 5.0 - 150.0 V UVS1 element 60.0 60.0
243 TUS1I 0.05 - 100.00 － UVS1 IDMT timer 10.00 10.00
244 TUS1 0.00 - 300.00 s UVS1 definite timer 0.10 0.10
245 TUS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UVS1 definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0
246 UVS2 5.0 - 150.0 V UVS2 element 40.0 40.0
247 TUS2 0.00 - 300.00 s UVS2 definite timer 0.10 0.10
248 VSBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UVS blocking threshold 10.0 10.0
249 UVG UVG1 5.0 - 150.0 V UVG1 element 35.0 35.0
250 TUG1I 0.05 - 100.00 － UVG1 IDMT timer 10.00 10.00
251 TUG1 0.00 - 300.00 s UVG1 definite timer 0.10 0.10
252 TUG1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UVG1 definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0
253 UVG2 5.0 - 150.0 V UVG2 element 25.0 25.0
254 TUG2 0.00 - 300.00 s UVG2 definite timer 0.10 0.10
255 VGBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UVG blocking threshold 10.0 10.0
256 BCD BCD 0.10 - 1.00 － Broken conductor threshold 0.20 0.20
257 TBCD 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD definite timer 1.00 1.00
258 Thermal THM 2.0 - 10.0 0.40 - 2.00 A Thermal overload setting 5.0 / 1.00 5.0 / 1.00
259 THMIP 0.0 - 5.0 0.00 - 1.00 A Prior load setting 0.0 / 0.00 0.0 / 0.00
260 TTHM 0.5 - 300.0 min Thermal Time Constant 10.0 10.0
261 THMA 50 - 99 % Thermal alarm setting 80 80
262 DOCNI 4.0 (fixed) 0.8 (fixed) A -- --
DOCN Negative OC relay
263 DOCNV 6 (fixed) V -- --
⎯ 357 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

Range Contents
264 TDEFF 0.00 - 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay timer 0.15 0.15
265 TDEFR 0.00 - 0.30 s ditto 0.15 0.15
266 TCHD 0 - 50 ms Coordination timer 12 12
267 TREBK 0.00 - 10.00 s Current reverse blocking time 0.10 0.10
268 TECCB 0.00 - 200.00 s Echo enable timer from CB open 0.10 0.10
269 TSBCT 0.00 - 1.00 s SBCNT timer 0.10 0.10
(Off) - Disable - SPAR - TPAR -
270 Autoreclose mode － Autoreclosing mode -- SPAR&TPAR SPAR&TPAR
SPAR&TPAR - EXT1P - EXT3P
271 ARC-CB ONE - O1 - O2 - L1 - L2 － ARC mode for 1.5CB system -- -- L1 -- L1 --
272 ARC-EXT Off - On － ARC initiated by ext. trip -- Off Off
273 ARC-DEF Off - On － ARC by DG carr. trip -- Off Off
274 ARC-BU Off - On － ARC by back-up trip -- Off Off
275 1CB Off - LB - DB - SY -- LB -- LB -- LB
VCHK － TPAR condition
276 2CB Off - LB1 - LB2 - DB - SY -- -- LB1 -- LB1 --
277 ARC-SM Off - S2 - S3 - S4 － Multi. shot ARC mode -- Off Off
278 ARC-SUC Off - On － ARC success reset -- Off Off
279 VTPHSEL A-B-C － VT phase selection -- A A
280 VT-RATE PH/G - PH/PH － VT rating -- PH/G PH/G
281 3PH-VT Bus - Line － 3ph. VT location -- Line Line
282 UARCSW P1 - P2 - P3 － User ARC switch -- P1 P1
283 TEVLV 0.01 - 10.00 s Dead timer reset timing -- 0.30 0.30
284 TRDY1 5 - 300 s Reclaim timer -- 60 60
285 TSPR1 0.01 - 10.00 s SPAR dead line timer -- 0.80 0.80
286 TTPR1 0.01 - 100.00 s TPAR dead line timer -- 0.60 0.60
287 TRR 0.01 - 100.00 s ARC reset timer -- 2.00 2.00
288 TW1 0.1 - 10.0 s ARC output pulse timer -- 0.2 0.2
289 TRDY2 5 - 300 s Reclaim timer -- -- 60 -- 60 --
290 TSPR2 0.01 - 10.00 s SPAR dead line timer -- -- 0.80 -- 0.80 --
291 TTPR2 0.1 - 10.0 s ARC timing for follower CB -- -- 0.1 -- 0.1 --
292 TW2 0.1 - 10.0 s ARC reset timer -- -- 0.2 -- 0.2 --
293 TS2 5.0 - 300.0 s Multi. shot dead timer -- 20.0 20.0
294 TS2R 5.0 - 300.0 s Multi. shot reset timer -- 30.0 30.0
299 TSUC 0.1 - 10.0 s ARC success reset timer -- 3.0 3.0
300 OVB 10 - 150 V OV element -- 51 51
301 UVB 10 - 150 V UV element -- 13 13
302 OVL1 10 - 150 V OV element -- 51 51
303 UVL1 10 - 150 V UV element -- 13 13
304 SYN1 SY1UV 10 - 150 V Synchro. check (UV) -- 83 83
305 SY1OV 10 - 150 V Synchro. check (OV) -- 51 51
306 SY1θ 5 - 75 deg Synchro. check (ph. diff.) -- 30 30
307 TSYN1 0.01 - 10.00 s Synchronism check timer -- 1.00 1.00
308 TDBL1 0.01 - 1.00 s Voltage check timer -- 0.05 0.05
309 TLBD1 0.01 - 1.00 s Voltage check timer -- 0.05 0.05
310 T3PLL 0.01 - 1.00 s three phase live line check timer -- 0.05 0.05
311 OVL2 10 - 150 V OV element -- -- 51 -- 51 --
312 UVL2 10 - 150 V UV element -- -- 13 -- 13 --
313 SYN2 SY2UV 10 - 150 V Synchro. check (UV) -- -- 83 -- 83 --
314 SY2OV 10 - 150 V Synchro. check (OV) -- -- 51 -- 51 --
315 SY2θ 5 - 75 deg Synchro. check (ph. diff.) -- -- 30 -- 30 --
316 TSYN2 0.01 - 10.00 s Synchronism check timer -- -- 1.00 -- 1.00 --
317 TDBL2 0.01 - 1.00 s Voltage check timer -- -- 0.05 -- 0.05 --
318 TLBD2 0.01 - 1.00 s Voltage check timer -- -- 0.05 -- 0.05 --
319 BISW1 Norm - Inv － Binary input Norm Norm
320 BISW2 Norm - Inv － ditto Norm Norm
325 BISW7 Norm - Inv － ditto Norm Inv
326 BISW8 Norm - Inv － ditto Norm Inv
⎯ 358 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

Range Contents
331 BISW13 Norm - Inv － ditto Norm --
337 BISW19 Norm - Inv － ditto -- Norm -- Norm Norm
340 BISW22 Norm - Inv － ditto -- Norm
344 BISW26 Norm - Inv － ditto -- -- Norm
347 BISW34 Norm - Inv － ditto -- Norm -- Norm -- -- Norm
350 LED1 Logic OR - AND － Configurable　LEDs OR OR
351 Reset Inst - Latch － Inst Inst
352 In #1 0 - 3071 － 0 2816
353 In #2 0 - 3071 － 0 0
354 In #3 0 - 3071 － 0 0
355 In #4 0 - 3071 － 0 0
358 In #1 0 - 3071 － 0 2817
359 In #2 0 - 3071 － 0 0
360 In #3 0 - 3071 － 0 0
361 In #4 0 - 3071 － 0 0
364 In #1 0 - 3071 － 0 2818
365 In #2 0 - 3071 － 0 0
366 In #3 0 - 3071 － 0 0
367 In #4 0 - 3071 － 0 0
370 In #1 0 - 3071 － 0 231
371 In #2 0 - 3071 － 0 0
372 In #3 0 - 3071 － 0 0
373 In #4 0 - 3071 － 0 0
374 Plant name Specified by user － Plant name Specified by user Specified by user
375 Description ditto － Memorandum for user Specified by user Specified by user
376 HDLC 1 - 32 － Relay ID No. for RSM 1 1
377 IEC 0 - 254 － Station address for IEC103 2 2
378 SYADJ -9999 - 9999 ms Time sync. Compensation 0 0
379 IP1-1 0-254 － IP Address Specified by user Specified by user
383 SM1-1 0-255 － Subnet Mask Specified by user Specified by user
387 GW1-1 0-254 － Gateway address Specified by user Specified by user
391 PRTCL1 HDLC - IEC103 － CH#1 Communication protocol HDLC 1
392 232C 9.6 - 19.2 - 38.4 - 57.6 － RS-232C baud rate 9.6 9.6
393 IECBR 9.6 - 19.2 － IEC60870-5-103 baud rate 19.2 19.2
394 IECBLK Normal - Blocked － Monitor direction blocked Normal Normal
395 Fault locator Off - On － FL function use or not On On
⎯ 359 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

Range Contents
Number of bi-trigger (on/off)
396 BITRN 0 - 128 － 100 100
events
397 Time 0.1 - 3.0 s Disturbance record 1.0 1.0
398 OCP-S 0.5 - 250.0 0.1 - 50.0 A OC element for disturbance 10.0 / 2.0 10.0 / 2.0
399 OCP-G 0.5 - 250.0 0.1 - 50.0 A recorder initiation 5.0 / 1.0 5.0 / 1.0
400 UVP-S 0 - 132 V UV element for disturbance 88 88
401 UVP-G 0 - 76 V recorder initiation 51 51
402 TRIP Off - On － Disturbance trigger On On
403 OCP-S Off - On － ditto On On
404 OCP-G Off - On － ditto On On
405 UVP-S Off - On － ditto On On
406 UVP-G Off - On － ditto On On
Chann(Automatic
407 1 - 24 hrs Carrier testing timer 8 8
test interval)
408 Display value Primary - Secondary － Metering Primary Primary
409 Power(P/Q) Send - Receive － Metering Send Send
410 Current Lag - Lead － Metering Lead Lead
411 Time sync Off - IRIG - RSM - IEC - RMT － Time Off Off
412 GMT -12 - +12 hrs Time 0 0
⎯ 360 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Event record default setting

Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents All models
Sig. NO. Signal name type
1 EV1 0 - 3071 － Event record signal 1536 CB1 A On/Off 9
2 EV2 0 - 3071 － ditto 1537 CB1 B On/Off 9
3 EV3 0 - 3071 － ditto 1538 CB1 C On/Off 9
4 EV4 0 - 3071 － ditto 1552 CB2 A On/Off 9
5 EV5 0 - 3071 － ditto 1553 CB2 B On/Off 9
6 EV6 0 - 3071 － ditto 1554 CB2 C On/Off 9
7 EV7 0 - 3071 － ditto 1542 DS On/Off 9
8 EV8 0 - 3071 － ditto 9 COM.block On/Off 9
9 EV9 0 - 3071 － ditto 1545 CB1 ready On/Off 9
10 EV10 0 - 3071 － ditto 1546 CB2 ready On/Off 9
11 EV11 0 - 3071 － ditto 1547 ARC block On/Off 9
12 EV12 0 - 3071 － ditto 1548 Ind.reset On/Off 9
13 EV13 0 - 3071 － ditto 1549 Ext.M.trip On/Off 9
14 EV14 0 - 3071 － ditto 1550 Ext.M.prot. On/Off 9
15 EV15 0 - 3071 － ditto 1556 Ext.trip A On/Off 9
16 EV16 0 - 3071 － ditto 1557 Ext.trip B On/Off 9
17 EV17 0 - 3071 － ditto 1558 Ext.trip C On/Off 9
18 EV18 0 - 3071 － ditto 238 Trip On/Off 9
19 EV19 0 - 3071 － ditto 291 CB1 ARC On/Off 9
20 EV20 0 - 3071 － ditto 292 CB2 ARC On/Off 9
21 EV21 0 - 3071 － ditto 172 VTF On/Off 9
22 EV22 0 - 3071 － ditto 176 PSB On/Off 9
23 EV23 0 - 3071 － ditto 253 Ch.fail On/Off 9
24 EV24 0 - 3071 － ditto 254 Relay fail On/Off 9
25 EV25 0 - 3071 － ditto 1268 V0 err On/Off 9
26 EV26 0 - 3071 － ditto 1269 V2 err On/Off 9
27 EV27 0 - 3071 － ditto 1267 I0 err On/Off 9
28 EV28 0 - 3071 － ditto 257 DS fail On/Off 9
29 EV29 0 - 3071 － ditto 490 AS1 On/Off 9
30 EV30 0 - 3071 － ditto 491 AS2 On/Off 9
31 EV31 0 - 3071 － ditto 492 AF1 On/Off 9
32 EV32 0 - 3071 － ditto 493 AF2 On/Off 9
33 EV33 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
34 EV34 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
35 EV35 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
36 EV36 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
37 EV37 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
38 EV38 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
39 EV39 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
40 EV40 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
41 EV41 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
42 EV42 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
43 EV43 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
44 EV44 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
45 EV45 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
46 EV46 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
47 EV47 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
48 EV48 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
49 EV49 0 - 3071 － ditto 1258 Relay fail-A On/Off 9
50 EV50 0 - 3071 － ditto 1438 Data lost On/Off 9
51 EV51 0 - 3071 － ditto 1266 CT err On/Off 9
52 EV52 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
53 EV53 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
54 EV54 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
55 EV55 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
56 EV56 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
57 EV57 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
58 EV58 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
59 EV59 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
60 EV60 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
61 EV61 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
62 EV62 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
63 EV63 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
64 EV64 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
⎯ 361 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Event record default setting

Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents All models
Sig. NO. Signal name type
65 EV65 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
66 EV66 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
67 EV67 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
68 EV68 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
69 EV69 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
70 EV70 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
71 EV71 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
72 EV72 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
73 EV73 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
74 EV74 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
75 EV75 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
76 EV76 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
77 EV77 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
78 EV78 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
79 EV79 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
80 EV80 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
81 EV81 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
82 EV82 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
83 EV83 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
84 EV84 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
85 EV85 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
86 EV86 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
87 EV87 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
88 EV88 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
89 EV89 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
90 EV90 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
91 EV91 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
92 EV92 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
93 EV93 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
94 EV94 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
95 EV95 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
96 EV96 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
97 EV97 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
98 EV98 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
99 EV99 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
100 EV100 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
101 EV101 0 - 3071 － ditto 1243 SET.GROUP1 On 9
109 EV109 0 - 3071 － ditto 1448 Sys. Set change On 9
110 EV110 0 - 3071 － ditto 1449 Rly. Set change On 9
111 EV111 0 - 3071 － ditto 1450 Grp. Set change On 9
112 EV112 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
113 EV113 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
114 EV114 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
115 EV115 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
116 EV116 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
117 EV117 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
118 EV118 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
119 EV119 0 - 3071 － ditto 1445 PLC data CHG On 9
120 EV120 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
121 EV121 0 - 3071 － ditto 1409 LED RST On 9
122 EV122 0 - 3071 － ditto 1435 F.record_CLR On 9
123 EV123 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
124 EV124 0 - 3071 － ditto 1436 E.record_CLR On 9
125 EV125 0 - 3071 － ditto 1437 D.record_CLR On 9
126 EV126 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
127 EV127 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
128 EV128 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
⎯ 362 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Disturbance record default setting

Default setting Model Default setting Model
201 301
No. Name Range Unit Contents 101
Signal No. Signal name 202 302 401 501 Signal NO. Signal name 204 205 206
102
203 303
1 SIG1 0 - 3071 － disturbance record triger 235 TRIP-A 9 9 9 9 9 235 TRIP-A 9
2 SIG2 0 - 3071 － ditto 236 TRIP-B 9 9 9 9 9 236 TRIP-B 9
3 SIG3 0 - 3071 － ditto 237 TRIP-C 9 9 9 9 9 237 TRIP-C 9
4 SIG4 0 - 3071 － ditto 291 ARC1 -- 9 9 9 9 291 ARC1 9
5 SIG5 0 - 3071 － ditto 292 ARC2 -- -- 9 -- 9 0 NA --
6 SIG6 0 - 3071 － ditto 194 BU_TRIP 9 9 9 9 9 194 BU_TRIP 9
7 SIG7 0 - 3071 － ditto 231 CAR_TRIP 9 9 9 9 9 231 CAR_TRIP 9
8 SIG8 0 - 3071 － ditto 342 Z1_TRIP 9 9 9 9 9 342 Z1_TRIP 9
9 SIG9 0 - 3071 － ditto 343 Z1X_TRIP 9 9 9 9 9 343 Z1X_TRIP 9
10 SIG10 0 - 3071 － ditto 347 Z2+Z3+ZR1 9 9 9 9 9 347 Z2+Z3+ZR1 9
11 SIG11 0 - 3071 － ditto 349 EF/DEF_ALARM 9 9 9 9 9 349 EF/DEF_ALARM 9
12 SIG12 0 - 3071 － ditto 328 OC_BU-TRIP 9 9 9 9 9 328 OC_BU-TRIP 9
13 SIG13 0 - 3071 － ditto 350 SOTF+STUB 9 9 9 9 9 350 SOTF+STUB 9
14 SIG14 0 - 3071 － ditto 176 PSB_DET 9 9 9 9 9 176 PSB_DET 9
15 SIG15 0 - 3071 － ditto 203 OST_TRIP 9 9 9 9 9 203 OST_TRIP 9
16 SIG16 0 - 3071 － ditto 225 EXT_CAR-S 9 9 9 9 9 225 EXT_CAR-S 9
17 SIG17 0 - 3071 － ditto 204 EXT_CAR-R1 9 9 9 9 9 204 EXT_CAR-R1 9
18 SIG18 0 - 3071 － ditto 1540 Z1X_INIT 9 9 9 9 9 612 EXT_CAR-R2 9
19 SIG19 0 - 3071 － ditto 1536 CB1_CONT-A 9 9 9 9 9 1536 CB1_CONT-A 9
20 SIG20 0 - 3071 － ditto 1537 CB1_CONT-B 9 9 9 9 9 1537 CB1_CONT-B 9
21 SIG21 0 - 3071 － ditto 1538 CB1_CONT-C 9 9 9 9 9 1538 CB1_CONT-C 9
22 SIG22 0 - 3071 － ditto 1542 DS_N/O_CONT 9 9 9 9 9 1542 DS_N/O_CONT 9
23 SIG23 0 - 3071 － ditto 1545 CB1_READY -- 9 9 9 9 1545 CB1_READY 9
24 SIG24 0 - 3071 － ditto 1546 CB2_READY -- -- 9 -- 9 0 NA --
25 SIG25 0 - 3071 － ditto 1552 CB2_CONT-A -- -- 9 -- 9 0 NA --
26 SIG26 0 - 3071 － ditto 1553 CB2_CONT-B -- -- 9 -- 9 0 NA --
27 SIG27 0 - 3071 － ditto 1554 CB2_CONT-C -- -- 9 -- 9 0 NA --
28 SIG28 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA -- 0 NA --
29 SIG29 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA -- 0 NA --
30 SIG30 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA -- 0 NA --
31 SIG31 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA -- 0 NA --
32 SIG32 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA -- 0 NA --
⎯ 363 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

PLC default setting
Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop
Cycle Relay model relay model Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn 101, 102, 201, 202, 203, 301, 302, 303, 401, 501 204, 205, 206 Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Filename: GRZ100-B1-04 Filename: GRZ100-B2-02 Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1536 CB1_CONT-A X [513]BI1_COMMAND X

1537 CB1_CONT-B X [514]BI2_COMMAND X
1538 CB1_CONT-C X [515]BI3_COMMAND X
1539
1540 Z1X_INIT X -- [524]BI12_COMMAND X
1541 EXT_VTF X [518]BI6_COMMAND X
1542 DS_N/O_CONT X [519]BI7_COMMAND X
1543 DS_N/C_CONT X [520]BI8_COMMAND X
1544 ARC_BLOCK X [199]CBF_DET+[203]OST_TRIP+[691]THM_TRIP+[791]PSBTP_TRIP+[832]TR1_TRIP+[840]TR2_TRIP+[767]BCD TRIP+[993]OV/UV TRIP X
1545 CB1_READY X [522]BI10_COMMAND [539]BI27_COMMAND X
1546 CB2_READY X [523]BI11_COMMAND -- X
1547 ARC_RESET X [524]BI12_COMMAND [538]BI26_COMMAND X
1548 IND.RESET X [525]BI13_COMMAND [522]BI10_COMMAND X
1549 M-PROT_TRIP X [526]BI14_COMMAND -- X
1550 M-PROT_ON X [527]BI15_COMMAND -- X
1551
1552 CB2_CONT-A X [531]BI19_COMMAND -- X
1553 CB2_CONT-B X [532]BI20_COMMAND -- X
1554 CB2_CONT-C X [533]BI21_COMMAND -- X
1555
1556 EXT_TRIP-A X [528]BI16_COMMAND X
1557 EXT_TRIP-B X [529]BI17_COMMAND X
1558 EXT_TRIP-C X [530]BI18_COMMAND X
1559
1560 EXT_CBFIN-A X [528]BI16_COMMAND X
1561 EXT_CBFIN-B X [529]BI17_COMMAND X
1562 EXT_CBFIN-C X [530]BI18_COMMAND X
1563
1564 ARC_BLOCK1
1565 ARC_BLOCK2
1566
1567
1568 EXT_CAR.R1-1 X [1287]BI4_COM_UF X
1569 EXT_CAR.R1-2 X [1288]BI5_COM_UF -- X
1570 OPEN_TERM-R1 X [1122]SUB_COM3-R1 X
1571 SEVERE_CF-R1 X [1123]SUB_COM4-R1 X
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 EXT_CAR.R2-1 X -- [1288]BI5_COM_UF X
1585 EXT_CAR.R2-2
1586 OPEN_TERM-R2 X [1170]SUB_COM3-R2 X
1587 SEVERE_CF-R2 X [1171]SUB_COM4-R2 X
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600 PROT_BLOCK X -- [523]BI11_COMMAND
1601 CRT_BLOCK X [521]BI9_COMMAND + [1513]RYID1_err + [1514]RYID2_err X
1602 DISCRT_BLOCK
1603 DEFCRT_BLOCK
1604 PSBTP_BLOCK
⎯ 364 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

1605 PSB_BLOCK
1606
1607
1608 OC-A_FS X 0 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1609 OC-B_FS X 0 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1610 OC-C_FS X 0 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1611
1612 OCI-A_FS X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1613 OCI-B_FS X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1614 OCI-C_FS X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1615 THMA_BLOCK
1616 Z1G_BLOCK X 0 [715]Z1CNT_TPBLK X
1617 Z1XG_BLOCK
1618 Z2G_BLOCK
1619 Z3G_BLOCK
1620 ZR1G_BLOCK
1621 ZFG_BLOCK
1622 STUB_BLOCK X -- [536]BI24_COMMAND X
1623 SOTF_BLOCK X -- [537]BI25_COMMAND X
1624 OCH_BLOCK
1625 OC_BLOCK X -- [533]BI21_COMMAND X
1626 OCI_BLOCK X -- [531]BI19_COMMAND X
1627 EF_BLOCK
1628 EFI_BLOCK X -- [532]BI20_COMMAND X
1629 DEF_BLOCK X -- [534]BI22_COMMAND X
1630 OST_BLOCK
1631 THM_BLOCK
1632 Z1S_BLOCK X 0 [715]Z1CNT_TPBLK X
1633 Z1XS_BLOCK
1634 Z2S_BLOCK
1635 Z3S_BLOCK
1636 ZR1S_BLOCK
1637 ZFS_BLOCK
1638 ZR2G_BLOCK
1639 ZR2S_BLOCK
1640 CBF_BLOCK
1641 EXTTP_BLOCK X -- [535]BI23_COMMAND X
1642 VTF_BLOCK
1643 VTF_ALARM
1644 TR1_BLOCK
1645 TR2_BLOCK
1646 ZNDG_BLOCK
1647 ZNDS_BLOCK
1648 Z1S_G-BLK
1649 STUB_CB X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 [101]CB-AND X
1650 OCHTP_ON X [708]SHOT_NUM2 + [709]SHOT_NUM3 + [710]SHOT_NUM4 + [711]SHOT_NUM5 X
1651 PSB.F_RESET
1652 DEF_PHSEL-A
1653 DEF_PHSEL-B
1654 DEF_PHSEL-C
1655 Z1_ARC_BLOCK X 0 [714]Z1CNT_ARCBLK X
1656 Z2G-A_FS X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1657 Z2G-B_FS X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1658 Z2G-C_FS X 1 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1659 Z1X_F.ENABLE
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664 ZFG-A_BLOCK X [29]Z3G-B X
1665 ZFG-B_BLOCK X [30]Z3G-C X
1666 ZFG-C_BLOCK X [28]Z3G-A X
1667
1668 ZNDG-A_COM X [666]ZNDG-AX X
1669 ZNDG-B_COM X [667]ZNDG-BX X
1670 ZNDG-C_COM X [668]ZNDG-CX X
1671 ZNDS_COM X [669]ZNDS-ABX + [670]ZNDS-BCX + [671]ZNDS-CAX X
1672 Z2G-A_BLOCK X [29]Z3G-B X
1673 Z2G-B_BLOCK X [30]Z3G-C X
⎯ 365 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

1674 Z2G-C_BLOCK X [28]Z3G-A X

1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680 TP-A_DELAY X [623]TP-A X 60 ms
1681 TP-B_DELAY X [624]TP-B X 60 ms
1682 TP-C_DELAY X [625]TP-C X 60 ms
1683 ARC_OFF
1684 ARC_SPAR
1685 ARC_TPAR
1686 ARC_S&T
1687 ARC_EXT1P
1688 ARC_EXT3P
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696 Z1_INST_TP X 0 [712]Z1CNT_INST X
1697
1698 Z2_INST_TP
1699 Z3_INST_TP
1700 ZR1_INST_TP
1701 ZF_INST_TP
1702 EF_INST_TP
1703 OC_INST_TP
1704
1705 DEF_INST_TP
1706
1707 DEFR_INST_TP
1708 ZR2_INST_TP
1709 ZND_INST_TP
1710
1711
1712 Z1_3PTP X 0 [713]Z1CNT_3PTP X
1713 Z1X_3PTP
1714 Z2_3PTP X 2 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1715
1716 OC_3PTP X 2 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1717 OCI_3PTP X 2 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1718
1719
1720 CAR_3PTP
1721 DEFCAR_3PTP X 2 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1722 PSBTP_3PTP X 2 [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1723
1724 TR1_3PTP
1725 TR2_3PTP
1726
1727 3P_TRIP
1728 CAR-A-R1 X [1088]COM1-R1 X
1729 CAR-B-R1 X [1089]COM2-R1 X
1730 CAR-C-R1 X [1090]COM3-R1 X
1731 CAR-S-R1 X [1091]COM4-R1 X
1732 DEFCAR-A-R1 X [1092]COM5-R1 X
1733 DEFCAR-B-R1 X [1093]COM6-R1 X
1734 DEFCAR-C-R1 X [1094]COM7-R1 X
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740 PSBCAR-A-R1 X [1095]COM8-R1 X
1741 PSBCAR-B-R1 X [1095]COM8-R1 X
1742 PSBCAR-C-R1 X [1095]COM8-R1 X
⎯ 366 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

1743
1744 TR1-A-R1 X [1096]COM9-R1 X
1745 TR1-B-R1 X [1096]COM9-R1 X
1746 TR1-C-R1 X [1096]COM9-R1 X
1747
1748 TR2-A-R1 X -- [1097]COM10-R1 X
1749 TR2-B-R1 X -- [1097]COM10-R1 X
1750 TR2-C-R1 X -- [1097]COM10-R1 X
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760 CAR-A-R2 X [1136]COM1-R2 X
1761 CAR-B-R2 X [1137]COM2-R2 X
1762 CAR-C-R2 X [1138]COM3-R2 X
1763 CAR-S-R2 X [1139]COM4-R2 X
1764 DEFCAR-A-R2 X [1140]COM5-R2 X
1765 DEFCAR-B-R2 X [1141]COM6-R2 X
1766 DEFCAR-C-R2 X [1142]COM7-R2 X
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772 PSBCAR-A-R2 X [1143]COM8-R2 X
1773 PSBCAR-B-R2 X [1143]COM8-R2 X
1774 PSBCAR-C-R2 X [1143]COM8-R2 X
1775
1776 TR1-A-R2 X [1144]COM9-R2 X
1777 TR1-B-R2 X [1144]COM9-R2 X
1778 TR1-C-R2 X [1144]COM9-R2 X
1779
1780 TR2-A-R2 X -- [1145]COM10-R2 X
1781 TR2-B-R2 X -- [1145]COM10-R2 X
1782 TR2-C-R2 X -- [1145]COM10-R2 X
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792 IO#1-TP-A1 X [240]TRIP-A1 X
1793 IO#1-TP-B1 X [241]TRIP-B1 X
1794 IO#1-TP-C1 X [242]TRIP-C1 X
1795 IO#1-TP-A2 X [243]TRIP-A2 -- X
1796 IO#1-TP-B2 X [244]TRIP-B2 -- X
1797 IO#1-TP-C2 X [245]TRIP-C2 -- X
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808 OVS1_INST_TP
1809 OVS2_INST_TP
1810
1811
⎯ 367 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

1812 OVG1_INST_TP
1813 OVG2_INST_TP
1814
1815
1816 UVS1_INST_TP
1817 UVS2_INST_TP
1818
1819
1820 UVG1_INST_TP
1821 UVG2_INST_TP
1822
1823
1824 SPR.L-REQ [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1825 TPR.L-REQ [273]SYN-OP X
1826 SPR.F-REQ [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1827 TPR.F-REQ [273]SYN-OP X
1828 SPR.F-ST.REQ [1]CONSTANT_1 X
1829 TPR.F-ST.REQ [486]ARC-SET X
1830
1831
1832 R.F-ST.REQ
1833 SPR.F2-REQ
1834 TPR.F2-REQ
1835
1836
1837
1838 ARC.L_TERM
1839 ARC.F_TERM
1840 ECHO_BLOCK
1841 WKIT_BLOCK
1842 PSCM_TCHDEN
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848 BCD_BLOCK
1849 DEFF_BLOCK
1850
1851 DEFR_BLOCK
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856 OVS1_BLOCK
1857 OVS2_BLOCK
1858
1859
1860 OVG1_BLOCK
1861 OVG2_BLOCK
1862
1863
1864 UVS1_BLOCK
1865 UVS2_BLOCK
1866
1867
1868 UVG1_BLOCK
1869 UVG2_BLOCK
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
:
:
2039
2040
2041
⎯ 368 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048 COM1-S X [800]C/R_SEND-A X
2049 COM2-S X [801]C/R_SEND-B X
2050 COM3-S X [802]C/R_SEND-C X
2051 COM4-S X [803]C/R_SEND-S X
2052 COM5-S X [804]C/R_SEND-DEFA X
2053 COM6-S X [805]C/R_SEND-DEFB X
2054 COM7-S X [806]C/R_SEND-DEFC X
2055 COM8-S X [815]C/R_SEND-PSB X
2056 COM9-S X [516]BI4_COMMAND X
2057 COM10-S X -- [517]BI5_COMMAND X
2058 COM11-S
2059 COM12-S
2060 COM13-S
2061 COM14-S
2062
2063
2064 SUB_COM1-S
2065 SUB_COM2-S
2066 SUB_COM3-S X [848]LOCAL_TEST X
2067 SUB_COM4-S X [881]SEVERE_CF-L X
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
:
:
2599
2600
⎯ 369 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610 ALARM_LED_SET X [909]CFSV1-R + [925]CFSV2-R X
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1
2625 F.RECORD2
2626 F.RECORD3
2627 F.RECORD4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1
2633 D.RECORD2
2634 D.RECORD3
2635 D.RECORD4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1
2641 SET.GROUP2
2642 SET.GROUP3
2643 SET.GROUP4
2644 SET.GROUP5
2645 SET.GROUP6
2646 SET.GROUP7
2647 SET.GROUP8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656 CON_TPMD1
2657 CON_TPMD2
2658 CON_TPMD3
2659 CON_TPMD4
2660 CON_TPMD5
2661 CON_TPMD6
2662 CON_TPMD7
2663 CON_TPMD8
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
⎯ 370 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684 ARC_COM_RECV
2685 TELE_COM_RECV
2686 PROT_COM_RECV
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
:
:
2814
2815
⎯ 371 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

2816 TEMP001 X -- [148]Z1G_TRIP + [160]Z1S_TRIP X

2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
⎯ 372 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
⎯ 373 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
⎯ 374 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
PLC default setting

3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
⎯ 375 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 376 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Phase fault element ZS test
4.2 Earth fault element ZG test
4.3 Out-of-step element OST test
4.4 Phase selection element UVC test
4.5 Directional earth fault element DEF test
4.6 Negative sequence directional element DOCN test
4.7 Inverse definite minimum time overcurrent element
(IDMT) EFI and OCI test
4.8 Voltage and synchronism check elements test
4.9 Thermal overload element
4.10 Current change detection element
4.11 Level detectors test
4.12 BCD element check
4.13 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
⎯ 377 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit
⎯ 378 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4. Function test
4.1 Phase fault element ZS test
Element Reach setting (ZS) IT 2IT × ZS Measured voltage (2Va)

Z1S
Z1XS
Z2S
Z3S
ZFS
Z4S
ZR1S
ZR2S
ZNDS
PSBSIN
PSBSOU
T
4.2 Earth fault element ZG test
Element Reach setting (ZG) IT 2IT × ZG Measured voltage (2Va)

Z1G
Z1XG
Z2G
Z3G
ZFG
Z4G
ZR1G
ZR2G
ZNDG
PSGBIN
PSBGOUT
4.3 Out-of-step element OST test
Element Reach setting (ZOST) IT 2IT × ZOST Measured voltage (2Va)

OSTXF
OSTXB
OSTR1
OSTR2
4.4 Phase selection element UVC test
Element Reach setting (UVCZ) IT IT × UVCZ + UVCV Measured voltage

UVC 0 0
⎯ 379 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
4.5 Directional earth fault element DEF test

(1)
Element Current setting Measured current
DEFF
DEFR
(2)
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage
DEFF
DEFR
4.6 Negative sequence directional element DOCN test
Element Test current Measured voltage

DOCNF IN
DOCNR IN
4.7 Inverse definite minimum time overcurrent element (IDMT) EFI and OCI test
Element Test current Measured operating time

EFI 1.2 × Is
20 × Is
OCI 1.2 × Is
20 × Is
4.8 Voltage and synchronism check elements test

(1) Voltage check element
Element Setting Measured voltage
OVB
UVB
OVL1
UVL1
OVL2
UVL2
(2) Synchronism check element

c Voltage check
Element Setting Measured voltage
SYN1 (SY1UV)
SYN1 (SY1OV)
SYN2 (SY2UV)
SYN2 (SY2OV)
⎯ 380 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
d Phase angle check

Element Setting Measured angle
SYN1 (SY1θ)
SYN2 (SY2θ)
4.9 Thermal overload element test
Element Test current Measured operating time

THM-A 1.2 × Is
THM-T 10 × Is
4.10 Current change detection element
Element Test current Result

OCD 1.2 × Fixed setting
OCDP 1.2 × Setting value
4.11 Level detectors test
Element Setting Measured value

OCH
EF
EFL
OC
OVG
UVLS
UVLG
UVFS
UVFG
OCBF
4.12 BCD element check
4.13 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage Measured Element Voltage Measured
setting voltage setting voltage
OVS1 OVG1
OVS2 OVG2
UVS1 UVG1
UVS2 UVG2
⎯ 381 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Voltage setting Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

OVS1 10.0 1.5 × Voltage setting
OVG1 10.0 1.5 × Voltage setting
UVS1 10.0 0.5 × Voltage setting
UVG1 10.0 0.5 × Voltage setting
5. Protection scheme test
Scheme Results
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
Scheme Results
On load check
Signaling circuit
Tripping circuit
Reclosing circuit
⎯ 382 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
⎯ 383 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please complete this form up and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION with the GRZ100 to be
repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRZ100 Model:

(Example: Type: GRZ100 Model: 204B-22-10 )
Product No.:
Serial No. :
Date:
1. Why the relay is being returned ?

mal-operation
does not operate
increased error
investigation
others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are very
helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please inform us of this information in respect to in the incident on a Floppy Disk, or by
completing the Fault Record sheet and Relay Setting sheet attached.
⎯ 384 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .
(Example: 04/ Nov./ 1997 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Fault Locator : km ( %)
Prefault values (CT ratio: kA/: A, VT ratio: kV/: V)

Va: kV or V∠ ° Ia: kA or A∠ °
Vb: kV or V∠ ° Ib : kA or A∠ °
Vc: kV or V∠ ° Ic: kA or A∠ °
Vab: kV or V∠ ° Iab: kA or A∠ °
Vbc: kV or V∠ ° Ibc: kA or A∠ °
Vca: kV or V∠ ° Ica: kA or A∠ °
V1: kV or V∠ ° I1 : kA or A∠ °
I0a: kA or A∠ °
Fault values
Va: kV or V∠ ° Ia: kA or A∠ °
Vb: kV or V∠ ° Ib : kA or A∠ °
Vc: kV or V∠ ° Ic: kA or A∠ °
Vab: kV or V∠ ° Iab: kA or A∠ °
Vbc: kV or V∠ ° Ibc: kA or A∠ °
Vca: kV or V∠ ° Ica: kA or A∠ °
I0a: kA or A∠ °
Ra : Ω Xa : Ω
Rb : Ω Xb : Ω
Rc : Ω Xc : Ω
Rab : Ω Xab : Ω
Rbc : Ω Xbc : Ω
Rca : Ω Xca : Ω
⎯ 385 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident.
4. Please write the detail of the incident.
5. Date of the incident occurred.

Day/ Month/ Year: / / /
(Example: 10/ July/ 1998)
6. Please write any comments on the GRZ100, including the document.
⎯ 386 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
⎯ 387 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 388 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix K
Technical Data
⎯ 389 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Ratings
AC current In: 1A or 5A
AC voltage Vn: 100V, 110V, 115V, 120V
Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz
DC power supply: 110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)
220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24Vdc/30Vdc Operative range: 19.2 – 36Vdc
AC ripple on DC supply IEC60255-11 maximum 12%
DC supply interruption IEC60255-11
Permissive duration of DC supply voltage interruption to
maintain normal operation: less than 50ms at 110V
Restart time: less than 10s
Binary input circuit DC voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc
220Vdc/250Vdc
48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc
24Vdc/30Vdc
Overload Ratings
AC current input 4 times rated continuous
100 times rated for 1s
AC voltage input 2 times rated continuous
2.5 times rated for 1s
Burden
AC current input 0.2VA for phase input (at rated 5A)
0.4 VA for neutral input (at rated 5A)
0.1VA for phase input (at rated 1A)
0.3 VA for neutral input (at rated 1A)
AC voltage input 0.1VA (at rated voltage)
DC power supply: less than15W (quiescent)
less than 25W (operation)
Binary input circuit: ≤ 0.5W/input at 110Vdc
CT Ratio Setting
CT ratio 1 to 20000 in 1 steps
Full Scale of Current for Measurement
Current 65 times rated current
Phase Fault Distance Measuring Element
Z1S, Z2S and Z1XS 0.10 to 250.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A relay)
0.01 to 50.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A relay)
Z1S θ1 0° to 45° in 1° steps
Z1S θ2 45° to 90° in 1° steps
ZFS, ZR1S and ZR2S 0.1 to 250.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
0.01 to 50.00 in 0.01Ω steps (5A relay)
Z3S and Z4S 0.1 to 250.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
Characteristic angle 45° to 90° in 1° steps
Z1S and Z4S offset 7.5Ω fixed (1A relay)
1.5Ω fixed (5A relay)
ZNDS 0.1 to 250.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
Blinder (BFRS1, BFRS2, BFRS3, BRRS, BNDS) 0.5 to 100.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
BRLS: Linked with BRRS 0.10 to 20.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A relay)
Characteristic angle (BFRS1, BFRS2, BFRS3, BRRS, BNDS) 75° fixed
Characteristic angle (BFLS) 90° to 135°
⎯ 390 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Earth Fault Distance Measuring Element

Z1G, Z2G and Z1XG 0.10 to 250.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (1A relay)
Z1G θ1 0° to 45° in 1° steps
Z1G θ2 45° to 90° in 1° steps
ZR1G 0.1 to 250.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
ZFG, Z3G, ZR2G and Z4G 0.1 to 500.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
ZNDG 0.1 to 500.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
Blinder (BFRG1, BFRG2, BFRG3, BRRG, BNDG) 0.5 to 100.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
BRLG: Linked with BRRG 0.10 to 20.00Ω in 0.01Ω steps (5A relay)
Characteristic angle (BFRG1, BFRG2, BFRG3, BRRG, 75° fixed
BNDG)
Characteristic angle (BFLG) 90° to 135°
Time Setting for Zone Protection
Time setting of Z1S, Z2S, Z3S, ZFS, ZR1S, ZR2S, ZNDS, 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Z1G, Z2G, Z3G, ZFG, ZR1G, ZR2G, ZNDG
Command Protection
Coordination time for BOP scheme 0 to 50ms in 1ms steps
Operating and Resetting Time of Distance Measuring Element
Typical operating time 20ms
Operating time curve (SIR curve) Refer to Figure 13.
Resetting time less than 30ms (for tripping output)
less than 40ms (for signal output)
Accuracy of Distance Measuring Element
Static accuracy ±5% under SIR < 30, ±10% under 30 < SIR < 50
Static angle accuracy ±5°
Transient overreach +5%
Minimum Operating Current
Current 0.08A (1A relay)
0.4A (1A relay)
Residual Current Compensation
Residual current compensation for reactance element of Z1G, Adjustable as follows:
Z1XG, Z2G, ZFG, ZR1G
Earth return compensation 0 to 1000% in 1% steps
Mutual coupling compensation (ZR1G excluded) 0 to 1000% in 1% steps
Phase Selection Element
Undervoltage 10 to 60V in 1V steps
Impedance 0.0 to 250.0Ω in 1Ω steps (1A relay)
0.0 to 50.0Ω in 1Ω steps (5A relay)
Residual current compensation Automatically set according to residual current compensation
setting of reactance element
Switch-on-to-fault and Stub protection
Overcurrent 0.4 to 3.0A in 0.1A steps (1A relay)
2.0 to 15.0A in 0.1A steps (5A relay)
⎯ 391 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Broken Conductor Detection

Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1): OFF, 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Voltage Transformer Failure Supervision
Undervoltage element (phase-to-phase) 50 to 100V in 1V steps
Undervoltage element (phase-to-earth) 10 to 60V in 1V steps
Current change detection element 0.1A fixed (1A relay)
0.5A fixed (5A relay)
Residual voltage element 20V fixed
Residual current element Common use with earth fault detection element
Power Swing Blocking
Detection zone (PSBZS, PSBZG) 2.5 to 75.0Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
Current change detection element 0.1 to 2.0A in 0.1A steps (1A relay)
Detection time 30 to 60ms in 1ms steps
Resetting time 500ms fixed
Out-of-step Protection
Resistive reach (OSTR1) 15 to 150Ω in 1Ω steps (1A relay)
Resistive reach (OSTR2) 5 to 50Ω in 1Ω steps (1A relay)
Resistive reach (OSTXF) 5 to 250Ω in 1Ω steps (1A relay)
Resistive reach (OSTXF) 1 to 50Ω in 1Ω steps (1A relay)
Detection time (TOST) 0.01 to 1.00s in 0.01s steps
Breaker Failure (BF) Protection
Overcurrent element 0.1 to 2.0A in 0.1A steps (1A relay)
BF timer for retry-trip of failed breaker 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
BF timer for related breaker trip 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
Operating time of overcurrent element less than 20ms at 50Hz or less than 17ms at 60Hz
Resetting time of overcurrent element less than 15ms at 50Hz or less than 13ms at 60Hz
Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
Time multiplier 0.05 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Characteristic Refer to Figure 8.
Accuracy of inverse time characteristics Standard, Very and Long-time: IEC60255-3 class 5
Extremely inverse: IEC60255-3 class 7.5
Reset definite time 0.0 to 10.0s in 0.1s steps
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
Time for delayed trip 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Operating time of overcurrent element less than 20ms
Accuracy of pick-up value ±5%
⎯ 392 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Directional Earth Fault Protection

Characteristic angle 0 to 90° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage (3V0) 1.7 to 21.0V in 0.1V steps
Zero-sequence current (3I0) 0.10 to 1.00A in 0.01A in 0.01A steps (1A relay)
Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic 0.05 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Definite time delay for backup trip 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Directional Earth Fault Command Protection
Coordination time 0 to 50ms in 1ms steps
Inverse Time Earth Fault Protection
Earth fault 0.10 to 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A relay)
Time multiplier 0.05 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Characteristic Refer to Figure 8.
Accuracy of inverse time characteristics Standard, Very and Long-time: IEC60255-3 class 5
Extremely inverse: IEC60255-3 class 7.5
Reset definite time 0.0 to 10.0s in 0.1s steps
Definite Time Earth Fault Protection
Earth fault 0.10 to 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A relay)
Weak Infeed and Echo Protection
Phase-to-phase undervoltage element 50 to 100V in 1V steps
Phase-to-earth undervoltage element 10 to 60V in 1V steps
Thermal overload Protection
Thermal setting (THM = k.IFLC) OFF, 0.40 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
OFF, 2.0 – 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Time constant (τ) 0.5 – 300.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps
Pre-load current setting 0.00 – 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.0 – 5.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Overvoltage Protection
1st, 2nd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 150.0V in 0.1V steps (for both phase-to-phase and
phase-to-neutral voltage)
Delay type: DTL, IDMTL(1st threshold only)
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
DO/PU ratio 10 – 98% in 1% steps
st
Reset Delay (1 threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage Protection
1st, 2nd Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 150.0V in 0.1V steps (for both phase-to-phase and
phase-to-neutral voltage)
Delay type: DTL, IDMTL(1st threshold only)
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
DO/PU ratio 10 – 98% in 1% steps
st
Reset Delay (1 threshold only): 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
⎯ 393 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Autoreclose Function
Number of shots 1 to 4 shots
Timer settings
Dead time for single-phase autoreclose 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Dead time for three-phase autoreclose 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Multi-shot dead line time 5.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Multi-shot reset time 5.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Reclaim time 5 to 300s in 1s steps
Pulse width of reclosing signal output 0.1 to 10.0s in 0.1s steps
Autoreclose reset time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset time for developing fault 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
One-and-a-half breaker scheme
Follower breaker autoreclose delay time 0.1 to 10.0s in 0.1s steps
Voltage and synchronism check element
Synchronism check angle 5 to 75° in 1° steps
UV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
OV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line dead check 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line live check 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Synchronism check time 0.01 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Voltage check time 0.01 to 1.00s in 0.01s steps
Operating time of synchronism check element less than 50ms
Operating time of UV and OV elements less than 40ms
Fault Locator
Line reactance and resistance setting 0.0 to 999.9Ω in 0.1Ω steps (1A relay)
Line length 0.0 to 399.9km in 0.1km steps
Correction factor of impedance between lines 80 to 120% in 1% steps
Correction factor of impedance between in each phase 80 to 120% in 1% steps
Accuracy ±2.5km (up to 100km)
±2.5% (up to 399.9km)
Minimum measuring cycles 2.5 cycles
Disturbance Record Initiation
Overcurrent element 0.1 to 50.0A in 0.1A steps (1A relay)
Undervoltage element 0 to 132V in 1V steps (for phase fault)
0 to 76V in 1V steps (for earth fault)
Pre-fault time 0.3s fixed
Post-fault time 0.1 to 3.0s in 0.1s steps
⎯ 394 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Communication Port
Front communication port (local PC)
Connection Point to point
Cable type Multi-core (straight)
Cable length 15m (max.)
Connector RS232C 9-pin D-subminiature connector female
Rear communication port (remote PC)
RS485 I/F:
Transmission data rate for RSM system 64kbps
Connection Multidrop mode (max. 32 relays)
Connector Screw terminals
Cable and length Twisted pair cable, max. 1200m
Isolation 2kVac for 1min.
Fibre optic I/F: ST connector, graded-index multi-mode 50/125μm or
62.5/125μm type optical fibres
Ethernet LAN I/F: 10BASE-T, RJ-45 connector
IRIG-B Port
IRIG Time Code IRIG-B122
Input impedance 4k-ohm
Input voltage range 4Vp-p to 10Vp-p
Connector type BNC connector
Cable type 50 ohm coaxial cable
Binary Inputs
Operating voltage Typical 74Vdc(min.70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min.125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min.28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating
Typical 15Vdc(min.14Vdc) for 24Vdc rating
Contact Ratings
Trip contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously,
30A, 290Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=10ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
Make and carry 4A continuously,
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≧5ms)
Break 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Durability
Make and carry 10,000 operations minimum
Break 100,000 operations minimum
Mechanical design
Weight 10kg (Type-A), 13kg (Type-B)
Case colour 2.5Y7.5/1(approximation to Munsell value)
Installation Flush mounting or rack mounting
⎯ 395 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
a) Minimum operating time (50Hz) b) Maximum operating time (50Hz)

Phase to phase fault
a) Minimum operating time (50Hz) b) Maximum operating time (50Hz)

Phase to earth fault
Note: In the case of a 60Hz relay the operate time is reduced by approximately 15% to 20%.
⎯ 396 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
CT Requirement
The requirement for minimum CT knee-point voltage for GRZ100 is assessed for the following
three cases separately:
a) Stability for faults beyond the zone 1 reach point:
Vk > k1 × If_z1_max × (Rct + R2)
b) Stability for close-up reverse faults:
Vk> k2 × If_rev_max × (Rct + R2)
c) Dependability of tripping for close-up forward faults:
Vk> k3 ×If_max × (Rct + R2)
where,
Vk: Knee point voltage.
If_z1_max: Maximum fault current at the zone 1 reach point.
If_rev_max: Maximum close-up reverse fault current.
If_max: Maximum close-up forward fault current.
Rct: Resistance of CT.
R2: Burden including connecting leads.
k1, k2, k3: Transient dimensioning factor
(All values refer to the CT secondary side)
The minimum requirement for Vk is determined for each of the three cases and the highest of the
three results is used to dimension the CT. k1, k2 and k3 are chosen depending on the primary
system time constant as follows:
Primary system time Transient dimensioning factor, k

constant, Td (ms) a) Stability for faults b) Stability for c) Dependability of
beyond the zone 1 close-up reverse tripping for close-up
reach point (If_z1_max) faults (If_rev_max) forward faults (If_max)
k1 k2 k3
< 35 6 2 2
< 50 7 3 2
< 75 8 6 2
< 100 8 6 2
< 150 8 6 2
Notes:
1. Knee-point voltage, Vk, is defined according to IEC 60044-1 as the minimum sinusoidal
e.m.f. (r.m.s.) at rated power frequency when applied to the secondary terminals of the
transformer, all other terminals being open circuited, which when increased by 10%, causes
the r.m.s. exciting current to increase by no more than 50%.
2. In cases where CTs are specified as P-class protective current transformers according to IEC
60044-1 (e.g. 5P10, 5P20 etc.), the knee point voltage can be approximated as follows:
Vk ≈ 0.8 × n × In × (Rct + RVA)
where,
⎯ 397 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Vk: Knee point voltage.

In : Rated secondary current.
Rct: Resistance of CT.
RVA: Rated burden.
n: Accuracy limiting factor of CT (e.g. 20 for 5P20)
(All values refer to the CT secondary side)
3. Remanent flux has not been considered. In cases where a high level of remanent flux may be
experienced, it may be necessary to include an additional margin when dimensioning the CT.
4. The data provided is valid for 50Hz and 60Hz power systems.
⎯ 398 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE CLAIMS
Test Standards Details

Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10°C to +55°C.
Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
Humidity IEC60068-2-78 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51 (Rear: IP20)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak), 1.2/50μs, 0.5J
between all terminals and between all terminals and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / Damped IEC61000-4-12 / Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Oscillatory Wave EN61000-4-12 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz and
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450, 900 and
Disturbance 1890MHz.
Fast Transient Disturbance IEC60255-22-4, IEC61000-4-4 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
/ EN61000-4-4
Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, 1.2/50μs surge in common/differential modes:
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5 HV ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz. Additional spot
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC60255-22-7, 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance IEC61000-4-16 / 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
EN61000-4-16 Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and Radiated IEC60255-25, Conducted emissions:
Emissions EN55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 30m):
30 to 230MHz: <30dB
230 to 1000MHz: <37dB
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN 61000-6-2 and
EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.
⎯ 399 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 400 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
⎯ 401 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Signal number
Marked with : Signal number and name of binary input by PLC function
Signal No. Signal name

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 1 1
Other cases 0
C
A
A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0
A
B & A B C Output
Output
1 0 0 1
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
⎯ 402 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output 0 1
1 0
Timer
t 0 Delaye pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time
XXX
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delaye pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY
Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output 1 0 1
R 0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output
1 ON 1
ON
Other cases 0
Switch Output
+ Output
ON 1
ON OFF 0
⎯ 403 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 404 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix M
Example of Setting Calculation
⎯ 405 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
1. Power System Data

[Example system]
A s/s B s/s
Line length: 16.8km
CT: 600/5A CT: 600/5A

VT: 150kV/ 3 : 110V/ 3 VT: 150kV/ 3 : 110V/ 3
• Line impedance of A s/s - Bs/s

- Positive sequence impedance: 0.0197 + j0.2747 (ohms/km)
- Zero sequence impedance: 0.4970 + j1.4387 (ohms/km)
- Mutual impedance: 0.0212 + j0.3729 (ohms/km)
• Back impedance
- A s/s: 0.94 (%pu) at 100MVA base
- B s/s: 0.94 (%pu) at 100MVA base
• Normal load current: 594.7A
• Minimum fault current: 2.05kA
2. Relay Setting
- Relay application:
Relay type: GRZ100-201
Protection scheme: BOP (Blocking overreach protection), 3 zone time-stepped distance
protection
Autoreclose mode: 1+3
3. Setting Calculation
3.1 Normal load current
To calculate load current, back impedance is converted from a percent unit value to an
impedance value.
Base impedance Zbase = (Vbase)2/VAbase
= (150kV/ 3 )2/100MVA
= 75 ohms
⎯ 406 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Therefore, load current IL is:

IL = (Source voltage)/(A s/s back impedance + Line impedance + B s/s impedance)
= (150kV/ 3 )/(0.94 × 75 + 16.8 × (0.01972 + 0.27472) + 0.94 × 75)

= 594.7A
3.2 Minimum fault current
The minimum fault current Ifmin on a protected transmission line is the current of the phase to
earth fault on the nearest remote terminal.
A s/s B s/s
Line length: 16.8km
Earth fault M
GRZ100
To calculate Ifmin, zero sequence earth fault current (Io), positive sequence earth fault current
(I1) and negative earth fault current (I2) are calculated as follows:
I0 = I1 = I2 = (Source voltage)/{(Back impedance of A s/s)
+ (Transmission line zero sequence impedance)
+ (Transmission line positive sequence impedance) × 2*}
= (150kV/ 3 )/{(0.94 × 75) + 16.8 × (0.49702 + 1.43872)
+ 2 × 16.8 × (0.01972 + 0.27472) }
= 822.28A
So,
Ifmin= I0 + I1+ I2 = 3 × 822.28 = 2.47kA
*Note: Assuming that positive sequence impedance = negative sequence impedance.
⎯ 407 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.3 Scheme setting
Element Contents Setting

SCHEME Protection scheme selection BOP
ZS-C Mho or Quadrilateral characteristic Mho or Quad (Note *1)
ZG-C Mho or Quadrilateral characteristic Mho or Quad (Note *1)
CRSCM Carrier out of service ON
CHSEL Carrier channel configuration SINGLE
BOSW Carrier sending signal A
ZONESEL Carrier control element Z2
ECHO ECHO carrier send ON
WKIT Weak carrier trip ON
CH-DEF DEF carrier channel --
PSB-Z1 PSB for Z1 elements ON
PSB-Z1X PSB for Z1X elements ON
PSB-CR PSB for carrier trip ON
PSB-ZF PSB for ZF elements OFF
PSB-ZR1 PSB for ZR1 elements OFF
PSB-ZR2 PSB for ZR2 elements OFF
PSB-TP Trip under PSB ON
BLZONE Blinder setting mode COM
Z1CNT Z1 trip mode 1
TPMODE Trip mode --
STUB STUB protection OFF
SOTF-OC SOTF OC trip ON
SOTF-Z1 SOTF Z1 trip OFF
SOTF-F SOTF ZF trip OFF
SOTF-R1 SOTF ZR1 trip OFF
SOTF-R2 SOTF ZR2 trip OFF
SOTF-ND SOTF ZND trip OFF
ZFBT ZF element back-up trip OFF
ZR1BT ZR1 element back-up trip OFF
ZR2BT ZR2 element back-up trip OFF
ZNDBT ZND element back-up trip OFF
OCBT OC back-up trip OFF
OCIBT OCI back-up trip OFF
EFBT EF back-up trip ON
EFBTAL EF back-up trip alarm ON
DEFFEN DEF back-up trip ON
DEFBTAL DEF back-up trip alarm ON
BF1 CBF re-trip OFF
BF2 CBF related trip OFF
BFEXT CBF initiation by ext. trip OFF
⎯ 408 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
OST Out of step trip OFF

THMT Thermal trip OFF
THMAL Thermal alarm OFF
Autoreclose mode Autoreclosing mode SPAR&TPAR
ARC-SM Multi. Shot ARC mode OFF
ARC-CB ARC mode for 1.5CB system --
ARC-DEF REC. by DG carr. trip OFF
ARC-BU ARC initiated by back-up trip OFF
ARC-EXT ARC initiated by ext. trip OFF
VCHK TPAR condition LB
VTPHSEL VT phase selection A
VT-RATE VT rating PH/G
3PH-VT 3ph. VT location BUS
3.4 Impedance setting
Element Standard setting (Recommended) Setting

Z1S 80% of protected line reactance 80%
Z1XS 120% or more of protected line reactance 130%
Z2S 120% or more of protected line reactance 130%
Z3S 100% of protected line impedance plus 150% 300%
of next line section
Z3Sθ Line angle setting (Note *1)
Z4S 120% of Z3S 120% of Z3S setting
Z1G 75% - 80% of protected line reactance 75%
Z1XG 120% or more of protected line reactance 130%
Z2G 120% or more of protected line reactance 130%
Z3G 400% - 600% of protected line impedance 500%
Z3Gθ Line angle setting (Note *1)
Z4G 120% of Z3G 120% of Z3G setting
PSBSZ 2 ohms (5A rating) 2 ohms
PSBGZ 2 ohms (5A rating) 2 ohms
Step 1
Calculate the setting impedance from the given recommended reach point table.
Step 2
Multiply the actual impedance by the factor “k” to calculate the relay impedance:
Relay impedance = k × Actual impedance
Factor “k” is calculated as follows:

K = (CT ratio)/(VT ratio) = (600/5A)/((150kV/ 3 )/(110V)/ 3 )) = 0.088
Note *1: Z3Sθ and Z3Gθ line angle settings are applicable if [ZS-C] and [ZG-C] are set to
“Mho”.
Line angle θ = tan-1(0.2747/0.0197) = 85.9°
⎯ 409 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
The line angle setting is set to 85°. Alternatively set to a smaller angle (e.g. 80°) in consideration
of higher levels of fault resistance.
<Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G element>

Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S, Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G element settings are calculated as shown in the
following table.
<Z3G, Z4G element>

Zero sequence current compensation is not applied to Z3 or Z4. Z3G and Z4G settings should be
larger than the calculated values because of the underreaching effect without zero sequence
current compensation.
a. Setting condition of Z3G element:

The Z3G element must operate on all faults for which the Z2G element operates.
(lower setting limit: Z3G > Z2G)
The Z3G element must not operate on load current. (upper setting limit), so:
X3G setting = [Zline × 130%](Z2G setting) × 2.6(operating margin for no zero phase
sequence current compensation) × 1.5(operating margin)
= 500% of Zline
b. Setting condition of Z4G element
The operation zone of the Z4G element includes the operating zone of the Z3G element
remote terminal relay.
Element Actual impedance k factor Relay impedance

(ohms) (ohms)
Z1S 3.692 0.32
Z1XS 5.999 0.53
Z2S 5.999 0.53
Z3S 13.84 1.22
Z4S 16.61 1.46
Z1G 3.461 0.088 0.30
Z1XG 5.999 0.53
Z2G 5.999 0.53
Z3G 23.07 2.03
Z4G 27.68 2.44
PSBSZ ----- 2.00
PSBGZ ----- 2.00
3.5 Blinder setting
Zero sequence compensation is not applied to the blinder elements.

Recommended setting: 5.00 ohms
These elements should not operate under maximum load current:

Rset < load impedance/margin
⎯ 410 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
< V rating/(2.5 times of I rating)

= (110V/ 3 )/(2.5 × 5A)
= 5.08
Element Setting
BFRS 5.00 Ω
BFLS θ 120°
BRRS 5.00 Ω
BRLS Linked with BFRS
BFRG 5.00 Ω
BFLG θ 120°
BRRG 5.00 Ω
BRLG Linked with BRRG
3.6 Zero sequence compensation
In the GRZ100, vector type zero sequence compensation is applied to Zone 1 and Zone 2, and
the compensation factor is given in the resistive and reactive components independently.
Step 1
Calculate the positive, zero sequence impedance and mutual impedance:
Z1 = [R1: 0.0197] + j[X1: 0.2747] (ohms)
Z0 = [R0: 0.497] + j[X0: 1.4287] (ohms)
Zm = [Rm: 0.0212] + j[Xm: 0.3729] (ohms)
Step 2
Calculate the zero and mutual sequence compensation factor setting according to the following
equations:
KRS = R0/R1 × 100 = 0.497/0.0197 = 2523 (*2)
KXS = X0/X1 × 100 = 1.4387/0.2747 = 524
KRm = Rm/R1 × 100 = 0.0212/0.0197 = 108
KXm = Xm/X1 × 100 = 0.3729/0.2747 = 136
Note *2: If the calculated value exceeds 1000, then a setting of 1000 should be applied, this being
considered to be the maximum practical value.
Element Setting
KRS 1000
KXS 524
KRm 108
KXm 136
⎯ 411 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.7 Current setting

a. Definite time earth fault protection (EF)
The EF element may be used either to provide back-up earth fault protection or,
alternatively, open circuit protection. For example, to detect open faults of the CT circuit,
the operating value of the detector should be lower than the normal load current on the line:
EF ≤ (normal load current/CT ratio) × 0.5
= (594.7 × 5/600) × 0.5
= 2.48A
Element Setting (A)
EF 2.4
b. Directional earth fault element (DEF)

The DEF element should not be operated by the unbalance current or voltage present in
normal conditions. It is recommended to set the current and voltage after measuring the
actual unbalance residual current and voltage on the site.
DEFFI, DEFRI > Max. zero sequence current (3Io) in normal conditions
DEFFV, DEFRV > Max. zero sequence voltage (3Vo) in normal conditions
Element Setting
DEFFI 2.5 (A)
DEFRI 2.5 (A)
DEFFV 21.0 (V)
DEFRV 21.0 (V)
DEFF θ 85
DEFR θ 85
c. IDMT overcurrent element (EFI)

The EFI element should not be operated by the unbalance current present under normal
conditions. It is recommended to set the current after measuring the actual unbalance
residual current for the protected line.
EFI > Max. zero sequence current (3Io) in normal condition
Element Setting
EFI 2.5 (A)
TEFI 0.5
MEFI S
DEFI F
d. Switch-on-to-fault/stub protection (OCH)

The setting of the OCH element should be lower than the minimum fault current (Ifmin) at
the busbar:
OCH < (Ifmin/CT ratio) × 0.5
= {(0.8(margin) × 2.47kA)/(600/5)} × 0.5
⎯ 412 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
= 8.23A
Element Setting
OCH 8.2 (A)
e. Breaker failure protection (BF)

The setting of the BF element should be lower than the minimum fault current:
OCBF < (Ifmin/CT ratio) × 0.5
= {(0.5 × 2.47kA)/(600/5)} × 0.5
= 5.14A
Setting of TBF1 = Breaker opening time + OCBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBF2 = TBF1 + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
OCBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
Element Setting
OCBF 5.1 (A)
TBF1 70ms
TBF2 140ms
3.8 Undervoltage element
a. Undervoltage element with current compensation (Phase selector)

(1) Undervoltage element (UVCV)
The UVCV element should be set not to work with the current of the power system.
UVCV < rated voltage × 0.7
= 63.5V × 0.7
= 44.5
(2) Reach setting (UVCZ)
The UVCZ element is set to the line impedance value:
UVCZ = 16.8 × (0.01972 + 0.27472) × 0.088
= 0.41 ohms
Element Setting
UVCV 45V
UVCZ 0.41
UVC θ 85
⎯ 413 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
b. VT failure supervision
The undervoltage element for VT failure supervision (UVFS, UVFG) is set to about 50% of
the rated voltage.
Element Setting
UVFS 52V
UVFG 30V
c. Weak infeed tripping function

The undervoltage element for weak infeed tripping (UVLS, UVLG) is set to 70% of the
rated voltage.
Element Setting
UVLS 77V
UVLG 45V
3.9 Time setting
a. Time delay setting for zone distance protection

b. Coordination time setting for protection signaling channel
This time setting is required only for the Blocking scheme. The time should be set larger
than the time delay of protection signaling equipment (PSE) including propagation time of
PLC (Power Line Carrier) or other communication link. The time setting should include an
operation margin of 5ms.
Time setting = Time delay of PSE + Margin
= 12ms + 5ms
= 17ms
c. Time setting of earth fault element EF (TEF)
This time setting is for time delay of the EF element. If it is set to 3s, the trip/alarm contact
will close 3s after detecting an unbalance current (residual current) such as a CT open
circuit fault. In addition to CT open circuit faults, this element can detect a broken
conductor condition.
d. Time setting of directional earth fault relay (TDEF)
Set the time delay for the directional earth fault element for back-up.
Element Setting (s)

TZ1S 0.00
TZ2S 0.30
TZ3S 0.40
TZ1G 0.00
TZ2G 0.30
TZ3G 0.40
TCHD 0.017
TEF 3.00
TDEF 3.00
⎯ 414 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
3.10 Autoreclose setting
a. Dead timer reset timing

b. Dead line timer
The SPAR and TPAR timer are provided to present the deionized time of the line. The
SPAR element is initiated simultaneously by the reclose initiation for single-pole
autoreclose dead time. TPAR is for three-pole autoreclose dead time.
c. Reclaim timer
The reclosing command signal is blocked during adjusted time set by reclaim timer, after
the breaker is closed manually or automatically.
d. ARC reset timer
This time element starts to run upon reclosing initiation.
e. ARC output pulse timer
The duration of the reclosing pulse depends on the operation time of the breaker. The
required pulse time is set by this time element.
Element Setting (s)

TEVLV 0.30
TSPR 0.80
TTPR 0.60
TRDY 60
TRR 2.00
TW 0.2
3.11 Synchronism check element
The synchronism check element setting is as follows.
Element Setting
SY1UV 83V
SY10V 51V
SY1 θ 30deg.
TSYN1 1.00s
TDBL1 0.05s
TLBD1 0.05s
OVB 51V
UVB 13V
OVL1 51V
UVL1 13V
⎯ 415 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 416 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix N
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
and Troubleshooting
⎯ 417 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily
as follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “\IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and
operate it according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start]→[Programs]→[IEC103 Configurator]→[IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking
[Help]→[Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.
(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)
- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission
condition(Signal number), COT
- Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal
number), COT, Type of measurand quantities
- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)
- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
⎯ 418 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
measurand quantities
- Common setting
• Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
• FUN of System function
• Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC supply
of the relay and turn on again.
3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values can be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported
commands with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing
in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test
mode’. This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages
normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
3.2 List of Information

The followings are the default settings.
⎯ 419 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
List of Information
IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal No. OFF ON
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 128 -- -- --
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 128 -- -- --
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 128 -- -- --
5 Power On Relay power on. Not supported -- -- --
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set
16 Auto-recloser active GI 1 1, 9, 11, 12 128 1411 1 2
active, if impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available,
17 Teleprotection active GI 1 1, 9, 12 128 1412 1 2
this item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to
18 Protection active GI 1 1, 9, 12 128 1413 1 2
active. If not, set to inactive.
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 1, 11, 12 128 1409 -- 2
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control

20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 9, 11 128 1241 1 2
system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to
21 Test mode GI 1 9, 11 128 1242 1 2
control system. IECTST "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
event is sent to control system.
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 1, 9, 11, 12 128 1243 1 2
27 Auxiliary input1 Binary input 1 No set

Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision GI 1 1, 9 128 1267 1 2
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision GI 1 1, 9 128 1268 1 2
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision GI 1 1, 9 128 1269 1 2
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision Not supported
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure GI 1 1, 9 128 172 1 2
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision GI 1 1, 9 128 253 1 2
46 Group warning Only alarming GI 1 1, 9 128 1258 1 2
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 9 128 1252 1 2
Earth Fault Indications
48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault No set
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault No set
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault No set
51 Earth Fault Fwd Earth fault forward Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse Not supported
⎯ 420 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal NO. OFF ON
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up No set
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up No set
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up No set
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up No set
68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1 128 1280 -- 2
69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip No set
70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip No set
71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip No set
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip -- 2 1 128 194 -- 2
73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location -- 4 1 128 1048 -- --
74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported

75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
Teleprotection Signal
76 Carrier signal sending Not supported
transmitted
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip -- 2 1 128 342 -- 2

79 Zone2 Zone 2 trip -- 2 1 128 344 -- 2
80 Zone3 Zone 3 trip -- 2 1 128 345 -- 2
81 Zone4 Zone 4 trip No set
84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up No set
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip -- 2 1 128 199 -- 2
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip -- 2 1 128 327 -- 2
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip -- 2 1 128 326 -- 2
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip -- 2 1 128 184 -- 2
93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip -- 2 1 128 678 -- 2
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output -- 1 1 128 291 -- 2
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block GI 1 1, 9 128 1544 1 2
Details of Fault location settings in IEC103 configurator

INF Tbl Offset Data type Coeff
73 5 26 short 0.1
⎯ 421 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IEC103 configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents Type
GI COT FUN Max. No.
ID
Measurands
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> No 0
145 Measurand I,V <meaurand I> No 0
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q <meaurand I> No 0
147 Measurand IN,VEN <meaurand I> No 0
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb, Vc, P, Q, f measurand
148 -- 9 2, 7 128 9
P,Q,f <meaurand II>
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries
241 Not supported
of a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry with confirm Not supported
250 Write entry with execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator

INF MEA Tbl Offset Data type Limit Coeff
Lower Upper
148 Ia 1 36 short 0 4096 3.41333
Ib 1 40 short 0 4096 3.41333
Ic 1 44 short 0 4096 3.41333
Va 1 0 short 0 4096 0.26877
Vb 1 4 short 0 4096 0.26877
Vc 1 8 short 0 4096 0.26877
P 2 8 long -4096 4096 0.00071661
Q 2 12 long -4096 4096 0.00071661
f 2 16 short 0 4096 0.34133
⎯ 422 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

INF Description Contents Control Type
direction
COT FUN
ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0 -- 7 9 255
interrogation
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off ON/OFF 20 20 128
17 Teleprotection on/off ON/OFF 20 20 128
18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 128
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 128
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 128
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243 Not supported
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of
245 Not supported
generic data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry with execution Not supported
(∗1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator

INF DCO
Sig off Sig on Rev Valid time
16 2684 2684 ✓ 0
17 2685 2685 ✓ 0
18 2686 2686 ✓ 0
19 0 2688 200
23 0 2640 1000
24 0 2641 1000
25 0 2642 1000
26 0 2643 1000
✓: signal reverse
⎯ 423 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Description Contents GRZ100 supported Comment

Basic application functions
Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data Yes
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
Measurand
value times
Current L1 Ia Configurable
Current L2 Ib Configurable
Current L3 Ic Configurable
Voltage L1-E Va Configurable
Voltage L2-E Vb Configurable
Voltage L3-E Vc Configurable
Active power P P Configurable
Reactive power Q Q Configurable
Frequency f f Configurable
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab Configurable
Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator

- Setting file’s remark: GRZ100_1.00
- Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Measurand period [s]: 2
- Function type of System functions: 128
- Signal No. of Test mode: 1242
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279
⎯ 424 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)
⎯ 425 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:
(1) Naming for IEC103setting data
The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be
provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:
First draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_01.csv
Second draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_02.csv
Third draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_03.csv
Revision number
The name “∗∗∗∗∗∗” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100 or
GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte characters.
It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.
(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data
The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy disk) or
CD-R, not to remain in the folder.
⎯ 426 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation

Object Procedure
1 Communication Address setting is incorrect. BCU Match address setting between BCU and relay.
trouble (IEC103
RY Avoid duplication of address with other relay.
communication is
not available.) Transmission baud rate setting is BCU Match transmission baud rate setting between
incorrect. BCU and relay.
RY
Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of BCU Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay
data that BCU transmits to relay is setting is fixed as following settings.
incorrect. - Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even
The PRTCL1 setting is incorrect. (The RY Change the PRTCL1 setting. Relation between
model with PRTCL1 setting.) PRTCL1 setting and available transmission
protocol is referred to the following table.
RS485 port at the PRTCL1 PRTCL1

back of the relay =HDLC =IEC
COM1 (CH1) HDLC IEC
COM2 (CH2) IEC ―
RS485 or optical cable interconnection Cable - Check the connection port.(CH1/CH2)

is incorrect. - Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM
- Check the send and received interconnection of
optical cable.
The setting of converter is incorrect. Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW
(RS485/optic conversion is executed setting in reference to INSTRUCTION MANUAL
with the transmission channel, etc.) (6F2S0794).
The relationship between logical “0/1” of BCU Check the following;
the signal and Sig.on/off is incorrect. (In Logical0 : Sig.on
the event of using optical cable)
Logical1:Sig.off
Terminal resistor is not offered. cable Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends
(Especially when RS485 cable is long.) of RS 485 cable.
Relay cannot receive the requirement BCU Check to secure the margin more than 15ms
frame from BCU. between receiving the reply frame from the relay
and transmitting the next requirement frame on
(The timing coordination of sending and
BCU.
receiving switch control is irregular in
half-duplex communication.)
The requirement frame from BCU and BCU Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the
the reply frame from relay contend. relay.
(The sending and receiving timing Time-out setting: more than 100ms (acceptable
coordination is irregular in half-duplex value of response time 50ms plus
communication.) margin)
⎯ 427 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation

Object Procedure
2 HMI does not The relevant event sending condition is RY Change the event sending condition (signal
display IEC103 not valid. number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a setting
event on the SAS error. When the setting is correct, check the signal
side. condition by programmable LED, etc.
The relevant event Information Number RY Match the relevant event Information Number
(INF) and/or Function Type (FUN) may (INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the relay
SAS
be different between the relay and SAS. and SAS.
The relay is not initialised after writing RY Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from
IEC103 configurator setting. the LCD screen. When differing from the sum
value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the relay.
It changes to the block mode. RY Change the IECBR settling to Normal.
3 Time can be BCU does not transmit the frame of time BCU Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.
synchronised with synchronisation.
IEC103
The settling of time synchronisation RY Change the settling of time synchronisation
communication.
source is set to other than IEC. source to IEC.
(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay
⎯ 428 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix O
Programmable Reset Characteristics
and Implementation of Thermal
Model to IEC60255-8
⎯ 429 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Programmable Reset Characteristics

The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC1 and EF1, each have a programmable reset
feature. Resetting may be instantaneous or definite time delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is
in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily
extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until
the fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with
associated damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60
seconds is applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each
successive fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the
point reached during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes
permanent. Figure O-1 illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Instantaneous
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed Reset
Figure O-1
⎯ 430 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8

Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2 ⎛ −t ⎞
θ = ⎜1 − e τ ⎟ × 100% (1)
I AOL ⎝
2 ⎠
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further
temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for
any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ =
100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then θ will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant τ, as in Figure O-2. If θ = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
θ (%)
100%
I2 2 × 100%
I AOL
2 − tτ ⎞
θ = I I 2 ⎛⎜⎝1 − e ⎟
⎠
× 100 %
AOL
t (s)
Figure O-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.
⎡ I2 ⎤
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2 ⎥ (1) ····· Cold curve
⎣ I − I AOL ⎦
⎡ I2 − I 2 ⎤
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2P ⎥ (2) ····· Hot curve
⎢⎣ I − I AOL ⎥⎦
where:
⎯ 431 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IP = prior load current.
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure O-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.
θ (%) Overload Current

Condition Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure O-3
⎯ 432 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix P
Inverse Time Characteristics
⎯ 433 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI) IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) (Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100 100
10
10
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
TMS TMS
1.5 1 1.5
1.0
1.
0.5
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.2 0.1
0.1
0.1 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Normal Inverse Very Inverse
⎯ 434 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
UK Inverse Curves (LTI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
10
Operating Time (s)
100
Operating Time (s)
1
TMS
TMS
10 1.5
1.5 1.0
1.0
0.5
0.1 0.5
0.2
1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse
⎯ 435 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
⎯ 436 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix Q
Failed Module Tracing and Replacement
⎯ 437 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
1. Failed module tracing and its replacement

If the “ALARM” LED is ON, the following procedure is recommended. If not repaired, contact
the vendor.
Procedure Countermeasure
No
“ALARM” LED ON? No failure
Not displayed
No
Any LCD messages? Press [VIEW] key Contact the vendor.
Yes
Yes
Not displayed
Press [VIEW] key Contact the vendor.
Locate the failed module. Locate the failed module referring to Table Q-1.
Caution: Check that the replacement module has an
identical module name (VCT, SPM, IO1,
IO2, etc.) and hardware type-form as the
failed module. Furthermore, the SPM and
FD modules must have the same software
name and version. Refer to Section
DC supply “OFF” 4.2.5.1.
Module replacement
As shown in the table, some of the messages cannot

identify the fault location definitely but suggest plural
possible failure locations. In these cases, the failure
location is identified by replacing the suggested
DC supply “ON” failed modules with spare modules one by one until
the "ALARM" LED is turned off.
No
“ALARM” LED OFF?
If both “IN SERVICE” LED and “ALARM” LED are
OFF, check the followings.
Check: Is DC supply voltage available with the correct
End polarity and of adequate magnitude, and
connected to the correct terminals?
⎯ 438 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Table Q-1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location
VCT SPM IO1 or IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 FD HMI Channel Discon- AC VT
IO8 nector cable
Checksum err ×
ROM data err ×
ROM-RAM err ×
SRAM err ×
BU-RAM err ×
DPRAM err ×
EEPROM err ×
A/D err ×
V0 err × (2) × (1) × (2)
V2 err × (2) × (1) × (2)
I0 err × (2) × (1) × (2)
CT err × (2) × (2) × (1)
DIO err × (2) × (1) × (1) × (1) × (1) × (1) × (1)
RSM err × (1) × (2)
FD:checksum err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD: ROM-RAM err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD: SRAM err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:Sampling err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:DO err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:ROM data err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD:Unbalanced err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD: A/D err × (2) × (1) × (1)
FD stopped × (2) × (1)
DS fail × (2) × (2) × (1)
Ch. fail × (2) × (2) × (2) × (1)
VT fail × (2) × (1)
No-working of × (2) × (1)

LCD
The location marked with (1) has a higher probability than the location marked with (2).
⎯ 439 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
2. Methods of Replacing the Modules
CAUTION When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an

earthed wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat.
Otherwise, many of the electronic components could suffer damage.
CAUTION After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the PLC
and IEC103 setting data are restored the original settings.
The initial replacement procedure is as follows:
1). Switch off the DC power supply.

WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2). Remove the front panel cover.
3). Open the front panel.
Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of
the front panel.
Case size : 1/2”inchs
4). Detach the holding bar.

Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of
the bar.
⎯ 440 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
5). Unplug the cables.

Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of black
connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the connector.
Gray connector
Black connector
6). Pull out the module.

Pull out the failure module by pulling up or down the top and bottom levers (white).
SPM module
7). Insert the replacement module.

Insert the replacement module into the same slots where marked up.
.
8). Do the No.5 to No.1 steps in reverse order.
CAUTION Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original
positions and the ribbon cables are plugged in. If the ribbon cables are not
plugged in enough (especially the gray connectors), the module could suffer
damage.
Details of the gray connector on modules (top side)
×Not enough ○Enough
⎯ 441 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
9). Lamp Test

• RESET key is pushed 1 second or more by LCD display off.
• It checks that all LCDs and LEDs light on.
10). Check the automatic supervision functions.

• LCD not display “Auto-supervision” screens in turn, and Event Records
• Checking the “IN SERVICE” LED light on and “ALARM LED” light off.
⎯ 442 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Appendix R
Ordering
⎯ 443 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Distance Protection Relay

GRZ100 − B− 0 − -
Relay Type:
Distance protection relay GRZ100
Relay Model:
-Model100: No autoreclose
18 BIs, 13 BOs, 6 trip BOs 101
-Model200: With autoreclose for single breaker scheme
22 BIs (12-independent), 19 BOs, 3 trip BOs 204
-Model300: With autoreclose for one and a half breaker scheme
-Model400: With autoreclose for single breaker scheme
/ with fault detector 401
21 BIs, 35 BOs, 6 trip BOs
-Model500: With autoreclose for one and a half breaker scheme
/ with fault detector
Ratings:
1A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc 1
1A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc 2
5A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc 3
5A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc 4
1A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc 5
1A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc 6
5A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc 7
5A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc 8
1A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc A
1A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc B
5A, 50Hz, 48V54V/60Vdc C
5A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc D
1A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc E
1A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc F
5A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc G
5A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc H
Communications:
RS485 1
Fibre optic 2
Dual RS485 3
Dual fibre optic 4
RS485 + fibre optic 9
Note:
Fibre optic is available for model 203, 204, 206, 302, 303, 401, 501.
10BASE-T option is available for specific configuration.
Miscellaneous:
None 0
GPS opt.. input 1
LED label:
Standard None
Option: User configurable LED label J
⎯ 444 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents

No.
0.0 Oct. 10, 2006 -- First issue
0.1 Nov. 6, 2006 2.4.9.2 Modified the description and Figures 2.4.9.7 to 2.4.9.10.
0.2 Apr. 12, 2007 2.4.1.3, 2.4.3.4, Modified the description.
2.4.4.1
2.4.10 Added Figure 2.4.10.2.
2.5.1 Modified the description of ‘Reactance element’.
3.4.1, 3.4.3 Modified the description.
4.2, 4.4 Modified the description.
6.7.2 Modified the description and Table 6.7.2.1.
Appendices Modified Appendix C, E, F, G, N and added Appendix P
0.3 Jul. 26, 2007 2.4.1.3 Modified the description and Figures 2.4.1.11 and 2.4.1.12.
2.4.3.1 to 2.4.3.3, Modified the description and Figures 2.4.3.1 to 2.4.3.3, 2.4.3.5, 2.4.3.6,
2.4.3.5, 2.4.4.1 2.4.4.3 to 2.4.4.5.
2.4.9.1, 2.4.9.2 Modified the description and the setting range table.
2.4.10 Modified the description the setting range table.
2.5.9 Added the description of OV∗1 – 4 and UV∗1 – 4.
4.2.3.1 Added recording items to fault record screen.
4.2.4.6 Modified the description.
6.7.3 Modified the description of ‘CAUTION’.
Appendices Modified Appendix B, K, M and Q.
0.4 Jun. 23, 2008 2.4.6 Modified the description of ‘Setting’.
2.7.1, 6.5.5 Added ‘Note’.
4.2.7.1 Modified the description of ‘THMRST’.
6.5.1.1 Modified the description and Figure 6.5.1.2.
6.6.1 Modified the description.
Appendices Modified Appendix G and K.
0.5 Jan. 18, 2011 Precautions Modified the description of ‘Disposal’.
2.4.1.3 Modified the description and Figure 2.4.1.12.
2.4.3.2 Modified Figure 2.4.3.2
2.4.3.3 Modified Figure 2.4.3.3
2.4.3.5 Modify the description.(Change CB-OR=1 to CB-OR =0)
2.4.3.9 Modified Figure 2.4.3.11.
2.4.4 Modified Figure 2.4.4.1
2.4.5 Modified Figure 2.4.5.1.
2.4.9.2 Modified Figure 2.4.9.9.
4.2.6.2 Modified the description. (added password trap of test menu.)
4.2.6.4 Modified the description.
4.2.7 Modified the description. (added password trap of test menu.)
Appendices Modified Appendix G and H.
⎯ 445 ⎯

GRZ100 Toshiba PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRZ100 Toshiba PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6 F 2 S 0 8 4 6

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2006

Explanation of symbols used

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

• Printed circuit board

• Tripping circuit connections

4.1 Outline of User Interface 168

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 257

Appendix A Block Diagrams 263

The GRZ100 provides the following protection schemes.

The GRZ100 actuates high-speed single-shot autoreclose or multi-shot autoreclose.

The GRZ100 provides the following metering and recording functions.

Further, the GRZ100 provides the following functions.

The GRZ100 has the following models:

Table 1.1.1 shows the measuring elements incorporated.

Table 1.1.1 Incorporated Measuring Elements

Model 101, 102 201, 202, 301, 401 501

Z1S, Z1SX, Z2S, Z3S, Distance element (phase fault) 9 9 9 9 9

DEFF, DEFR Directional earth fault element 9 9 9 9 9

OC, OCI Overcurrent element (phase fault) 9 9 9 9 9

EF, EFI Overcurrent element (earth fault) 9 9 9 9 9

SOTF (OCH) Switch-onto-fault protection 9 9 9 9 9

VTF (OVG, UVF, OCD) VT failure supervision 9 9 9 9 9

PSBS, PSBG Power swing blocking 9 9 9 9 9

OST Out-of-step tripping 9 9 9 9 9

BF Breaker failure protection 9 9 9 9 9

THM Thermal overload protection 9 9 9

OVS1, OVS2, OVG1, Overvoltage & undervoltage 9 9 9 9 9

AMF Automatic monitoring 9 9 9 9 9

2.1.2 Protection Relay Requirements

Busbar Busbar Busbar

Figure 2.1.2.1 Protection Zones

Figure 2.1.2.2 Protection Zone and CB, CT

2.1.3 Main Protection and Backup Protection

2.1.4 Distance Relay - General Performance

2.1.5 Power Swing and Out-of-Step

Impedance locus during

Figure 2 1.5.1 Impedance Locus during Transient Power Swing

Impedance locus during

Figure 2.1.5.2 Impedance Locus during Out-of-Step Condition

2.1.6 Redundant Configuration of Protection Relay and Improvement of Reliability

2.2 Principle of Distance Measurement

Figure 2.2.1.1 Two-Phase Fault

2.2.2 Earth Fault

Figure 2.2.2.1 Single-Phase Earth Fault

Positive-sequence circuit V1 V1F

Negative-sequence circuit V2 V2F

Zero-sequence circuit V0 V0F

Figure 2.2.2.2 Equivalent Circuit of Single-Phase Earth Fault

2.3 Multi-Terminal Line Protection

2.3.2 Protection Problems on Three-Terminal Application

Figure 2.3.2.1 Three-terminal line

2.3.2.2 Current Outfeed in the Event of an Internal Fault

Figure 2.3.2.2 Current Outfeed in Event of Internal Fault

2.3.2.3 Diversion of Outfeed Current in the Event of an External Fault

Figure 2.3.2.3 Outfeed Current in Event of External Fault

2.3.2.4 Possible Attenuation of Carrier Wave in Power Line Carrier

2.3.3 Three-Terminal Line Protection

2.3.3.1 Distance Relay Protection

Figure 2.3.3.1 Short-Distance Tapped Line (1)

2.3.3.2 Command Protection

Figure 2.3.3.2 Short-Distance Tapped Line (2)